ea i #oPaiady NTk TNS to ot Ma tke * # Ape et i a & ~~ 4 “ete sini "LMG | Bishitiiy sssedf = i SUIS STS, te Save STARS) «, Ronee Pe ss aly jot “Bids res a ae eae 8 ny Eye ripe: wor. ~ vera Day eis ‘i " Popes I Sve f : ak Lave aut) yb “- ea Late WE Pet to) cae Sa ris eer) Ss = < <4 — => As Qs = < x = = = = \ = ss NS 5 z = 3 = 5 NS = 5 CE 2 ae 2 BY 2X 2 2 | » 2 E 2 % E Z E » 2 c Nae = eS : a 2 7 a oe = INLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3INVYSII LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION | NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYY cas os Le 2 i Vv a ul oe Wd za tu = a ay Ww oI Ww 2” ree! s SS ZI = 4 Eh “S = % WX = 5 = = < = F 2 WA = ~ ed = = ca = s a re) S 3 a Ze re) = ro) abe z Nie) 4 — Zz = 2 basin oe) 3RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YVYdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN ee aE = Gis Ss ia z . i re) & ie = ey oO = wo ‘ — ow = fp a 5 GY > > > Ye, = > 5 FY = Gl; > o] = = AS = So] E Vp bi 0 = fNFe Ss = sah ~\ NY E coe - W fF = n° = ” m SNWwY ® m ee m < 7) z 7) dan 2 wo = wo INLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SSIYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSN! NVINOSHLINS S31YVY re 7) ; Fa, 77) eae os 7) Zz 7) | < = = = < = < = z 4 z a = a = = c= z 9 NSW 3 § We ae : ae fe} cq NS re) rT SMW WE Oo r re} = Z, E Nv 2 E Nv 2 = = 2 : Te ae = ae es = 3 -RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIT LIBRARIES ) = ” =a eae oe z ee) = = 7) w & wi 7) ud 7) =P 4 PE, 4 a 4 «= , ~ cod a —_ fea = ac = oc 4 Ee = = 4 = rs} aa ) ; = ro) Es 3 4 Z a Zz ; — z ay Fe | INLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I¥VYaII me: IBRARIES _oMITHSONIAN SINS TITOTION NOILNLILSNI NYINOSHLINS S31 uvy LE z = = z fe ee z ow ° wo = ae) = wo Xs 2 i = > =) o D a i * = 2 = F v = = > = z = - Fs = 2 = m B E Z a Z m 2 -RARI ES SMITHSONIAN ” Coos ps J IUVYGIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT eS = < = = RNS = WS z io Uf EGY 2Nw 2 aw = 2% * 2 Wy = SY Zz \ > > GQ = > , = ae za z= w as w = za LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSN LMLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31YVYaIT NVINOSHLINS S31uWH ES NOILALILSNI NOILNLILSNI LIBRARIES ax x 3RARIES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTION_NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IY¥VYsIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN Gi71 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN S3!YVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNILILSNI INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI z : = - ° GW; o o Yy rei YF fl: = a UY fs. acs oe z 7 ae rs i no 2) | LINLILSNi NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYdIT LIBRARIES INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Salava) $e S31YVYaI1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIILIBRARI SMITHSONIAN NVINOSHLIWS SMITHSONIAN ree Ss YP NVINOSHLINS NVINOSHLIWS SMITHSONIAN SS 3RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS 3RARIES SMITHSONIAN 3RARIES LALILSNI 3RARIES ILALILSNI LALILSNI SRARIES LMLILSNI Se Ne Co! a Bisse: — XY ‘= —= J= ae \S r rn Z 2 m Z i wn =_ — (22) a ITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI SNVINOSH IMS oS iuvyudit atl B RARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3 iuvud aes ES ty, < = =< = wat = wy, < = Zz Sj Woh y, = = Zz = Zz ei Wi 2 = Nat 925691 B72 SOHED? SL AATED: = 9 YY = Zi f= Z = 2G ff = Zz, So ee 5 : 5 : 5 = 5 = SJIYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION _ NVINOSHLIWS LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTIC a = @ = a 2 a z ae 2 = 7) i 7) 8 n = 77) ee 7) 2 z : <3 Z = S 5 2 = . < s ; < < oc Ss oc S oc S oc = o S Se 2 = 2 = ee 2 a 2 —_! J IITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1uYvudit —t! BRARIES _ SMITHSONIAN SINSTIDUMON SNOT enc ITSN! NVINOSHLINS SS3IlY¥vVag Zz | Zz tS Zz a 2) = . re) = se) o ° o NS ° tif J a = kK = = as - ttyl So 2 2 ond = SN SS iE LLf * 2 S = s ef * 2 ES = =_ - pas = - Y, rae = x “iff m EY m B m g / — 2 m @ n = (7) pees = n — (7) 5 eS IINOSHLIWS (Sa iuvaad rel BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS (S23 {uvdd Ue po MITHSONIAN INSTITUT! =| z =| z = Zz An z = Z WN: 2 i= 2 = 2 = 2° = 2 = N So A ee: : Se ee pe IITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS | Sa (yvVyusit_ Ce Te eee ea eR eee oa ee eS S eo [UVUE 2 Ww z Ke wi rs uw 2 wi 2 Ne wi op fy 3 ce ZN 2 =. hfe 3 e a Ne Y a a = 3 = — %° NX 2 S 2 fh : S : 5 = Uf AW E x = «7 2 = 2 = z = OT 2 WY 2 5; Cee F Z A : i ea SS = wo = on = “” = wo = (27) MTHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Sal uvuaIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS Saiyuvug Zoe 7) z a p = °* ” Fe 7) c= n : z 7 g ; =< : = < = < : = Ly < = G = \, a p z = = = Zz 4 Vy A = = Ui 3 Nw 3 8 z 5 NSN 5 Wy ? G2: wy, ZT WW o Ie o ac WING CO rT SW AN oO YG fl? = Oo EF Gs E Wr" 2 iS Zz, = WS 2 EW 2.7 Z. Be ace : : 2 we Se: - : YINOSHLIWS S3luvud tt BRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS sa3luvug a BRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTI a : a Ef z \ é & =! = eal = = a = face! 7 = = f: a = a =| = [and LES = 4 7 ] s 4 J yo 4 os PL) Rims $0 er es f a v= £: o ‘ = or we; ns ¥ ‘ E 7) a Atal ca ; i yey t < rf ; Cd ; he aay ‘ i Ras , ie 7 hg! gr QE Nos. 175-185 i, SMITHSON ARS : APR 15 1975 LIBRARIES A ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN January 15, 1975 175. Observations on the birds of 180. Biogeography of reptiles on Diego Garcia, Chagos Archi- some of the islands and cays pelago, with notes on other of Eastern Papua-New Guinea vertebrates by Harold Heatwole by A. M. Hutson 181. Sands cays of Tongatapu 176. The birds of the Iles Glori- by D. R. Stoddart euses by C. W. Benson, H. H. Beamish, C. 182. The murine rodents Rattus Jouanin, J. Salvan, and G. E. Watson rattus, exulans and norvegicus as avian predators 177. Fulgoroidea from Aldabra, As- by F. I. Norman tove, and Cosmoledo Atolls, collected by the Royal Society 183. Ducie Atoll: Its history, phys- Expedition 1967-68 (Hemip- iography and biota tera-Homoptera) by Harald A. Rehder and by M. D. Webb John E. Randall 178. A preliminary description of 184. Marine turtles in the Phoenix the coral reefs of the Tobago Islands Cays, Grenadines, West Indies by George H. Balazs by John B. Lewis 185. Island News and Comment 179. Marine zonation and ecology of Cocos Island, off Central America by Gerald J. Bakus THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. < Ree ? ai 175. 176. 177 176 179. mI OLE RESEARCH Peeee TiN Observations on the birds of Diego Garcia, Chagos Archi- pelago, with notes on other vertebrates by A. M. Hutson The birds of the Iles Glori- @uses by C. W. Benson, H. H. Beamish, C. Jouanin, J. Salvan, and G. E. Watson Fulgoroidea from Aldabra, As- tove, and Cosmoledo Atolls, collected by the Royal Society Expedition 1967-68 (Hemip- tera-Homoptera) by M. D. Webb A preliminary description of the coral reefs of the Tobago Cays, Grenadines, West Indies by John B. Lewis Marine zonation and ecology of Cocos Island, off Central America by Gerald J. Bakus Issued by 180. 181. 182 183 184. 185. Biogeography of reptiles on some of the islands and cays of Eastern Papua-New Guinea by Harold Heatwole Sands cays of Tongatapu by D. R. Stoddart The murine rodents Rattus rattus, exulans and norvegicus as avian predators by F. I. Norman Ducie Atoll: Its history, phys- tography and biota by Harald A. Rehder and John E. Randall Marine turtles in the Phoenix Islands by George H. Balazs Island News and Comment THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 ACKNOWLEDGMENT The Atoll Research Bulletin is issued by the Smithsonian Institution as a part of its Tropical Biology Program. It is co- sponsored by the Museum of Natural History, the Office of International and Environmental Programs, and the Smithsonian Press. The Press supports and handles production and distribution. The editing is done a by the Tropical Biology staff, Botany Department, Museum of Natural History and by D. R. Stoddart. The Bulletin was founded and the first 117 numbers issued by the Pacific Science Board, National Academy of Sciences, with financial support from the Office of Naval Research. Its pages were largely devoted to reports resulting from the Pacific Science Board's Coral Atoll Program. The sole responsibility for all statements made by authors of papers in the Atoll Research Bulletin rests with them, and statements made in the Bulletin do not necessarily represent the views of the Smithsonian nor those of the editors of the Bulletin. Editors F. R. Fosberg M.-H. Sachet Smithsonian Institution Washington, D. C. 20560 D. R. Stoddart Department of Geography University of Cambridge \ Downing Place Cambridge, England ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 175 OBSERVATIONS ON THE BIRDS OF DIEGO GARCIA, CHAGOS ARCHIPELAGO, WITH NOTES ON OTHER VERTEBRATES by A. M. Hutson Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 1; a a ve 7% AWA Ry, i ee “ft - y i Dadam | : - no 4 7 ae, yy x é “6 4 “Aen ) ew, me Re Sa Lan Contents Page Introduction 1 Systematic List 2 Shearwater (Puffinus sp. ) 2 White-tailed Tropic Bird (Phaethon lepturus) 3 Red-footed Booby (Sula sula) "Fou" u Frigates (Fregata Sil. ) "Fregat" mn Cattle Egret Metis ibis) "Madam Paton" 4 Latete Green Heron (Bu aie eo) striatus) "Manique" 5) Flamingo (Phoenicopterus sp.) 6 Francolin (Francolinus ondicerianus ) Perdue. 6 Waterhen (2 ~ Amaurornis aeees\) "Poule d'eau" 6 Turns tone a interpres) res if Greater Sand Plover (Charadrius leschenaultii) v7 Grey Plover (Charadrius squatarola 8 Great Snipe (Gallinago media 8 Whimbrel (Numenius phaeopus ) "Corbi jou" 8 Bar-tailed Godwit (Limosa lapponica) 9 Wood Sandpiper (Tringa glareola) 9 Common Sandpiper (Tringa hypoleucos) 9 Terek Sandpiper (Xenus cinereus ) 10 Greenshank (Tringa nebularia) 10 Sanderling (Crocethia alba) 10 Curlew Sandpiper (Calidris testacea) 10 Crab Plover (Dromas ardeola 11 Roseate Tern (Sterna ~ a 11 Little Tern (Sterna albifrons V2 Black-naped Tern (Sterna sumatrana) 2 Sooty Tern (Sterna fuscata) eZ Crested Tern (Thalasseus bergii) "Goeland Sardine" 12 Lesser Crested Tern (Thalasseus bengalensis ) 13 Noddy Tern — stolidus ) 1 3} Paany Term (Gygis alba) "Goeland Blanc" 15 Indian Barred Ground Dove (Geopelia striata) Witbier aie cocos" 16 Turtle Dove (Streptopelia tetunata)) “lurrtunrides alles "N\6 "Le Merle", presumably the Bulbul (Hypsipetes borbonicus olivaceus al7, Indian Mynah (Acridotheres tristis) 18 Madagascar Fody (Foudia madagascariensis) 19 Appendix I 22 Appendix IT 23) Reptiles 23} Mammals 2S Acknowledgements 2h References Dy 72°25 \le Grande Barbe t Island lle Milieu Ween Pte Nord Est lle la Passe (Observatory (Isle Nagheeee) Point) (West Island) 4 715) svi Pte Pavillon ~ ,7 Clairci Nordest =~ | (Eclipse Point) PteTrois Brissant zi or Pte Nord-Ouest Z (Simpson Point)_ 7 j O_Touffe Larcher \O\ ON Pte Canards <@s.. Camp Marcel Ox iA if; Pea Carcasse Barachois Maurice +S J bys fx - Barachois Canon, 4/7 G Barachois GE La Paille Sec_= Gs AG Anse David Uy / Be Barachois ---- Reef edge Barachois Courpat he, ST, Barachois Barrer Barachois Sylvain Fig. 1. The atoll of Diego Garcia OBSERVATIONS ON THE BIRDS OF DIEGO GARCIA, CHAGOS ARCHI- PELAGO, WITH NOTES ON OTHER VERTEBRATES los7 QXo MIC eee INTRODUCTION Diego Garcia (Fig. il) is the southernmost atoll of the Chagos Archipelago, central Indian Ocean. Detailed descriptions of the island and its fauna and flora are given by Stoddart & Taylor (1971). W.R.P. Bourne (1971) therein thoroughly reviewed the rather scant and scattered previous knowledge of the birds. Since the preparation of that work the atoll has been briefly Vil Satie Gib Ma J). Hiralzd er (in July 1970) but apart from a few observations included in Bourne's paper his findings have not yet become available. This report gives details of the birds of Diego Garcia from observations made during the course of entomological work On bhnecsaroldl, between March 19 and May 23, 1971.. The information Given here consists mainly of sight records, supplemented with data from a small number of birds trapped, and information from Seychellois who have been resident on the island for many years. It was found impractical to collect specimens, despite the need for particular species such as the Little Green Heron (Butorides striatus ) and the Turtle Dove (Streptopelia pile tumava). DOI Ost which have been described as endemic subspecies, on rather little evidence. The sea birds, waders and well established land birds (Fody and Turtle Dove) that were trapped were ringed and released. Except where otherwise stated, all reference to previous knowledge is from Bourne (USF Comparison with the ogi ke is from Phillips (1963) and with Aldabra from Penny OWN)... Thirty-five species are discussed, four of which were not seen by the author. Twelve species which have not previously been recorded from the Chagos are marked by ** and one species previously recorded from elsewhere in the Chagos, but not DicrOmGireueawisbih 2.) thie Status of each Spectres ais) dasicussed HimaismoiienGdetrart! as possible to facilitate comparison wath observations at different times of year and in different years. The visit was made in the first two months of construction work involved in the establishment of a communications facility on Piet lands hetb important to, considen the slavus ot yep —’ Department of Entomology, British Museum (Natural History) os (Manuscript received June 17 2=—Bdsicy) each species in some detail to determine any effects brought about by changes in the environment. To this end counts are given as often as possible and for this to be meaningful it has been necessary to use rather more locality names than have been previously published (Stoddart & Taylor, 1971 )) A revised placename map incorporating the names that were in use by the Seychellois resident at the time of my visit is given in Fig. 1; some of these names differ from those given by Stoddart & Taylor (1O7lsePres. de and 3/)): A very few migrant land birds have been recorded from the Chagos, but none was seen during the present visit. Phillips (1963) lists many land migrants for the Maldives and puts forward a strong case for the likelihood of many species reaching the Chagos. This is probably true for a more suitable time of year, although relatively few are likely to reach Diego Garcia. Details of weight (in @) wing length (in mm ) and moult of wing primaries (outer primary fast) are given for trapped birds. The notation) of wane smnoullt is as) hollows 9 Ole—aonicl feather, 1 = new feather in pin. 2-4 are degrees of development of new feathers, to N = a fully developed new feather. Local Creole names for some species were noted and are Siven after the scientific names. Appendix I lists birds seen during the sea voyages between Mauritius and Diego Garcia. Appendix II gives notes on other vertebrates made during the 1971 survey. Other observations, especially on insects, will be published elsewhere. Mr. S. Rickard and Mr. J.R.C. Bashall were stationed on the island in 1945. Rickard (pers. comm. ) says that they were not particularly interested in birds at the time, but I am grateful to them for allowing me to incorporate their memoirs into this report. Their activities were largely confined to the north-west area and to the Minni Minni area. They do not remember any large colonies of sea-birds on the mainland of the island. SYSTEMATIC LIST Shearwater (Puffinus sp.) The only evidence of shearwaters was a wailing call, heard at night, which was almost certainly a species of shearwater. About 10 were heard at Point Marianne from 12-18 April and 21 April. At De Moulin one was heard on the nights of 23 April (to north), 24 April (to north), 26 April (at village) and 27 April (to south west). At Roche Point one was heard to NW of the house on 30 April. In all cases calling started at about 3 19.00 and continued until 20.00. On one night at Point Marianne they were calling until at least 02.00. At Point Marianne they were seen on several of the early evening sessions and the early morning session, but the light was too poor to confirm the species involved, merely enough to say that they had a wing span of about 2 feet and that the wings were rather narrow. It is extraordinary that these were only heard at settlement areas; they were not heard during many night excursions to sites away from the settlements. Those at De Moulin and Roche Point were apparently flying around coconut trees, indeed the one at De Moulin on 26 April could only have been around, if not in, the quite isolated coconut palms (3) in the village clearing. At Point Marianne, where most observations were obtained, they were curiously confined to the tops of fruit trees in the area behind the village; around the Bread Fruit Abbecat ce altilis), Mango (Mangifera indica) and Takamaka Calophyllum inophyllum) trees and in the coconut palms) an the main village area. Mist nests placed up to a height of 25' amongst the fruit and these coconut trees failed to catch anything. That they were confined to this area was confirmed by taking observations from various points around and outside they vaniktasesanea.. it as difficult to explain athism@icind) of; behaviour from a shearwater. They were not heard from the eastern limb of the atoll. No shearwaters were seen during several watches between sunset and light failure from the ocean coast at De Moulin and Roche Point. From my description the Seychellois knew of its occurrence here. They called it the "Riga" and described it as a bird of the ocean that rarely comes to land and then only at night. In the Séychellois "Riga" is Audubon's Shearwater (P. lherminieri). Audubon's and Wedge-tailed Shearwater (P. pacifica) have been recorded from Diego Garcia and elsewhere in the Chagos. White-tailed Tropic Bird (Phaethon lepturus) Regularly seen down the western rim of the island with 3 or 4 over the coconuts in open areas to the north of Point Marianne. Four were frequently seen over Roche Point between 29 April and 2 May. The heaviest concentration was around the fresh-water pool area of Simpson's Point, where about 3 pairs were flushed on 2 April while others could be heard calling overhead. The only one seen on the eastern arm was one at Barachois Canon on 13 May. Among those seen at Simpson's Point were ones flushed from ground level on the mounds around the bases of coconut trees with a dense covering of ferns, etc. Although the Red-tailed Tropic Bird (Be rubricauda) has been reported from Diego Garcia and in nearby Seas, none was seen during the present visit. Red-footed Booby (Sula sula) "Fou" Only seen on Ile Grande Barbe on 15 May. Circa 100 were in a large bare Hernandia tree with many nests. This number included many immature birds and non-fully fledged young were visible in some nests. Circa 50 boobies flew from a nearby Hernandia tree that was well foliated, but heavily limed. It was not possible to ascertain whether there were any nests in this tree. Although most of the birds in the latter tree were typical white-phase Red-footed Boobies, some were thought to be of a different kind, probably a different colour phase of Sula sula, but views were unsatisfactory for identification. Some Seychellois believe that three species occur on this islet, but descriptions were vague and could not be satisfactorily identified with any definite forms. It seemed possible that there was some confusion with immature birds, but it is true that at least three species are known to occur in the region. The only Boobies seen at sea were 3 seen at e.15°S 63°R in the afternoon of 18 March. They were probably Red-footed. Frigates (Fregata sp.) "Pregat" Apart from 2 of unknown species seen flying north over Barachois Sec on 23 April, Frigates were only seen at Ile Grande Barbe. All identified birds were Lesser Frigates (F. ariel). From suitable viewpoints on the mainland, about 10 were usually visible circling over the islet and more were to be seen on trees.) Durmdingsy a valsitte tor achntce asiteda ones iciyamnles birds were seen. On a visit on 15 May about 30 were seen, mainly at the N.E. tip of the islet where they were sitting in bare trees or on coconut trees. These birds included a large percentage showing variable degrees of white. Many were apparently young, but there was no evidence of breeding. Rickard and Bashall remember seeing a few frigates over the lagoon regularly in 1945. It is possible that they were more widespread around the atoll up to that time than they have been in recent years. One adult male Lesser Frigate was seen at sea at 17.00 on 25 May at c.14 30'S 64°R (see Appendix 1)’, Cattle Egret (Bubulcus ibis) "Madam Paton" According to the Seychellois resident in 1971, 9 cattle egrets were released in 1953 from the Seychelles. lLoustau- Lalanne (1962) (who states that the Species was introduced in 1955) found a colony of 27 nests at East Point in 1960. In 1971 they were still nesting as a colony by the manager's house, although they had moved in recent years from their earlier site to a large mango tree. Due to the thick growth of this tree it was not possible to tell how many nests were 5 OCCUpNedE pun tb was jprobably, not umuch more, than 10... At) thas time (5-16 May ) several nests contained nestlings, varying from very young downy chicks to well feathered birds. lin earlier years this was the only colony and birds would perform daily travel from all parts of the atoll to roost here (teste the manager). in consideration of the fact that this daily movement no longer occurs and of the large number of birds around the island (particularly any iAte iN Wie area), he Seenis likely that other colonies have been established, although none was found. As already stated, the egret is now common around the island, particularly so in the well vegetated marsh areas of Point Marianne and Mare Julien, but not in the tidal barachois. It was also common in clearings around settlements such as De Moulin and East Point and in open coconut areas such as the N.W. area. In drier, more thickly wooded areas such as south of De Moulin to and including the southern barachois, it was almost absent. Although most usually seen on the green marsh- lands of Point Marianne, the open water area attached to the north end of this part of the marsh was also favoured ana by far the highest total seen together (c.50) was seen here on 18 May. One other notable locality was in the areas being cleared of coconut woodland by the U.S. Navy. The egrets took advantage of the felling of these trees and their subsequent removal and would stay dangerously close to bulldozers, etc., to feed on larger arthropods and geckoes that were exposed. Most birds were in a plain white non-breeding plumage. The breeding plumes of those that showed them generally seemed to be a rich sandy golden colour, though some were seen that suggested a more cinnamon colour and some that could not be satisfactorily assigned to either group. It is feasible, then, asipostulatced) am) Bourne (1971)), that va'siting bards of ‘the Asiatic form, B. i. coromandus, such as those seen by G.C. Bourne (Saunders, 1886) have taken up residence and mixed with birds introduced from the Seychelles. Little Green Heron (Butorides striatus) "Manique" Abundant and widespread around the whole island. Although more common around inland water systems (ene Simpson's Point) and the barachois areas, it was also regularly seen in dry apneas, such as under rather open 'Cocos Bon Dieu" areas. “Lt was also very common around the shores of both the lagoon and ocean sides. Ten were on the wet marsh area of Mare Julien on 3) Apres put only ion) 22 April; “c.3) were! an’ Barachois Sec on P3-2o Aptis |e. 15 om the southern barachors oni 17> May; 7S Jon B. Maurice on 10 May, most of them being on the inner reaches of the barachois. No count was made, but the largest concen- tration was on the marsh at Point Marianne. On the non—-perma- nent inland water areas and in the dry habitats it was generally only individuals or two's that were seen. Two were on the shore of Ile Grance Barbe on 3 May. Birds seen included some young birds, but no information on breeding was obtained. Three adults were trapped and ringed at Point Marianne: Ring No. Date Weight Wing Length Primary moult EPF43901 TAS aIEV:. 202 168 0001 2NNNNN 02 ey erisVire 194 168 OOONNNNNNN 03 Ae ier. 195 176 0000000011 One of the birds at Mare Julien on 22 April had only one leg and was too weak to fly. It was an adult weighing only 105 gm. This specimen was collected and the skin is now in the British Museum (Natural History). The stomach contents were as follows, but judging from the disability and general poor con- dition of the bird it cannot be assumed that this bears any relation to a normal diet: large number of Paratettix chagonsensis Bolivar (Orthoptera; Tetrigidae) (det. J. Huxley a few ? Labidura riparia (Pallas) (Dermaptera; Labiduridae) The measurements given here, photographs and plumage notes, etc. add little to the discussion on the taxonomic status of the subspecies B.s. albolimbatus, described from the Chagos (see Bourne, 1ST) S **Plamingo (Phoenicopterus sp.) Rickards (pers. comm.) was informed that there was a colony of flamingoes at the south end of the island, but there is no other report of these from Diego Garcia. Francolin (Francolinus pondicerianus) "Perduit" Although reported as recently as 1964 (Bourne, 1966), this species was not noted in 1971. The Seychellois reported that it had been common in the north west and felt that it was still there, but this was the area that received the most attention by the present author, both by night and by day. None of the construction workers who were questioned had seen it either. That this was the region receiving the most disturbance by construction activities, etc., may have had the effect of either bringing, 1b to notace ior) of) horeame. Aste LOMGdec pishiGscn aaa ees possible, then, that the species has recently suffered a sharp decline in numbers, even to the point of extinction. Waterhen (? Amaurornis phoenicurus) "Poule d'eau" A moorhen was reported to Loustau-Lalanne (1962) and to Odling-Smee in 1964 (Bourne, 1966), but resident Seychellois questioned about this bird in 1971 knew nothing about it. No 7 such bird had been known to them to occur on the island since at least the 1940's--they could not speak for periods prior to this. All water systems on the western arm were thoroughly investigated and there was no sign of any such bird here or in such areas as were investigated on the eastern arm. It is perhaps questionable whether any such bird has been resident on the island--if it were present, it must surely be extinct now. Turnstone (Arenaria interpres) Ubiquitous and common, but rarely forming large flocks. C.100 were on the Point Marianne marsh on 5 April, but at other times there was only about 20 seen here (A Aonestil, WA iyonesl il. 14 Apr 1 5 May ). At Barachois Sec there were c.15 on 23-24 April. At the southern barachois area, c.12 were in B. Sylvain on 30 April and c.80 in the whole area on 1 May; GG il Sy alia 13)7 Tavares Sec lon toMay; 20 1n B. Cannon on 13 Mays) 20 om ‘the NW limits of B. Maurice on 8 May, c.20 on the whole main bara- chois area on 10 May and 10 on a connected arm to the south of this barachois on 13 May; Cho invand /around Bi. wubime money aMaye. Small numbers occurred in many inland pools including those deep in thickly forested areas: the inland pool near B. Lubine held about 20 on 1 April, 3 on 8 May and c.12 on 10 May; small numbers in pool areas, particularly near Eclipse Point, Point Marianne and elsewhere, especially after rain had left standing water. They were also frequently encountered (often in small parties of up to ten) iniodry areas jan ‘thickly, wooded as wielsl as open areas, where they were probably roosting rather than feeding. Around both the ocean and the lagoon shores they were commonly seen, ether singly or in small parties of wp to c.10. C.6 were on the shores of Ile Grande Barbe on 3 May, and 20 on the pools of Ile Milieu (+6 on the shore ) On Sy liken? cual ox SO) here on 15 May. No individuals were in an obviously breeding plumage. One caught and ringed at Point Marianne on 14 April had a wing length of 151 mm, weight of 100g and no wing moult was apparent. One found almost dead from unknown causes at Point Marianne on 5 April was collected; this bird showed no wing moult. **Greater Sand Plover (Charadrius leschenaultii) Present in small numbers in the major barachois. Records as follows: 1 on beach by Point Marianne on 5 April; 5 on mud flats at Point Marianne between causeway and lagoon on 12 April; 1 (showing some red on chest) at Point Marianne on mud flats on aie/) *Agpaeaides iivatBarachous: Sec ion 23) April s2) April (seen to cateh a fiddiler crab, Uca Sp.) and ~27/7A prin s tierait) oD. batrese "on 30 April; c.15 in the whole of the southern barachois system on 1 May; 1 at Point Marianne on 5 May; 9 (1 in breeding plumage ) in B. Maurice on 10 May; 1 an’ Bo La Parle Sec on 13 May. This species has not previously been recorded from the Chagos, but is to be expected. It is quite common in the Maldives during the northern winter with a few remaining through the rest of the year. “Grey Plover (Charadrius squatarola) An uncommon species at the time of this visit, but quite widely spread around the atoll. Recorded as follows: 1 on ocean beach at Tamil on 5 May; 1 at eBaySecvone2> Apmis) Seneca at B. Barrer on 30 April; 5 in the southern barachois on 1 May; 3 in B. La Paille Sec on 13) May;9 4am BeMauirsce! on iO May; 1 on Isle Milieu on 15 May. All were in non-breeding dress. Thais is) the first record fom Diego (Garcia, buy ett hasmveen previously recorded elsewhere in the Chagos. In the Maldives it is plentiful in the winter with smaller numbers lingering all year round. **Great Snipe (Gallinago media) Bight snipe, almost certainly this species, were seen at Mare Julien on 3 April, but could not be found when this marsh was revisited on 22 April. This marsh consists of a large area of very lumpy ground with dense fern on the mounds and mud in the hollows, except for an area to the NW which is lower and flat. This latter area was wet and covered with a thick turf of sedge with some Bacopa. The fern area was largely dry during the period of this visit. The snipe were flushed several times from the edge of the sedge area, but they quickly resettled without giving long clear views in flight and they were not seen on the ground. They were larger and heavier than Common Snipe (Gallinago gallinago) with a shorter bill, they flew straight and gave a single alarm note, less forceful than that of Common Snipe. Any bar on the trailing edge of the wings was not very apparent. Prominent white outer tail feathers were not observed, nor was prominent white edging in the coverts. While there may be some doubt about this identification, it 1S a species that has been seen in the Seychelles by Crook (Loustau-Lalanne, 1963) and it is a common migrant to the south- central African mainland (Benson, pers. Comme) el pauiiasmatnonts previously been recorded from either the Chagos or the Maldives. Gardiner and Cooper (1907) saw "a few snipe" on Diego Garcia in 1905 in barachois, but these may well have been another wader species. Whimbrel (Numenius phaeopus) "Corbijou" Ubiquitous in small numbers. Unfortunately no full counts were recorded at Point Marianne marsh, but from odd counts for various sections, it is likely that there were 20-30 in this ea, Similarly no counts were recorded for B. Sec, although several were always present. At the southern Barachois, 6 were in B. Sylvain on 30 April and c.30 in the whole area on iMave Cho wererane be wa Paiiie Sec) on 13°May:” c? in’ Be Cannon ony 13° May ; 10 on the N.W. edge of B. Maurice on 8 May and 24 on the whole of B. Maurice, except for the southern tnmbanedyeattm., jon) 10) May; 1 or 2 were generally around B. Lubine Celjen 7 May, & May). They were also frequently seen on the small barachois. Secluded inland pools were also highly favour- ed, but only one was seen in Mare Julien (22 Apri) 4 The pools along the N. coast of the N.W. area between Eclipse Point and Simpson's Point often had small numbers on them as did pools around Point Marianne area. They would frequently occur on dry land, often deep in woods. ‘Thus c.7 were generally in the clearing at De Moulin (23-28 April) and 16 were flushed when travelling by jeep between here and East Point on 1 April. They were frequently flushed from the ocean shore and often from the lagoon shore too. One was on the shore of Ile Grande Barbe on 3 May and 7 on the shore of Ile Milieu on the same date. Loustau-Lalanne (1962) reports shooting a Curlew in December, but no definite records of this species were obtained during this Visti ndtv Tatals were seen that had all the appearnce jor N- arquata, but the only callsheard from such birds were that of N. phaeopus. N. arquata is likely to occur in very small numbers, as it does in the western Indian Ocean, for example on Aldabra. **Bar-tailed Godwit (Limosa lapponica) two an Bs Courpat on 1. May are the first record for thie Chagos. It is recorded from the western Indian Ocean by Penny (1971) and Loustau-Lalanne (1963). The wintering range extends as far as the west coast of India and it is recorded from the Maldives. Most of these records are of small numbers. **Wood Sandpiper (Tringa glareola) Two together and later a single at the Point Marianne marsh on 5 April and 1 there on 15 April are the first records for the Chagos, but it is recorded from the Maldives as a regular winter visitor, with some summer records. **Common Sandpiper (Tringa hypoleucos) Seen only at Point Marianne by the lagoon shore or flying along the lagoon past the village. Records were as follows: Jebemmeen Z2ZO'and (24 Mareh-) 2 on 1 Aprads “lon 13) ,Aprid; 2 one 1 > Apia. These are the eee records for the Chagos, although it occurs in moderate numbers in the Maldives. 10 **Terek Sandpiper (Xenus cinereus ) Two seen at B. Sec on 23 and 24 April are the first record for the Chagos. It is recorded from the Maldives. **Greenshank (Tringa nebularia) One seen three times at Point Marianne marsh on 5 April 1s the farst record for they Chacos abut ite swam tacque nt visitor to the Maldives. Sanderling (Crocethia alba) Regularly seen in small numbers with other waders, particularly Curlew Sandpiper. At Point Marianne there were 3 on 1 April, 10 on 5 April, 10) tora 12 Nees, I on 2G WNereails 2 om 26 Well au 3, Sees om 13° May at B. Canons 1) on) 10) May and 4 om WB Mayan) Be) Maurelcer ec. 1O,on 1 Apert and ons 10) May, ons tien amlands poole baer le ulostimer. Loustau-Lalanne's record of 2 in December 1960 is the only other record of this species from the Chagos. Small numbers are recorded from the Maldives. Curlew Sandpiper (Calidris testacea) A common wader in barachois areas and some inland pools, outnumbered only by Turnstones. The highest number seen was c.70 on 1 April and c.60 on 1ODMay, ina smaiel inland pool! wvoyeine Neb ote Meu stacy a Orl both occasions the tide was high and, since at other times ten was the most seen here, it is likely that they congregated here due to the flooding of the nearby tidal barachois. At a time when the Bacopa-covered part of the Point Marianne marsh was fairly dry and considerable areas of mud were exposed, c.60 were seen (5 April), but otherwise, although always present here, their numbers did not exceed c.15. The open water and mud section of the Point Marianne marsh adjacent to, and to the north of the main Bacopa area, was quite popular in the early part of April, but as this area became drier from towards the end of April, it became less attractive to waders. Curlew Sandpipers were usually present in other barachois: 4 in B. Sec on 23 April and 24 Apraivands Shere non 277) April. @o 5) slid the small barachois between B. Sec and the southern barachois eared on 25 Apri. 9 int Be soybviaesnwon BO April handace 2 onsale ie whole of the southern barachorsmonle May; (c. 10) an Bela Padiake Sea osil Suen oa ee cin iy Ceinom om 119) WEEKS. 2 om tine WW, aclee of B. Maurice on 8 May with over 10 in the main barachois area aS a whole on 10 May and 13 May with a further 15 in a mudded area to the south of the main barachois on 13 May. 11 Inland, one was on Mare Julien on 3 April and small numbers were frequently seen on pools flooded by heavy rain, even in dense forest, as around Point Marianne on 13 April. One was on the pools at the S.W. end of Ile Milieu on 3 May. It did not occur on the ocean shore or on the lagoon shore away from barachois areas. One trapped and ringed at Point Marianne on 14 April showed no active moult and had a wing length of 132mm. All birds were in non-breeding dress. Previously recorded as in Bourne (1971) and in the Maldives. Crab Plover (Dromas ardeola) Small numbers only in the two largest barachois areas as follows: v7, (3 adults. /¢ immatures ) ims By Barrer on pOrApre ieee 20 (c.10 adults, c.10 immatures) in southern barachois on 1 May; 1 at N.W. edge of B. Maurice on 8 May and 6 in B. Maurice on 10 May’. A species that was not as common at the time of this visit as is suggested by previous reports. It is common on islands of the western Indian Ocean such as Aldabra and is recorded regularly from the Maldives. The only definite breeding area is the coast of Somalia. Loustau-—Lalanne (1963) thought it may breed in the Seychelles and Gadow and Gardiner (1907) were told that it bred on Diego Garcia. Breeding has not been confirmed at either of these localities and there was certainly no evidence of it on Diego Garcia during this visit. **Roseate Tern (Sterna dougalli) Birds that were, without doubt, this species were mixed with flocks of Crested Tern. C.15 were at Point Marianne on 5 April, 12 April and 17 April, but were not seen on any visit to this area in May. Five were in the southern barachois (Courpat ) on 1 May. When seen they were not identified, but were described as "much smaller than Crested, but slightly larger than Black-naped Tern. The bill appeared uniformly dark, a narrow white forehead, black cap extending narrowly down the nape. Rest of head and belly white. Upper wings and mantle uniformly grey and rump and tail white in apparent adults; apparent young birds seen to have dark (black) along lesser coverts, this is visible in Lesh DP erds General ly va very Slam, Silleek specaes "Later (17 April) it was noted that the legs were black. The apparent young birds were undoubtedly in their first year and the apparent adults would appear to be adults in winter plumage. First record for Chagos, but reported, from, and possibly breeding in, Maldives. 12 **Little Tern (Sterna albifrons) Only seen on two occasions, both at the southern mud section of the marsh at Point Marianne. A party of 15 flew rapidly out of the marsh into the lagoon on 12 April. Although they gave a rather brief view, they called and there can be little doubt but that they were this species. Two that were subsequently seen here on 15 April gave better views. First record for Chagos and not recorded from Maldives. Black-naped Tern (Sterna sumatrana) Generally not a very common species around most of the island, they were regularly seen in small numbers at the entrance to the barachois at Point Marianne and Sec. One was seen while passing through Point Marianne on 1 April and five were here with other terns on a shingle bar exposed by low water on 5 April. The same number were present on 12 April, but numbers subsequently dropped. Four to six were present at the entrance to B. Sec between 23 April and 28 April, generally seen at low tide sitting on an exposed tree trunk. These were still present on 19 May. At neither of these sites was there any evidence of breeding. Definite breeding was observed at Tle Milieu on 3 May where about 30 pairs were present. Four nests of two eggs each were seen and many young to flying stage. The birds were nesting on the beach ridge to the south (lagoon side) of the island and within the beach ridge on the south west edge of the pool area. The same number was present on 15 May. One pair was seen on Ile Grande Barbe on 3 May, but there was no evidence of breeding and no birds were seen there on 15 May. On 3 May there were about 8 including two each with flying young on Ile La Passe, but no nests were seen. These reports confirm other recent observations. Phillips found this the most abundant and widespread tern in the Maldives. Sooty Tern (Sterna fuscata) Numbers seen only at the lagoon mouth islets: c.10 on Ile Milieu and c.30 on Ile La Passe on 3 May. In neither case was any evidence of breeding seen and there was none on Ile Milieu on 15 May. While crossing the lagoon on 10 April one was seen flying westward over the lagoon. See appendix I for records of birds seen on sea crossings. This may not have been the best season for this species, but it seems likely that if this bird does still breed on Diego Garcia, it does so only in small numbers. It breeds in large numbers elsewhere in the Chagos, but is rare in the Maldives. Crested Tern (Thalasseus bergii) "Goeland Sardine" Very common around the atoll either feeding in the lagoon or roosting on exposed sand or mud in the major barachois. 13 At Eclipse Point 4-6 were feeding along the lagoon coast on most days and similar numbers were seen at Roche Point and East Point. A few were seen on sea crossings between Eclipse Point and East Point. C.80 were with Lesser Crested Terns (a. bengalensis), Black-naped Terns and Roseate Terns on the south- ern entrance to the Point Marianne marsh on 5 April. C.100 were here on 12 April, but from this date numbers began to drop here: e.c0 ton, 1 7sApril, ¢. 70) terns including other species’ on) 23 April, c.30 including other species on 5 May, 10 on 18 May, c.20 were in the southern barachois on 1 May, c.80 in B. Maurice including three in the most inland reaches on 10 May. C.10 were on the sand bore to the S.W. of Ile Milieu on 3 May. None of these birds was in a markedly immature plumage, and nowhere was any evidence of breeding observed. Two were caught at Point Marianne on 14 April. Both were adults in primary moult. One (weight 260g) had primary 10 (outer) old, 9 missing, 8 2/5 grown, 7 4/5 grown, 6-1 new. The other (weight over 260g) had primaries 10 and 9 old, 8 missing, 7 4/5 grown, 6-1 new. This species has been recorded as a possible breeding species elsewhere in the Chagos, but there was no evidence of Lots .on. Diezo (Garcia during the time of this visit, at a time when they would be likely to do so. However, many adults showed a clear black crown, typical of breeding birds. Present in Maldives. **Lesser Crested Tern (Thalasseus bengalensis ) Only seen in the company of Crested Terns where this species flocked on the exposed mud of major barachois. The bright orange bill was used to distinguish this species from T. bergii with its yellow or greenish-yellow bill. One was with Crested Terns at Point Marianne on 5 April, three at this same site on 12 April and 17 April and one on 18 April. Three were in the southern barachois on 1 May, five were on Ile Milieu on 3 May. The first definite records of this species from the Chagos, although Odling-Smee thought that they may have been present in 1964 (Bourne, 1966). Present in Maldives. Noddy Tern (Anous stolidus) Large numbers breed in the crowns of coconut trees. The main mainland breeding area, at the time of my visit seemed to be from the north west area to just north of Point Marianne,’ where there was often more than one pair ina tree. They did not appear to breed in the area of Point Marianne itself or in the area of shorter coconut trees to the south. They were then very common again in the tall "Cocos Bon Dieu" areas to the 14 north and south of De Moulin, but while still plentiful were not as numerous nearer the south end of the island. They were virtually absent from the southern tip up the eastern arm of the island to Minni Minni, but some were present in the bara- chois areas to the south of East Point and occasionally chicks were heard calling in this area on 13 May. The area north of Minni Minni was not well investigated, but from two trips to N.E. Point it seemed that they were virtually absent until the N.E. area itself, where they were again common. Several hundred were on Ile Grande Barbe on 3 May and 15 May. It is likely that some of these were breeding in Hernandia as well as coconut trees. There was no evidence of breeding on Tle Milieu on 3 May or 15 May. On Ile La Passe on 3 May about 100 birds were present, breeding in coconut trees and down to ground level. On the ground, four well grown chicks with some downy remnants were found as well as about 30 nests each with a single egg. The ground nests were mostly under Scaevola bushes with some around the buttress roots of Hernandia. One nest in the crown of a coconut tree also contained a single ege. The nests were all rather rough simple nests of dead leaves and a few twigs, although the nest in the crown of a coconut tree was a little more substantial. With the clearing of a large part of the north west area, this species must have suffered quite considerably and several young birds were brought to the main camp. On 4 April one young, with a trace of down which it soon lost, could fly well by 20 April; on 6 April one with a general covering of down and flight feathers not fully grown; one well grown chick on 7 April; one very small downy chick on 7 April; one just flying was found at De Moulin on 25 April. Young were heard calling from the coconut trees during the entire visit. Few birds seemed to use the lagoon for feeding, but there were usually some, particularly by the coast where they were frequently seen to collect leaves of Cymodocea, presumably for nest building. On the ocean side, large shoals of small fish moving along the coast with incoming tides would attract numbers of Noddy Terns. It is likely that most birds feed well out to sea and on evening sea-watches on the ocean side, at De Moulin and Roche Point, numbers could be observed returning to the island. From these points many birds were moving northwards up the coast presumably to the major breeding centres on the north-west from feeding areas to the south of the atoll. Visitors to the atoll at the end of the last century referred to large colonies on the mainland (on the ground and in trees), but visitors in the 1960's refer to them as only occurring on the lagoon mouth islets. Predation by humans and other animals undoubtedly discouraged ground nesting on the mainland, but the very large numbers now breeding in trees on the mainland are unlikely to have recently re-acquired the practice. 15 It breeds in large numbers elsewhere in the Chagos, but rarely in the Maldives. Lesser Noddy (Anous tenuirostris) has been recorded by several earlier visitors, but was not seen during this visit. Fairy Tern (Gygis alba) "Goeland Blanc" Common and breeding around the entire island. For breeding they seemed to favour Casuarina, where thiS was common, such as around Eclipse Point. Taking the atoll as a whole, Hernandia was probably by far the most used tree. Certainly in the areas that were predominantly coconut, there were usually isolated single or small groups of Hernandia and these were generally occupied by one or more pairs. In areas of more mixed woodland, or areas of predominantly broad-leafed woodland, Hernandia was again the tree most frequently used for breeding, although Calophylilum was often used where it occurred. Occupied trees were generally within ready reach of the ocean or lagoon, but the proximity of water of any sort seemed sufficient stimulus for Fairy Tern occupation, thus it was only areas with a wide land rim and absence of a water system such as the central region of the N.W. area and parts of the eastern land rim where this species was not apparently breeding. There were about 50 paams on ile Grande Barbe, c.5> pairs on Ile Milieu and 2 pairs on Ile La Passe, on 3 May. In most cases referred to above, breeding is assumed from the agitation of adult birds which would hover very close to the intruder giving a repeated "Doink, Doink" call, even at night. Positive breeding was recorded from several such instances. One downy chick was seen about 30' up ina Casuarina near the ocean coast to the west of Eclipse Point on 30 March. On 31 March a young bird, mainly white, but with some down, was reported by one of the censtruction battalion. On Tle Grande Barbe one egg was seen on a brach of a Hernandia by the lagoon beach and many young birds of a complete size range were seen in Hernandia up to a height of at least 60". One deserted chick was found at hte: base Vom anCasvarina at Pelipse Point on) 3 Apral. “At this time it was well grown, but still with quite a lot of down; it weighed 55g. It would take small fish or fish pieces readily from the hand, would drink water by itself and preened actively. It was quiet until joined by young Noddy Terns, when it gave a repeated "See, see" call for prolonged periods, keeping well aWwag rons black cousins. — By 19° April thats” bird could: filly quite well and weighed 84g, but still had some down around the neck and on the belly. It had lost all its down and was flying quite strongly before it mysteriously died on 25 April. The status of this species seems unchanged since previous reports. 16 Indian Barred Ground Dove (Geopelia striata) "Turtur cocos" According to resident Seychellois, 16 birds were brought to Diego Garcia nine years previously (1962). They were kept in captivity initially, but after 4 died the remaining 12 were released. The year of release is apparently incorrect, since Loustau-Lalanne (1962) found them present in 1960 after their release earlier in that year. Assuming the other information to be correct, they have now successfully spread from the release point at East Point around the island, but are nowhere particularly common. They occur along the whole of the eastern arm of the atoll and up the western arm as far as Point Marianne. On a trip round the whole island on 1 April, only one was seen on the western arm (at Roche Point). It was quite frequently seen on the eastern arm, particularly near the settlement areas of East Point and Minni Minni. During a brief stay at Roche Point one was again seen on 30 April. During 7 days at De Moulin at least two were regularly seen to the south of the village clearing, and a flock of between 5 and 10 in a clear area by the ocean coast to the north west of the village. Twelve were seen between the latter area and Point Marianne (Tamil) on 5 May. In the area of Point Marianne, itself, only single birds were seen on 8 April and 15 April, both in the same area near the ocean coast to the N.W. of the marsh. Turtle Dove (Streptopelia picturata) Mipewce Ces ailes"' Common around the entire land rim, but probably more common on the eastern half, both in densely forested areas of more or less pure coconut or of mixed broad-leafed woodland, and in relatively open areas. It was particularly abundant at the south end of the island in the tall Hernandia forest area between the barachois and the ocean and up the western arm in the tall dense broad-leafed woodland areas (30 April). But by far the densest population was on Ile Grande Barbe (3 May and 15 May). The high density on this islet was well known to the Seychellois, but they stated that, in fact, the numbers here had dropped markedly in recent years. The species was not seen on either of the other two lagoon mouth islets. It was particularly common on areas cleared for development, such as the airstrip. Large numbers of individuals would collect, sometimes forming loose flocks of up to 20), tor feed onmbhese aireas) ats tes atinerits initial clearance. No details of breeding were obtained. sl, Five were caught and ringed: Moult of Ring No. Date Locality Wing length Weight primaries DS96003 7 oiwe , Pt.Marianne 164 163 No moult EF43904 1osiwv, "Pt Marianne 179 198 No moult Omer. “wal it.wing: OOO3NNNNNN EF43905 18.iv. Pt.Marianne 2 185 No moult EF43906 MOS 2 PG. Hast 165 56 No moult EF43907 cee a Pt... Bast 166 164 No moult The wing lengths suggest that 03, O06 and O7 were female, and O4 and 05 were male. The head colour, examined from both trapped birds and from field observations, was very variable. Such observations and photographs as were taken do little to help resolve the question of the affinities of this dove, which has been described as a separate subspecies, S. p. chuni. 03 (female) had a blue-grey head; in O4 (male) the crown and forehead are quite blue-grey while the nape and sides of the neck and face are somewhat pink; in O5 (male ) the whole head is a clear blue-grey which extends somewhat onto the upper chest and toward the shoulders; in 06 (female) the blue-grey is restricted to the crown and forehead with that on the fore- head having a notable suffusion of pink, while the sides of the face carry only a suggestion of grey; O07 (female) has the head almost entirely pink, with only the slightest hint of grey on the crown. The eye is a dark reddish-brown with the surrounding skin a deep purplish-red. The bill has the basal half a deep lilac colour and the apical half pale greyish white. The feet are a deep purple above with soles buffish to grey. The wing measurement of live birds given here tend towards the figures for nominate picturata rather than for comorensis. These data suggest that further specimens are likely to provide evidence to support the suggestion that the Turtle Dove on Diego Garcia is derived from an artificial introduction of picturata, possibly with some comorensis (Benson, 1970). **"Le Merle", presumably the Bulbul (Hypsipetes borbonicus olivaceus ) According to the resident Seychellois, this species was introduced at some time from Mauritius. They say it became common by about 1953, but at this time it suddenly died out and was not reintroduced. 3 This introduction has not been recorded before and the species is not known to have been introduced elsewhere in the Chagos. 18 Indian Mynah (Acridotheres tristis) According to resident Seychellois the mynah was introduced in the mid-1950's. Fifteen were brought from Mahé in the Sey- chelles in 1953, but died before reaching Diego Garcia. In 1954 or 1955, 12 were brought from Agalega and released. It is now the commonest land bird over the whole island and flocks of up to 30 were not uncommon. in the clleamed area Jat De Moutan there were usually about 20 feeding ina loose flock. They were quite common even in such places as the thicker parts of the separating land spits of the southern barachois from where they would make sorties onto the mud to feed. They took advantage of the clearing activities in the northwest, and large numbers collected on the ground that had been turned over and amongst the accumulations of felled trees and other vegetation. Fresh copra laid out to sun-dry at the East Point settlement was also a great attraction and c.150 would concentrate on the copra drying platforms. A further 100 or so would feed around the village areas associated with copra preparation. One was heard on Ile Grande Barbe on 3 May (but none on 15 May) and one was seen on Ile La Passe on 3 May. According to the Seychellois the peak breeding season is around February, when they nest in holes at the top of rotted coconut trunks and around the crowns of living trees. Thirteen Mynahs were trapped and examined. Weights, measurements and moult are as the following table: Locality Date Weight Wing length Primary Moult Pt. Marianne ilies ~ = OOO000-1NN " MN Sraves - = 0000001 4NN East Point Wl exre 128 144 O0O00O-4NNNNN W u 108 142 OO0003NNNNN i ss 102 136 0000001 4NN 4 i 105 39 OOOOOOOONN i" i 93 138 000000000- i A 120 145 OO-4NNNNNN 8 y 121 149 -14NNNNNNN " " 129 147 OOOOO-3NNN ‘ i 114 140 OOOOOOOONN if ii 110 Why OOOO3NNNNN g a 94 132 O000003NNNN The moult was symmetrical in all cases. 19 The white patch of the left wing of the birds trapped at East Point was painted red with a "magic marker" and eight of these were released at Eclipse Point. This marking would be difficult to see in resting birds, but was readily visible in flight. One of these was seen just north of Point Marianne a week later, but none was seen at East Point up to the time of my departure (23 May). Since all these birds were in active primary moult, they would have moulted out most of these red feathers after a fairly short interval. One mynah found dead at De Moulin, 26 April 1971, showed primary moult as follows: OOOO4NNNN. Forbes—Watson (1969) noted that throughout the Comoro Islands the mynah was frequently seen associated with domestic stock, parching on their backs and feeding in the area disturbed by the "host" or sometimes apparently feeding directly from the animals' backs. No such behaviour was noted on Diego Garcia, either in the main Seychellois settlement where there was a mixture of domestic animals or around the rest of the atoll where feral donkeys were quite common. It is extraordinary that Loustau-Lalanne (1962) did not see the Mynah in 1960, since it was the commonest land bird by 1964 (Odling-Smee in Bourne, 1966) and is particularly fond of the fresh copra laid out to sun-dry at the main settlement at East Point. Madagascar Fody (Foudia madagascariensis ) The second commonest land bird, found around the entire atoll. Near the beginning of the present visit, breeding pairs were well distributed in all types of habitat. Two empty nests were seen; one about 20’ up in a Casuarina near Eclipse Point on 28 March and apparently made of Casuarina needles; the other one, found recently fallen to the ground just north of Mare Julien on 19 April, was c.2" wide and 3-1 "deep ansader It was entirely made of grass, coarse on the outside, with a fine grass fibre lining; the whole structure was rather thin and quite loose with very little suggestion of a porch. Droppings on the outside suggested that young had been recently reared. A fledg- ling was found by a member of the construction battalion on 31 March and a female was feeding a fledgling at Eclipse Point on 8 April. At this time the breeding season was coming to a close and many males were coming out of breeding plumage (even some of those still attending young), giving a great excess of dull coloured birds. Towards the end of April it was noticeable that there were not so many in the woods and that whereas occasional flocks of six to ten had been noted soon after arrival on the island, flocks of up to 30 were regularly seen in certain clear- ings of grass, etc. Males in full breeding dress were absent from these flocks. Such flocks were particularly regular at Point Marianne and De Moulin. 20 They were present in small numbers on Ile Grande Barbe, but were not seen on either of the other lagoon mouth islets (3 May). Six were caught and) ringed. from ia, flock of c.90 seeding amongst mixed herbs in the clearing at De Moulin on 28 April. Weights and measurements of these birds are given in the table on page 21. The moult of these individuals was as follows: 52 (adult male) some red on head, most of rest lost. Primaries: OOOOOOOINN. 52 (adult female) central tail feathers moulting. Primaries: 0001 3NNNNN. 54 (juvenile) no moult. 5963 {(-eyelulI lik female) taal moul tine: central oneseN, “otters. Primaries: -1234NNNNN. 56 (juvenile) no moult. 57 (adult female) central tail feathers moulted. Primaries: 0000001 3NN. (Feet deformed: only hind claw on both feet, other toes represented by stumps). Tt is likely that birds such as those seen by Finsch and by Stoddart in July and August were losing the breeding dress and not coming into this plumage as is suggested in Bourne C1974 yee No individuals were seen that suggested F. eminentissima or any atypical colour forms of F. madagascariensis, although the latter, especially, would have been difficult to distinguish from typical madagascariensis in post-—breeding moult. Zl UdPEM Tita 6°8 0°6 0°6 LoS G°8 L°6 yydep TItd O°SL erik O°SL e161 Gare ({h Y4SuU9T TIta Sei SUTMOLS TT¥4S 6° Ot G*Or €°St G°OS TTeL O°6L Gs Sil OGL eel Gr Al >All snsize, SuTM O°€9 Gg 99 go) Ae) OL OO*SL 00°9L 00°9L OG iil 00°60 00°40 out L OS aI! G*OL O 9 Gol Go°GL Gon TUS TOM F/+TUPV eTTusane 5/4 TDpPV eTTusange F/4TDPV w/TNpy xoS/esy LG 9S GS 7S CG cGellad "ON SUTY APPENDIX I Birds seen on sea-voyages: Mauritius to Diego Garcia 18-19 March, and Diego Garcia to Mauritius 2-26 May The co-ordinates of sightings are extremely approximate, being calculated from the time of observation assuming the ship to be moving at a constant speed for the whole journey and ina direct line between the two islands, as calculated from a Mercator's projection. 18 March 4 Sooty Tern 3 Boobies (? Ss. sula) u i These were the only birds seen on the outward crossing. 24 May No birds seen. 25 May W255) GoBOQ SOOuyv 1 Great 1 56. BO) 10 Sooty 1 7/5 OO 30 Sooty 1 Adult 26 May LOM 511 615 10.45 11 400 13.00-15.45 16.45-17.45 11.18 14.00 (1h, 30 15.00 15s 30 e700 Tern 13°45'S, 64°45'E Skua (Catharacta skua) 13°45'S, Bee 64°51 Tern 14°15'S, 64°15'E Tern 14°30'S, 64°R male Lesser Frigate 14°30'!S, 64°R 1 Sooty Tern 17S) 61 te 2 Y W NW 2 YW W SW 60 " f Sh 19°S., 6) a | Ween, S790 (White) SE 5 Sooty Tern SE Dw Oi 1721 BiS 5, GOChS te 1 " PW KI LSOIS., GO° 30's 1 a mM § S17-309S, 6O°SO1R DQ it " N<217°45'S, 60°15'E 4 Noddy Tern NW>17°45'S, 60°15'E A Soon Arexcin Ss 13°S, CO fp 23 APPENDIX IT Notes on other vertebrates Reptiles Stoddart (COTA, 169) notes old records of two species of gecko from Diego Garcia, but all of the 91 specimens collected by H.A. Fehlmann in 1967 were the common Hemidactylus frenatus pemtese! Jand none was the other recorded species, Leprdodacty lus lugubris Dumeril and Bibron. Three specimens taken in 1971 from fairly natural sites proved to include both species (identified by A.P. Russell): Hoy arenas) sch tegek - Beli pse Point < >) Apacs iO ale. In rotting stump of Casuarina. LL.) tugubris (Dumeril and Bibron). Ineibijorsve I2tejshane. 5) Z\jeaeslil 1971 and 4 May 1971. A special effort was made to look for the mud-turtles (see sLoddart 197/41", 168) particularly in the wet areas of the western arm, but with no success. Certain of the Seychellois living at Fast Point said that they still exist in some wet areas near there, but that they are extremely difficult to find outside the very wet periods. Offers of reward for finding specimens produced nothing. The probability that they do occur is supported by the fact that the acting manager of the island settlement, Marcel Moulinié, had two in captivity in his garden when he was last on the island in 1968. It is still uncertain which of the two species that were previously found there still survives. The only marine chelonian recorded during this visit was the Hawksbill Turtie, Eretmochelys imbricata. On arrival (20 March 19719) the shell of a recently killed specimen was Ssecn abt weltpse orm. "On the night tof 31) March—li April one was caught on the ocean side near Roche Point and released at Eclipse Point. It was a female with the following measurements: length of carapace (over the curve ) 1'6"; width over carapace ie bene thot. pilast ron 11d: WVaLGligl\ (ae joules eieroim I) 2 6 They were occasionally reported from the lagoon in 1971. The ocean shore offers very few suitable nesting sites for turtles, particularly on the western half and the lagoon mouth islets, but there are suitable sites on the eastern ocean beach, on the lagoon shore of the main land rim and probably on the lagoon shore of Ile Grande Barbe, although it is doubtful whether they ever bred in large numbers on the island. Mammals Rats were very common and widespread, but not as common as previous reports have suggested. The acting manager, Marcel Moulinié, also stated that they were nowhere near aS common as 2h they had been at the time of his last stay there in 1968. However, they are still very much in evidence, both around habitations and among the coconut areas. In the latter areas, the damage done in causing the premature drop of the nuts by eating through the base of young nuts to get the milk, was a very common sight. The drop in numbers is unaccountable. It is unlikely to be the result of human effort for the bounties offered at various times. It is perhaps worth noting that the figures quoted for the numbers of rats brought in as a result of these bounties (e.g. 30,000 per year in the 1930's) probably give a very false picture, since the whole animal was not required of the claimant, usually only the tail, and the islanders soon learnt to make several of the required part from one rat! Two rats were collected, both Rattus rattus L.: one from De Moulin, 27 April 1971 and one male (116g) from Roche, Loint.0 29) Mayan Omaie There are perhaps 200 feral donkeys on the atoll, mainly around the more open dry areas. They were not seen in the NW area itself, but all over the rest of the atoll in parties of up to 13 including young animals. Cats and dogs were common. Cats didnot psitaly, Sears ipieeont settlement areas even when these had been deserted for several months. Dogs were far more numerous and widespread. An extermination campaign, by shooting, was well under way by May, 1972. Despite intensive observation no bats were seen and none caught in mist-nets set at night in possible likely places. The islanders confirmed that no bats existed on the island. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS For the period of my stay I was a guest of the United States Navy, and personnel on the island, on ships to and from the island and in U.S. Embassies in London and Mauritius were all snost (hel pti.) Digey ER. Antvodme sy) Diese) a djuebcise tyne tome sruey ny = Vaughan, and Mr. J. Guého of the Mauritius Sugar Industry Research Institute and Mr. R. Giddens of the British High Commission in Mauritius gave very valuable assistance while I was in Mauritius. To Marcel Moulinié, of Moulinié Industries in the Seychelles, lessees of Diego Garcia at the time of my visit, and acting manager of the copra station, I am grateful for hospitality during the time spent at the East Point settlement and for help in questioning the Seychellois on the history and status of birds, etc. The Ministry of Defence made full air photograph coverage available. C.W. Benson, Dr. W.R.P. Bourne and Dr. D.R. Stoddart gave helpful advice and information about the island and its birds and discussion and criticism in the preparation of this account. 25 REFERENCES Benson eahonto 70. ) the systematic status of the form of SPGopEpovella pleburava on Dilezo Garcia. Bull. Br. Orn’. Ciub, 902 32=35. Bourne, W.R.P. 1966. Observations on islands in the Indian Ocean. Sea Swallow 18: 40-43. ---------- 197i.) ) the birds of the Chagos Group, Indian Ocean. witoll Res. Bull: 149: 175=207. Forbes—Watson, A.D. 1969. Notes on birds observed in the Comoros on behalf of the Smithsonian Institution. Atoll ReSt asin. feo f—23. Gadow, H. and Gardiner, J. Stanley, 1907. Reports of the Percy Sladen Trust Expedition to the Indian Ocean in 1905. VIII. Aves, with some notes on the distribution of the land-birds Ghetmcemsevecheltes. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond (2) 12. 103-110. Gardiner, J.o. and Cooper, C. Forster, 1907. Reports of the Percy Sladen Trust Expedition to the Indian Ocean in 1905. i Descer prion of the expedition. Trans Linn. Soc. Lond. (2) 122) dese. Loustau—Lalanne, P. 1962. The birds of the Chagos Archipelago, indian Ocean. Ibis, 104: 67-73. ---------- 1963. Sea and shore birds of the Seychelles. Seychelles Soc. Occasional publication no.2. Mahé: Government Printer. Penny, M.J. 1971. Migrant waders at Aldabra, September 1967- Marehd9oe. Phot, Trans. Roy. Soe. Wond: Bi, 260: 5/9=5592 Phillips, W.W.A. 1963. The birds of the Maldive Islands, Indian Ocean. J. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 60: 546-584. Saunders, H. 1886. On the birds obtained by Mr. G.C. Bourne on the Island of Diego Garcia, Chagos Group. Proc. Zool. Soc.) Wond., eco: 335-337. stoddart, D.R. 1971. Terrestrial fauna of Diego Garcia and ether Chasos atolls, Atoll Res. Bull. 1493 163-170. prodditre Deke wand taylor, oJ.) Pds. 19714 sGeosraphy, and Ecology of Diego Garcia Atoll, Chagos Archipelago. Atoll Result VyOe G=xaa, 1237. wre met a vets a vrai Fi fs aay ee ye se | uf) ose aw Te ? - ‘ = mp 2an sth) Da ae : ae Witt eee, wth» atl ai ; j aways an . 7 Sy a ‘a 4) if . wee | ire {peta bine his a ial Vaated Seid i : A J TOES ds Oo ea Te cree Foe aF Se at ae : iit ib i tind ut ty oP tie Meee Tee Te) eee ae ee ¢ ae SRL | anit | va as kia Bi t ‘ a ns tpt Be Fa ee ae eat ann in | (faded ae wut a Ate oe My neers ti F nent) wae. Phy vn id ae A ; tise: pei ees: ee I rk Na fe" 4 Se OS ag tty Pe eae ole, eben ee UM gage. bvisiente 39 SOR ae MD Nes Bo ity A & ont swat «C4. Pra it i = De toy am DP nas Aa. ine e's a ams Te ore) hn TET “iy EM eae Se Ree yey x eee. kaa e z 7 J Re pe i ME GR yee oi. vee, vue ie ifn A 4 *% => z ; c Li Lae 6 b40s ic 7 aa iprar i vr hat : qi > } ita . Res - oe a ae ait i ‘en ns, ata y ost mas POMS Popeye Ok? eRe fade opab 4 ust ive Te ee ye : GEV Se ee ee uy dae et a a ; Lee eee bes op Pewee ees teen net a te Ed “ty A 5 seater sy ae i bay i a iat ae r eon ai i ef ty “e ’ ss ng: Lute ; inf ex oe Las ia ; ok ‘ Mag aes Osi ie | i Sad ‘ 7 ice’. ee heal et AKA AL’ Se hi) ae ay se s bs Cease eta ce , et Was ic a Pet at ke? oe ee - > é : ~ ee a , = , a H ~ j pie pak: Siem) Cen fea " “arb * oH a Beets et WL toc \aG4 ne . its : ; ao th PGES ae |opety oe ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 176 THE BIRDS OF THE ILES GLORIEUSES by C. W. Benson, H. H. Beamish, C. Jouanin, J. Salvan, and G. E. Watson Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 Ou SE ware eri leat <5! 2a a eae ah. bant sak 7 ef ie 7 et Fighia | Toa yrteinatilee a pw a ’ : Ty} oat Fis OAL ee rere ~ at oe eae eal Introduction Acknowledgements The Individual Species ij) Land bards A. Resident species B. Mieratory species, status C. Species of purely hypothetical occurrence 2. Shore birds 3. [ea bards Discussion Land birds Shore birds Sea birds References Contents and species of uncertain Aldabra Cosmoledo y) con Assumption —10° 2) Astove ILES GLORIEUSES 12" \ | Ce) % | é Geyser Reef ; % | ES ” G @ » 0 ‘ Ae) « @ G RY 6 Fig. 1. Location of Iles Glorieuses 77 / &J du Lys kilometres Submarine contours in metres Fig. 2. Iles Glorieuses, in part after hydrographic chart (from ARB 159) THE BIRDS OF THE ILES GLORIEUSES hy Coe oBensondg tH. Ha iBeamish we C., Soudan Jin salvan, “and 'G. (bs Watson INTRODUCTION This paper is an account of ornithological observations made during two series of short visits to the Iles Glorieuses (Gloriosa or Glorioso Tsland) in 1970-71. The first series was undertaken by the following: Major J. Salvan, 29 October 1970, to Grande Glorieuse; C. Jouanin, 2-4 November 1970, to Grande Glorieuse and Tle du Lys; A. Barau, 17-19 April 1971, to Grande Glorieuse, Ile du Lys and Roches Vertes (sometimes known as Roches Noires). Their observations have been collated by Jouanin. Jouanin and Barau collected 11 specimens which are deposited in the Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris, and have been studied by Benson. Salvan only had time to search the northern part of Grande Glorieuse, particularly the scrub area ca. 0.8 km west and east of the Old Meteorological Station. But he was Bison bas ship ofr—shore, ca. 1.5 km north of .thegisitland | ior 12 hours, when he had the opportunity to observe several species of terns, but he saw no boobies at all. The second series of visits was made during day calls by the cruise ship Lindblad Explorer at the Iles Glorieuses, between August 1970 and June 1971. Visits, lasting the greater part of the day, were always made to Grande Glorieuse by the full complement of 50 to 60 passengers (the personnel differed irom crudise fo cruise), althouwsi sons OAp rill 9 7 leaie, dinelivs was also visited. From time to time the passengers included some well known naturalists, among them Dr. D. Backhaus (Frankfurt Zoo), Prof. F. Bourliére (President, International Biological Programme ) , C. Cadbury eg for Promotion of Nature Reserves), Dee Ho Prddrach) (Berd myZoo,) who pubiitsiled ga short account of his visit /Frddrich 1972/), the late Earl of Mansfield, P. M. Scott (Wildfowl Trust, Slimbridge), N. Sitwell (Editor, Animals) and Dr. G. E. Watson, a co-author of this paper who contributed his observations directly. IDE, Iba LIL IL Watson, resident zoologist on the ship, also made three visits. Prof. Bourliére, who visited Grande Glorieuse on 28 August 1970, gave his observations to Jouanin, who collated them with those SE thewtrtest series of visits. The remainder have; been mainly collated by Beamish, who was in charge of the subsequent visits, (Manuscript received April 1973--Eds. ) 9 of which there were two in November, two in April, one in May and one in June. The actual drafting of this paper has been the responsibility of Benson. Previous visits to the Iles Glorieuses have been few. Published accounts of earlier observations are as follows: The recording of three species ('fou', 'colibri' and 'cicogne') seen during a visit to Ile du Lys in 1818 (Frappaz 1820, 1824). The last of these was probably a heron or egret. The record is unaccompanied by any comment, and is only in the 1820 report. It is not referred to again below. Dr. R. W. Coppinger visited Ile du Lys and Grande Glorieuse on 3-8 May 1882, during the cruise of the Alert in 1878-82 (Coppinger beh The four birds which he collected were listed by Sharpe (1884 Dr. W. L. Abbott was on Grande Glorieuse during 18-29 January 1893 where his ship was incapacited. On February 1 he also called at ile du Lys’. in asbrief faelid repomt hegdesenibed the island and some of the birds (Abbott 1894), while the orni- thological results were detailed by Ridgway (1894, 1896), who included abstracts from Abbott's field notes but without the benefit of personal discussion with the collector. The birds he collected and his field notes are in the National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution. M. J. Nicoll visited Grande Glorieuse and Ile du Lys on 10-11 March 1906, during the voyage of the Valhalla in 1905-6 (Nicoll 1906, 1908). His collections are in the British Museum (Natural History). Arnoux (1950) has given a brief account of a breeding colony of Sooty Terns Sterna fuscata on Ile du Lys, inspected on 5 Apr oe Coppinger's and Nicoll's specimens have been re-examined by Benson, and Abbott's specimens and field notes by G. E. Watson. Earlier lists of species of birds on certain islands in the western Indian Ocean are available in Dupont (1907) and Watson et al. (1963). The former is simply a bare list, unaccompanied by any supporting detail. The latter, by contrast, contains a much fuller and more informative account although based only on a survey of the literature. No cognisance is taken in the present paper of the sea bird observations by Bailey (1968), during voyages of the Discovery in 1963-64, although around 20-21 July 1964 he appears to have been close to the Iles Glorieuses. There is a brief summary of the ecology of the Iles Glorieuses by Stoddart (1967), and a longer account on the geomorphology and vegetation by Battistini and Cremers (1972). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Jouanin is most grateful to M. 1'Ingénieur en chef Marcel Malik, directeur de la Météorologie Nationale A la Réunion, who 7 and are anithe Britwsh Museum (Natural History). 3 Made Vai rWewarranzenenvs for his journey, and “allsio for that of A. Barau, to the Iles Glorieuses. Jouanin is grateful too to M. Paul Cousseran, Préfet de la Réunion, who lent his own outboard, making possible the visit to Jle du Lys. Werare®alse nost grateful “to Dri Do RY Stoddart for assistance in various ways, especially for making available the papers by Frappaz and by Battistini & Cremers in manuscript. M. J. Penny, who was on several visits from the Lindblad Baplorer tovrse tiles Glorieuses! towards the vend of “1971, has been kind enough to comment on certain points. It is hoped that he will publish his own observations from these cruises in due course. THE INDIVIDUAL SPECIES The term 'Aldabra Archipelago,' wherever used, includes Assumption, Cosmoledo and Astove, as well as Aldabra. An asterisk denotes that the species under discussion on the existing evidence cannot be regarded as of entirely certain occurrence, either now or at some time in the past. vane moans A. Resident species Gallus gallus Domestic Fowl Abbott (in Ridgway 1896, as G. ferrugineus ) records Domestic Fowl as wild and plentiful on Grande Glorieuse, but "quite shy and by no means easy to shoot.' Nicoll (1906, 1908) writes in Similar terms. But in 1970-71 there was no sign of them and they must have been extirpated. Coppinger (1883) makes no mention of fowl. At the time of his visit there was a popu- lation of 29 humans on Grande Glorieuse. Obviously chickens must have been introduced directly by man, presumably between 1882 and 1893. ae nate Pi erence Ovens Madagascar Buttonquail or Hemipode Madagascar Buttonquail were widespread on Grande Glorieuse during 1970-71, inhabiting more open grassy areas near beaches, bare ground under Casuarina trees, the lower slopes of sandhills, and the airfield and its edges. Beamish estimated that there might be as many as 300 pairs on the island; G. E. Watson found them particularly abundant in long grass near the airfield in early April 1971. Although no specimen was collected there can be no doubt about the identification, as Beamish sent Benson four colour slides of the birds for comparison with specimens. One of these was good enough for it to be possible to determine the sex (female). There is no earlier record of the species. M. J. Penny (pers. comm.) has the impression that it was deliberately intro- duced by man many years ago for sport, despite its small size. He has been told that plantation labourers were forbidden to | kill it. Like Geopelia Sitriata, see bellow, at may, havewbeen / brought from Réunion, where it is very common in cultivation A. Barau in litt. (to Jouanin) ) and thas ibeengso )Gor amlousaiame orl 1946: 38; Milon 1951: 159). Abbott (1894) and Nicoll (1906) write of Grande Glorieuse being covered with a thick growth of trees and scrub (Abbott's specimen notes refer to "jungle" ) except for a coconut plantation and a large maize field. Recent activities by man, especially the clearing of the airfield, must have favoured the Buttonquail. In Madagascar, Rand (1936: 369) found it associated with treeless, grassy areas and cultivation, much as T. sylvatica in Africa. Dr. L. Watson found a nest containing three eggs in low grass on 18 March 1971. When Beamish and G. E. Watson visited the site on 8 April it was deserted, the young having presumably been hatched and left. G. E. Watson observed two families of small chicks in heavy forest along the road. The data in Rand (1936: 369 ) indicate egg-laying during September to February in Madagascar, though if those for T. sylvatica in south-central Africa (Benson et al. 1964: 53) are a guide, egg-laying may occur virtually throughout the year. Beamish found that the birds could be approached to within 5 metres without being disturbed, the yellow eye being most noticeable. Streptopelia picturata Madagascar Turtledove Coppinger (1883) collected a Turtledove specimen on Ile du Lys which served as the type of Turtur coppingeri Sharpe (1884). Coppinger apparently also saw it on Grande Glorieuse, Since he states that he saw the same land birds there as on Ile du Lys, with the addition of the "Madagascar crow" (Gagee Corvus albus). Abbott also collected a female on Grande Glorieuse (Ridgway 1896), but in his field notes, states that although ‘a few exist on Gloriosa it is not common! and ‘has very probably been introduced.' Nicoll (1906, 1908) made a special search for it, but without success, and suspected that it might be exc balncit. The only possible sighting for 1970-71 is a 'Madagascar Turtle Dove' recorded by Bourliére on 28 August 1970. But in April 1971 G. E. Watson could not find it, despite a determined search, It is curious that it should otherwise have been over- looked, although Benson & Penny (1971: 462) note that on Aldabra it is conspicuous early in the day, albeit skulking in cover later on. Possibly it was already extinct on the Iles Glorieuses before Wicoll "s-vaisit. Benson (1967: 75-79) applied the name coppingeri not only to the above two purple-headed specimens, both of which were available to him, but also to similar colored birds from Assump- tion and Aldabra. It appears that S. p. coppingeri now survives 5 only on Aldabra. Even there, on West Island, its numbers have been reduced, probably due to a combination of tameness and human predation (Benson & Penny 1971: 462). It has apparently been extirpated on Assumption (Stoddart ew Bile 1 O7/0e ip ties Presumably this was also the form that inhabited Cosmoledo and Astowe, but there 1s no definite evidence of its occurrence on either atoll to-day (Benson 197 Oa: T68E" 19'/ObE ‘titi5a)! Benson & Penny (1971: 425) suggest that turtle doves colonised the Iles Glorieuses from Aldabra, not from Madagascar, which is occupied bythe vsrey—-neaded Ss. p. pieturatas The land area of Aldabra is much larger than that of the Iles Glorieuses, Assumption, Cosmoledo or Astove, and so the most likely place for the evolution of coppingeri, which subsequently spread to these smaller islands. Geopelia striata Barred Ground Dove or Zebra Dove Several individual Barred Ground Doves were seen on every visit from the Lindblad Explorer, mainly around the northern and extreme southern ends of Grande Glorieuse. Salvan saw one or perhaps two small doves, presumably also this species, 200 m west of the Old Meteorological Station. There is no previous record. It was presumably deliberately introduced by man into the Seychelles, and thence in 1960 to Diego Garcia (Bourne 19712 this surely atso applies to thevliles Glorzeuses. Indeed, M. J. Penny (pers. comm.) was told that it was intro- duced from Réunion about 1969 by one of the meteorologists, Harry Vesramars. As with Turnix nigricollis, recent ecological changes must favour it. Thus, Goodwin (1967 ) WHOLiLeS) wlaeie wiz ILS characteristic of ‘cleared areas, gardens and agricultural land. Parker (1970) found it common on North Island, Farquhar Atoll, and Benson (1970a) gives a single record from Menai Island, Cosmoledo, which he suggests 'may represent a not very success-— fiVartiftetal wntroduction.-' Hypsipetes madagascariensis Madagascar Bulbul The Madagascar Bulbul was first recorded by Abbott who collected three specimens on Grande Glorieuse (Ridgway 1896, as Ixocincla madagascariensis). In his field notes Abbott states that it was not common and had an ‘entirely different note! from that of Aldabra birds. Nicoll (1906) also found it, but only saw four birds and collected one. No record was made of it in 1970-71, unless the following from Beamish's notes applies: 'Both Dr. Backhaus and Dr. Frddrich reported seeing a small group of birds of thrush-like appearance near the high sandhills at the extreme northern tip of Grande Glorieuse. [I did not see these birds myself.' Frddrich (1972) did not men- tProneieeinehis account. Etvis perhaps relevant that the Sey— chellois name (reasonably apt) hon Hypsipeves 4s" | Me miter y) Gale. French for Turdus merula, and that on Aldabra it is usually in two's or three's (Benson & Penny 1971: 476). Nevertheless, with every respect, it is far from certain that 1t still’ survives in @) the Iles) Glorieuses. During) his visit anpApraw® 1971 0G.e hemWat sion could not find it, despite a determined search. He had no diff- iculty in finding the species on Grand Comoro and Aldabra, and H. crassirostris on Mahé and Praslin in the Seychelles, the birds responding readily to squeaking. It appears never to have been common on Gloriosa, in contrast to Aldabra, where Benson & Penny found it numerous, and it has never been recorded from Assumption, Cosmoledo or Astove (Stoddart eit ad 97058 Benson 1970a, 1970b). The question now to be resolved is whether or not there is a subspecies H. m. grotei Friedmann (1929) endemic to the Tles Glorieuses. Benson accepts entire responsibility for the ensuing discussion. He has examined all the material of the Spectes) nay Wem Bisisva Sia Mus cunt (Natural History) from Madagascar (virtually throughout), the Comoros (Grand Comoro, Anjouan, Moheli, Mayotte), Aldabra and the Iles Glorieuses (Nicoll's Single specimen, a female). Thais) anedudineal soma Hecitaemine University Museum of Zoology, Cambridge, amounted to over 100 specimens, the measurements of which, exclusive of a few from Madagascar, are shown in the table below. Furthermore, of special importance he has had the loan of the two Gloriosa para- type females collected by Abbott, and Watson has examined the type of grotei, a male, and sent comments to Benson. Most of the material has also been seen by R. Wagstaffe, who in part-— icular has checked certain culmen lengths, of critical import— ance. The problem is best considered against this relatively wide background of possible variation among the islands mentioned above. There has already been some discussion by Benson (1960, 1967) and by Benson & Penny (1971), but the validity of the Gloriosa subspecies was not established. In Benson (1960) ELAS sexes were not separated (while there is no difference in colour, males are normally a little larger than females). In the second and third references, attention was concentrated on the Aldabra form, Hom. Lost ravusy. Friedmann (1929) compared Iles Glorieuses birds only with Specimens from Aldabra and bestowed the name grotei on them, on account of the longer, stronger bill, differing also in colour, being wholly orange-red, not dusky, almost blackish, towards the 1paljo) felis) aligi Tylave) abloyaiivene,, These possible differences can be con- sidered in turn, and also possible differences in colour of plumage: (ay) Bill-length: Wing and tail-lengths, as well as culmen- lengths, are set out in the table. These first two are remark-— ably uniform, and the only point worth noting is that males are a little larger than females, but with an appreciable amount of overlap. Friedmann (1929) does not indicate how he took culmen- lengths. His figures do not show even any overall overlap bet- ween rostratus and grotei, and there is none in the present set ih between females. On the other hand, the single male of grotei is at the minimum for males of rostratus. Furthermore, while the females of grotei are around the maximum for Madagascar females (nominate madagascariensis), iWiNe WHILE GS IN@eue wine swiSe0, for Madagascar males. There are a number of unusually long- billed individuals from Grand Comoro, Anjouan and Moheli, in the Comoros, though none from Mayotte, the nearest of these four islands to Madagascar. It is well known that island forms often have longer bills than their mainland counterparts (in this taking Madagascar as 'mainland'), and this has been shown for various Comoro forms in comparison with Madagascar (see most recently Benson HOA) iim thie jpresient casie at as ciumilous thak, in comparison with Madagascar, while no tendency to lengthening is apparent on Mayotte or Aldabra, there is on the Iles Glori- euses, less remote from the 'mainland'. In any case, the leng- thening on the Iles Glorieuses is not such as to justify the recognition of grotei on this ground alone. (b) Bill-colour: On only a relatively few specimens is tierenany second, Of what was the colour of the ball an life. Nevertheless it does appear that everywhere (in ine) the colour approximates to orange-red, with the apical half of the culmen dark brown. The orange-red soon fades after death. Thus in Specimens collected by Benson on Aldabra in the first three months of 1968, which he recorded at the time as having bill 'vermillion, sepia towards tip of upper mandible,' the bright colour has changed four years later to pale yellow, as in the remainder of the specimens, all of them older, some of which were collected more than a century ago. But the dark brown Sects aot tOMmmade ac all, “so that the contrast as still easily discerned. In Aldabra birds this darkening on the culmen is consistently apparent. Of those from the Iles Glorieuses, in Abbott's three it is reduced to a trace at the extreme tip and Abbott's notations on the label of the male and one female read, Dniioranme red.) (On tie other hand, in Nacolil's (specamens ab is quite well marked. Most Madagascar specimens have it well marked, although four have been found in which it is reduced or absent as in Abbott's two. Reduction of the darkening seems best marked on Grand Comoro, in contrast to the other islands in the Comoro archipelago. However, apart from this possibility, the variability would appear to be on an individual rather than feographical basis. Incidentally there may be little or no MittaArTOon ame thie colour of the arnas. Bensonié Penny (1971: 478) five it as 'red-brown' on Aldabra ('greyish brown' in a juven- ielie )\. and Benson (1960: 67) 'chestnut—brown' in the Comoros. Nicoll (1906) gives it as 'brown' for his Grande Glorieuse Specimen, alr noush on) the Habel iat is) recorded as 'hazeilis' 3 An old Madagascar specimen in Cambridge, collected by E. Newton, had iris ‘reddish brown.' Eleven collected by Benson and A. Wai tansaneMadacascar sim 19/2 had at ‘dark med") or ‘aaich aed — brown,.! (c) Plumage-colour: As remarked by Benson & Penny (Giovalr D (97) GaSe Wee Oc. Wem Bie, WeNicr Se ie eae Hee wee, Se TAG ip Pec abe a= (Ol (EES) OSE uenoruy Grecah Gee teme Gece Ge GW e328 ae 4, (Z°06) GOO tii (ean) GE We Gh ce Ne me een | Ga Aree sO (1.246) OOl=G6 2 (spatq , Lots , ) OrTOWwOD puery Gece Com oS Go "CG “6G. G (Cane LEG eS [E “SlGe Se 2B Ge era etiam le 49 mC ahd a Gc =e ia io (L°G6) G66 ~ 4 (2 270U700fF oes ‘spatq ,U9ets , ) (Gime ie Ge Nei “GORE WO Ne 9A MI Le 22 WG (LE LG) SO-GB. 8 (ORG) ce Jets “GuGe Mere SG te 22 (LeZG) COMO 8 erlqepty G2 GC de Ga Coe 3S On Comm AO g Scam ul G6 L SOSNOTIOTS SoTL (L° 8a) GoW ee ce ee Ge emo” Gencie 12 age teen so ee y, Sic e =e 19) (6°06) 86-98 (CECA ig AMER IL epee Gate ge ae Cade cease at, mace Sec amar) (8°16) 66-16 Tessesepew zequnu (1 2a40U400 J 90s) usuTNg) TEM, OL (oe TIE) SIL Koil (O°SOL) LO1-ZOL (OPAL) Seo! Cae eles weal (6°SLL) Ghil=eiE orowoyjg puery 91 GL requnu (2°17) ZOl-Gol (Z.2O {HE} SI eyo! Ol OD ILI Ol. "OL (eo), Ol htorovrt Cero) Albeo zrequnu SUT M StTSUOTZeOSesepeM Soj,odrsdAY jo sorZoOWTTTtm ut szUoWeINseoW FO 9TqeL dik GL eTew oTeuls J eoTew eaTeue J eTeuw aTews F eTeu eTeuwse fy eTeu oaTeus F oTeuw *SUOTEq O04 AT}ZO9XLTIOO woes AoyA etTeymM pooe,td ote 4ynq ‘pexesun 919M OTOUM & Se Tets19zeW OY UL SUSWTOSedS Moy VW "(4x04 20s) unesny UsStzZtag oy UT TeTtezZeu uO ATUTeW poseq SoINSTJ 944 O01 PEeppe Useq eaey ‘StTtieg ‘eTTeinieN e1TTOYSTH,p TeCUOTZEN wnesnw eu UT SSOTOWOD 949 YNOoOYSsNOTyy worfZ Seuo pernoToo AeiF# gi go pue ‘(zzz :G8gl FeTeISNO YP SprITeMpg-eUTTW ST4IzSOaTATed "H go odAQ 944 SUT PNT OUT )/ OTOWOD puery worry suowtoeds peanoToo usets Jeu,ZINI 4.USTAE IOyJ soins ty *seTTeyoAes oy fO STIZSOITSseIO “WH *Ssatoods Tey{Z0uUe 04 SuTSuOTeq “Sires ipiscsitheporein of) Wawel suelsbrear Weg Wiero)a joewinloypOs) wees) i) Sas Crick) yrcleKoyn uo YcsnouizTe ‘(99 >O096L uosueg ) eseud anotoo e AtTetow sdeyrzed *‘spatq peanotToo usedts Aq sopnytyTe Toyusty 4e pooetTdet oq pue ‘searte [Te1SeOO 04 OTOWOD puerTy UO POUT yuOd eq Aew ‘SspueTST 1TOeyAZO 947 [Te uo ssoyy OF ZeTtuts ‘spitq pernotToo Asis [TewaIoON “*zZ Tis ou UO SiopLrArtp cl} = 70 4uLod ous {oO surddrps fo AZTTIqQtssod 94} SuTZeUTUITTS ‘TTNys 94 wWoTy Ue OINSTJ 9}eINTD0e AT}USAXSTSUOD o1OW Peso Vice cit (i CLOUT lL Ss WOLEeLOr dnt OO peoolVOUudUBUE [oO SSeq wor, pounseoy ~~ Gace mee =e 6G cr fie Neate 7 OL €2> 6) G6—68 = *9 (ORCO)NoOl-cOl = 6 | soreuics Glee) CGeate ao corte CO Glee) 1e i oS Cl? 26) LOl=Le #2. (oy Seale S)) Me JE) ee teXo| Bewaey oTeu 2737 0ACW GiGi 7a ceo te Teng ence wea Oe were wege | 26 (L-O6)@ 76-99 = =S (2290) > St=GOl= 6 = goTenay Ge atic CC aa CYNE Gh tite tiles © lve “Ge eTeu TTSUOoW mice oC a cuge, \G (GeGe)Re6-66_ ot (OL OO OLl—-00 i smoLemar 10 477), specimens collected in the first three months of the year are often so worn in plumage as to be useless in making sub-—- specific comparisons. The name H. m. parvirostris has been applied to the Comoro birds, which (the 'sreen' birds apart, see table) are somewhat paler, less bluish in tone than nominate madagascariensis, although the difference is not strongly marked. H. m. rostratus of Aldabra is characterised by a brownish wash on the mantle and flanks. The specimen collected by Nicoll on Grande Glorieuse, on 10 March, is heavily worn on the underparts. However, it is an a faurly tresh dress onthe mantle a hneinemris none of the brownish tone of rostratus, and it can be matched with many Madagascar specimens. Abbott's male, collected 20 January, and two females, collected on 18 January, are in worn dress and are molting, both wings and body. The few fresh feathers on the mantle, however, show no sign of the brownish tone, although there is a slight brownish tone on the flanks of all three. But it is not so pronounced as in rostratus, and the three can be matched with individual specimens from Madaga- Seat. To conclude, there does not appear to be any real justif- teation for recognising eH. en. (eOvers wiikey ts es Const cleed a synonym of nominate madagascariensis. Mr. Wagstaffe and Dr. Watson agree with this decision. Benson is most grateful to them for their advice. Cisticola cherina Madagascar Grass-—Warbler Benson drew Jouanin's attention to the likelihood that he would find a grass warbler in the Iles Glorieuses. This proved correct, for Jouanin duly found it abundant on Grande Glorieuse, as also did G. E. Watson. Beamish reports that the largest number seen on Grande Glorieuse in one day was approximately thirty. The birds were most numerous around the airfield at the south end of the island, and in degraded vegetation in the centre. During his visit to the north of the island Salvan saw none at all, and suggests that it is restricted mainly to the south, including the airfield. However at the time of his visit a strong wind was blowing, so that the birds might have been overlooked. Beamish found them usually in pairs, and thought them rather more timid than those which he saw on West North Island in the Cosmoledo Atoll, and on Astove. Frddrich erro- neously identified this warbler as Nesillas typica, another widespread Madagascar species. There is no record from the Iles Glorieuses prior to 1970-71. it asovirtually certain that Gaere has been a colonisation subsequent to Nicoll's visit in 1906, since so competent an observer could scarcely have overlooked I Be It is no less sure that a small insectivorous species such as this could not have been deliberately introduced by man, although his activities may have favoured its establishment. In Madagascar, which must be the source of the colonisation, C. cherina frequents ‘grasslands ... and other cultivated land' S (Rand 1936: Kg), 11 Cisticola cherina has also colonised Cosmoledo and Astove (Benson 1970a, 1970b). Vesey-FitzGerald (1940) found it abund- anry on botn these atolls in 1937, but unfortunately there are no earlier comprehensive ornithological accounts to help deter- mine when it might have originally arrived. Benson & Penny (1971: 120) 479) suggest that it may eventually colonise Aldabra and Assumption. It is possible that it has already colonised Remire in the Amirantes, where Stoddart & Poore (1970c) thought they saw and heard it. Five specimens from Grande Glorieuse are available, some particulars for which are as follows (measurements are in millimetres): Paris Museum merits Tr. Ne. Apparent Culmen 1971 sex Wing Tail from base 651 male 50 LO 12 653 male 50 42 12 654 male 52 hO 11 650 female ri) 28 10 652 female 7) yy oles Specimen 651 was collected on 2 November 1970, the remain- der on 18 April 1971. None was sexed at the time of collecting, but wing-lengths suggest sexing as above, in accordance with the figures in Benson (1970a). Numbers 651 and 654 are considered to be adults in worn summer (breeding) dress; the remainder, rusty above and on the flanks, juveniles. Like Cosmoledo and Astove specimens, there is no evidence that they are subspecif-— ically separable from Madagascar C. cherina which iS monotypic. From its measurements, specimen 650 appears to be not fully grown, the tail being especially short. It was probably from an egg laid not earlier than the previous month, i.e. in March. Other evidence of breeding comes from Beamish, who reports a nest with three eggs seen in May 1971. Benson (1970a) reports breeding activity on Cosmoledo and Astove in March, and indic-— ates that the breeding season of C. cherina may be more exten-— Sive than that of the related juncidis in south-central Africa. Corvus albus Pied Crow One was seen on Grande Glorieuse by Bourliére on 28 August 1970, and a couple by Jouanin on 2 November 1970. Beamish reports that three or four were seen on every visit, around or perched on high Casuarina trees in abandoned cultivation at the north end of the island. Coppinger (1883) noted it (as '"Mada-— gascar crow'). Abbott (field notes) found the crow ‘plentiful on Gloriosa where they are very destructive to the eggs of the boobies and other birds.' Nicoll (1906, 1908) saw a few, and was told that it was resident. Although no nest has been record— ed, probably it does breed in small numbers. Even on Aldabra, where it is believed that there are between 50 and 100 individ- uals, few nests have been found (they are easy to see), perhaps because breeding takes place only at infrequent intervals (Benson & Penny 1971: 484-487). Corvus albus is well known to be strongly commensal with man, Scavenging around his habitations. It is therefore unlikely to have inhabited the Iles Glorieuses before his advent. Cop- pinger did not see it on Ile du Lys, which was uninhabited by man, but did see it on Grande Glorieuse, where there was a population of 29 humans, and collected a specimen (Sharpe 1884, as C. scapulatus). Benson & Penny (lige: Gila ) could not find any variation in this wide ranging species, and took cognisance of a Gloriosa specimen (in fact the one collected by Coppinger). As they suggest, there is probably some inter-island gene-flow; the crows' habit of soaring and riding on up-—draughts may take them from one island to another. Zosterops maderaspatana Madagascar White-eye Jouanin reports that the white-eye was seen on Grande Glorieuse by all observers, Beamish that it occurred in all parts of the island investigated. The largest number reported by the latter as seen at one time was a flock of 25 feeding on ripe fruit in abandoned cultivation near the north coast, al- though it was not common in the dense scrub in the central zones. It seemed to prefer the larger trees, and any of these in flower or fruit would be frequented invariably by a few white-eyes. This and the sunbird Nectarinia sovimanga are undoubtedly the two most plentiful species of land bird to-day; Abbott (field notes) specifically states that the white-eye was the commonest land bird during his visit. It is curious that white-eye and sunbird should be able to thrive on so small an island as Grande Glorieuse. In contrast to N. sovimanga, which is common, Z. maderaspatana is uncommon on Menai Island, the only island in the Cosmoledo Atoll from which it has been recorded, and on Astove, and is unknown on Assumption (Benson 1970a, 1970b; Stoddart et al. 1970). On the much larger Aldabra, Z. maderas— patana is the most plentiful land bird after N. sovimanga (Benson & Penny 1971: 497). a Sharpe (1884) lists a specimen of Z. maderaspatana collect-— ed by Coppinger, evidently from Ile du Lys (Coppinger 1883), although he also saw it on Grande Glorieuse. Abbott thought it the commonest land bird (Ridgway 1896), as did Nicoll (1906, 1908), both agreeing substantially with the recent observations. Ridgway (1894) named the four specimens collected by Abbott Z. m. gloriosae, but was not fully convinced that this was just-— ified as he had only one Madagascar specimen for comparison. us) Moreau (1957: 416), using the six specimens collected by Nicoll, could not separate them from the yellowest ones from Madagascar (from drier areas), and placed both Madagascar and Gloriosa birds with Z. m. maderaspatana (see also pp. 393, 397). Moreau does however mention that most of the Gloriosa specimens have a little yellow wash on the grey belly, and that an immature female had most of the underparts washed with gamboge, together with a golden tinge on the lores. Measurements (p. 428) also show no difference. Benson (1969) was unable to separate either Gloriosa or Astove specimens from Z. m. maderaspatana, although the latter were the greener of the two series, matching those from the more humid parts of Madagascar. Incidentally, he sep- arated the population of Menai Island, Cosmoledo, as Z. m. menaiensis, but later (1970a) thought that the difference claimed might have been due merely to immersion in alcohol. Particular interest attaches to two of the three known Menai specimens in that they have the green of the upperside partially replaced by grey. A watch should be kept for the occurrence of further such individuals. One unsexed specimen was collected on Grande Glorieuse on 18 April 1971. It is not in good condition. Its measurements are within the ranges as given by Moreau and by Benson, i.e. it nase wine! 57.0 bas iv 37. 5, ‘culmen: from base: 14 mm: Watson has re- examined Abbott's specimens, measurements of which are: Wing Ake PS Culmnen’ from ibaisic 2 males Bi oe DD Be, Diced 18.5, one broken 2 females 56... 59 B5 L316. 5 VB Be These figures too are similar to Moreau's and Benson's. Watson finds that these four specimens are similar in colour to those collected in Madagascar by Abbott at Andrangoloaka and TImahatsara (see Richmond 1897: 693) and three by H. G. Deignan at Ambatosoratra, although three collected by Deignan at Didy and Périnet are darker and greener. Following Moreau (1957: 397) all these birds must be known as Z. m. maderaspatana, although if one wishes to use finer divisions only the Didy and Périnet birds would be so known, and the remainder (including of course those from the Tles Glorieuses) as Z. m. ampotakae. Mita sSOnmtmere wns, the absurdity that in!’ contrast ™ to) those yan the Iles Glorieuses, Astove birds are nominate maderaspatana (as per Benson 1969). It is surely wise to follow Moreau (loc. feat) Mir nominiat bei. anc ise Only “the Jone) name shor all Vote tines birds, i.e. Z. m. maderaspatana, for the reasons explained by him. Nectarinia sovimanga, Souimanga Sunbird The relative abundance of the sunbird and Zosterops maderaspatana, both on Grande Glorieuse and in the Aldabra Archipelago, has been discussed above. Jouanin reports it as ’ 14 seen on Grande Glorieuse by all observers, Beamish as common and widespread on flowering trees all over the island. Many old nests were seen, usually at a height of about 2 metres, in the outer branches of bushes. Frappaz (1820, 1824) mentions 'colibris' on Ile du Lys, and was presumably referring to this species. Coppinger (1883) saw a sunbird on both Ile du Lys and Grande Glorieuse. Almost certainly it was this species, although Sharpe (1884) does not mention any specimen. Abbott (in Ridgway 1896) found it common, and states that 'A very few were nesting'; he collected a nest and an egg 25 January. This is the only def- inate, necord of an occupsied nest... Nacols (1906) Sipehic es) qwelateiie lic the time of his! visit, (in Manch)) ait was not) an Gites eauislbeauis em and that it kept aillmost ‘entirely. tomcoconut sires (he states that he collected two males, but actually they are females, accordingly lacking any metallic feathering). During his visit in October, Salvan saw no nests atv alll.) > Probably, as) ons Aldabra (Benson & Penny 1971: 491), egg-laying occurs at least from August to’ March. "The same authors record an jeclapse) desis yam the male on both Aldabra and Assumption, and probably this applies in the Iles Glorieuses too. A female was collected on 3 November 1970 and two males on 18 April 1971. The males have only a little metallic feathering, and only the odd red feather on the chest. They must either be immature or adults in an eclipse dress. Using also the two females collected by Nicoll and Abbott's material (four males, two of which, collected on 18 and 20 January, are in a metallic dress with red chest-band, such as is worn in the breeding season), the following are some comparative figures (in milli- oS Wing Tail Culmen from base Madagascar 14 males 51-56 (54.1) SMO (36.6) 20. Fa2ly (22-11) 14 females 47-52 (49.4) QS=S5; (Bil 01 )) 1921.5 (20.5) Iles Glorieuses 6 males 5457 (55.2) BIO) (9542) 2-23, (224) females 49, 49, 50 30, Sl. B32 19, 19.5, one broken The Madagascar figures are from Benson (1967: 85), from which Nicoll's two females have now been transferred to those for the Iles Glorieuses. The two series of figures do not indicate any appreciable difference. Nor does there seem to be any difference in colour except that Watson finds that Abbott's two Iles Glorieuses males in metallic dress, compared with others such also collected by Abbott at Mahanoro and on the River Sakale, in eastern Madagascar (see Richmond 1897: 693), and by H. G. Deignan at Marovoay, Didy, Périnet, and Ambatosoratra, also in Madagascar, have the red chest—band slightly broader and the black on the abdomen slightly less extensive. But Watson finds that there is enough variation for there to be no ID justification for bestowing a name on the Iles Glorieuses birds. Thus we follow all previous workers, including Rand (1967) in placing them with the nominate subspecies. By contrast, there is a very well marked form on Cosmoledo and Astove (N. s. buc- henorum), and others on Assumption (abbotti) and Alildabra (aldabrensis); see most recently Benson & Penny (1971: 493). Watson finds that material collected by Abbott supports the validity of these last two names (Abbott Glau! inoig AWalSsalig Cosmoledo or Astove). Foudia madagascariensis Madagascar Fody In 1970-71 the Madagascar Fody was widely dispersed on Grande Glorieuse both in forest and in bushes and trees in more open areas near the airfield. Beamish notes that it was in the largest numbers at the north end of the island, among Casuarina trees there. He counted over 40 birds om each of two visits in November and December 1970. Two specimens were collected, one by Jouanin on 2 November 1970 with wing-length 66 mm, and one by Barau on 18 April 1971 with wing-length 60 mm. Comparison with the figures in Moreau (1960: 35) and Benson (1960: 98) suggests that the first is a male, the second a female. Both authors give a minimum length for males of 64 mm. The apparent male does not show any red coloration, although it is likely that it was about to assume the breeding dress. Salvan noted that four males had assumed about 50% of the breeding dress on 29 October 1970, while Beamish found that males were assuming it in November, but by the early May following it had almost completely disappeared (as has been noted on some other islands, see for example Benson 1960, some males were orange rather than red in colour). Jouanin, on 2-4 November 1970, found some males just starting to come into breeding dress (and incidentally around the New Meteorological Station behaving like sparrows, Passer domesticus). These observations accord quite well with those of Rand (1936: 481), who found no birds in the red plumage in south-eastern Madagascar during June to October, but was told that it was assumed in November. In the Comoros Benson records birds assuming it in late October, and others still in full breeding dress in mid-June. This is yet another species which is evidently a recent colonizer. It is not mentioned by Abbott (in Ridgway 1896), who was on the Iles Glorieuses during the breeding season in January when red males would have been conspicuous. The same applies to Nicoll (1906, 1908), who was there in March, thus still in the breeding season. Benson found it to be a recent arrival in the Comoros, and thought that this might have been iMmarded) by man, Since he could find no evidence of at beings kept as a cage-bird. The earliest record he gives is of a specimen collected by Kirk on Moheli. This would have been about 1860, though colonisation of Anjouan and Grand Comoro was probably much later, since Krishnasamy Naidoo did not collect this fody on either of these two islands in 1906-07. Probably, as in the Comoros, colonisation of the Iles Glorieuses has been unaided 16 by man, although in both areas man's activities may have fav-—- oured it. Thus in the Comoros Benson found it common in scrub-= land and cultivation. It is common on Farquhar Atoll, but while one report has it that it as ‘native, another ts thats anewes ‘introduced! (Stoddart & Poore 1970a). In any case, introduc- tions to some other islands further to the north, such as the Chagos Archipelago and the Seychelles (see for example Watson et al. 1963) must have been deliberately effected by man. There is still no record from the Aldabra Archipelago, unless an old record of a 'Sourin'! (? Serin) from Cosmoledo, attributed by Benson (1970a) to Serinus mozambicus, was in reality of a female F. madagascariensis. "Serin' is in fact a Seychellois name for Foudia spp. In any case, whatever the species may have been, it appears no longer to exist there. B. Migratory species, and species of uncertain status There have been so few and infrequent bird observers in the Iles Glorieuses that the following list of migrants is undoubtedly incomplete. Thus almost any of those recorded by Benson & Penny (1971: 512-521) on Aldabra might be expected, as visitors from the palaearctic or on passage between Madagascar (breeding area) and Africa (wintering area), although lost intra- African migrants such as Porzana marginalis, Striped Crake, are obviously of less likely occurrence than on Aldabra, much nearer to) Aterarcar. Milvus migrans Black Kite Ridgway (1896, as M. aegyptius ) TeOOuaslss WING Sos Csiisias ~ although evidently Abbott saw it. Nicoll (1908) states that 'Now and again a black kite Milvus migrans was observed sailing overhead. ! There is no record of it seen during 1970-71. Benson & Penny (1971: 514) discuss a few records from Aldabra, for August-October and December-—January, and conclude that it occurs there only as a stray. This must also be the case on the Iles Glorieuses, Eurystomus glaucurus Broad—billed Roller Ridgway (1896) gives the same comment as for the last Species. There is no further record. Benson & Penny (1971: 517) discuss a few records from Aldabra and Cosmoledo for October-December, considered to be of birds returning to Mad- agascar to breed (E. Be gelaucurus ), and one from Aldabra for 25 March, considered to be post—breeding (also this subspecies). Doubtless it can be seen periodically on the Iles Glorieuses too. Abbott would have seen it in January, either very late or very early. The breeding records in Rand (1936: 417) indicate egg-laying in October and November, while Benson & Pitman (1962) record an oviduct egg in November. Wy *Terpsiphone mutata Madagascar Paradise Flycatcher Bourliére saw a 'paradise flycatcher' on Grande Glorieuse on 28 August 1970. Quite independently, Beamish has provided some further records of an ‘unidentified paradise flycatcher:'! "A very reliable observer saw at close quarters on 12 November 1970, near the west coast of the island, a bird closely resembling Pic eae omens iphone COrvina, at rest an the lower branches of a tree. The observer, a former resident of La Digue in the Seychelles, the omy stand om which ©. cornvina still supvaves,, was already well acquainted with that species. A Similar bird was seen again two weeks later. Despite an intensive search, no further observation was made." Gm Morton. phe observer, told G. E. Watson, Ghat, the bard had wholly rufous underparts, characteristic of the Madagascar species and unlike the white-bellied Seychelles form. Later Lindblad visitors to the island, including G. E. Watson, were alerted to watch for the bird, but none was seen. One possible interpretation of these records is that there is a very small BestGentL, population of T. mutata on Grande Glorieuse. If so, it must represent a recent colonisation from Madagascar, since there is no earlier record. The November records would appear to fall within the breeding season, since Rand (1936: 433) records eggs in Madagascar in November, and males with enlarged testes in October-January, while Benson (1960: 74) gives various records for the Comoros indicating egg-laying in October. AIlt- ernatively, the observations might refer to one and the same rmnodivadual, whieh was either a vagrant or a migrant T. mutata from Madagascar which had failed to return. We are not aware that this species has any regular movements, although 7. viridis in southern Africa is well known to be a long distance migrant (see for example McLachlan & Liversidge 197O)) 2 Riparia riparia Sand Martin Ridgway (1896) records a male specimen collected on 29 January by Abbott who states in his notes that several were seen but that it was not common. Benson & Penny (1971: 520) also mention a few records from Aldabra and Madagascar (its main wintering area is in Africa). Probably it can be seen in the Iles Glorieuses occasionally. *Nectarinia notata Green Sunbird Beamish reports that a number of observers, including Dr. Frddrich (1972), Dr. Backhaus and himself, saw a sunbird larger than N. sovimanga, several times in association with that species for comparison. It was a yellowish green colour, res-— embling in this respect a Zosterops. The large size suggests N. notata, the only other species of sunbird also found in Madagascar, while the colour suggests a female, although the female of notata is not yellowish as in Zosterops, being brown- ish olive above, dingy yellow streaked dark brown below. As with Terpsiphone mutata, this is a problematical case. At all events, like that species, N. notata has colonised the Comoros, and could also the Iles Glorieuses. C. Species of purely hypothetical occurrence *Dryolimnas cuvieri White-throated Rail No evidence has been traced of this species ever having inhabited the Iles Glorieuses. Coppinger (1883) found no sign of Ile du Lys ever having been inhabited (by man), but does not mention it either there or on Grande Glorieuse. This is less Sunprisine So far as the Vativer, as) concerned since Memsimcwe!s that there were 29 people living on the island, and moreover that it was so infested with rats that it was impossible to raise any vegetables. However, he does also mention the presence of a ‘brown rat' on Tle du Lys, and these as well as cats would be inimical to the rail (Penny & Diamond 1971: 534). Nicoll (1908) made particular inquiries about the rail, but obtained no information. Nevertheless, in view of its former existence apparently throughout the Aldabra Archipelago (ae now survives only on parts of Aldabra, Penny & Diamond 1971: 529) it is strange if it never existed on the Iles Glorieuses. Pos- sibly some old account of its former existence will eventually be brought to light, such as has recently been revealed of its occurrence on Astove in 1836 (Stoddart 1971). Ze Shore | bascds The following species were listed among others by Dupont (1907) without supporting documentation: Butorides striatus (as B. atricapillus), Green-backed Heron Numenius arquata, Curlew Actitis hypoleucos, Common Sandpiper ibienbiivers Jimtioibioel, Waliniblle Sigatane Charadrius leschenaultii (as Aegialitis ROO IOS )) Greater Sand Plover Probably all of these do occur, although this should be confirmed. Thus Butorides striatus occurs throughout the Aldabra Archipelago (Benson & Penny 1971: 421). It would be interesting to know whether the subspecies is Be Ss. pnuveubereut, as in Madagascar, or crawfordi, as on Aldabra and Assumption (or perhaps even both, as mere strays). The four others speertes have all been recorded from Aldabra (Penny 1971). Indeed the last named occurs throughout the Aldabra Archipelago (see also Stoddart et al. 1970; Benson 1970a, 1970b), and is surely reg- ular as a Visitor. Bubulevs yrbiis, Cattle Benet. occurs Luroush— out the Aldabra Archipelago (actually inland), and breeds on Aldabra (see the same references), and must occur occasionally Wy on Gloriosa. Probably all of the species recorded by Penny (1971) from Aldabra occur, at least occasionally. In particular, the extensive sandy beaches of Grande Glorieuse must surely be frequented regularly at the right season by Crocethia alba, Sanderling. The species which now follow may be considered as mostly of reasonably definite occurrence: Ardea cinerea Grey Heron The Grey Heron was evidently seen by Abbott, since it is listed by Ridgway (1896), with the bare comment 'No specimens.'! There is no further record. Egretta garzetta Little Egret Beamish reports that white phase Little Egrets were seen flying singly over the north-west corner of Grande Glorieuse on! 6) Apral (observed fox Coe Bye Watson) and 19 June 1971--the only records. Apparently it is no more than a vagrant, although E. g. dimorpha occurs throughout the Aldabra Archipelago (Benson & Penny 1971: 421), as well as in Madagascar. *Ardeola ralloides Squacco Heron Jouanin identified a Squacco Heron on Tle du Lys on 2 November 1970. There is no other record, nor from the Aldabra Archipelago, although A. idae, Madagascar Squacco Heron, well known as an off-season migrant from Madagascar to eastern Africa, breeds on Aldabra (Benson & Penny 1971: 431). There Peds hes necordnor AS rallolides from the Comoros (Benson 1960: 34). Except when A. idae is in white breeding dress, these two species are not easily distinguished. Numenius phaeopus Whimbrel Abbott evidently saw the Whimbrel (Ridgway 1896) on Grande Glorieuse in January and Nicoll (1906) mentions it as seen in company with Dromas ardeola in March. Bourliére saw it on Grande Glorieuse on 28 August 1970, and Jouanin on Ile du Lys on 2 November 1970. Salvan saw two on Grande Glorieuse on 29 October 1970. Limosa lapponica Bar-tailed Godwit Beamish reports that six godwits were seen at a distance of only about 14 metres, feeding in the pond (called ‘lagoon! by Battistini & Cremers 1972, figure 3) in the north-west of Grande Glorieuse, 12 November 1970. Tringa nebularia Greenshank Abbott may have seen the Greenshank (Ridgway 1896), but his notes record only 'Totanus sp.' Salvan saw an individual 20 of either this or T. stagnatilis, Marsh Sandpiper, on Grande Glorieuse, 29 October 1970. ihe 2S aig Glicl in@wy Ce@ILIL, aii wes not possible to decide to which of the two it belonged. The former seems much more likely. Thus on Aldabra Penny (i971) records T. nebularia as regular, but does not even mention stagnatilis. Arenaria interpres Turnstone Sharpe (1884) records a Turnstone specimen collected by Coppinger. Abbott evidently saw it (Ridgway 1896). Bourliére saw it on 28 August 1970, and Jouanin on 2 November 1970. Salvan saw a few on Grande Glorieuse on 29 October 1970. Dromas ardeola Crab Plover Abbott evidently saw the Crab Plover in January (Ridgway 1896). Nicoll (1906) saw a flock an) March.) Jouan tne saw elt Or Tlie du Lys on 2 November 1970. Penny (1971) HOUNCG Sn EvOm ema common visitor to Aldabra presumably from the population that breeds on the coast of Somalia during March to October. 3. Sea birds Salvan saw an individual of a Pachyptila sp., Prion, ‘fishing for ten minutes) azound™ hus "Share i>) ue moder laeon Casuals Gilomlouse, 29 Ocwoloer IY7/O. Wawsoim wu il. (1963: a) record P. forsteri (=vittata), desolata and turtur from the western Indian Ocean, and Benson (1970c) records yet another SiDSCiLeS, es loeilcingral, IseuliLeyw (1968: 504) saw prions, species indeterminate, on six occasions, south of 10 S in the western Indian Ocean during June and July 1964, and refers to some other recent records. In the absence of a specimen it is impossible to be sure which species Salvan saw. There is no definite record of Phaethon Iepturus, Whate— tariled Tropichird, Yon Gloriosa but at is eikeily, stor ocetis since it is common on Aldabra (Diamond 1971), and it is also known from Cosmoledo (Bayne et al. 1971a). Watson et al. (1963, based on the discussion in Gibson-Hill 1950: 68), suggest that Sula abbotti, Abbott's Booby, possibly used to breed on Gloriosa as well as Assumption, where it has not been seen since about 1926, Abbott (1894), in a preliminary report from the islands, cites 'a booby, which seems to be peculiar to the island. They breed in large numbers upon the 'fouche! (also called 'fig' by Abbott in notes with egg specimens and possibly the 'Ficus sp.' of Battistini & Cremers 1972) trees, in company with frigates and common boobies /probably Ss. sula/.' Abbott fails to mention S. abbotti in his discussion of Assumption Island in the same paper. Possibly there may have been some confusion in his letter from the Seychelles, or he may have been referring to the dark phase of S. sula (see below). The original label on the type of S. abbotti shows it was definitely collected on Assumption. There is no certain record of Hresatalaniel, 221 Lesser FPrigatebird, but its possible occurrence is mentioned Detfowmindeie yp minor. Sterna allbitrons, Littile) Dern, is listed without documentation by Dupont (1907, Bis) Sc minuta), and appa- rently again by him as S. balaenarum (in fact unknown in the Indian Ocean, and breeding on the coasts of south-western Africa). The Little Tern probably occurs, since Diamond (1971) records non-breeding flocks as common on (LGETSEE in January- March, and Milon (1950) saw it in south-western Madagascar in Pe pemben=May , Gysis alba, Fairy Tern, is also likely, even though it only appears on the undocumented list of Dupont (1907) It breeds on Aldabra (Diamond NOMA iy and probably on Assumption (Stoddart, et al. 1970). The occurrence of the majority of the species which follow may be accepted as definite: Phaethon rubricauda Red-tailed Tropicbird A female Red-tailed Tropicbird and four eggs collected by Abbott January 23 and 24 (partly in Ridgway 1896) appear to be the only record from the island. The nests, containing a’ single ere each were onsthe “eround under a bush, generally inj.a, thick bit,of. jungle. ! Sula dactylatra Blue-faced Booby Coppinger (1883) found 'gannets' abundant and breeding on Tie du Lys, possibly this species (se dactylatra is more like the Gannet S. bassana in colour than are two other local species, S. sula and " leucogaster). Abbott collected a female and an egg on Tle du Lys 1 February reporting that it bred on the ground in considerable numbers (Ridgway 1896, as S. cyanops). There is no later record. Breeding has also been reported from the Cosmoledo Atoll, where Diamond (in Bayne et al. 1970a) saw at least 200 pairs and five occupied nests on Wizard Island in March 1968. It also used to breed on Assumption, but probably no longer did so even in 1937 (Stoddart et al. 1970). Mention must also be made of the information by Frappaz (1820, 1824) from Ile du Lys. In his first account he writes of sea-—birds ('Des fous: ils ont le bec long et pointu, les narines latérales, les pattes palmées et la serre du milieu dentelée comme une scie; ils sont blancs et gris.') which having probably never previously seen men allowed such a close approach that several were killed with sticks. Some females were brooding on a hillock in shelter from the wind. There were two eggs to aRelubren sbi inthe cease jo, those which hadjhatched,, onidiyjone young. The second account is almost identical except that the birds are deseribed as 'blancs et bruns', not ‘blancs et gris.'! The birds were apparently nesting on the ground, so that it is unlikely that they were S. sula, which only rarely so nests (Nelson 1969: 358) and furthermore is recorded below as nesting ie) he) in trees on Grande Glorieuse. Most probably they were S. dacty- latra, as recorded by Abbott from Tle du Lys. In both accounts Frappaz seems to indicate the predominant colour as white ('blane'), since it takes precedence. If the birds had been leucogaster, then brown ('brun' ) would surely have had priority. Moreover in the first account there is no mention of brown. Sula sula Red-footed Booby Abbott (original field notes, and in Ridgway 1896, as Se piscator) collected three male Red-footed Boobies and noted it as 'the most common species of booby on the Grand Glorieuse IESsilewavel 6: It was nesting on ‘Fouche! trees 5 to 7 metres above the ground, with trom tf to 20 nestseim amt ree met a Uineunciinem oss his visit to Grande Glorieuse in January, nests were being loosely constructed of sticks, and some already had eggs of which he collected sax. ~Nilcoll is not speci hic about sbiscedams when he was there in March. However he (1906: 691) collected a 'male breeding' and 'female immature,' and indicates that the birds were crowded in tree-tops in company with frigatebirds (1908: 102; photograph facing page 16) The latter at least had nests, apparently near the tops of the same trees (on Aldabra they commonly nest together, see Diamond 1971: 564). There is no record for 1970-71 even of the presence of any species of sulla. Thus the collony which flouni1shed)imPmAbboti Ss sand pNteortars times appears to have been extinguished. Visits in 1971 inclu- ded January and March, the months respectively of Abbott's and Nicoll's visits. Moreover, on Aldabra, Diamond (loc. csi) indicates laying peaks for S. sula in early November, cariy January and mid-March, as well as August-September, in 1967-68. In March 1968 Diamond (in Bayne et al. 1970a) also found eggs and young on Cosmoledo. hh Nicoll's male specimen was made by Grant & Mackworth-—Praed (1933) the type of a new species, Sula nicolli, characterised by having the normal white plumage of S. sula replaced by brown, only the rump, tail, vent and thighs being white. But Murphy (1936: 864) was surely justified in casting doubt on the validity of nicolli, which he regarded as a mere colour phase of Sula sula, and in any case the name is probably antedated by S. autumnalis (see also Nicoll 1906: 690-691). Nicoll found that at least 90% of the Gloriosa population was in this brown phase. According to Ridgway (1896: 524) 'only the gray, white-tailed plumage of this species seems to have been seen on Gloriosa! by Abbott. On the other hand he had already visited Aldabra and Assumption before arriving on Gloriosa, and was therefore familiar with the white phase of S. sula which he presumably thought of as the ‘common booby! (Abbott 1894: Zoi 8 TRhe field abet vonwesss son S. sula collected on Gloriosa reads 'Brown booby (Sula) with white Tail, '). has) "Capuchin (Ridgway 1896: 532) probably was the 'booby which seems peculiar to the island' (Abbott 1894: 764) rather than Sula abbotti as presumed by Gibson-Hill (1950: 68). On Aldabra, Diamond (1971) found only two dark adult S. 23 sula with white tails (one of them also with white scapulars), out of an estimated breeding population of 5000 pairs. Nelson (1969: 382) has discussed the possible significance of the phases, and suggests that there may be a difference in hunting habits. It is unfortunate that the problem cannot be pursued further in the Iles Glorieuses, since this interesting popula- tion is apparently extirpated. *Sula leucogaster Brown Booby Nicoll (1906, 1908) mentions 'one or two pairs' of Brown Boobies on Roches Vertes, but gives no details. It is believed to breed on Cosmoledo (Diamond in Bayne et al. 1907a: 50), but on Aldabra is no more than a regular visitor (Diamond 1971: 569). There is no further record from the Iles Glorieuses. Fregata minor Great Frigatebird Coppinger (1893: 238) found that frigatebirds were abundant and bred on Ile du Lys, and that they were also numerous all over Grande Glorieuse. He did not distinguish between the two species, B. minor and F. ariel. ‘Abbott (1894 and in Ridgway 1896) records frigatebirds as breeding on Grande Glorieuse in the 'Fouche!' trees with boobies but he did not collect any specimens. In his field notes for Aldabra and Assumption Islands, he records under F. minor (22 ariel), "Some appear to be the greater frigate but there seems to be all gradations of size between the two... Also plentiful on Gloriosa.' Nicoll (1906, as F. aquila) collected F. minor. The specimen is a male, and had a brilliant red pouch. It is considered to be correctly identified, since the wing-length is as much as 615, with culmen (from base) 109, (exposed) 103 mm. Nicoll (1906) found that frigatebirds were breeding in numbers on Grande Glorieuse (on 10-11 March), in the tallest trees of the island. "Many were sitting on their nests and on the tree-tops with their scarlet pouches extended, some were flying about with extended pouches, while others were in the air with the pouch collapsed.'! Nicoll (1908) gives a similar account. Although there is no mention of the contents of any nest, the recording of extended pouches seems indicative of males about to breed. This is in contrast to Aldabra where in 1967-68 Diamond (1971: 565) found that F. minor and ariel lay from June to December, with a concentration between August and October, the largest colony being a mixed one of the two species. Both species are said to breed also on Cosmoledo, but dates are not available (Diamond in Bayne et al. 1970a: 50). The only records of frigatebirds from the Iles Glorieuses in 1970-71 are from Salvan, Jouanin and Barau. Salvan saw one or possibly two F. minor circling around his ship off Grande Glorieuse on the afternoon of 29 October 1970. Jouanin saw an immature F. minor over Grande Glorieuse on 2 November 1970, and 2h two more such birds over Ile du Lys the following day. Barau saw five immature birds in April 1971. Lt aes sap pisalsdins sthat there are no observations of frigatebirds by the passengers of the Lindblad Explorer. It must be concluded that frigatebirds do not now feed habitually around the Iles Glorieuses, although the contrary might have been expected. It also appears that the breeding colony (with which S. sula may also have been associated) on Grande Glorieuse has been extirpated since Nicoll's visit. Coppinger (1883) found that both 'gannets' and frigatebirds were abundant and bred on Ile du Lys, but Jouanin is sure that this no longer applies. Except that it appears on the undocumented list of Dupont (1907), there is no record of pio yaniuely, Meesic er sires cones although it may well have formerly bred, in association with F. minor. Sterna sumatrana Black-naped Tern The Black-naped Tern was evidently seen by Abbott, since it is listed by Ridgway (1896, as S. melanauchen), with the bare comment 'No specimens.' There is no further record, al- though Diamond (1971: 561) thought there might be 7O pairs breeding on Aldabra, and it is also known from Cosmoledo and Assumption (Bayne et alls 197 Oa; ssivoddani jeu gare: 1970). Sterna fuscata Sooty Tern Abbott collected three Sooty Terns, two males on Grande Glorieuse and a female on Ile du Lys, 1 February, where he also collected 13 eggs (partly in Ridgway 1896, as S. fuliginosa). The egg data labels read 'breeds in vast numbers upon this islet' and the eggs are ‘laid upon bare sand, amongst grass or beneath shrubs.! Nicoll (1908) saw a few overhead on Roches Noires (Roches Vertes). On Ile du Lys he saw none at all, but from dried remains found he thought that there must be a large colony nesting at some time of the year. Arnoux (1950) writes of a 'trés importante colonie' on Ile du Lys on 5 April 1948. An accompanying photograph shows adults sheltering the eggs from the sun by their shadows. Milon (1950), evidently writing of the same colony, quotes an estimate by a Dr. Cachan of 200 pairs, all with eggs on 4 April 1948. On the late afternoon of 29 October 1970, from his ship lying 1.5 km north of Grande Glorieuse, Salvan saw at least 200 birds flying towards Ile du Lys. Four days later (2 November ) Jouanin found an enormous breeding colony on Ile du Lys. There was not a single egg. All the chicks were hatched and already of large size. The growth of chicks being very variable (Ash- mole 1963), it is impossible to determine precisely when the eggs had been laid, although it is probably that laying had commenced at the beginning of September. Two chicks were col- lected, the bigger of which regurgitated some little squids. 25 When Dr. Lyall Watson visited Ile du Lys in mid-December 1970 he found only an enormous number of dead chicks, possibly as many as 80,000. They were all almost fully fledged, and were thought to have been dead more than one month. Evidently there had been a major calamity after Jouanin's visit. Lyall Watson has suggested that a cyclone might have hit the island. However, Jouanin has made inquiries with regard to this possi- bility, through Barau, resident in Réunion. There was no meteor-= ological event between Jouanin's visit on 2 November and the mid- December following which could explain the disaster to the chicks. This is stated on the authority of M. Marcel Malik, directeur de la Météorologie Nationale & la Réunion, who is also patron of the Meteorological Station on Grande Glorieuse. Barau visited Ile du Lys on 18 April 1971, but got no evidence whatever of the birds' presence (although two days later Beamish saw 300 or 400 adults, either in the air near the island or resting on the sandspit at the western end). This is in contrast to the findings of Arnoux in April 1948. Possibly the reproductive cycle on Ile du Lys is not on an annual rhythm, albeit not necessarily on a nine and a half month cycle as on Ascension (Ashmole 1963). Milon's quoted estimate of 200 pairs in April 1948 may be quite unduly low. By contrast Arnoux writes of the colony being 'trés importante' without suggesting any figure. Jouanin did not have the time to visit the Roches Vertes in November 1970. But with his binoculars he made out large numbers of birds, wheeling like a cloud of mosquitos above the islets. They were too far away for it to be possible to deter- mine the species. However, on 18 April 1971, Barau found there 200 young Sterna fuscata of variable age, including some ten still in down to others much larger (yet in March 1906, Nicoll 1908: 104, merely saw a few birds overhead, and got no evidence of breeding). In the Aldabra Archipelago the species apparently breeds on Cosmoledo and Astove (Diamond im Baye vet yal 19 7/ Oa, 1970b), but no dates are available, although on islands further north in the western Indian Ocean breeding iS apparently seas- onal, during June-August inclusive (Vesey-FitzGerald 1941, and see also Ashmole 1963: 355). Salvan (1971) found some 5,500 pairs breeding on Nosy Dombala, an islet south of Tamatave, eastern Madagascar, 29 May 1971. About 30% had eggs, 70% chicks ased up to 15 days. Also (unpublished) he found a colony on Juan de Nova, in the Mozambique Channel, 2 November 1970, in which egg-laying had just started. Thus in 1970 the season on Juan de Nova was about two months later than it was on Ile du Lys (see Jouanin's observations above). Thalasseus bergii Crested Tern Abbott collected an adult Crested Tern in breeding dress Ridgway 1896, as Sterna bernsteini) on Grande Glorieuse. Nicoll 1906) states that he collected a specimen (in March) of Sterna 26 cantiaca (=S. sandvicensis), Sandwich Tern. Actually it is a specimen in breeding dress of Tf. bergid (see Benson 1960: 45). Salvan saw a flock of about 20 off Grande Glorieuse, 29 October 1970. It is possible that it breeds in the Iles Glorieuses. Diamond (1971) records breeding on Aldabra, with laying concen- tratedy an mili. ya Mason (1950) found a colony at Diego Suarez, northern Madagascar, in which eggs were laid in April. Salvan (1971) found a small colony containing eggs on Nosy Dombala, eastern Madagascar, 29 May 1971. Thalasseus bengalensis Lesser Crested Tern Abbott collected a male Lesser Crested Tern (in Ridgway 1896, as Sterna media) in non breeding dress and molting the primaries on 25 January on Grande Glorieuse. Salvan saw one or two fishing near his ship, ion the north side of GrandesGlomneuses 29 October 1970. Jouanin saw a flock of about 50 on a sandbank in the lagoon near Ile du Lys, 2 November 1970. It may be regu- lar as a non-breeder. Diamond (1971) records it as seen regu- larly as a winterer on Aldabra in January-April, and thought it might have been overlooked earlier in the season. Milon (1950) records it from Tuléar, south-western Madagascar, between Sep- tember and May, and it was common on Mayotte, in the Comoros, in February (Nicoll, in Benson 1960: 45). Anous stolidus Brown Noddy Nicoll (1908: 104) states that thousands of 'Noddy terns! were sitting on their eggs, most of them fresh (on Roches Vertes, 11 March). On Ile du Lys, 2 November 1970, Jouanin found two breeding colonies, each consisting of about 50 pairs. One colony was on the edge of the sea, on an ancient limestone cliff, some 3 metres above the level of the sea. The other was some 20 metres inland. There were all stages of development, from fresh eggs to young ready to fly. Barau saw no birds at all when he visited Ile du Lys and Roches Vertes on 18 April 1971. In comparison with Sterna fuscata, it seems that the breed-— ing season may be prolonged. On Aldabra Diamond (1971) found a few eggs in September-November, but records a peak of laying between early December and early March. DISCUSSION This section is confined to the more important and signif- icant points arising from the preceding one. Land birds The comprehensive discussion by Peake (1971) on the evolu- tion of terrestrial faunas in the western Indiwvan Ocean as not an excuse for failure to offer some comment on the composition 27 of the land avifauna of the Iles Glorieuses. Benson & Penny (1971: 421) drew up a list of species of land birds breeding on different islands in the Aldabra Archipelago. The first seven (herons etc.) would be under shore birds in the present paper, and so are excluded from the immediate discussion. Including species which have become extinct and those for which breeding cannot be assumed (actually only Corvus albus, on Cosmoledo and Astove), the totals are: land area sq. km* number of species Aldabra 5 hs Assumption 11 5 Cosmoledo 6 6 Astove 5 6 *from Peake (1971: 585) The chief source of colonisation is Madagascar, even though Benson & Penny (1971: 424) suggest that one or two of the species on Aldabra may be of direct Comoro origin. Never- theless, Aldabra, the most remote from Madagascar, is much the richest in species, having the following which are absent else- where in the archipelago and from the Iles Glorieuses: Falco newtoni, Madagascar Kestrel Alectroenas sganzini, Comoro Blue Pigeon Centropus toulou, Madagascar Coucal (GLE did formerly occur also on Assumption) Tyto alba, Barn Owl (extinct) Caprimulgus madagascariensis, Madagascar Nightjar Nesillas aldabranus, Aldabra Tsikirity Dicrurus aldabranus, Aldabra Drongo Foudia eminentissima, Red-headed Forest Fody The relative richness in species on Aldabra is related to its much greater land area, with more room for viable popula- tions. The area of Grande Glorieuse is 4 sq. km, with Ile du Lys much smaller, so that the total area for the Iles Glorieuses Cannot exceed 5 isqa km. At the time of Abbott's visit an 1693, there were only five land birds (exclusive of Gallus gallus which must have been introduced directly by man), i.e. Strep— topelia picturata, Hypsipetes madagascariensis, Corvus albus, Zosterops maderaspatana and Nectarinia sovimanga. This list can be compared with that for Astove, of similar area, and the nearest island in the Aldabra Archipelago to Madagascar (Gives 250 km to the northwest, Iles Glorieuses 180 km to the west- north-west; as per map of Africa and Madagascar by J. Bartho- lomew & Son, Edinburgh, 1966). Common to the two areas are all of these five species except the Hypsipetes, only known in the Archipelago from Aldabra. The other two from Astove are: Dryolimnas cuvieri, now believed extinct there. At present there is no evidence that it ever existed in the Iles Glorieuses. Ee) CO Cisticola cherina, which may have colonised Astove since the turn of the century, as it surely has the Iles Glorieuses. The Cosmoledo list is the same as that for Astove, and the circumstances in regard to the last two species are the | same. Turning now to the present, there has been a considerable change since Nicoll's visit in 1906. Nicoll was a competent observer, and although he spent only two days in the Iles Glorieuses his list is probably complete. He failed to find Streptopelia picturata, and it was possibly already extinct. It formerly occurred throughout the Aldabra Archipelago, but now survives only on Aldabra. Although Hypsipetes madagascar- iensis was found by Nicoll (in fact he saw only four), 15 as) very far from certain that it svaill survawes. On’ thier oliver hand, the following four species have become established: | Turnix nigricollis, Madagascar Buttonquail or Hemipode | Geopelia striata, Barred Ground-Dove Cisticola cherina, Madagascar Grass-—Warbler Foudia madagascariensis, Madagascar Fody | It seems that Turnix nigricollis and Geopelia striata | have been deliberately introduced by man. But this could hardly } be so for a tiny insectivorous species such as Cisticola cherina. | Ecological changes wrought by man must have favoured these colon- | isations. All four species are associated with grassland or cul- | tivation. In their conclusion Battistini & Cremers write that | the vegetation has been transformed, and that the number of plants has increased from 30 in 1893 to 48 in 1971, the influence of man being the main reason. There is only one record of Geo- pelia striata from the Aldabra Archipelago, from Cosmoledo in 1968. But Cisticola cherina is abundant on Astove and Cosmoledo, which it might have colonised from the Iles Glorieuses a little later. Foudia madagascariensis is at present unknown from the Aldabra Archipelago, though it may well reach it in due course. The ecology of Astove, Cosmoledo and Assumption, like that of Iles Glorieuses, has been much affected by man, in favour of all four of these species. The status of Zosterops maderaspatana and Nectarinia sovimanga appears to be much the same as in Abbott's and Nicoll's time, both still being abundant, as they are on the much larger Aldabra. But the former was perhaps always less so on Astove and Cosmoledo, and has never been recorded from Assumption. Thus the difference on the Iles Glorieuses, with no larger a land area, is remarkable. In 1882 Coppinger found Corvus albus on Grande Glorieuse, which had already been colon- ised by man, although neither crow nor man existed on Ile du Lys. This is yet another species which must owe its introduction indirectly to man. Benson & Penny (1971: 424) have drawn attention to a degree of endemism in the Aldabra Archipelago, even to species level on 29 Aldabra. But there is no convincing evidence of this at all in the Iles Glorieuses. By contrast, Astove and Cosmoledo share a well marked form of Nectarinia sovimanga. However, the subspecies of Streptopelia picturata of the Iles Glorieuses is (or was ) Cervatmby Wilh hemeni elcome Onn Madagascar, but even so is shared with the Aldabra Archipelago, whence it might have been derived. Shore birds Benson & Penny (1971: 421) ILI 7G (under land birds) five species of herons as breeding on Aldabra, and also Threskiornis aethiopica, Sacred Ibis. Several of the herons are also accep- ted as breeding on other islands in the archipelago. Although three are recorded from Iles Glorieuses, they appear to be no more than casual visitors. Perhaps there is insufficient eco- logical diversity for breeding populations to be supportable. Battistini & Cremers write of the beach of Grande Glorieuse being ‘always sandy', at least in the west and south. On Aldabra in particular, there is certainly a much greater variety of feeding niches—-thus in addition to sandy beaches there is a large man- grove-fringed interior lagoon, where many shore birds feed among rocks uncovered at low tide, and a series of freshwater pools in the southeast of the atoll. Sea birds On Grande Glorieuse in 1893 and 1906 respectively, Abbott and Nicoll found Sula sula breeding in forest trees in associa- tion with frigatebirds. There is no modern evidence of its presence at all. This is all the more unfortunate because the population was preponderantly brown phase, in contrast to Aldabra, where a white phase exists almost exclusively. Thus there is no longer the possibility for local comparisons of the hunting habits of the two phases. Again, there is no recent evidence of the breeding of frigatebirds, although Nicoll found occupied nests and collected a specimen of Fregata minor. The reason for these disappearances is not clear, although cutting of the Hative forest tot a coconut plantation and attendent ancrease in human activity may have been contributing factors. Also the breeding season was apparently different from that indicated by recent observations on Aldabra. On Ile du Lys Abbott found Sula dactylatra breeding, but there sone) aur her record, (so that it also has presumably disappeared. On the other hand in 1970 both Sterna fuscata and Anous stolidus were breeding there. The former was in thousands. Even so it is regrettable that some unexplained disaster wiped out the nearly fully fledged chicks. There is a stone-built house on the island, which it might be suspected has been used by a resident egg-collector. But Jouanin found that it bears a dateworhmuty 1927, and as thus of relatively recent iconstruc— tion. According to the information which he obtained, it was 30 built with a view to the establishment of a coconut plantation, which proved a failure. The few inhabitants of the Iles Glori- euses (four pny O77 Or 1971) certainly eat terns' eggs, but Jouanin got no evidence that there has been any systematic collecting with a commercial purpose. Some Sterna fuscata also breed on Roches Vertes. Nicoll found one or two pairs of Sula leucogaster breeding there, but this is the only record of this species from the Iles Glorieuses as a whole. REFERENCES Abbott, W.L. 1894. Notes on the natural history of Aldabra, Assumption and Glorioso Islands, Indian Ocean. Proc. U. Se Nat. Mus. 16: 759-764 (Glloriloso,—ppre 763—76o)e Arnoux. 1950. Rookery de Sternes aux Glorieuses. Nat. Malgache 2: 57. Ashmole, N.P. 1963. The biology of the Wideawake or Sooty Tern Sterna fuscata on Ascension Island. Ibis 103b: 297-364. Bailey, R.S. 1968. The pelagic distribution of sea-birds in the western Indian Ocean. Ibis 110: 493-519. Battistini, R. & Cremers, G. 1972. Geomorphology and vegetation of Iles Glorieuses. Atoll Res. Bull. 159: 1-10, 7 figures, 19 plates. Bayne, C.J. et al. 1970a. Geography and ecology of Cosmoledo ATotl. Atom Resa) Buds SO —por ---------- 1970b. Geography and ecology of Astove. Atoll Res. Belli, Wes SBaOe), Benson, C.W. 1960. The birds of the Comoro Islands. Ibis 103b: 5-106. ----------— 1967. (The bisedis of Ailldabravand ithesasistatus. PMGprolil Were) 1bLILA, oq) qlee OS 1 Tq —--------- 1969. The white-eye Zosterops maderaspatana (Heimritae) of Menai Island, Cosmoledo Atoll. Bull. Brit. Orin iCl moos 24278 See ee 1970a. Land (including shore) birds of Cosmoledo. Atoll” Res. PBwiliy #1365807 cir Se eae ae 1970b. Land (including shore) birds of Astove. Atoll Res; Bulls A367 mab Zor 31 Benson, C.W. 1970c. The Cambridge collection from the Malagasy Region (first part). Brill. Ieciice “Ohaas, (ils SOo” We6Sciy2y ---------- 1971. Notes on Terpsiphone and Coracina spp. in the Malagasy Region. Bull. Brit. Orn. Cl. 91: 56-64. Benson, C.W., Brooke, R.K. & Vernon, C.J. 1964. Bird breeding data for the Rhodesias and Nyasaland. Occ. Pap. Nat. Mus. S. Rhod. 27B: 30-105. Benson, C.W. & Penny, M.J. 1971. The land birds of Aldabra. RiwiaaAnseyhoy SOc. Mond... 200% 417—527. Benson, C.W. & Pitman, C.R.S. 1962. Some breeding and other records arom Madarzascar. Bull. Brit. Orn. Cl. 623 30=—33'). Berlioz, J. 1946. Faune de 1'Empire Francais. IV: Oiseaux de la Réunion. Paris: Larose. Bourne, Woks. 1971. The birds of the Chagos Group, iIndaan Ocean. Atoll Res. Bull. 149: 175-207. Coppinger, R.W. 1883. Cruise of the 'Alert'. London: W. Swan Sonnenschein. Diamond, A.W. 1971. The ecology of the sea birds of Aldabra. Bia aubratic ano. SOC. Lond. 6B. 200: 562—5i/ilie HDIponte kate. N9O/.. Report on a visit of investigation to Sit. Pierre, Astove, Cosmoledo, Assumption and the Aldabra group. Victoria, Mahé: Government Printing Office. FPrddrich, H. 1972. Beitrag zur Avifauna der Seychelles und andere Inseln des westlichen indischen Ozeans. Sitzungsber. Ges. naturf. Freunde Berlin 12: 132-145. Frappaz, T. 1820. Relation d'un voyage fait a Madagascar, a Anjouan et aux Seychelles, pendant les années 1818 et 1819. Annee Mam aColon. 5 2) 229=273 (les Glorieuses, p.242))- ---------- 1824. Souvenirs d'un jeune marin, ou Récit de plusieurs voyages faits de 1816 a 1822, a la cote de Coromandel et au Bengale, aux iles de France et de Bourbon, aux Seychelles, A Madagascar, etc. Journal des Voyages, ou Archives Géographiques du XIXe 63: 5-74; 64: 129-207; 65: 257-336; 66: 5-190 (Iles Glorieuses 2 1782182). (aia library of Trinity College, Dublin). Friedmann, H. 1929. The Gloriosa race of Ixocincla madagascar-— llensaseyeProc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 42: 215=216. Gibson-Hill, C.A. 1950. Notes on Abbott's Booby. Bull. Raffles Mus. 23: 65-76. 32 Goodwin, D. 1967. Pigeons and doves of the world. London: Trustees of the British Museum (Natural History). Grant, C.H.B. & Mackworth-—Praed, C.W. 1933. /Description of a new booby/. Bulli, (Brit. Orne Cl. om omer McLachlan, G.R. & Liversidge, R. 1970. Roberts birds of South Africa. Cape Town: Trustees of the John Voelcker Bird Book Fund. Milne-Edwards, A. & Oustalet, E. 1885. Observations sur la faune de la grande Comore. Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. (Paris) LOMA isi er223 Milon, Ph. 1950. Quelques observations sur la nidification des Sternes dans les eaux de Madagascar. Ibis 92: 545-553. ---------- 1951. Notes sur l'avifaune actuelle de 1'Ile de la Réunton. Terre Vie 98: 129-178. Moreau, R.E. 1957. Variation in the western Zosteropidae (Aves). BOHLILG relies Witty (NEB ES.) Zool, (W))s 309Sh93. ---------- 1960. The ploceine weavers of the Indian Ocean iSisncs, Journ, Osama, 1O13 2OaIN® . | Murphy, R.C. 1936. Oceanic birds of South America. New York: 1 American Museum of Natural History. | | | Nelson, J.B. 1969. The breeding behaviour of the Red-footed | Booby Sula sula. Tbis 111: 357-385. } Nicoll, M.J. 1906. On the birds collected and observed during the voyage of the 'Valhalla'. Ibis (8)6: 666-712 (Glorioso, pp. 686-692). --------~-- 1908. Three voyages of a naturalist. London: Witherby (Glorioso, pp.100-106). Parker, I.S.C. 1970. Some ornithological observations from the western Indian Ocean. Atoll Res. Bull. 136: 211-220. Peake, J.F. 1971. The evolution of terrestrial faunas in the Western Imndvan, Ocean. bass ivicanicnmh Onn SOC ale OniGlimnE 260: 581-610. Penny, M.J. 1971. Migrant waders at Aldabra, September 1967- Mareh 1968), (Phil. trans eRoysoce Lond) Ba 260s 549—5590e Penny, M.J. & Diamond, A.W. 1971. The White-throated Rail Dryolimnas cuvieri on Aldabra. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. iMesstels sin y LEO, WE LO SSNs BD) Rand, Avi. 1936. The distribution and habits of Madagascar Dirdsmebuid Amer.) Mus. Nat. Hist. (5)72: 143-499. ---------- 1967. in Check-list of birds of the world (Ed. RAS Paynter), XII. Cambridge, Mass.: Mus. Comp. Zool. RTchmonGden © 2Wie O97 . Catalogue of a collection of birds made by Dr. W.L. Abbott in Madagascar, with descriptions of three new species. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 19: 677-694. Ridgway, R. 1894. Descriptions of some new birds from Aldabra, Assumption, and Gloriosa Islands, collected by Dr. W.L. Hae ee 1e96,) On) birds colllected by Dr. Wel. Abbott im the Seychelles, Amirantes, Gloriosa, Assumption, Aldabra, andwadyacent, aslands, wath notes on habits, ete.; by the collector. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 18: 509-546 (Gloriosa, pp. 524-526). Salvan, J. 1971. Une visite sur les ilots au sud de Tamatave (Nadacasear). Atauda 39: 213-222. Sharpe, R.B. 1884. In Report on the zoological collections made in the Indo-Pacific Ocean during the voyage of H.M.S. ‘Alert' 1881-2. London: Trustees of the British Museum (Natural History) (birds from western Indian Ocean, pp.483-485). Stoddart, D.R. 1967. Summary of the ecology of coral islands north of Madagascar. Atoll Res. Bull. 118: 53-61 (Gloriosa, pp.57-58). ---------- 1971. White-throated Rail Dryolimnas cuvieri suc rovers ome Bull. Brit. Orn. Cl. UOl-iEbaen SROddcdmh. Owe. beuson, C.W. & Peake, Jor. 19707 Ecological change and effects of phosphate mining on Assumption stand ArolimeRes. Build. 91 96° 1201765). stoddart, D.R. & Poore, M.E.D. 1970a. Geography and ecology SEeparauhar Atoll. Atoll Res. Bull. 136: 7=26. ---------- 1970b. Geography and ecology of Desroches. Atoll Res. Budd. 136: 155—-165'. . ---------- 1970c. Geography and ecology of Remire. Atoll Res. Bustle hoc 1/t—181 2 Vesey-FitzGerald, D. 1940. The birds of the Seychelles. I. The endemic birds. Ibis (14)4: 480-489. ---------- 1941. Further contributions to the ornithology of the Seychelles Islands. Ibis (14)5: Sl Sa H2 7 4 34 Watson, G.E., Zusi, R.L. & Storer, R.E. 1963. Preliminary field guide to the birds of the Indian Ocean. Washington: Smithsonian Institution (Gloriosa, pp.191-199). ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 177 FULGOROIDEA FROM ALDABRA, ASTOVE, AND COSMOLEDO ATOLLS, COLLECTED BY THE ROYAL SOCIETY EXPEDITION 1967-68 (HEMIPTERA-HOMOPTERA) by M. D. Webb Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 Se ee Contents Page Introduction 1 Systematic List Ricaniidae Flatidae Meenoplidae Issidae Cixiidae Delphacidae Achilidae Derbidae Tropiduchidae Table 1. Fulgoroidea from Aldabra Atoll and their distribution elsewhere 8 References 10 NWNAWNFWWWW DD an 27: nea WS . iy FULGOROIDEA FROM ALDABRA, ASTOVE, AND COSMOLEDO ATOLLS, COLLECTED BY THE ROYAL SOCIETY EXPEDITION 1967-68 (HEMIP- TERA-HOMOPTERA ) by M. D. Webbe INTRODUCTION The present study is concerned with the Fulgoroidea collected by B. H. Cogan and A. M. Hutson of the British Museum (Natural History ) on the 1967-68 Royal Society Expedition to Aldabra, Astove and Cosmoledo Atolls. These islands together with Assumption are known collectively as the Aldabra group. Eight Fulgoroid species were recorded from the Aldabra group by Distant (1906) who placed them in seven genera and four families. The present work adds five families, eighteen genera and ten species to the fauna. A list of species from the Aldabra group with their distribution is included at the end of the paper. Three of Distant's species were not found by the expedition but are listed for completeness. Identifications were carried out with reference to the type specimens, except in those species where published descriptions and illustrations proved sufficient. The classification used follows Metcalf's General Catalogue of the Hemiptera (1936-58) except where indicated. The collecting areas on the present expedition were as follows: Aldabra Atoll: South Island, Middle Island, West Island, itile Michel. Cosmoledo Atoll: Wizard Island, Menai Island. Astove Atoll. Recent detailed maps, descriptions and discussions on the flora and fauna of the areas listed above can be found in Westoll and Stoddart (1971) for Aldabra, Bayne et al. (1970) for Cosmo- ledo and Bayne et al. (1970) for Astove. il/ British Museum (Natural History). (Manuscript received Dec. 197B=—dsy ) I would like to thank Dr. Gdlliner-Scheiding, Humboldt University Museum, Berlin and Dr. A. Kaltenbach, Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna for the loan of type material. SYSMAAMMELCG ILS Ricaniidae Deferundata aldabrana Distant ALDABRA, ‘SOUTH TSLAND: 7ieahie, (alkkamakal —27/ 150/1,968- mo 22, Dune Jean-Louis, 13-20/i1i11/1968; 36 19, Flamingo Pool, 21=22/71/19683 13 12, Cinq Cases.) 3=16/ 2/7 19635) MEDDE nH iS ANinE 1d, near Passe Gionnet, 2/aan/196esmilSs 12, mearnbastmChanmnacna 18-23/1i1/1968; WEST ISLAND: 16, near Settlement, 21-31/iii/ 19685 ub eMECHH te: Mis), M1 5/41 w/o Ger Identified from the type series deposited in the British Museum (Natural History). Neoprivesa fuscovaria Distant AT DABRAR SOUTH MISLAND:E 610 32) Galcamalxc eat —24/7 0) OOS cum gaS 21%, Dune Jean-Louis, 13=20/2110/ 1968. 9s, uCanquaCases. 3-16/1/1968; 336 42, Dune D'Messe, 21/i1i1i/1968; 12, Frigate Pood, 120/417 1968; MiDDED DSLAND ad) oa inearebas taCitcnamedl 18-23/11/1968; WEST ISLAND: 3¢ 32, near Settlement, 7-12/i111/1968; ILE MICHPL: 36, 15/11/1968; COSMOLEDO, WEZARD UiSWAND hl 2 6/aiataw/1 96S. Identified from the type series deposited in the British Museum (Natural History). Privesa punctifrons Signoret ALDABRA, "SOUTH ISLAND) 5 o 29°) ‘Takamaka, 91=27 /13)/119683)2¢2 32, Takamaka Grove, 1-27/11/1968; 33 32, Dune Jean-Louis, 13-20/ii1i1/1968; 12, Dune D'Messe, 21/iii1/1968; 14, Anse Cedre, 17-19/1/1968; 238, Point Hodoul, 27/1/1968; MIDDLE ISLAND: 18 12, near Passe Gionnet, 2/iii1/1968; 36, near East Channel, 18-23/ii/1968; WEST ISLAND: 12, near Settlement, 7-12/11i1/1968; ILE MICHEL: 63% 32, 15/ii/1968; COSMOLEDO, WIZARD! ESUAND = 2's) 1) 2G asian TOG Sr eMinN Agia mins te ANID an tata 6/i111/1968; ASTOVE: 28 5%, around coconut plantation, By/ialst 11 SOS 5 Identified from the description and figure given by Melichar (1898). According to Melichar, the type of this species is in the Vienna Museum, but I have been unable to trace it there or elsewhere. JI have, however, studied a headless specimen mentioned by Melichar and determined by him as the same species. Osaka hyalina Distant The genus Osaka is here included in the family Ricaniidae as proposed by Schmidt (1912) and other authors rather than in the Nogodinidae as given by Metcalf. ALDABRA, SOUTH ISLAND: 76 42, Takamaka, 1-27/11/1968; 626 22, Dune Jean-Louis, 13-20/iii/1968; 22, Flamingo Pool, 21-22/i/ 1968; 38 3%, Cinq Cases, 3-16/1/1968; 3a 49, Dune D'Messe, 5 2A ey NOG -9 oo Ansie, Cedne, 17=19/1,/1968;) MIDDLE. TSUAND): iideneac Passe Gionnet, 2/111/1968; WEST ISLAND: 16 2°, near Settlement, 21-31/i1i11/1968; ILE MICHEL: 44, 15/11/1968; COSMOLEDOA MENA ESLAND: 1-2, 6/11/1968; ASTOVEs d0d 58, BLoMicecocoma, plantation, 5/a74-/1968. Identified from the type series deposited in the British Museum (Natural History). Flatidae Chaetormenis madagascariensis (Signoret) APDABRAe SOUTH ESMAND: 190 62, Takamaka, 1=27/14/1968; ¢ 52, Takamaka Grove, 1-27/1i1/1968; 94 42, Dune Jean-Louis, 13=20/ 1157 19685 110.12, Takamaka, Pool, .1=17/11/19683 56 62; Cing Cases, 3-29/i1/1968; 46, Dune D'Messe, 21/11i1/1968; 68 pee AnsemCedire. 17—-19/1/1968; 160. 112, Bras: Cing, Cases, Say iOose. 3a 32, Elamimgo Pool, 21-22/1/19684 18, Brigate Pool. 20/4/1968; MIDDLE TSLAND:, 12, .mear East, Channel. 18=23/11/1968; WEST ISLAND: 4312, near Settlement, 7-31/iii/ 196S600LE MECHHIEs 43°19, 3=15/11/1968;, ISLETS. IN WEST CHANNEL: 2812, 28-29/i1i1/1968; COSMOLEDO, WIZARD ISLAND: 1¢ 22) 6/t41a/1966; MENAT TSLAND: 12, .6/111/1968. Identified from the type specimen deposited in the Naturhistorisches Museum, Wien. Meenoplidae Nisia atrovinosa (Lethierry) ALDABRA, SOUTH ISLAND: 1¢ 22, Takamaka Grove, 23-27/1i/1968; (ieee takamatiea Pool, 1=17/i1,/ 19685. 22, Cing, Cases, , 3-297 1/1968; (Open tiamiacomPool. 621—-22,/1/1968: 12s Anse Cedre.ui7—d9/ a/ 1968. Identified from the description and figures given by Synave (1957). Issidae Trienopa (Ivinga) typica Distant ALDABRA, SOUTH ISLAND: 12, Takamaka, 1-17/1i1/1968; 142, Takamaka Grove, 23=27/11/1968; 3¢ 12, Cinq Cases, 3=-16/i/ 1968s) tiaedles, Anse, Cedre, 17=19/1/19683 12, Frigate. Pool, * 20/1/1968; COSMOLEDO, WIZARD ISLAND: 18, 6/111/1968; ASTOVE: 28 22, around coconut plantation, 5/iii/1968. Identified from the type series deposited in the British Museum (Natural History). Cixiidae Brems > Lp) iy 1) 0) Ee) mh > wm oO O) = © ct a a SS oe H. W H. oO 0) fe) fe) e) H. (e) 0 5 ey fe) © IH ) 0) GYHHMASTH NOTLONATULSTAC YlaHt dNv o'6) TIOLV VYEVOTV WOU VACTOUOOTOANT “LL AIaVL -uoTytpedxe Aq punoy you setoeds 4ueistq — ‘feaqepTy worgz pepszooser ATUO he fi. Xx TiIoshisy CLUE 6 StTSueuepeqr STdoT},OUeTOTG X STSuUeSeae0 Sepooeyd tog xX xX TyEeSseuoyr °L ue ytTpTodousog x oe Ser ANG xX enbutdoid exkoy x Topuecoeul eVeATedeT tn uepns ‘footy offend EOC SPM “SCING) Ke xe eueqno Sapo esos x SNT Od} STSsueTtestu eTTeyesos X Vz eras sdoxsn eeproeydtoqg 10 REFERENCES Bayne, C.J. et al. 1970. Geography and ecology of Cosmoledo atoll. Atodal Rese Bulli 1 3640s7—oor ---------- 1970. Geography and ecology of Astove. Atoll Res. Budd. 136:963—-99. Crawford, D.L. 1914. A contribution toward a monograph of the Homopterous insects of the family Delphacidae of North and South America. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 46: 557-640. Distant, Wel. 19l 7. Rhynchova.. Panibh lile Stp Oncol OMmooizetscar iberins, Sbaliaias Soxes Iino Il, 173 27393220 Fennah, R.G. 1958. Fulgoroidea from West Africa. Bull. Inst. Fond. Afr. Noire 20: 460-538. ---------- 1963. The Delphacid species—complex known as Sogata fucifera (Horvath) (Homoptera: Fulgoroidea). Bull. Daisg Res, Ge Wise). ---------- 1964. The Delphacidae from Madagascar and the Mascarene Islands (Homoptera: Fulgoroidea). Trans). Re shia Soc. iLomcl, 1163 197-150. Melichar, L. 1898. Monographie der Ricaniiden (Homoptera). Ann. Nat. Hofmus. Wien. 13: 197-359. ---------- 1914. Monographie der Tropiduchinen. Metcalf, Z.P. 1936-58. General Catalogue of the Hemiptera. Fasc. IV. Muir, F. 1920. On some African Delphacidae (Homoptera). Bul Ent. Res. 10: 139-144. Muir, F. & Giffard, W.M. 1924. Studies in North American WenljolsteKeatclerey IsibLiks islenweliein Suc, Piles? ASS. lWsqo, Siam. i! 52 1-53. Schmidt, E. 1912. Diagnosen neuer Fulgoriden-Gattungen und Arten nebst einigen bemerkungen. SUOwbs IMAe se “4@alibo 7/3)2 67 —=O2r Syiavie,, JH.) all Ose Meenoplidae de Madagascar (Hemiptera-Homoptera). Naturaliste Malgache 9: 141-145. Westoll, TS. & Stoddart. Dek lo7 Ih eS dascusscaon onuntiae results of the Royal Society Expedition to Aldabra 1967-68. Pha > Draris:. Re SOc 26 Oreo te ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 178 A PRELIMINARY DESCRIPTION OF THE CORAL REEFS OF THE TOBAGO CAYS, GRENADINES, WEST INDIES by John B. Lewis Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 Contents Page Introduction List of corals found at Tobago Cays Description of Horseshoe Reef Back reef Reef crest Reef front Distribution of shallow water communities around the islands Petit Rameau Petit Bateau Baradal Jamesby Discussion References © ONIN VNU FrWWh Figures (following p. 9) 1 Map of Tobago Cays with inset showing Lesser Antilles and Grenadines. 2 Three dimensional sketch of a generalized transect across the Horseshoe Reef showing zonation. Sketch not to scale. Depth 15-20 meters; horizontal distance approximately 100 meters. 3 Distribution of shallow water communities around Petit Rameau and Petit Bateau, Tobago Cays. 4 Distribution of shallow water communities around Baradal and Jamesby, Tobago Cays. 5 Profiles of typical shallow-water communities on leeward (sheltered) and windward (exposed) coasts of the Tobago Cays. 19 Bie ait pis eons D ie ere! YS rere r Oe ; a5 be ore Dee ethers, et rucray heingest 9 iene e ns : peta 68 hela ae or 1 Fee ai ew 45, wry cmued at saat wa" rn t " etnias * Papirtirbn ce othe ott ate n) | aa Peadeh he neon var ae 60-0 Pin Geni on) ae ELEN vervcer) ae L t ey Big wei ii abet vies! Leon ncaa ok — : q j e: ee i oS i he i | Mes dat eR bs ij ; i i | | | A PRELIMINARY DESCRIPTION OF THE CORAL REEFS OF THE TOBAGO CAYS, GRENADINES, WEST INDIES long dolaray 15i7 Deel INTRODUCTION The Tobago Cays are composed of four small islands of the Grenadines lying between St. Vincent and Grenada, West Indies at 12°28 N- Gil 22" Ww. They are exposed on a long, narrow submarine bank which stretches southward to Grenada. All are low lying with narrow beaches and rocky coasts and are covered for the most part by scrub vegetation of the type described by Beard (1949) for the Grenadines. The largest island, Petit Bateau, has an elevation of about 45 meters while the smallest, Jamesby is only 20 meters in height. The islands are not populated. They are visited frequently by fishermen from the nearby isiands and are politically administered from Grenada. The Cays are protected on the east by a semicircular coral reef called the Horseshoe Reef. Heavy seas break over the reef during most of the year and strong and variable currents flow across the reef into the central area. A map of the Cays and surrounding reef is shown in Fig. 1. The distribution of the fauna on Horseshoe Reef and around the Cays was investigated by free divers. Data was recorded on an underwater slate and on photographs with a Nikonos II under- water camera. Three transects across the Horseshoe Reef were studied in detail. Because of the small size of the Cays it was possible to swim around the coast of each one and map the distribution of the shallow water communities. Representative samples of corals and other invertebrates were collected on each dive for subsequent identification. The work was supported by a grant in aid of research from the National Research Council of Canada. I am grateful to Alan Emery for diving assistance. Dy peidains Research Institute of McGill University, St. James, Barbados, W.1I., and The Redpath Museum, McGill University, Montreal, P.Q., Canada. (Manuscript received June, 1972--Ed. ) nN LIST OF CORALS FOUND AT TOBAGO CAYS Seriatoporidae: Madracis decactis (Lyman) Madracis asperula Milne—Edwards and Haime Acroporidae: Acropora cervicornis (Lamarck ) Acropora palmata (Lamarck) Agaricidae: Agaricia agaricites (Linnaeus) Neeiei ile) jereeyeal ILaus (Dana) Siderastreidae: Siderastrea radians (Pallas) Siderastrea siderea (Ellis and Solander) Poritidae: Porites astreoides Lamarck Porites porites (Pallas) Porites furcata Lamarck Porites divaricata Leseuer Faviidae: /Favia fragum (Esper) Diploria clivosa (Ellis and Solander) - Diploria strigosa (Dana) Diploria labyrinthiformis (Linnaeus) Colpophyllia natans (Muller) Colpophyllia amaranthus (Miiller) Manicina areolata (Linnaeus) Solenastrea bournoni Milne-Edwards and Haime eae and Solander) Montastrea annularis Montastrea cavernosa Linnaeus ) Trochosmiliidae: Meandrina meandrites (Linnaeus ) Dichocoenia stokesii Milne-Edwards and Haime Dendrogyra cylindrus Ehrenberg Mussidae: Mussa angulosa (Pallas) Isophyllastrea rigida (Dana) Mycetophyllia lamarckana (Milne-Edwards and Haime ) Isophyllia multiflora (Verril1l1) Cariophylliidae: Eusmilia fastigiata (Pallas) DESCRIPTION OF HORSESHOE REEF A three dimensional sketch of the zonation across the mid-region of Horseshoe Reef is shown in Fig. 2. Three distinct regions were recognized, an inner zone or back reef, a reef crest and a reef slope or reef front. alice Back reef This iS an area of relatively flat bottom varying in depth between 1 and 2 meters and in width between 50 and 75 meters. Between the back reef and the Cays the bottom is sandy with meadows of the sea grasses Thalassia testudinum Kénig and Syringodium filiforme Kitzing, broken by the presence of clumps of corals, sponges, the sea fan Rhipidogorgia flabellum (Linnaeus ) and other alyconarians. Sediments in the back reef region are composed of coarse calcareous sands and there are wide areas of flat reef rock pavement. Patches of reef are dominated by low clumps of Montastrea annularis which may be 3-4 meters in diameter at the outer edge of the zone. Large colonies of Siderastrea sSiderea are also common in this zone, together with Porites astreoides, P. porites, Siderastrea radians, Diploria clivosa, D. strigosa, D. labyrinthiformis, Favia fragum, Agaricia agaricites, Isophyllastrea rigida and Meandrina meandrites. Towards the seaward limit of the zone scattered stunted growths of Acropora palmata occur. Alcyonarians are very conspicuous on the back reef, especially the sea fan Rhipidogorgia. Other common alcyonarians include Briareum asbestinum (Pallas), Pterogorgia acerosa (Pallas), Bunicia asperula (Milne-Edwards and Haime), Plexaurella dichotoma (Esper), P. grisea (Kunze), Plexaura flexuosa (Lamouroux ) and Muricepsis flavida (Lamarck : Patches of Millepora sp. are common in the mid-region of the back reef and towards the reef crest. Both the flat-—bladed form and the more fragile branched types (Boschma, 1948) are present. Other conspicuous invertebrates in this zone include the sea urchins Diadema antillarum (Philippi) on the coral patches and rock pavement, Tripneustes esculentus (Leske ) on algae covered bottom, the large sedentary polychaete Sabellastarte magnifica (Shaw) in crevices between colonies of Montastrea annularis, the smaller boring polychaete Spirobranchus giganteus (Pallas) and numerous species of sponges. Near the reef crest zone extensive areas of flat reef rock pavement are densely covered with the yellow zooanthid Palythoa mammillosa (Ellis and Solander). ae Reef crest The reef crest zone is dominated by dense growths of the branching Acropora palmata. The water depth in mid-Zone is 1-2 meters and the width varies between 10 and 25 meters across. The bottom is covered with broken branches of Acropora or is composed of bare rock pavement encrusted with Millepora or Palythoa and scattered colonies of Porites astreoides and Havaa fragum. Narrow channels, a few meters in width, occur at frequent intervals along the reef and are bare of Acropora. The reef crest zone is thus a band of prolific growth of Acropora and is subjected to heavy wave action and water turbulence. Biz Reef front The reef front may conveniently be considered to begin within the area of turbulence where the water begins to deepen. At the inner edge, clumps of Acropora palmata appear less dense and low mounds of Montastrea annularis are able to colonize the reef rock surface. There are large areas of uncolonized bare rock surface, scattered | colonies jot (horttes portves, sla asrscosees and the encrusting zooanthid Palythoa. The seaward slope drops steeply from the reef crest to depths of 15-20 meters. Its face is dominated by large massive mounds of Montastrea annularis from a depth of about 5 meters down. At the top, Montastrea forms tall pillar-like clumps but then changes to shingle shaped colonies and broad sheets towards the bottom of the slope. There is much destruction of the clumps for a considerable amount of talus-like debris lies at the bottom of the slope or on the sandy bottom. Mixed with the Montastrea are a number of other corals on the slope face. Acropora palmata is common near the top and there are numerous colonies of Porites porites, P. astreoides, P. furcata, Agaricia fragilis, A. agaricites, Dendrogyra cylindrus, Colpophyllia natans, C. amaranthus, Isophyllastrea rigida, Diploria cilivosa, Deistrigosaylete: )\ihersea fan Rhipidogorgia is abundant near the shallower portion of the slopes. DISTRIBUTION OF SHALLOW WATER COMMUNITIES AROUND THE ISLANDS The pattern of distribution of shallow water communities around the islands was very similar in each of the four Cays. Maps of the distribution of the major communities around the islands are shown in Figs. 3 and 4. A prevailing current flows from east to west, across the Horseshoe Reef and past the four Cays. Longshore currents flow along the east coasts of each of the Cays and are strongest at the northern and southern extremities of the islands. A strong current also flows between Rameau and Bateau Cays. The direction of current flow are shown in Fig. 1. Bach of the Cays is partially surrounded by a narrow reef. Except for Jamesby Cay, reefs are absent on the leeward sides. Between the reefs and the shore are mixed beds of Porites porites, P. furcata and Thalassia on patches of sand or reef rock pavement. At the northern and southern extremities of the islands, where the currents are strongest, there are luxuriant beds of Rhipidogorgia and other alcyonarians. The narrow reefs consist for the most part of low clumps or heads of coral on a sandy bottom which slopes gradually down into a channel. Typical sections of littoral shallow water fringing communities for a leeward and windward coast are shown in Baie. ¥ 5S ils Petit Rameau The southern coast of Rameau Cay is fringed by a narrow beach with a small patch of mangrove trees (Rhizophora sp.) near the eastern end. The eastern and western extremities are comprised of rocky outcrops. Between the south coast reef and the beach the bottom is Benselyscoverea with a mixture, of Porites) porites, |) Pan funcata, the turtlegrass Thalassia and the algae of the genera Halimeda and Amphiroa. Other corals commonly found in this zone include Manicina aereolata, Porites astreoides, Favia fragum and Stephanocoena michelani. The anemones Condylactis sp., and Aiptasia sp., are abundant, as are the sea urchins Tripneustes esculentus (Leske ) and Echinometra lucunter (Linnaeus ) Ninel igiaie: Jougslin iGile stars Ophiocoma riseii (Lutken) and 0. echinata (Lamarck). Several species of sponges including the large Spheciospongia vesparia (Lamarck) are abundant. The Thalassia-—Porites association develops upon the debris and erect branches of Porites porites and Porites furcata. Sediment from two coralline algae of the genera Halimeda and Amphiroa is abundant throughout the community. Several other species of algae are abundant including the genera Laurencia, Dictyota, Dictyopterus and Zonaria. On the slope below about 2-3 meters Thalassia is absent and beds of Porites porites, P. furcata are mixed with low clumps of Montastrea annularis, Porites astreoides, Siderastrea radians, S. siderea, Favia fragum and the hydroid Millepora. Halimeda is still common and the bottom is thickly covered with debris from the calvareous algae and rubble from the branching oO Porites species. There are profuse growths of a number of species of algae of the) genera Dictyota, PenremiiMlus ands Udoiea. At the bottom of the slope and on the inner edge of the channel at about 5 meters a more diverse coral community is present. Montastrea annularis is the most common species and occurs inwdely separated clumps. M. cavernosa, Siderastrea siderea, Diploria clivosa, D. strigosa, Colpophyllia natans, Porites furcata, Dichocoenia stokesii, Agaricia agaricites and Millepora are common. Rhipidogorgia and other alcyonarians are also present. The middle of the channel between the south coast of Petit Rameau and the north coast of Petit Bateau is composed of calcareous sand and varies between 5 and 10 meters in depth. The west coast of Petit Rameau is comprised of low rocky outcrops, broken by small sandy beaches. In shallow water the bottom is composed of carbonate sand and loose rubble of branching Porites and Acropora. There are small patches of living, Porites pomites and Pa huncavar, | Mancunayacneotlavagets common and Halimeda is abundant. In general, however, the area does not support a diverse fauna. Ina little deeper water a few scattered corals, Favia fragum, Siderastrea siderea, Porites porites, Roni ves vast reoides and Mailiiepora oecuridown tomsandy bo ttomba trace pit itots ial ounianasmereng Sie few isolated patches of Acropora palmata and Montastrea are present in depths of 4 or 5 meters. The north and east coasts and the four corners of the island are characterized by low rocky cliffs, heavy wave action and strong currents. Prolific growths of the sea fan Rhipidogorgia develop in these areas, together with massive boulders of Siderastrea siderea and Diploria spp. These are encrusted on a reef rock pavement or upon exposed country rock. Close to shore the rock substrate is bare or secondarily encrusted with Millepora and Palythoa. Rhipidogorgia is found close to low water mark and the tips of the fans are sometimes exposed. Massive mounds of Montastrea annularis are developed in deeper water at 3-4 meters. At the south west corner of the Cay, where the current is less strong and wave action limited, a more prolific association of corals are found and develops close to the shore. Fewer alcyonarians are found here but the coral community is much more diverse. Montastrea annularis is dominant but a number of species of massive corals are present. Be, Petit Bateau The distribution of benthic communities around Bateau Cay is similar to that of Petit Rameau. The north coast lies il on the lee side and is protected from wave action. There is a wide beach along most of the coast. The shallow water along the coast is covered by extensive areas of broken coral rubble with a few patches of Thalassia and small colonies of massive corals. This bottom slopes downward to the channel with a andy pDObLom at a depth of 4=5 meters. The north-east promontory supports a dense growth of Rhipidogorgia, the boulder corals Siderastrea siderea and Diploria species and Acropora palmata. On the west side of the island there are steep rocky cliffs with piles of rubble at their bases in shallow water. Sea fans and other alcyonarians are abundant here, especially on the promontories where the current is strongest. There are patches of Acropora palmata, A. cervicornis, dense Millepora and small colonies of Porites porites and P. astreoides. Favia fragum and Siderastrea radians are common. Outside the 3 fathom line the bottom is comprised of sand and rubble with scattered coral patches. Along the southern and eastern coasts there are sandy beaches with beds of Porites porites and Porites furcata in shallow water. Thalassia is less abundant here than on the southern coast of Petit Rameau. The Thalassia-Porites association lies in a narrow band along the coast down to depths of about 2 or 3 meters. Beyond this depth there are dense coral communities similar to those of Petit Rameau, dominated by Montastrea annularis. Sie Baradal There is a sand and rubble bottom in shallow water along the south coast of this island and the water is very turbulent close to shore. The marine grasses Thalassia and Syringodium are common but very little Porites occurs here. Manicina aereolata is common and there are numerous loggerhead sponges Spheciospongia and a red encrusting sponge. Tripneustes esculentus is common in the grass beds. A long sand spit is present at the south-east end of the island. Along the eastern coast there are rather narrow beds of Porites and Thalassia with scattered corals in deeper water. The Thalassia is replaced towards the northern end by scattered patches of reef corals including Acropora palmata, Diploria spp., Siderastrea and Porites. Alcyonarians are abundant at the northern and southern ends of the Cay. The bottom along the western coast is composed of sand and rubble with a heavy growth of green algae of the genera Ulva and Enteromorpha. Mh Jamesby The shallow water along the western side has flourishing 8 communities of reef corals and alcyonarians similar to those on the east side of Petit Bateau. The west coast is rocky with much debris in shallow water. The water is turbid and strong currents prevail along this shore. A rather poorly developed Thalassia-Porites association with reef corals in deeper water occurs along the eastern coast. DISCUSSION The zonation of corals on the Horseshoe Reef is similar to that described for a number of other Caribbean reefs. The reef front or reef slope zone which is dominated by Montastrea annularis most closely resembles the reef front of Nicaraguan reefs described by Milliman (1969), the Montastrea—Deep-Water Zone at Abaco Island, Bahamas (Storr, 1964) and the outer reef regions on Aruba noted by Roos (iovA)= The reef crest with its dense growth of Acropora palmata is a characteristic feature of many Caribbean reefs and exists on the shallow frontal region in Florida (Shinn, 1963), in British Honduras (Stoddart, 1962), Jamaica (Goreau, 1959), Cayman Islands (Roberts, 1971), Curagao and Aruba (Roos, 1964, 1971) and the Bahamas (Newell et al, 1959 and Storr, 1964). The spur and buttress region described for Jamaican reefs by Goreau (1959) is not present on the Horseshoe Reef although the reef is bisected with channels. The back reef region resembles the shallow water zones described by Stoddart (1962), Roos (1964, 1971), Goreau (1959) and Milliman (1969) as a patchwork distribution of corals and alcyonarians. The occurrence of Millepora and the colonial zooanthid Palythoa in shallow water is also characteristic of Caribbean reefs and has been reported by Lewis in Barbados (1960), Adams in St. Vincent (1968), Milliman (1969) and Goreau (1959). The distribution of shallow water communities around each of the Cays appears to be related to the coastline configuration and to the current velocities. Currents are strongest at the eastern entrance to the channel between Bateau and Rameau, at the north-eastern tip of Petit Rameau, the northern and southern ends of Baradal and along the western side of Jamesby Cay. There are flourishing patches of a number of reef corals in all these areas and dense stands of Rhipidogorgia and other alcyonarians. Thalassia-Porites associations are restricted to the southern coasts of Rameau and Bateau, along the eastern sides of Baradal and Jamesby where the currents are less strong. In deeper water below a few meters the composition of coral species is much the same for each Cay. REFERENCES Adams, R.D. 1968. The leeward reefs of St. Vincent, West inaresseedour. Geol., 76: 587-595. Beard, J.S. 1949. The natural vegetation of the Windward and Leeward islands. Oxford Forest. Mem., 21. Boschma, H. 1948. The species problem in WELILierexcneey ZOOL. Verband Leiden I: 115pp. Goreau, T2F. 1959. The ecology of Jamaican coral reefs. I. Species composition and zonation. Ecology, 40: 67-90. Lewis, J.B. 1960. The coral reefs and coral communities of Barbades, Mabe. Can. Jour., Zool. ,38: 1133-11445. Milliman, J.D. 1969. Four Southwestern Caribbean Atolls: Courtown Cays, Albuquerque Cays, Roncador Bank and Serrana Bank, | Atoll! Res. Bull. ,.129: 26pp. Newell, Nope, a. Imbrie, E.G. Purdy and D.L. Thurber.) 11959. Organism communities and bottom facies, Great Bahama Bank: BudiieewAmer. Mus, Nat. Hist., 17: t77=228. Roberts, H.H. 1971. Environments and organic communities of North Sound, Grand Cayman Island, B.W.1L. Caribb. Jour. Sea.) 11 (Noel 2) <4 16777 1. Roose. J. 19648, Whe idistribution of reef ‘corals an Curagao. Stud. Fauna Curagao and other Caribbean Islands, 20: 1-51. ---------- 1971. The shallow-water stony corals of the Netherlands Antilles. Stud. Fauna Curagao and other Caribbean Islands, 37: 1-108. Shinn, E.A. 1963. Spur and groove formation on the Florida Reef Tract. Volum. Seda. Petro. =o2: 291-303. Stoddart, D.R. 1962. Three Caribbean atolls: Turneffe Islands, Lighthouse Reef and Glover's Reef, British Honduras. Atoll, Res. Build. 1872 1/49pp. Storr, J.F. 1964. Ecology and oceanography of the coral-reef tract, Abaco Island, Bahamas. Geol. Soc. Amer. Special Paper 79: 98pp. rr Martinique (op) ARADAL See =—oer=e. = anoOROUSs (oe) Sem ees 8 INCHES TO ONE NAUTICAL MILE DEPTHS IN FATHOMS ---- 3 FATHOM CONTOUR & y 10 wou REEF FRONT - e —* Map of Tobago Cays with inset showing Lesser Antilles and Grenadines. *S19070U AToyeutxoidde e\ue{STp [TeluozT0y {s1ej0W YZ-ST yqdeq -eTeds 032 Jou YDIeyS tomeue SUTMOYS FEOY SOYSESIOH oY} Sso1de DeSUeI} PeZTTeIoUes JO YOIOYS TeuUOTSuSWTP sory, 7 VEOdS TTIW [tym] YOHLATWd[o0°] GNWS [==] wruoldia [Cy [ aJlggnulsee] vuodouov [SZ 7 VSUISVLNON (Ee) uf Pang ISH] y SNVIHVNOADTV[A A] v.) VIONODOAIdIHU[ D 3] Sih salmod /vissviwHIL Ad] 499% KEGEL Dh cast GMO bmegy UN ur LSAY9 |LNOYS 4dagnu MOVE 433uY|44535u : a [YY JTHALASSIA /PORITES 4 Ea sm [VPP]ALCYONARIANS = a [| CURRENT yee [e © ©] RUBBLE A dh [=m | CORALS 0 [= =] SAND @,"' rei RAMEAU eB ewer" 2-=,., a 3 PATHOM. ee CONTOUR}, - - 0, ---’ e2eerer i / x a i 0 ne H .°] ? i = e (oo See erin me A 1/8 NAUTICAL MILE BY ; Distribution of shallow water communities around Petit Rameau and Petit Bateau, Tobago Cays. [y Y y] THALASSIA /PORITES ALCYONARIANS [—* ] CURRENT ae ; Br [o © ©] RUBBLE [nwt ]CORALS [257] SAND fy: a a ¢ ¥ Z 1/8 NAUTICAL MILE . 4 Distribution of shallow water communities around Baradal and Jamesby, Tobago Cays. IN METERS DEPTH (i) ’ LEEWARD COAST PROFILE | 1 Lia) | tT} My | 2 ~@ | Ge bg / p,. | 4 LL? | Megs Z| 5 10 15 20 WINDWARD COAST PROFILE 1 ny Zaz | QD | S | 2 (2 prs | 3 By : Qe 5 3 & | 5 10 15 20 DISTANCE IN METERS CYITHALASSIA PORITESLZ] ALCYONARIANS [7Z|DIPLORIA [€)] SIDERASTREA ACROPORA MONTASTREA [2] RHIPIDOGORGIA 5 Profiles of typical shallow-water communities on leeward (sheltered) and windward (exposed) coasts of the Tobago Cays. ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 179 MARINE ZONATION AND ECOLOGY OF COCOS ISLAND, OFF CENTRAL AMERICA by Gerald J. Bakus Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 bg eee 7 GO, 1 FC See ee a ay oredalion pies tikes 4 cane veeer eh ME? FO Wee Ce etre A JISCSIE Rh Td a fq Swit ia, Hayat vt i BT Contents Page Introduction 1 Zonation of the Leeward side 2 Protected intertidal zone (bays) 2 Exposed intertidal zone (2 Subtidal zone 3 Discussion 5 Acknowledgments 7] Literature cited 8 Figures (following p. 8) 1 Leeward side of Cocos Island showing the lush vegetation and one of many waterfalls. 2 Low intertidal zone in Bahia de Wafer. Note Porolithon and/or Lithophyllum spp. on the rocks. 3 Intertidal zonation on a vertical wall, leeward side of Cocos Island. The lichen-covered basalt is followed below by the dark encrusting alga Hildenbrandia or Petrocelis (2) A veneer of Porolithon and/or Lithophyllum spp. is covered by dense aggregations of Tetraclita stalactifera at the lowest level. u Pontes) Calinhorpniaca, at a depth) of about 10 an; representing a predominantly one species coral reef at maximum development. Note the high standing crop of fishes. 5 A massive round head of Porites californica showing numerous toothmarks made by parrotfishes. 6 A ‘colony of Pocillopora robusta growing from a mound of Porites californica. The white tips on the branches of Pocillopora indicate that they have been bitten off by parrotfishes. Note also the toothmarks on Porites. 7 Tubastrea aurea growing on dead coral substratum. Note the extent to which benthic algae have been browsed. Diadema mexicana is shown in the lower rae Corner, ; rT Ts 4 rugs $1 - init aad ae AOS | ae es pe i, @ dine - es igh m rehibaet ie hf ioas bideber wy tanto S wy : . F Chery Gat Thi up cewG sgh cs ‘ a ® Ve = “ee i ; i «ti Nong a -7 re) + & vg : 23 as = ~~ \ ' 4 + ‘ : = ee) z£ es > ; sa PO RECN TO Ee EN Oe Br epee Eten apts emer MARINE ZONATION AND ECOLOGY OF COCOS ISLAND, OFF CENTRAL AMERICA by Gerald J. Bae During March 29 to April 8, 1972, the author participated tm a cruise to Cocos Island (Isla dei Coco, a (Costas Ralcai island located at 5°N and 87°w), about 500 kilometers (300 miles) off Pacific Central America. The Janss Foundation vessel, R/V Searcher, was operating in Central America on a number of research projects, including those on the Cocos Island investigations. Although the primary purpose of the journey was to document the major nektonic groups, including crustaceans and fishes, and obtain data on holothurians that are toxic to fishes, an effort was made to gather information on the zonation of dominant marine organisms. Parlier accounts of studies on Cocos Island are well summarized and a species list is given by Hertlein (1963). ihe present study is the first report on underwater zonation at Cocos Island. The following account is based on observations by erehLOSciecntrscs, during intertidal visits, and I3esubitadal dives ranging from O to 31 m on the leeward side of the island, in the vicinity of Bahia de Chatham and Bahia Wafer. Station data and specific information are available from the present author or the Section of Fishes, Los Angeles County Natural History Museum, Los Angeles, California. Cocos Island is the only portion of the Cocos Ridge appearing above sea-level. This Ridge extends in a south- westerly direction from Costa Rica almost to the Galapagos Islands and has relatively deep trenches on the north and south sides. The steep basaltic island (elevation 850 m) is CoOVvercad wit lusa. Lrop ical vegetation (more than 200 species OL (plants, Dc. Manvel Murillo, personal communication), including a few patches of coconut palms (fig. 1). It has an abundant seabird population (e.g. frigate birds, boobies, terns, petrels) and 7 species of land birds (Hertlein, 1963). Feral pigs and goats roam the island. Protected bays have gentle underwater slopes covered with sand, living coral and coral Vee — Field investigations supported by the Janss Foundation. 2/ Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California 90007. (Manuscript received October, 1972——bidiy) rubble; exposed portions have gentle to moderate slopes; and offshore islets possess moderate to steep slopes. The tidal amplitude was about 2 m and water termperatures ranged from 29 to 30°C during out Stay. A siaent) thermocline (ealmevomip ae temperature change ) occurred between depths of 13 and 22 m at this season (end Of thie tropical idiasy, season). Underwater visibility is often 30 m, especially below the thermocline. ZONATION OF THE LEEWARD SIDE Protected intertidal zone (bays): As the intertidal is approached the lush island vegetation fives way to lichen-covered rocks followed by a band of thin, black encrusting algae (Hildenbrandia or Petrocelis?). The rocky substratum is covered by Porolithon and/or Lithophyllum spp. at the very lowest tidal levels (Pe. B) The intertidal rage INess 2) iMSluebalyellyy ILO sMyEie wore SjOSCLSS ClAWeisSa wy (based on the observed numbers of species). This is character— 1stie of a number of tropical, anvenrridal srocky Shoves sO imme ts tidal unbroken limestone reef flats (Atsatt, 1972; Paine, 1966; Risk, 1972) The snail Nerita scabricosta lives at the highest level in the intertidal; the rocks were covered with hundreds of its egg capsules, especially in small pools of water. “Just below Nerita is the snail Littorina modesta followed downward by the gastropods Purpura pansa, Thais melones, Scurria mesoleuca, Planaxis planicostatus, and Siphonaria gigas at the lowest levels. Oysters (Ostrea palmula) and the large chi ton) Chiton svoke sin) are Jcomnmon an iyne slevelon jocuri ter The shore crab Grapsus grapsus is common in the upper inver— tidal and supralittoral. The rock louse Ligia ranges through- out much of the intertidal. the shallow bays contain), anwadd a palon voy cocksma uml Meise edges, sand and coral rubble. A few sponges (Haliclona Sp., Tethya quran tia), snails such as Mitra, Conus and Cypraea (e.g. C. moneta), abundant alpheid shrimps and some crabs (Grapsidae; Porcelanidae, Petrolisthes spp.) occur in the protection of coral rubble between O and 2 m in depth. A small freshwater stream, near its entry into Bahia Wafer, contained 6 species of freshwater fishes (William Bussing, personal communication), remains of swimming crabs (Portunidae), numerous small shrimps and large snails (probably Neritina latissima). Exposed intertidal zone: On exposed basaltic cliffs outside the bays, lichens again grow at a high level, followed downward by a 1 to1.5m band of Hildenbrandia or Petrocelis (?) then a richly covered 1 m band of Porolithon and/or Lithophyllum spp. which continues 3 far below the water surface (fig. 3) (on the windward side of the island, Hildenbrandia or Petrocelis (?) may extend as much as 4 m high when exposed to heavy swell). The most character- i ijle sania is iine spank Jbarnacle, Tetraclita stalactiafera, which forms a dense 1 m band that may extend as far as 3m below the water surface. The barnacle is densest in the upper half of the exposed Porolithon band. Again, Nerita scabricosta daves at the highest tidal level followed by Purpura pansa. Thais melones, and Siphonaria gigas. Grapsus grapsus iS common throughout much of the intertidal. Heavy surge prevented close observations for smaller animals. Subtidal zone: Outside of bays (as well as in deeper waters inside the bays), the subtidal benthic fauna is dominated by the mushroom- shaped hermatypic coral Porites californica which when well developed simulates an inverted stack of medusoid strobilae (file. Ly) Porites extends almost from the water surface down- ward to a depth of from 8 to at least 31 m, where it gives way BOusand. | Livan= Porites is intermixed with Porttes rubbile. Both the living coral and rubble are generally free of epibionts on the upper surface, due to the presence of living coral polyps and the extensive rasping habits of parrot-fishes and browsing by other fishes (Gereee 5). However, at some sites, numerous, small, flat, roughly spherical, red foraminiferans live on Porites. Slits are often seen on the coral surface, evidence of burrowing barnacles or crabs. The sides and undersurfaces of Porites are often covered by oysters, vermetid gastropods and hydroids, among other animals. The coral Pocillopora robusta occurs in small, scattered patches at depths of 1-8 m; the tips of its branches are frequently bitten off by parrot- fishes (fig. 6). The burrowing sea urchin Echinometra vanbrunti is also common at these depths. The sea urchin Diadema mexicana is abundant to a depth of 10 m then common to at TEAS Oi site It is a constant diving hazard, as are the numerous white-tip (Triaenodon obesus) and hammerhead (Sphyrna spp.) sharks, the lattermost at depths greater than about 20 m. Small, scattered bunches of the bright orange coral Tubastrea aurea are common at various depths (ris. a At Isla Manuelita, be between Bahia de Chatham and Bahia Wafer, Tubastrea is common at 13 m and even more dense at 30 m. Two additional species of scleracti- nian corals were found, one (Leptoseris sp. ) from the underside of Porites at a depth of 5 m and the other, Psammocora (Stephanaria) Spetlaba tah wilo mM. ja shteen species ots sce lenac— tinian corals, including 14 hermatypic species, have been reported from Cocos Island (Hertlein, 1963). Only one species of starfish (Linckia columbiae) is common. It is small and lives amongst coral rubble. The starfish Acanthaster ellisi was observed on several occasions but no abnormal effects of their feeding activities on the reef were noted. The lobster Panulirus (P. gracilis and P. penicillatus are known from Cocos Tsland) is common in holes and caverns under Porites. Ophiuroids (Ophiocoma Spp.-; in addition, Ophionereis and Ophiocomella have been described from Cocos Ts land ) are common under coral rubble and holothurians (11 species have been reported from Cocos Island) occur there in relatively small numbers. Balanus occurs in small, scattered patches. Sponges are relatively uncommon except as encrusting forms under coral rubble. Only one species lives exposed part of the time and this one occurs exposed infrequently. Gorgonians (Lophogorgia alba) were observed in small patches on only three occasions, at 9, 12 and 30 m. The bivalve mollusc Spondylus calcifer is common on rubble and the sea urchin Eucidaris thouarsii is common under rubble at depths of between 10 and 31m. The slipper lobster Scyllarus was taken once at 29 m (station Dalrys west side of Isla Manuelita). All benthic algae observed during the dives were either thinly encrusting forms or they were grazed and browsed to within a few millimeters of the substratum. The Porites coral reefs give way to gently sloping but micro-undulating (rippled) sand bottoms which contain numerous tubes of the polychaete Chaetopterus. On one night a few dozen of the fire worm, Eurythoe complanata (males On3 im long), were attracted to the lights of the ship and spawned copious amounts of sperm after being collected. The fish fauna is exceptionally rich in standing crop and is moderately diverse. One hundred and twenty species of fishes were collected, adding 33 new distribution records. A total of 156 species of fishes are now known to occur at Cocos Island, not including those taken by otter trawling. Among the most important pelagic fishes that are dominant and marine predators are jacks (Carangidae) and sharks (several families). A variety of tropical fish families feed on the benthic biota. Parrotfishes (Scaridae) are common, particularly Scarus ghobban and S. rubroviolaceus. Numerous toothmarks from these species are observable on benthic algae and on the corals Pocillopora and Porites (see above). Large populations of algal-browsing surgeonfishes (Acanthuridae, represented by 5 species) are present; the most abundant is Acanthurus glaucopareius. Scattered large schools of the Indo-Pacific manini, Acanthurus triostegus, also occur. There are 3 species of triggerfishes (Balistidae), and the most abundant, Melichthys niger, often occurs in large schools. Other bottom feeders include 3 species of damselfishes (Pomacentridae; Eupomacentrus arcifrons is the most abundant ), 6 species of wrasses (Labridae; a species of Halichoeres is the most abundant and Thalassoma lutescens occurs in large numbers), 4 species of butterflyfishes (Chaetodontidae ) including the angelfish Holacanthus passer, 4 species of snappers (Lut janidae; Lutjanus jordani is the most abundant), 1 species of puffer (Tetraodontidae, Arothron meleagris), 1 species of porcupine fish (Diodontidae, Diodon holocanthus), 2 species of grunts (Pomadasyidae), a species of goatfish (Mullidae), 4 species of groupers (Serranidae) and the moorish idol, Zanclus cornutus (Zanclidae). Gymnothorax flavimarginatus, a large dark-violet moray eel (Muraenidae ) with light spots, is aggressive during daylight hours and will swim near divers at depths of between 8 and 30 m. The zonation of dominant marine organisms at Cocos Island is summarized in Mable i": DISCUSSION Cocos Island has basically the same intertidal fauna of dominant gastropods as that of mainland Costa Rica (see Bakus, 1968) but the overall species diversity of benthic invertebrates does not seem to be quite as great. This could be due to its isolation, some 483 kilometers (300 miles) southwest of Costa Rica and about 7730 kilometers (4800 miles) east of Christmas island, directly across the Hast Pacific Barrier. One differ- ence between much of the Central American continental rocky intertidal zone and that of Cocos Island is the lower standing crop of fleshy benthic algae and the development of a strong intertidal band of Porolithon and/or Lithophyllum spp. with a very dense concentration of Tetraclita on the calcareous algae at Cocos Island. The subtidal structure of Cocos Island shows Porites to be highly developed, in contrast to many adjacent continental shores or islands very close to continental shores where corals are represented by either small isolated heads (ele. Playa del Coco, Costa Rica) or groups of up to 4 species of scleractinians occupying scattered patches no greater than about 5 by 5 meters in rough dimension (ene Isla Taboga, Panama). The coastal waters of Central America are often turbid, accounting for some of the differences between it and that of Cocos Island where the water is very clear (see Bakus , 1968, 1969a). However, Islas Secas (23 km from the coast) in the Gulf of Chiriqai and Isla Teuana (5° km from the coast) in the Gulf of Panama are reported to have well-developed coral reefs whereas there are only coral patches in the Islas Perlas (101 km from the coast), Gulf of Panama (Dr Charles Birkeland, personal sou eet)” Cocos Island does not have a true reef formation in that the entire substratum is not living coral. The degree of reef development is similar to that of Eameshur Bay, St John, U.S. Virgin Islands (personal observation by the author), although the species diversity of corals is far greater in the latter region. The diversity of fishes at Cocos Island is moderate when compared to that known for other tropical regions (see Bakus, 1969b). This might be expected considering the small size of Cocos Island and its geographical isolation. However, very large standing crops of fishes exist there and certain tropical representatives (Sec those fishes discussed previously) produce marked effects on the benthic biota. Fishes will con- sume essentially all organic wastes that are deposited into the water from ships, attesting to their voracity. The incidence 6 of biting and rasping of the substratum is probably responsible for the relatively low density of subtidal Balanus (probably eect eninsularis), in strong contrast to that of Malpelo Island (see below). The large populations of acanthurids, pomacentrids, balistids and scarids result in a profound reduction in the standing crop of benthic algae, and the many predators must be responsible for the low incidence of a number of different taxa of exposed benthic invertebrates. It is evident that primary production must be very high in order to support the large populations of fishes living there (particularly top consumers ) and that the turnover of energy must be very rapid. Five of the 7 species of holothurians collected from Cocos Island are toxic to fishes. Toxic bodyparts were rejected by jacks in the natural environment whereas non-toxic portions were immediately consumed by jacks. These data continue to support the hypothesis that toxicity in certain benthic invertebrates is a chemical defense mechanism against predation by fishes (Sakus, #197i))- The Smithsonian Institution, in early 1972, made a brief but concentrated study of zonation and population densities of benthic invertebrates at Malpelo Island (Isla Malpelo, Colombia, Dr Charles Birkeland, personal communication). Diving took place at 8 stations around the island to depths of up to 51 m. It is of interest to compare the differences between Malpelo and Cocos Islands because the former is located only about 600 kilometers (400 miles) east and slightly south of the latter. Malpelo Island is a small, steep and barren basaltic rock that lacks permanent reefs eeeO it at one site. The waters are characterized by having a strong thermocline (26. ye aero ah S55) °C between February 29 and March 3 of 1972) between about 6 and 335) Sil Balanus predominates on the rock walls and produces considerable sediment (white sand). Scarus is remarkably scarce. Pocillopora and two species of Porites predominate in shallower waters but below about 18 m Porites is replaced by two species of reef-—forming corals (Pavona). in contrast, Cocos Island has predominately a one species reef (about 95% Porites). Starfishes are apparently more diverse at Malpelo Island and the two islands may lack species in common. At Malpelo Island a black sponge (Polyfibrospongia), blue bryozoan, a purple hydrocoral aeaet and several species of gorgonians (Lophogorgia and Pacifigorgia) were dominant animals that, excepting Lophogorgia, were not observed at Cocos Island. However, it is possible that some of these organisms may occur on the windward side of Cocos Island or in water deeper than our diving range. The fish faunas of Malpelo and Cocos Islands appear to be similar in species composition and possibly also in standing crop. There is a slightly greater incidence of Indo-Pacific fish species at Cocos Island than at Malpelo Island. The prevalent parrotfishes at Cocos Island and their very low density at Malpelo Island result in marked differences in the occurrence of certain exposed benthic plants and animals. Algae at Malpelo Island, such as Padina, Sargassum and similar-sized species, were not observed at Cocos Island. Clipperton Island, about 1,045 km (700 miles) southwest OF SOULherneMexieo, }iS an jatoll that,.contains a reef flat, reef-front cut by channels, submarine terrace (12-18 m) and then a precipitous outer slope (Sachet, 1962). There sas Jooral (Pocillopora verrucosa, Pocillcpora meandrina and Pavona gigantea, see Squires, 1959) and algal growth on the reef front and submarine terrace. The lower edge of the submarine terrace and the outer slope are completely covered by corals. It is evident from these comparisons that major differences do exist in the components and distributions that comprise the marine biota of tropical eastern Pacific islands. Further work is needed to clarify the reasons for these differences and to incorporate the information into our knowledge of biogeography and general ecological theory. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS IT would like to thank Robert J. Lavenberg, Cruise Leader and Curator, Section of Fishes, Natural History Museum, Los Angeles County, William A. Bussing and Manuel M. Murillo, Departamento de Biologia, Universidad de Costa Rica, Robert N. Lea, Paul Wild and Steve Schultz, California Department of Fish and Game, for their unfailing assistance, diving observations and pleasant shipboard companionship. JI would especially thank my graduate student, Gerardo Green, for serving as diving and research assistant and providing under- water photographs. Lavenberg, Bussing, Murillo, and John 8S. Garth and Allan Havens, Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California and Charles Birkeland, Smithsonian Tropical Research Institute, read and criticized the manuscript. Numerous persons helped me by providing species identifications including: Paul Silva (benthic algae), Herbarium, University of California, Berkeley; John W. Wells (corals), Department of Geological Sciences, Cornell University; Frederick M. Bayer (gorgonians), University of Miami School of Marine and Atmospheric Science, Dora P. Henry (barnacles), Department of Oceanography, University of Washington, and John S. Garth (brachyuran crabs ) and Fred Ziesenhenne (echinoderms ) of the Allan Hancock Foundation. Of special help was the literature provided by Garth and manuscripts of species and zonation at Malpelo Island provided by Birkeland and his associates. A special acknowledgment is extended to the Janss Houndabtonetor their Support of this project in tropacal reef ecology. The scientific data were collected from the R/V Searcher, and to the Captain, Don Matthews, and crew (Richard McKean, Barney Schmidt, Craig Hampton) IT express my thanks for their cooperation and assistance. (98) LITERATURE CITED Atsatt, N. 1972. Distributional patterns of rocky intertidal gastropods in Discovery Bay, Jamaica. In: Bakus, G.J. (ed.). Marine studies on the north coast of Jamaica. AGowly Rese Buds eis Bakus, G.J. 1968. Zonation in marine gastropods of Costa Rica and species diversity. Veliger, 10(3): 207-211. —---------- 1969a. Some effects of sedimentation on benthic invertebrates of atoll lagoons. pp.503-504, in: Coastal Lagoons, A Symposium CARAS Castanares and F.B. Phlieger, eds ie Mem. Internat. Symp. Coastal Lagoons, UNAM-—UNESCO, Mexacoy De he Nove 2oO—OOLmlo ove —--------- 1969b. Energetics and feeding in shallow marine waters. Internat. Rev. Gen. Exper. Zool., Kh: 275-369. ---------- 1971. An ecological hypothesis for the evolution CMe ROpaleskimy ala Wikwedinle OQ:seiaisis, pO, H/A52, aing DeWielteS. A. and E. Kochva (eds.). Toxins of plant and animal origin. Gordon and Breach, London. Hertlein, L.G. 1963. Contribution to the biogeography of Cocos istand, “aneludainse ay bilo orsrapliy. — Proce mC alleitinnee Nc Gun Crimean. 52(B))e ZIGSBEo Paine, R.T. 1966. Food web complexity and species diversity. Amer. Nat.; 100(910): 65-75. Risk, M.J. 1972. Intertidal substrate rugosity and species diversity. Phi De dassiertataon,, Unaviers tty, Om »cOUmMemm Cadatornia. 7/9 pp Sachet, M-H. 1962. Geography and land ecology of Clipperton stand. 9 Atoll Resi Sule. sNoem cor aill—nmiss Squires, D.F. 1959. Results of the Puritan-American Museum of Natural History Expedition to western Mexico. Bull. Aner, Mus.) Nat 7 eHals bo Smneol 7) Oy =a *uOTZTSOd 8sATZOOdSeL IT9Y4Z 0 SUTpPIO.De pedue tae ete setoeds Tept}z13e4,UuL *‘soSuet Tept}{1T94UT IO sosuer yAdep eZeutTxor1dde s1eOTPUL SMOULVy I9u}z0 pue oeptsuerted) ; _ropoter itl | -dds euakyds (peututezyep SoOTIOUOTTeH OU OTOM SOUSTS TOF SnNT}USceMOdN| S}TWTT yydep toeMmoT) SAUAUOT LON -dds snainy ueoy unt TAydoyyty | oc- Snteos Io /pue seni Apuods uoyyETOLOd (pues UT ) sniejdoj,eeyO FEsGaroia SeptzLoOUIEA eepter4so eUlIODO TYUdGQ snitTnued OLS eTyoury eueperqd Seasrog: eIOdOTTLO0d ert} OWOUTY OG @prts pademooy — 18e0Q uedgO WoyuFELOLOd O etreuoydts e@tTaiainog Bet4sSO erreuoydts etSttT STeUL ey PT ToedzeL stxeuetd eindang SsTeuL 24 TION eindaing ‘snsdeiry : BUTIOFITT oe 24 TION (2) STTe901zeq 10 aaa | Ge at (Tettzse119}7) suoyort |) @prsS paemooy] — sAeg @pltsS paemMooy] — 3Se09 Uedg (a) uzdeq yPpUuUeTSI soo009 4e suISTUeSIO euTIeW JYUeUTWOp jo UOTZeUOZ “| STQGeL eae Siu, da Ty fies : pa bop Je } reap tr tes Se eee ne ict ae un es oh 6 r ead ea ioe ae ae ee $ ets: Ita se a le Ag } pa bio ts ie a% Boas Del REDD ie) ay 2) a ne eh eg a gS ae be A Rate | bees he | 25 Bic ; Ps a ae ees nea ~« ov - ; wi rin Ati . nw e ‘$0 ay toad, gad J a Wr per ery: min Aa bites cals Rr - ’ a i mes ae) 4 > a & 7 : ¥ + wi’ i { tg, ie 1 ery “Sea | ee | ~~ : # sax en ~ edhe t i is 78 ea ay pet te, meee ic Leeward side of Cocos Island showing the lush vegetation and one of many waterfalls. Low intertidal zone in Bahia de Wafer. Note Porolithon and/or Lithophyllum spp. on the rocks. Intertidal zonation on a vertical wall, leeward side of Cocos Island. The lichen-covered basalt is followed below by the dark encrusting alga Hildenbrandia or Petrocelis (?), A veneer of Porolithon and/or Lithophyllum spp. is covered by dense aggregations of Tetraclita stalactifera at the lowest level. °*TSeULIOS 4USTI IOMOT OUR UT UMOYS ST BueOTXOM eWlopeTq ‘pesmorqg useq eAey eeSTe OTY}UEq YOTYM 04 4US4KO 98} 940N -unjerjisqns [Teroo peep uo SuTMoa3 Boane eoerzSseqny ‘seystjgi0zz1ed Aq opeu syreuTy}Z004 snoreumu suUTMOYsS eOTUIOJTTeO SoTIOgG JO pesy puNnor eaTtTssell V . 4 24 ‘ G “Sojrtaog UO SHTeUITZ009 ey osTe e10N “SsoUusty}Z0ated Aq gyo ue44TG Useq saey A0yq) 2eU1 Se1eOTpUT eAOdOT{[ 100g Jo seyouerq oy} uo Sd} S1TYUM SOUL “eoOLUAOTELeo Sedraog jo punou e WOT SUTMOTS S3YSNqorT eTOdoTTtLo0g jo AuoToOO y *sousTy go dowzo Sutpueis YUSstu ou} 2940N “*QueWdOTSASp umuUTxeul 7e joor Teroo setoeds euo ATZUeUTWOpeId e SuTJUeseidet ‘-m OL ynoqe jo y4dep e ye BOTUTOFTTeO Soytstog ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 180 BIOGEOGRAPHY OF REPTILES ON SOME OF THE ISLANDS AND CAYS OF EASTERN PAPUA—NEW GUINEA by Harold Heatwole Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 ice "hs ae: A? a i? meet. | 3 ly ry ee = Lets a | 2 u a at hi a i y Payee " ae a eel) BEL Ee ie A) eire a a. y te Se Se MEW 2 NOSE AP TE EIR I ey poaheemes “a Contents itp roduct 1on General description of the islands Account of the terrestrial species Aquatic and semi-aquatic species Importance of reptiles to the human population Ecology Faunal similarity Species—numbers Minimum insular area Conclusions and summary Acknowledgments Literature cited Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Table 1 Table 2 =) : 2 BIOGEOGRAPHY OF REPTILES ON SOME OF THE ISLANDS AND CAYS OF EASTERN PAPUA—NEW GUINEA by Harold Hoetbmorlel INTRODUCTION During participation in part of the Fairbridge Expedition to New Guinea, February to May, 1969, I had opportunity to visit 17 islands and cays east of the New Guinea mainland for sufficient time to assemble reasonably complete collections of their terres-— trial reptilian fauna. The purpose of this paper is to present the results of that survey. Fairbridge (1971) has previously published a brief report on the expedition and a more detailed one is in preparation. The taxonomy of the New Guinea herpetofauna is not well known and much nomenclatural confusion exists. Consequently, placing species names on all insular specimens would have invol- ved extensive taxonomic studies for which sufficient comparative material is not available. Rather than describe doubtfully new species, or use names which are of uncertain application to the insular populations, I have deferred judgment until proper taxo- nomic studies clarifying relationships can be made, and have metherred Lo such taxa only by the generic name. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS The eastern islands are, in four groups, the northern most one being the Trobriands, consisting of the major islands of Kiriwina, Vakuta, Kuia, Kaileuna and Kitava (or Nowan ) and a number of smaller ones to the west collectively known as the Lusancays (Figs. is 2s) The larger islands and many of the smaller ones are raised coral; some of the small ones are sand cays. The most southerly group is the Louisiade Archipelago. It is made up of 3 large rocky islands primarily of orogenic origin, 1/ Department of Zoology, University of New England, Armidale, NiiSeie Zoot, Australia. (Manuscript received March 1oi72=—Edsi. ) 5 Misima (or St. Aignan), Rossel and Tagula (or Sudest), their surrounding small islands and cays (Fie. 1a)s and a series of small raised-coral islands and atolls with sand cays, lying between the major islands and the New Guinea mainland (Pigs. Beh) Between the two major groups mentioned above are two central groups (Fig. (liye On the west are the D'Entrecasteaux Islands which consist of 3 large volcanic islands, Goodenough, Fergusson and Normanby with their associated smaller islands and cays. To the east is Woodlark Island (or Murua) and its nearby islands. All these islands have a maritime tropical climate. Mean temperatures for the general area (at sea level) range from 24° to 30°C; average humidity is 80% (Tudor 1968). On Kiriwina during the hottest part of the year (December to March), the average maximum temperature ranges from Siang to 32286 and average minima are 22.8-23.3°C; in the coolest months (June to September) corresponding values are 285-20 oC and 22 Ean Oe (Brass 1959). Mean annual rainfall (coastal) is 356-391, 312-401, 419, 257, and 165 cm for Kiriwina, Misima, Woodlark, Fergusson and the Conflicts, respectively (Brass, LO 59R budor,, 1968). The year is divided into two seasons, the dry period of the southeast trade winds, May to November, and the wet period of the northwest monsoons, December to April (Tudor 1968). There are transition periods of doldrums between the two seasons (Brass 1959). The principal islands and many of the smaller ones have long been inhabited, the population totalling approximately 57,300 in the mid-sixties for the area under consideration (Tudor 1968). Non-European influences include burning and clearing (Brass 1956); European onesdhave been the development of copra plantations on most of the islands suitable for raising coconuts, development of trade, establishment of missions, bringing of the native population under government control, extensive mining of gold on Woodlark, Tagula and Misima, and the use of a number of the islands for military purposes during World War II (Brass 1956, 1969; Tudor 1968). The islands and cays visited by the author will be described in more detail. Areas of these and other islands to which ref- erence is made, were obtained by planimetry of nautical charts and from Tudor (1968). Elevations were either estimated during visits or obtained from nautical charts or from Devery (1968). Some values from nautical charts seemed excessive and probably are elevations to tree-top level. These are followed by an asterisk in the text. Kiriwina: This was the largest island surveyed. It has an area of 29,050 hectares and a maximum elevation of 46 m. Mangrove forests occur along part of the coastline; the interior is forested by second growth but is extensively cleared for the ee ee ae 3 raising of yams and taro. Copra is exported. The island is densely populated (about 9,000 in the mid-sixties; Tudor 1968), there being several large villages and missions with smaller ones scattered throughout. Losuia serves as a port for small vessels. Roads connect major villages. Livelihood is obtained from the sea, from gardening and fruit gathering, and from exporting wood-carvings, and selling these as well as shells, pearls and other items to tourists which come to the island's single hotel on a weekly commercial flight. The island served as a base for Allied fighter aircraft during World War II. Dim Sim: This member of the Lusancays is a small island (64 hectares, elevation 68 m) consistin= of a sandy, flat pillain leading to a promontory of raised coral. A native village of about 60 inhabitants is located on the sandy portion. The vegetation of this part consists largely of coconuts and gardens; shrubs and trees occur on the rocky part. Livelihood seems to be predominantly from the sea. Wagalasa: This island is close to Sim Sim and is very similar to it in topography. It has an area of 35 hectares and a maximum elevation of 62 m. It is not permanently inhabited although a number of huts are present and the inhabitants from Sim Sim make nearly daily excursions there. It is largely forested; coconuts are cultivated. Kawa: This island has a steep, almost cliff-like perimeter. Maximum elevation is 52 m and the area is #7 hectares. A trail leads from a narrow beach up to a village and mission on top. The inhabitants subsist from gardening, fruit gathering and from the sea. Gabwina: This is a low sand cay (elevation about 5 m). The area is 26 hectares. It is uninhabited though a few huts are present and people from other islands visit it to harvest coconuts. It is forested. Panaete: This is the largest (3,010 hectares) of the Deboyne islands. It is mostly flat but a rocky area reaches an elevation of 223 m. Though mostly forested, there are a number of native gardens and plantations on the flat parts. A large village, complete with modern school, is present. Panapompom: This member of the Deboyne group (Fig. 1) is rocky but bordered by a broad flat area containing a native village, gardens and plantations. It is mostly forested. The area is 871 hectares and maximum elevation is 158 m. It was used as a Japanese sea-plane base during World War II. Wari (or Teste): This is a rocky island of the Louisiade Archi- pelago (Fig. a Tt has an area of 215 hectares and a maximum elevation of 119 m. It was influenced by humans more than most of the islands visited. The rocky.peaks are grassy and are partly 4 eroded in places. The lower slopes and flat areas have gardens and coconut plantations; small forested areas with a heavy herbaceous undergrowth occur. One village is present. Marai (or Stuers): This is a coral and sand island (area about 5 hectares, elevation 26m*). It is forested with Casuarina, coconuts and other trees. A shrub zone of Tournefortia, Scaevola and Suriana encircles the island at the level of the upper beach. It is uninhabited although apparently visited by copra ‘collectors: Quessant: This is a small sand cay of about 5 m elevation and anlarealot, O64 shectanes. Situ spillancedy, anomes tied) pein mats ihon: permanently inhabited though coconut plantations are present and at the time of our visit, 6 natives were there collecting copra. Unnamed Cay (Long Reef, Louisiade Archipelago ) (Fie. 4), unofficially named Delores Cay by the Fairbridge expedition and referred to as such in the expedition report in preparation: This is a small (219 hectares), low (2 m) uninhabited sand cay covered by coconut palms, shrubs and small trees. There was an abundance of dead wood on the ground suggesting recent storm damage. Panawan:) “Lhivs a's aysand and coral’ cay (12 hectares, 31m elevation*). It is uninhabited although copra plantations are present. It is mostly forested. IES, 2 This island is low (about 3} m) and has an area of 97 hectares. It 1s forested in’ part but the majority of guhe vegetation consists of coconut plantations with an undergrowth of shrubs and herbs. The island is inhabited by the plantation owner and his wife and about 18 native laborers brought in from New Britain. Some plant-enriched, clay-like soils occur in small depressions. Gabugabutau: This is a sand cay of 1.5 m elevation and an area of 3.2 hectares. It is long and narrow, in one place being no wider than several meters. Part is forested and contains coconuts; part has a shrub cover of Scaevola and Pandanus. Many trees were broken down and dead wood was abundant. This island showed the most severe storm damage of any I visited. It is uninhabited though the copra plantation is regularly worked by laborers from Irai. Auriroa: This island is a sand cay similar in appearance and vegetation to Gabugabutau except it suffered less storm damage. It has an area of 61 hectares and an elevation of about 2 m. It is not permanently inhabited. Tupit: An uninhabited sand cay containing a copra plantation with an open shrubby and herbaceous understory. A herd of 5 goats was present. It has an area of 1.6 hectares and an elevation of About a) m- 5 Bare Sand Cay: This is a small cay near Gabugabutau with an area of 0.002 hectares and an elevation of about 0.5m. It lacks vegetation and was the only island visited that did not have any terrestrial reptiles. Several islands not adequately surveyed on the Fairbridge expedition are included in the biogeographic treatment. One of them, Kuia (area Nels hectares, elevation 3 m) was well collected by a party from the Australian Museum and I examined their specimens. The others were Kaileuna, Kitava, Fergusson, Good- enough, Normanby, Misima, Rossel, Tagula and Woodlark. Species lists for these islands and for the New Guinea mainland were assembled from my specimens (Misima, Goodenough) , from the literature (de Vis 1892; Boulenger 1895a; de Rooj 1915, 1917; Burt and Burt 1932; Loveridge 1948; Brass 1959) and from an unpublished list of identified specimens in the American Museum of Natural History collected by the Archbold and Whitney expeditions (Zweifel, personal communication). As most of the specimens upon which these lists are based have not been examined by the author, only data on numbers of species are used in the present paper; with the exception of Kuia, faunal lists for these islands are not included in Appendices 1 and 2 nor in Table 1, nor are species present on them, but not on the islands I visited, discussed in the species account. Some literature (e.g.', Boulenger 1895b, de Haas 1950) was not very useful as localities were often given as "Trobriand Islands" or "D'Entrecasteaux Islands" without specifying which particular island. On the basis of small, incomplete collections made on Misima, Goodenough and Samarai, I can report as new records, ' the occurrence of Cryptoblepharus boutoni and the introduced toad, Bufo marinus on Samarai, and Lepidodactylus lugubris and Sphenomorphus sp. (perhaps undescribed) on Misima. I can confirm the presence of Emoia mivarti, EPmoia caeruleocauda, Emoia atro- costata and Dendrelaphis sp. on Misima, and Emoia mivarti on Goodenough. ACCOUNT OF THE TERRESTRIAL SPECIES In the following account, the scientific name is followed by the common names, where known, in English, Pidgin and/or one of the native island languages. For the last, the spelling is phonetic. It is felt that species lists for small islands are reasonably complete, especially for skinks. Geckos, snakes, and particularly Typhlops, tend to be more secretive and some species may have been overlooked on even the small cays. Faunal lists of islands the size of Kiriwina and larger, will almost certainly be added to in the future. In many cases I have only one specimen of a given species from an island. This gives a false impression, however, of the thoroughness of collecting. 6 For small islands, once a species was represented in the collection, further attempt to secure additional material was usually not made, though specimens proffered by helpful islanders were diplomatically accepted. Series were collected on the large islands (Qos 4 Kiriwina). ORDER SQUAMATA Suborder Sauria Gekkonidae Cyrtodactylus pelagicus: Records from museum specimens. No ecological data. Gekko vittatus: Record from museum specimen. No ecological data. Gehyra oceanica: This gray gecko of medium size, about 75 mm snout to vent (s—v), was found under loose bark or under logs in coconut groves and other, rather open beach-side areas. It is nocturnal. Gehyra sp.: This species was found under dead bark in much the same type of habitat as G. oceanica. It is brown and reaches 45 mm s—v. Lepidodactylus lugubris: This slender gecko (about 4O mm s-v) was found under loose bark in rather open situations and in houses. It is light brown with darker transverse markings on the back. Lepidodactylus sp.: The single individual encountered was under a log. It was dark brown and 47 mm s-v. Varanidae Varanus indicus (Monitor Lizard, Goanna, Gawi): This species was found near water, either along rocky coasts or mangroves. It has been known to feed on marine organisms (Mertens 1934), and Hediger (1933-34) indicates it voluntarily enters the sea. On Kiriwina, it was most frequently seen basking on logs or mangrove roots along channels through swamps. In life it is black with yellow spots. It is the largest lizard on the islands; adults reach a total length of about 1 m. Scincidae Carlia fusca (Carpiyeta): This lizard was active from sun-up to dusk, and foraged over leaf litter and low herbs, usually in relatively open areas but with at least some canopy cover. Adults q reach up to about 55 mm s-v and are rather heavy-bodied. Juveniles” are dark with lines of white spots on the dorsum and side of the head; these are lost during growth and adults are nearly uniformly brown. Cryptoblepharus boutoni: This extremely widespread species was one of the most abundant and common lizards on the islands. i It was usually found in sunny, rather open areas on tree trunks or piles of sticks, though it was sometimes seen on logs, large boulders containing crevices, and occasionally on the ground. it ws aqsmati. (40 mm s-v), slender lizard, bluish gray below, darker above with pronounced dorsolateral white stripes and a middorsal band which varies in conspicuousness among individuals. Emoia atrocostata: This is a medium-sized skink (about 75 mm s-v). it is found in sea-side habitats (Mertens 1934). Alcala and Brown (1967) five its habitat as "rocky beaches and mangrove swamps". JI found it in the former on Misima. On Gabugabutau it inhabited crevices in tree roots and logs near the high tide splash zone of a sandy beach. Hediger (1933-34) mentions that it is never found more than 100 m from the sea, and that individuals swim in tide pools. It is white beneath, becoming blue-gray to brown above, irregularly mottled with small whitish and dark spots. The sides have a series of large black spots nearly coalescing into a lateral band. Emoia caeruleocauda: This is a small, blue-tailed skink. I obtained no ecological data. Emoia cyanogaster: This lizard forages on shrubs and vines up to about 2 m above the ground, where there is a nearly closed canopy overhead. It is light green below becoming brown dorsally, with regularly scattered whitish scales. It has a white upper lip. Adult size is about 80 mm s-v. Hediger (1933-34) considers this species a branch occupant as compared to L. smaragdina which occurs more on tree trunks. Emoia mivarti (Kulumamauva, Koyonikw4): This small (about 45 mm cave slender skink was extremely common. It is a ground form, foraging on the leaf litter, especially around palm fronds and other debris, in areas of partial canopy cover, though venturing into more open areas. It is brown above, lighter beneath. There is a middorsal lighter band of varying conspicuousness (or absent), a pair of white dorsolateral stripes, and a pair of white lateral stripes. 0.50 in all cases). Thus none of these parameters was important in influencing species—numbers. The lack of an effect of area can also be appreciated from figure 9. For rocky islands, neither distance measure had a signifi- cant effect on log species-number (P ranged from 0.08 to 0.80). However, both area and elevation when treated separately, had a Significant effect. The slope of the regression coefficient of each was significant (P<0.001 TLisl. Joyeiplal cases). However, ina multiple regression, reduction in sum of squares due to fitting elevation after area was not significant (P = Ooi) Thus, the apparent effect of elevation may be attributable to the corre- lation of elevation and area, elevation not exerting a signifi- cant independent effect. The regression was repeated for both types of island using species-numbers rather than log species-numbers. The results were similar to the above. For rocky islands, area accounted for 68% of the variation in species-number whereas it accounted for 74% of the variation in log species-number. Thus the latter 16 measure is preferable. Transformation to natural logarithms gave Similar results as base ten logs and also accounted for 74% of the variation. Thus there is little to choose between the two types of logs in the present study. Only base ten logs are referred to below. As only area had a significant effect on species-—numbers, the expression relating these two variables is adequate for descriptive or predictive purposes. The calculated line (fase 9) for rocky islands, including the mainland of New Guinea is: on =O a5 ilimeAtas - New Guinea was, however, excluded from the multiple regression analysis as one of its distance measures was zero and consequently not subject to treatment. MacArthur and Wilson (1967) reviewed the exponents obtained by various authors for the species-area formula. The expected value is 0.27 and most observed values were between O.20 and 0.35. Those higher than 0.27 were attributed to the breaking up of biotas on large islands into semi-isolated communities due to increase in topographic barriers and environmental variation. This seems to be the case in the present study as a value (0. 335) near the upper limit of previously observed ones was obtained. Preston (1962) gives an exponent of 0.318 for West Indian lizards and snakes. On the basis of the above analyses, it can be concluded that in eastern New Guinea, a sand cay large enough to have any terres-— trial reptilian species at all, is large enough to have the maxi- mum number for cays; areal effects if present are small enough to be ignored. In contrast, species—number increases markedly with island area on rocky islands. Species-number of neither group seems to be independently influenced by elevation or distance, at least within the range of values occurring in the present study. The lack of an effect of area on species-—numbers of sand cays requires further discussion. it is possible that very small islands may not be subject to the same areal effect as large ones and thus, in the present study, if rocky islands as small as the smaller sand cays could have been examined, their values might have resembled those of sand cays, i.e., the observed differences in areal effect may not have been due to substrate differences at all, but to discrepancies in average size of sand cays and rocky islands. The "small island effect" is not restricted to the present study. On Kapingamarangi Atoll, species-—number of higher plants did not increase with area on islands in the lower end of the size range (below isyouig 3) 5 5) acres), whereas it did on larger islands (Niering 1963). Carlquist (1967), and Whitehead and Jones (1969) suggest that the small-island effect is due to the fact that on small islands, establishment is restricted to the flotsam-transported segment of immigrants (hardy, salt-—tolerant forms), and all such species can colonize a wide range of small island sizes. A similar argument could be advanced for the Wy present data; "strand" reptiles (the widespread Pacific element ) adapted to high temperatures and salinities, would be able to survive well on small islands and would be tolerant of environmental conditions during flotsam transport. Hence their immigration rates would be high, and even small cays (with presumed high extinction rates) could maintain high species- numbers by frequent re-invasion. Most of such hardy, mobile species would be present on many islands, regardless of size or substrate, and hence there would be little or no areal effect on species—number (note that in the present study there were no common species restricted to sand cays). However, once a certain island size is reached (perhaps about the upper size Pimit for sand cays), habitats suitable for non-strand reptiles would become available and those arriving by means other than flotsam could become established. Strand species would, of course, still be present in beach habitats. Thus, an inflected species-area curve could result from a linear base-line for strand species (line for sand cays and its dotted extrapolation in figure 9) upon which the linear species-area curve of non-strand species is Superimposed. An inflection is also suggested by species-area data on reptiles from Californian and Caribbean islands (Fig. 10); none of these islands were sand cays. However, analysis of more archipelagoes, particularly those with very small islands, is needed before the extent of inflections in species-area curves for reptiles can be elucidated. A second feature of possible importance to the observed difference in species-area curves for rocky and sandy islands is that the relationship between ecologic diversity and area may differ between the two substrate types. For rocky islands, larger area often means greater diversity in vegetation and climate, with a corresponding influence on species-—number. However, all sand cays within the size-range studied show little change in environmental diversity; increase in area results merely in more habitat of the same type rather than a greater number of habitats, and consequently in relatively few additional species. MacArthur and Wilson (1967) postulate a different explana- tion. They feel that islands below a certain size are highly unstable and that all the biota (regardless of ecological and adaptation) would consequently be periodically extirpated inde- pendently of island size within a certain range of small values. An example might be the effect of hurricanes on small cays. Storm—induced extinction would be independent of island size until a sufficient size were reached that (1) parts of the island might lit outside of the main path of the storm or (2) that topo- graphic diversity would be adequate to provide shelter permitting survival. In summary, the differences in effect of area on reptile Species-numbers between sand cays and rocky islands may reflect a difference in relationship of ecological diversity to area on the two types of island. On the other hand, it may not be due to substrate differences at all, but to differences in average size of islands of the two substrate types. The "small island effect" has been postulated by other investigators to result from (1) area-independent extinction on small, unstable islands or (2) from selective establishment of flotsam-—transported, strand species on very small aSilernds 27 Assessment of the | relative merits of these theories requires further study. The overriding influence of area on species—numbers and the negligible effect of elevation and distance found in the present study is not applicable to all groups of organisms nor to all archipelagoes. For example, Hamilton et al. (1963) found no correlation between species-number of Galdpagos plants with island area, whereas elevation, area of adjacent island, distance to nearest island, and distance to center of the archipelago had | Significant effects. Similarly, distance measures accounted for the majority of variation in species-numbers of finches on the Galapagos, with plant diversity and elevation being less important; island area was not a determinant (Hamilton and Rubinoff 1963, 1964). Lack (1969) has subsequently challenged this conclusion on the basis that isolation is ecological rather | than imposed directly by distance. In any event, the Galdpagos finches are probably exceptional because island area is the major predictor of species-numbers in most multiple regression analyses carried out on insular avifaunas (Hamilton and Rubinoff 1967). | An understanding of the physical factors acting as determinants | of species-numbers clearly demands study of the proximate factors in dispersal, establishment and extinction of various taxa on many archipelagoes, as well as additional multiple correlation analyses. Species-numbers are almost certainly influenced by the ecological interactions within the fauna. For example, Wilson and Taylor (1967) found that species-—numbers of native ants in the Pacific were higher than those of tramp species on islands of comparable sizes even though the available pool of the latter was much higher than the number present on any one island. They attributed this to the fact that among native ants there has been opportunity for niche partitioning to occur within the assemblage, whereas most tramp Species are recently introduced and evolution- ary adjustment among them has not taken place. In the present study only two species had a nearly mutually exclusive mosaic distribution. All others for which there were adequate data showed niche partitioning, and the equilibrium species=-number for the eastern New Guinea archipelago has probably undergone evo- lutionary adjustment. 7 2/ ; —Heatwole and Levins (in prep.) have added still another alter- native, i.e., that species-numbers may be influenced by type of trophic structure which can be maintained on specific types of very small islands. Wy In comparison to two other archipelagoes (Caribbean and Californian islands) the equilibrium species-numbers of the larger islands are high in the New Guinea area, though those for the smaller islands are about the same (Fig. 10). MINIMUM INSULAR AREA The Minimum Insular Area (MIA) for a given taxon is here defined as the minimum island area necessary for supporting at least one species of that taxon. The smallest cay on which reptiles were found was Tupit (area 1.62 hectares). Bare Sand Cay (0.002 hectares ) was the only one examined on which they were absent. Thus the Minimum Insular Area for reptiles on sand cays in eastern New Guinea is estimated to lie between 0.002 and 1.62 hectares. The corres-— ponding value for rocky islands is not known as none smaller than 30 hectares was examined. However, extrapolation of the species- area curve indicates that, on the average, species-number becomes less than 1.0 on islands smaller than 7.6 hectares (Fig. 9). If such an extrapolation is valid, this method provides an objective way of calculating the MIA for comparative purposes, i.e., the point where the species-—area curve intersects the line Y=1, in this case 7.6 hectares. However, extrapolation of the species curve would not be valid when inflections in the curve are present (see above). MIA may have to be separately calculated for "strand" and "non-strand" species. MIA probably differs greatly among different taxa, and even for a given one (Qn reptiles) there may be regional differences dependent upon phy- Siological tolerances of species in the source area. Comparative studies are badly needed. CONCLUSIONS AND SUMMARY An analysis of the insular reptile fauna of eastern Papua-— New Guinea has suggested that niche partitioning has occurred among most species but that members of one of the species-pairs may competitively exclude each other, one being favored on sand cays, the other on rocky islands. Faunal similarity is greatest between members of island-pairs which are very close together, lowest when inter-island distances are very great. However, over an intermediate range of distances, there is no effect of distance on faunal similarity. This range extends further upward for rocky island-pairs than for those whose members are sand cays. Where members of island-pairs are of different substrates, relation of distance to faunal similarity is much more variable. Species—number on rocky islands is strongly area—dependent.| On sand cays, species-number is area-independent. Two hypotheses are suggested to explain this. One is that there is less change in ecological diversity with island size on sand cays than there is on rocky islands. The second is that there is no real differ- ences between the two types, the apparent differences arising from 20 the fact that the smaller islands were all sand cays and the larger ones rocky islands, with the species-area curve being non-linear, the inflection coincidentally occurring at about the upper size limit of sand cays. Several hypotheses as to the nature of the "small island effect" are discussed. Species—-numbers were not significantly influenced by island elevation, distance from New Guinea, or distance to nearest larger island. A new ecological term, Minimum Insular Area (MIA) is defined. More questions are raised than are answered by this study. It is hoped that the hypotheses suggested will have heuristic value and will stimulate further investigation in this field. Data are now being collected from a large number of islands by myself and my colleagues in order to elucidate some of the problems arising from the data presented here. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS T am grateful to the other members of the Fairbridge expedition to New Guinea, especially Prof. and Mrs. Rhodes Fairbridge, Colin Freeman, Elizabeth Mann, Marian Cahill, Brian Phillips, Warren Manser and David Burchill for their aid and many kindnesses, to the Explorer's Club, U.S. Navy Oceanographic Office, Vetlesen Foundation and Catron Foundation which collect-— ively financed the expedition. I am also indebted to the Papua- New Guinea Dept. of Agriculture and Fisheries for services and sea transport, to the Dept. of Earth Sciences, University of Papua-New Guinea for various services, to the many islanders who, despite language barriers, enthusiastically aided in the collection of specimens, and to Fr. Murphy of the Kiriwina Catholic Mission for the photographs of Crocodylus porosus. Harold Cogger of the Australian Museum kindly permitted examina- tion of specimens in his charge and both he and Fred Parker aided in identification of material. Drs. John Burr and Victor Bofinger advised on statistical procedures and computer techniques. Dr. Richard Zweifel, of the American Museum of Natural History, supplied a list of the herpetological specimens collected on some of the islands by the Whitney and Archbold expeditions. Dr. Sweifel, Dr. F.R. Fosberg and various colleagues and students at the University of New England criticized the manuscript. They should not be held responsible, however, for the views expressed, as in some cases they disagreed with the interpretations presented in this paper. Elizabeth Cameron, Barbara Saylor, Pam O'Hara, Elizabeth Cherry and Audry Heatwole aided in preparation of the manuscript. (2) LITERATURE CITED Menta Ane mona brown. Wace iOo7. Populativon ecolory of the tropical scincoid lizard, Emoia atrocostata, in the Philippines. Copeia 1967: 596-604. Barme, M. 1968. Venomous sea snakes (Hydrophiidae), in: Venomous animals and their venoms, W. Btlicherl, E.E. Buckley and V. Deulofeu, Eds., vol. 1: 285-308, Academic Press, New York. Boulenger, G.A. 1895 a. On a collection of reptiles and batra- chians from Ferguson Island, D'Entrecasteaux Group, British New Guinea. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. VI, 16: 28-32. -------------- 1895 b. Descriptions of two new reptiles obtained by Mr. A.S. Meek in the Trobriand Islands, British New Guinea. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. VI, 16: 408-409. Brass. Wes Oboe Results of the Archbold Expeditions. Now 75. Summary of the fourth Archbold Expedition to New Guinea Soop ea bute Amer Mus. Nat. Hist. tit: ~y=ioo. ---------- 1959. Results of the Archbold Expeditions. No. 79. Summary of the fifth Archbold Expedition to New Guinea (956-1057) bull, Amer. Mus. Nat. Hast. (Ss) 1—70- Bryan, E.H.J. 1959. Notes on the geography and natural history CReVaicemohande Atoll Res. Bull. 66. 1-22. Pci Fold a nutri Dos, Herpetological results. of. uve Whitney South Sea Expedition. VI. Pacific island amphibians and reptiles in the collections of the American Museum of Natural History. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 63: 461-597. Bustand. Hoke 1970. Australian lizards. Collins, Sydney, 162 pp. Mistard, Hak. sana tmpus, CC. 1970. Farst ianternatvtonal recapture of an Australian tagged Loggerhead turtle. Herpetologica 262 358-359. carlqutst. so 1907. The biota of long=—distance dispersal. V. Pham, eduspersal) jo Pacitirc aslands. | Bulilastorrey Bot. Ciub, Of 129-1162. Mapp en oeeanacolptey. Hac. 19/1. Notes on the vascular ilonra and terrestrial vertebrates of Caroline Atoll, Southern tine mictandse Atoll Res. Build. 14 -et—d ol. Dammerman, K.W. 1948. The fauna of Krakatau 1883-1933. Verhan- delingen der Koninklijke Nederlandsche Akademie van Wetens-— chappen, afd. Natuurkunde 44: 1-594, plus 11 plates. 99 Devery, P.J., ed. 1968. The Reader's Digest complete atlas of Australia. Griffin Press, Adelaide, 183 pp. Downes, M.C. 1969 a. Status report on crocodiles in the Territory of Papua and New Guinea. Mimeographed, 4 pp. —---------- 1969 b. Protection for the crocodile skin trade in Papua and New Guinea. Mimeographed, 6 pp. Fairbridge, R.W. 1971. Advance report on the Fairbridge New Guinea copal) reef expedition.) AtollewRes se buleled yt Sl O aie Fricke, H.W. 1970. Die S8kologische Spezialisierung der Eidechse Cryptoblepharus boutoni cognatus (Boettger) auf das Leben in © der Gezeitenzone (Reptilia, Skinkidae). Oecologia 5: 380-391. Hamilton, ©.H. and Rubino, ©. 1969.) isola talon.) sendemascmemencl multiplication of species in the Darwin finches. Evolution 17: 388-403. lakeiibiLigoaly APSIalgy IRosliNGHOe, I055 Beuewin deo, Rylkle a@incl uel, Gs 1965. Species abundance: natural regulation of insular variation. Scoremoee Wes 157521 577 - Hamilton, Ts. and Rubanot.o, he 96.) .On model smpre date: abundance of species and endemics for the Darwin finches in the Galapagos archipelago. Evolution 18: 339-342. Hamilton, ©: nH. and (Rubino. oie. 19672) Ona predtetne samc ulate variation in endemism and sympatry for the Darwin finches in the Galapasos anchipelaco.) MhemAmetan Nei iOll- dion =i Harrison, J.L. 1965. Number of mammals on the Malaysian islands. J. Malaysian Branch Royal Asiatic Soc. 38: 26-42. Haas, C.P.J. de. 1950. Checklist of the snakes of the Indo- Australian archipelago. Treubia 20: 511-625. Heatwole, H. and MacKenzie, F. 1967. Herpetogeography of Puerto Rico. IV. Paleogeography, faunal similarity and endemism. Evolution 21: 429-438. Hediger, H. 1933-34. Beitrag zur Herpetologie und Zoogeographie neu Britanniens und einiger umliegender Gebiete. Zool. Jahrbucher 65: 441-582. Lack, D. 1969. Subspecies and sympatry in Darwin's finches. Evolution 23: 252-263. Levins, R. and Heatwole, H. 1963. On the distribution of organisms on islands. CAieallos' JOunes Ses6 B38 l/Bol7 7 - Loveridge, A. 1946. Reptiles of the Pacific world. Macmillan Co., New York, 259 pp. 23 ---------- 1948. New Guinean reptiles and amphibians in the Museum of Comparative Zoology and United States National Moseum.. Soli Mus. Compe. Zool. (Harvi Codils 102 9052430. Machrihue, 7k. Hos and Wilson, 20.1963. An equilibrium theory of insular zoogeography. Evolution 17: 373-387. Machrihur, R.H. and Willson; E.0. 1967. The theory of island DIC cCOSrapMy bh Ince ron Univ. Press, Princeton, 203 ‘pp. Mertens, R. 1934. Die Insel-Reptilien, ihre Ausbreitung, Variation und Artbildung. Zoologica 32: 1-209 + 6 plates. Niering, W.A. 1963. Terrestrial ecology of Kapingamarangi Atoll, Caroline Tistands; Ecol. Monogr. 33: 131-160. Pope, CoH wiobo. Ehe reptaltle world, a natural history of the snakes, lizards, turtles, and crocodilians. Alfred A. Knopf, New York. 325 pp. Preston, FW. 1962. The canonical distribution of commonness Andarartive Paste, and Part Tl. Ecology 43: 185-215, 410-432. Rooij, N. de. 1915. The reptiles of the Indo-Australian archi- pelaro.) ee lacenritta, Chelonia, Emydosauria. hed. Briii, idee wenden) 968 upp. ------------ 1917. The reptiles of the Indo-Australian archi- pelago- et. Ophadzas: E.J. Brill, Ltd. , Heiden, 33 ppe Ssavate. J.M. 1964. Evolution of the insular herpetofaunas, pp.219-227 in: Proceedings of the Symposium on the Biology on phe (Catitornia Tstands, R.N. Phalbrick, Ed. Santa Barbara Botanic Garden, Santa Barbara. Thornton, I.W.B. 1967. The measurement of isolation on archi- pelagoes, and its relation to insular faunal size and endemism. Evolution 21: 842-849. midors J. bd. 1966." Pacific Eslands Year Book and Who's Who. 10th edition, Pacific Publications, Sydney, 718 pp. fs CeW.ade 1692. Zoology of British New Guinea. Part i. Vertebrata. Ann. Qid. Mus. 1892 (2): 3-24. Whitaker, A.H. 1970. : Z is 2 > 2 z 2 +STd = = (2) C961 U0ZSerg gas) T9470 94% FO euNeJ 94} UT pepnNyTOUT ote pueL[ST suo uo saetosds [Te esnedseq peyeTNoTeo oq JouUeD. sonTeaA-zZ Ysnoy, AL TAeSTIWTS [Teuneyz ssoOTO soeZeoTpuT xy *pepnzTourt ete seTtydet go setoeds Tetaszse1t94 ATUQ “*VENIND MAN-VONdVd NYALSVAANT SULVd-GNVISI 40 (UST) SHONVLISIG GNVISI-YHINI GNV (2-1) ALIYVIINIS IVNOVa JO SHOIGNI *z aIdve jassoy "y‘o°Z °S8TJ FO UOTPVDOT 9FeSTpUT D‘g‘W Sexog *Apnys Jueseid oy} UT TIeJep UT pe}e9812 SSOy} 91e POUTTLepuN Soweu YIM SpUeTS] ‘*eoUTND MoN-endeg U19}Se9 JO SpueTST T DWISIW “S| JNAO83G { wodwodouodd Y1D|POOM d)a0U0d VANINS MIN - VWNdVd Aquow i0N JO dil Pl S yBnouspoos . i 6 =o \ \ e DADIIY~ DUIMIZ! DuNna!o0y “S| ONVIYSOUL SAVINVSN) C Gwadarab © Kanapu Simi: imlindon Kuaniagal——2 © Gabwina © Deia : Simsim —Q 4 Wagalasa o Konokonowona Nukuana—2 2 The Lusancays. Islands with names underlined are treated in detail in the text. No collections made on other islands. Tabulagoal Gabugabu tau —-#--* Ae Panasesa -47’ Itamarina ae “Auriroa ila Terenas Panaiiaii Panamaiia 3 Conflict Atoll. Islands with names underlined are treated in the text; others not examined. *pouTwexXS JOU SiIsy}ZO £}x97 oYt UL pejeet} OLB PSUTTIepuN soweu YIM SPpURTS] *SPURTST epeISTNoT uLeISeMYyINOS sUL, 7+ J1eWwvys 43334 SNOT aunala 7 ‘S| 9190S yuDssen IDMOM!|0| —*: j4aqui| —o i ‘foo “2 ‘Drum from Kawa Island showing use of Varanus indicus skin for the head (grass cord used to bind drum head to drum lost). 6 Natives of Kiriwina with a Crocodylus porosus which had eaten a 15-year-old girl. 7 Head of same crocodile (Photos by Rev. K.C. Murphy, M.C.S.). ? oF 8 e 6 100 200°2/400 INTER-ISLAND DISTANCE IN KM 8 Relation of Preston's (1962) index of faunal similarity (1-z) to inter-island distance for some small islands and cays of eastern Papua-New Guinea. A. Island-pairs in which both members were sand cays. B. Island-pairs in which both members were rocky islands. (C. Island-pairs in which the members were of different substrate types. Symbol on the right summarizes values in the range of neutral distances (see text); vertical line represents the range, horizontal line the mean and the rectangle indicate 2 standard errors on either side of the mean. In part A, the Black symbol represents values from part B shown for comparison. Dashed line is 1-z=0.73, the value Preston (1962) gives as the limit below which genuine isolation is present. *popnytoxe ore SeTT}de1 SuLyDeT spue[s] *(SpueTST [TeLones wo1z eIep SUTUTQUOD WOLF BUTI[NSeL son~ea asoy. SUTpNTIXe */96T ‘a8eaeS WOLF eIepP) SpuUeTST BTULOFTITe) WOLF SSoy} S,X pue (COGT S9TOMI OT pue SUTAS] WOLF eJep) SpUeTST uveqqTie) WOIF senTeA ore sqoq * (sUTT SUTJUeTS) SPUeTST AYDOL pue (SUTT TeJUOZTIOY) sAed pues uo eIep voUTND MoN-endeg ey} WOLF paJeTNOTed ssoy. oie SOUT] ‘*Se0SseTedtTys1e ¢ UL Poe pueTST pue so[tydex TeTsse1101 Jo tequnu-setoeds FO uoTeTOY OT (SAYVLOSH) V3IYV GNVISI gO! X Ol gO! X | 000'00! 0000! 000'! Oo! Ol PaaS pane T NN a a a) S3194dS YSEWNN fey * poyzou soezenbs seat Aq pele[NdTed souTT ‘Sed pues OF SUTT SY} FO uoTeTOde1}xXe Ue ST SUTT peysep oy], “SpueTST [e10D-pesteit 10 AYDOI WOLF 9soy. S,xX ‘SAed pues WOIF eJeEp JUSserdat S10q “*SpueTST eouTNy moN-endeg oy} FO eore PUeT[ST Ppue TOqumnU-soTIeds usemM{Eeq drTYsSUOTIeTOY 6 (S3JYVLO3SH) V3I"V INVISI gAX 02 gO! x O1 g®! X | 00000! 000'0! ood! ofo) Ol I $3194dS 2 Y38WNN oo! 002 ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 181 SAND CAYS OF TONGATAPU by D. R. Stoddart Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 : senOrR 10 Ate Contents Introduction The Cays Makaha'a Pangaimotu Manima Oneata Acknowledgements References OO SEOUL FW DY + it Figures Island of Tongatapu, showing location of the cays Makaha'a Pangaimotu Manima Oneata Shore erosion on the east coast of Makaha'a Beachrock at the southern point of Makaha'a: view towards the south Beachrock on the southwest coast, with cliffed Shore behind, on Makaha'a Beachrock at the west point on Pangaimotu Coastal vegetation on the southeast beach of Pangaimotu Clumps of Rhizophora on the north shore of Pangaimotu Page NEN OUI WW y vna vANY / nig g SAND CAYS OF TONGATAPU yn bis eR. eloddart, INTRODUCTION Tongatapu, like Tahiti, was visited by many early European navigators and was one of the first of the South Pacific islands to be charted in any detail. Though it was discovered (and named Amsterdam Island) by Tasman in January 1643 (Sharp 1968, 152-158), the first comments on the sand cays of the surrounding reefs were made by Cook during his second voyage, with the Resolution and Adventure, in October 1773. On this occasion Cook spent less than a week at Tongatapu, anchored in the northwest, and commented that "it would have taken up more time than I could spare to have surveyed these parts Minutely as there are a number of small Islots and reefs of rocks extending to the NE even further than we could see" (1961, 261). His naturalists, the Forsters, did not describe the cays, though Georg Forster remarked on the emersion of reef limestones on TOngatapu and its similarity to the continuing emergence of the land in Scandinavia Gia. ii ise) Cook returned on bis last voyage in 1777, with the Resolution and Discovery, and stayed for a month. He anchored near modern Nuku'alofa and landed on Pangaimotu and possibly other islands (1967, 124-125, 155, 890). He charted the area but gave no desicripiiom iof sthhe. cays. D'Entrecasteaux's expedition in seach of La Pérouse, with La Recherche and L'Espérance, visited the area in March jand: Aprad) a)793)- “The chart of the harbour was revised by Beautemps—Beaupré (1807), and incidental mention of the cays was made by Labillardiére (1800) and Rossel (1808). Pangaimotu was best known, for there D'Entrecasteaux established his observatory. Almost immediately afterwards the mission ship Duff called, and Wilson (1799) gave a further chart and description. Thirty years later, Dumont D'Urville called with the Astrolabe (April-May 1827) and also established an observatory on Pangaimotu, where his naturalists, Quoy and Gaimard, landed. He described his Say ate loneatapul (1830-35), 3b, 75) andsParis (1833) added to the chart. In common with the other early expeditions it is not possible to determine which specimens a / Department of Geography, Cambridge University. (Manuscript received May, 1972--Ed. ) were collected on the cays rather than the main island, Since locations are given only as "Tongatapu", but it is likely that many of the land plants and marine molluscs came from Pangaimotu and the surrounding area. Quoy and Gaimard themselves (1833, 931) only explored the reef round Pangaimotu, which they found "rich in Molluscs and Zoophytes of alll kinds). Shama leliy. simmer Aprsalenn Oo TOmmrinine United States Exploring Expedition under Charles Wilkes (1845) called, and it too established its observatory on Pangaimotu. In view of this documented history, it is surprising that no account of the sand cays north of Tongatapu exists in the literature, aparly fromibrileh anoles in thewRaciwh wc stands Ballot, norvare (the wmoederntncets sol apne somt meat: Tonga Islands at all well known. The opportunity of a brief visit to Nuku'alofa in September 1969, during the Cook Bicentenary Expedition to the South Pacific, was therefore taken to visit four of these islands. No collections could be made, and this account depends on rapid compass traverses and field notes made at that time. It is hoped that this whole complex of reefs and islands can be properly studied now that Nuku'alofa itself is accessible by air. Tongatapu is one of the southernmost islands of the Tonga Group, on the west side of the Tonga Trench. It isa limestone island 35 km long, with a maximum elevation in the southeast of 61 m. The northern shore of the island is deeply embayed, and its fringing reefs extend offshore to the northwest and northeast, enclosing a shoal platform 25-35 m deep (Figure Eis Small sand cays and some raised limestone islets are situated on these reef flats. The prevailing winds are the Southeast Trades: 60 per cent of wind observations are from the east and southeast, and about 10 per cent each from the northeast and south. Mean wind speeds are 7-10 kts. Hurricanes occur infrequently during the southern summer, approaching Tongatapu from the north and northwest. Mean annual rainfall at Nuku'alofa is 1784 mm, being highest during January-March and lowest in June; annual totals are rather variable. Mean daily maximum temperatures vary from 25 AC in July-September to 29°C in January-March, and mean daily minimum temperatures from 18°C in July-September to 23°C an February-March. The mean of the highest temperatures recorded in each month reaches eh 16 in February-March, and the mean of the lowest in each month falls to 13°C in July- August. For a tabulation of climatic data for Nuku'alofa, see Pacific Islands Pilot (II, 1969, 32). The tidal range at Nuku'alofa is 1.22 m at springs and 0.98 m at neaps (Admiralty Tide Tabiless) iam enon 3!) - IMe rome stands vrsited are all sand cays, their vegetation a coconut woodland much altered by man, witha fa pvoraliserub domtna ved iby Habiascus’ taliaceus. \ By comparison with reef islands in the Cooks, the absence of common littoral species such as Suriana, Pemphis and Tournefortia, and the relative unimportance of Scaevola and Guettarda are remarkable. The reef flats, however, are densely carpeted by sea grasses, absent in the Cooks, though mangroves, while present at Tongatapu, are inconspicuous on the cays visited (ef) Yuncker 1959). 4palg (AYES Makaha'a Makaha'a (Figure 2) is a small oval sand cay, 310 m tone ands 17O°m in ereatest wadth, area 3.9 ha, onthe eastern side of a reef patch isolated from the Tongatapu fringing reefs by a narrow channel about 10 m deep. Ie aS approached through a gap in the encircling reef at its northeast point. The cay was mentioned by Cook in 1777 (Maccoha ) and Labillardiére in 1793 (Mackaha), jowlie alae fullest early account is that by Wilson on PG. INonesuil “4)'7/S)7/s "We therefore embarked again, and crossed to another, called Makkahah: this we found well stored with cocoa-—nuts, plantains, breadfruit, and sugar-cane, also good fresh water. Upon the beach we found a curious coral rock, much resembling the stump of an old tree, about five feet high and Loun phacks 1b was full of holes, in which were ja great number of water-snakes..." He encamped on Makaha'a: "the few natives, about thirty in number, became our servants; from whom we could afterwards draw whatever we wanted of the produce, or demand their fish, if we chose it; or improve the island by making what alterations in it we pleased" (iFalsom 1/797 4 238))- The island has aggrading sand beaches on its west and northwest sides, and flat gravel spreads fronting eroded sand cliffs on its east side. These cliffs are 13-2 m high along most of the east shore (Figure 6), rising to 3 m in the southeast. Beachrock is extensively exposed, especially in the southeast (Figures 7 and 8), and the island is clearly Musratin= towards the northwest. The eastern cliff 1s cut in sand, exposing coconut roots, and is marked by fallen coconuts and some large fallen Hernandia. There is a waterhole near the northeast point. The vegetation is primarily an open coconut woodland with a varied undergrowth of low trees (Hernandia, Leucaena, Carica, Thespesia, Pandanus ), shrubs (Colubrina asiatica, thicket-forming Lantana camara, Rivina humilis), herbs (Hymenocallis, Euphorbia chamissonis, Vigna marina, Passiflora, Leonotis, Cassytha filiformis, Polypodium) , and grasses (probably Stenotaphrum and Sorghum). In the southeast this coconut woodland reaches the shore. Blsewhere there is a littoral thicket of Hilbiuscus )tilaaceus scrub, with scattered Guettarda, Calophyllum, Pandanus, Leucaena, and occasional Scaevola. On the aggrading west shore there are patches of pioneer strand vegetation: Sporobolus, Vigna marina and Cassytha. Some species are represented only by seedlings: Morinda and Casuarina in the coconut woodland, Rhizophora on the shore. Pangaimotu Pangaimotu (Figure 3) is the largest of the islands considered here, and the closest to Nuku'alofa; it is permanently inhabited and has a long history of human settlement. Water depths between it and the Tongatapu fringing reefs are less than 2 m. The island is roughly triangular, 680 m long N-S and up to 500 m wide, with an area of 22.3 ha. The shores are aggrading except at the extreme eastern and western points; beachrock outcrops only at the latter, at the foot of the beach (Pigure 9). The island was well-known to late eighteenth and early nineteenth century navigators. Cook mentioned it (as Pangymaudoo) in 1777, and D'Entrecasteaux in 1793 (Panghaimodou), Dumont D'Urville in 1827 (Pangai-modou), and Charles Wilkes in 1840 set up shore observatories there. On writer (Anonymous 1810, 68) referred to "Bonghy-Moddoo; on which former navigators pitched their tents, as a convenient spot, on account of its separation from the main Island, to preserve themselves from being too much incommoded by the natives". Cook has little to say of the cay, though Anderson (Cook 1967, 890) recorded that fresh water was available. Water was also found by D'Entrecasteaux: "On avoit apergu, dans le centre de l'ile Panghaimodou, un lieu oti étoient creusés plusieurs trous qui fournissoient de l'eau médiocrement bonne ... On creusa tout 1'espace ot étoient contenues ces petites sources; ce qui forma un réservoir assez grand pour remplir nos barils" (Rossel, 1808, 278). Dumont D'Urville also found the water not of good quality (1830-33, IV, 75). The most detailed account comes from Labillardiére (1800, 101): in the interior of the island "nous traversames des bois fourrées A 1'ombre desquels croissoient le tacca pinnatifida, le saccharum spontaneum, le mussaenda frondosa, l1'abrus precatorius, le pouvrier qui sert aux habitans a faire le kava, etc. Nous marchames ensuite sur des terrains employés les uns a la s\ culture des patates, les autres Aa celle de l'espéces d'igname appelée dioscorea alata: nous voyions d'ailleurs de jeunes plantes de vacoua, pandanus odoratissima, dont tes Heuailes Serventsa faire, despnattes. Plus Loan, nous trouvames A cause de son écorce dont ils fabriquent des étoffes pour se vetir. L*hybiscus tiliaceus croissent spontanement sur les bords de ces diverses cultures et tout para emer 5..." The island is covered with coconut woodland surrounded by a thicket of broadleaf trees; the interior was not investigated. The coastal woodland in the southeast (Figure 10) comprises shrubs of Sophora with Hibiscus, Cordia, Thespesia and Pandanus, fronting taller woodland of Calophyllum, Guettarda, Hernandia and Cocos. Along the north side of the island bushy Hibiscus, T Thespesia, Cordia and other trees line a narrow beach; other trees and shrubs include Colubrina, Xylocarpus, Morinda, Leucaena, Pandanus and Cocos, with clumps of Rhizophora in shallow water offshore (Figure 11). Erosion at the east point brings tall trees of Hernandia with Pandanus and Cocos to the water's edge. ~ Along the southeast shore the beach is wider: the trees (Calophyllum, Guettarda, Cocos) are fronted by a wide low shrub zone (Scaevola and | Hibiscus ) with pioneer herbs and grasses (Ipomoea, Vigna, Sporobolus, Cenchrus). The 1ittoral scrub opens at the western and southern points, where there are settlements. Cocos, Artocarpus and Casuarina are found here, with Sporobolus, Hymenocallis, Ipomoea, Catharanthus, Carica, Passiflora, and other cultivated, decorative and weed species. There is a white navigation beacon on the southwest coast, 160 m north of the south point. Manima Manima (Figure We), east of Pangaimotu, is a much smaller island (410 m long, up to 110 m wide, area 3 ha), aligned WNW-ESE. It is a low island, reaching about 1m above high water level, with intertidal fresh sand spits at each end, and with no beachrock exposed. Labillardiére in 1793 commented: "L'Tle de Manima offre un terrain peu cultivé; cependant nous y vimes quelques champs d'ignames, des cocotiers et des bananiers" (1800, 129). The island is covered with coconut woodland, with partly bare ground beneath, surrounded by a tall and dense fringe of broadleaf woodland. Taro, cassava and eggplant are grown beneath the coconuts, and Stachytarpheta and Polypodium are common. The littoral woodland is dominated by Hibiscus and Thespesia, with Cordia, Pandanus, Leucaena 6 and Guettarda, and clumps of much taller Hernandia, Calophyllum and Xylocarpus. At the west end there is an area of low shrubs, herbs and grasses: Sporobolus and Cassytha, with Stachytarpheta, Lantana and Leonotis. Manima is inhabited; in 1969 there were also goats, pigs and dogs on the island. Oneata Oneata (Figure 5) is a larger island immediately south one WewaslneyS ahie als} 550) iin dlome, bio tO ZOO mawsice, e@uacl 7/4 Ine. alia area. Vegetationally it resembles Manima in its coconut woodland fringed with dense Hibiscus scrub. Several early navigators mentioned the island without giving any details; D'Entrecasteaux's experiences there were of a non-scientific nature —- "nous fumes bien surpris de voir un chef qui ... permettait a un particulier de notre vaisseau la plus grand liberté avec une des plus jeunes personnes de 1l1'ile" (Lali lilaccieicee, 1800, 129). The island is a low sand cay; the shores appear stable, though the beaches are narrow, and no beachrock was seen. The coastal vegetation is mainly Hibiscus woodland with Guettarda, Pugenia, Pandanus, and other species, replaced in the northwest by single-species woodland of Cordia and elsewhere by Thespesia. There is almost no pioneer vegetation seaward of the Hibiscus hedge, except for some low Scaevola in the southeast. Inland the littoral scrub rises to a taller woodland of Calophyllum, Cocos and Pandanus, with massive emergent Hernandia. The coconut woodland over the centre of the island has a highly diverse undercover: trees such as Leucaena and Morinda, shrubs such as Colubrina and Rivina, herbs and grasses such as Stachytarpheta, Solanum nigrum, Boerhavia, Cenchrus and Polypodium. Casuarina trees are found near the houses at the north point, and there is a taro field. Horses, pigs and chickens were seen. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank the Royal Society of London and the Royal Society of New Zealand for the opportunity to take part in the Cook Bicentenary Expedition to the South Pacific in 1969, during which I was able to spend three days at Nuku'alofa. I thank Dr F. R. Fosberg who identified several plants from photographs. REFERENCES Admiralty Tide Tables. 1971. Volume 3. Pacific Ocean and adjacent seas. London: Hydrographer. Anonymous. 1810. An authentic narrative of four years' residence at Tongataboo, one of the Friendly Islands, in the South-Sea, by ------ » who went thither in the Duff, under Captain Wilson, in 1796. London: Longman, Hurst, Rees and Orme; L. B. Seeley; Hatchard. Beautemps—Beaupré, C. F. 1807. Plan du havre de Tongatabou rédigé en avril 1793, par C. F. Beautemps-—Beaupré, Ingénieur-Hydrographe, d'apres ses Opérations, celles de 1'Ingénieur Jouvency et le plan levé par Cook en 1772. Plate 18 in: Atlas du voyage de Bruny- D'Entrecasteaux, contre-amiral de France, commandant les frégates la Recherche et 1'Espérance, fait par ordre du gouvernement en 1791, 1792 et 1793. Paris: Dépot Général des Cartes et Plans de la Marine et des Colonies. Cook, J. 1971. The Journals of Captain James Cook on his voyages of discovery. II. The voyage of the Resolution and Adventure 1772-1775. Edited by J. C. Beaglehole. Cambridge: University Press. Cook, J. 1967. The Journals of Captain James Cook on his voyages of discovery. III. The voyage of the Resolution and Discovery 1776-1780. Edited by J. C. Beaglehole. Cambridge: University Press, 2 volumes. Bonont D' Urviltes J. Ss. CC. 1830-33. Voyage de la corvette L'Astrolabe éxécuté pendant les années 1826-1827-1828- 1629 Paris. i, Tastu. 5 volumes. Horster, G. 1777. A voyage round the world in His Britannic Majesty's Sloop Resolution, commanded by Capt. James Cook, durinomphe ~wears 1772, 3, 4 and 5. London: Bai rey Roselle Hh lmsby, (G. Robanson, 2) volumes’. Rabiltlardiére, J.=J. de. 1800. Relation du voyage 4 la recherche de La Pérouse. Paris: J. Jansen. Volume 2. Pacific Islands Pilot. 1969. Volume 2. 9th edition. London: Hydrographer. (9) Paris, E. 1833. Plan de 1'ile Tonga-Tabou, levé et dressé par M. E. Paris, Enseigne de Vaisseau, Expédition de la Corvette de S.M. 1'Astrolabe, avril et mai 1827. In: Voyage de la Corvette 1'Astrolabe exécuté pendant les années 1826-1827-1828-1829 sous le commandement de M. Jules Dumont D'Urville, Capitaine de Vaisseau, Atlas. Paris: J. Tastu. Quoy, J. R. and Gaimard, J. P. 1833. Voyage de Découvertes de 1'Astrolabe exécuté par ordre du Roi, pendant les années 1826-1827-1828-1829, sous le commandement de Me Jo Dumont) Di! UmviiMies) -Zoollo miler aZoophyres. Reresise Wo ese, BVO joo. Rossel, E.-P.-E. de. 1808. Voyage de D'Entrecasteaux, envoyé &@ la recherche de la Pérouse. Paris: Imprimerie Impériale. Volume 1. Sharp, A. 1968. The voyages of Abel Janszoon Tasman. Oxford: Clarendon Press. United States Exploring Expedition. 1850. Atlas. Volume 2, map 97: Tongataboo Harbour, Island of Tongataboo. Wilkes, C. 1845. Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition during the years 1833-1842. Philadelphia: Lee and Blanchard. 5 volumes. Wilson, W. 1799. A missionary voyage to the southern Pacific Ocean, performed in the years 1796, 1797, 1798, in the ship Duff. London: T. Chapman. Yuucker, IT. G. 1959. Pillants vot Monga sbesnaice P Batshop Museum Bull. 220, 1-283. e , eueyen CG i =e OG seujew fe) V VHVAVW ANITAYOHS LNDYSGNA eww GNV1GOOM LNNODOD LS SANVONVd'WATIAHdO1V9 “VONVLLANS HLIM GNV1G0O0OM SNJOSIs!lH VIOASAVOS = NOILVLAOSA GNVYLS YSANOld [| PIONEER GRASSES, VINES AND HERBS WS COASTAL WOODLAND, MAINLY HIBISCUS TILIACEUS Sod BUT WITH THESPESIA,CORDIA, [* ] HERNANDIA SONORA KY COCONUT WOODLAND Ee SAND BEACHROCK PANGAIMOTU metres 100 GUETTARDA, PANDANUS oe FIIID < SSR = —— x> SO OH ‘ \ \x} » et \ Navigation \a 88 marker . N \ \ Pangaimotu euTtuey 17 Se OS SoujowW O VWINVA SOO ANV1IGOOM LANODOD KAJ WOTTAHEONI WATTAHdOTW [ > | 3NITaYOHS Pal VYONOS VIONVNYSH [| LNDYSONN i Wo, SNNVONVd GNV vlva“Noosns vidHoo lids ONVS gia! ‘YSOIDAdS WOYVLISN 'VANINdOd vISAdS3H1 KXX See rice in ea a HLIM SN3OVIIIL SNOSIBIH GNYHS GNV ssw waaNoid F—| anvs{ | —_— ~ te SS a ST FL IEEE SS SA IL I I ET SEL CSTE ELSES TE TTT RAE: se CR all e1e90u0 G x= S2 ERRORS RKO = 50 Be OD aL tea od ONEATA metres O (a) Zz t (a) fe) O = < WJ Zz =I >) a {e) a x "2) Ww a 12) Ww ae = = >) aa) oa) > ac a e} J < O ire e) [@) Zz a =) fo {@) O = — =) it = WITH GUETTARDA AND PANDANUS TOURNEFORTIA ARGENTEA [> | HIBISCUS TILIACEUS WOODLAND < fa) z < z a Ww ze fa) z < ray Zz < a a (e) O = < x ray 8 @ =>) Y) a ra} a O O fa) Fe. < a ja) [e) e) = e >) Zz ie} 1) oO e) ee SCAEVOLA TACCADA WITH 6 Shore erosion on the east coast of Makaha'a vs the south. Beachrock on the southwest coast, with cliffed behind, on Makaha'a. SAE AE fH SS eee eachrock at the west poi nt on Pangaimotu. Re 2 : ie ea a SS A Iueg ee ; basis : : shore 11 Clumps of Rhizophora on the north shore of Pangaimotu. ea ce [ Nps et Vere ae ae , Bay a theless MAE yi € 1% a ; ee ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 182 THE MURINE RODENTS RATTUS RATTUS, EXULANS, AND NORVEGICUS AS AVIAN PREDATORS by F. I. Norman Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 = DF A aati Lb Ae CTO TAM 3 eh PA a tos " wit Contents Page Introduction References to Predation by Rats Apterygiformes Procellariiformes Pelicaniformes Ciconiiformes Anseriformes Galliformes Charadriiformes Columbiformes Psittaciformes Passeriformes Discussion References ONINDNDAADUUFPwWww = THE MURINE RODENTS RATTUS RATTUS, EXULANS, AND NORVEGICUS AS AVIAN PREDATORS i by he ao Nosman— INTRODUCTION Few mammals have adventitiously accompanied man around the world more than members of the Murinae and of these, the most ubiquitous must surely be the Rattus group. Three species, R. rattus Linn., R. norvegicus Berkenhout, and R. exulans (Peale), have been hasTmorical Ly, PeSCClated Tabteia man, and their present distribution reflects such associations. Thus although he exons us seneralty distributed through the Pacific region, R. rattus and norvegicus are almost worldwide in distribution, having originated presumably in Asia Minor, as did exulans (Walker 1964). All have invaded, with man's assistance, habitats which previously did not include them, and they have developed varying degrees of commensalism with man. Neither cab cus Nor norvcesicus has entered antarctic ecosystems, but Law and Burstall (195 6) recorded their presence on subantarctic Macquarie Island. Pelee (1961) and Schiller (1956), however, have shown that norvegicus has become established in the arctic where localised populations are dependent on refuse as a food source during the winter. More frequently, reports have been made of the over-running of islands by these alien rats. Tristan da Cunha is one such example (Elliott 1957; Holdgate 1960), and Dampier found rattus to be common on Ascension Island in 1701 though presently norvesicus is more widespread there (Duffey 1964). Rattus spp., and Mus musculus Linn., are present on some of the Galapagos islands (Abs et al. 1965). Ilha lie IPeyoslirslG., Bia aimPllbb< Olt seeiTeuIs occurred during the Second World War (Johnson 1945; Marshall 1955), and these may have displaced exulans, a prior introduction (Morrison 1954). The rats, once introduced into areas of abun- dant food and no extreme of climate, may cease commensalism and exist independently of man. This may occur more readily in disturbed habitats where rattus generally predominates, perhaps because of its wider range of food acceptance (@sB6 5 Ecamlealire Medina, and Jackson LOW) - The diet of these species, and of the Rattus group as a Li Be Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, 123 Brown St., Heidelberg. Victoria. 3084. (Manuscript received April 1972--Ed.) ae) whole, tends to be of an herbivorous nature. However rattus, norvegicus and exulans have generally developed an omnivorous diet which has ultimately led to active predation and even cannibalism (ener Bailey and Sorensen 1962; Murphy 1936; Steiniger 1948; Troughton 1962). Of especial concern to conservationists have been the persistent reports that the introduced rats were avian predators. It is the purpose of this paper to present and briefly review such statements. On islands two factors may act to initiate predation of birds by rats. Piarstiy, thie aliven) cas pend avo benscamensermse and secondly, there may be a requirement for water other than that supplied by metabolism of the normal dietary intake. Cott (1952) suggested that sea bird eggs must be utilised as a water source, and Habs and Heinz (Grobue) considered that the brown rat obtained water requirements from eggs during birds' breeding seasons and from dew or rain at other times. Norman and Baudinette (1969) kept rattus on a diet ‘containing, only slew per cent water and found that they could not maintain even reduced body weight without supplementary water being provided. On many islands obligatory water requirements may easily be obtained from the more vascularised plant tissues or storage organs. But in extreme conditions it seems that rats must become predators, particularly of eggs, to survive and that this source could be extensively exploited. Thus Fisher and Baldwin (1946) observed that, "many of the Pacific Islands offer no large quantities of vertebrate animal food other than birds and eggs, (and) the pressure from increases in numbers of rats would be exerted upon bird populations." Listed below are summaries of references to predation of birds and their eggs, this listing includes and adds to those given by Cott Grebe Though extensive, the references indicate that few systematic observations on the food preferences of rats have been conducted on islands where bird and rat populations co-exist, and more particularly on those islands where decreases in bird populations have been recorded. Usually statements regarding the diet of rats include generalisations relating to the content of avian material taken. Thus Steiniger (1948) stated that norvegicus, which fed extensively on plant seeds on Norderoog (in the North Sea), had almost exterminated the bird population there. Bailey and Sorensen (1962) considered that norvegicus fed on seeds, fruit and roots, shellfish, dead seals, sheep, and birds (outa Aus cam (1948), who provided one of the few quantitative reports on regular predation, noted that mussels were eaten by norvegicus. Wor the: Cape Wed area, Austin (1948) gave results of 19 years observations on Sterna hirundo Linn., S. dougalli Montagu and S. paradisea Pontoppidan. He stated that the rat norvegicus was the greatest deterrent to successful nesting. The daily kill during the breeding season was between three and 20 birds, and caches of 25-150 eggs were found. Kattaine, jan; Austin’s study. colony, followed the breeding pattern, thus adults were taken as they began nesting, eggs were later predated as were chicks as they hatched. However Austin provided no evidence of direct observation, and nor did Habs and Heinz (1951), who considered that norvegicus destroyed 60 percent of the S. hirundo eggs laid on Scharhérn off Cuxhaven, Germany, amounting to some 6000 eggs within a month. More recently Kepler (ise )\, supporting his report photographically, has detailed losses of Diomedea immutabilis Rothschild on Kure where exulans caused considerable predation of incubating adults. However Norman (1970), and Pai ciate (Ome hound that rattus dad not cause: any. predation even though specimens inhabiting ground nesting colonies of sea birds were collected, nor did the latter authors observe predation of incubating adults by rattus or exulans. REFERENCES TO PREDATION BY RATS APTERYGIFORMES Heaphy (in Moncrieff 1938) considered that rats were the most likely cause of the decline in numbers of Apteryx spp. in New Zealand. PROCELLARITFORMES Alsatt (1945) believed that rats aided the decline of Pterodroma hypoleuca on Laysan. Bailey and Sorensen (1962) felt that rats were "probably responsible for the practical elimination of Campbell Island (New Zealand ) as a breeding place of small petrels and shearwaters." Bell (in Merton 1970) recorded enormous losses of young Pterodroma neglecta in the Kermadec group as being caused by R. exulans. Campbell and Mattingley (1907) state that rats were causing destruction of Pelagodroma marina in Victoria, Australia. Davidson (in Merton 1970) notes heavy egg predation of Pterodroma neglecta by norvegicus on Raoul Island in the Kermadec group as being caused by R. exulans. Fisher (1952) mentioned that rats were predators of Fulmarus glacialis. Harris (1970) considered that rattus were almost certainly responsible for the poor breeding success of Pterodroma phaeopygia in the Galapagos. Holdgate and Wace (1961) thought that rats were associated with declines in petrel populations on Tristan da Cunha and South Georgia. Johnson (1945) considered that rattus lives on the Midway Islands largely at the expense of seabirds and particularly Pterodroma hypoleuca; the young of the albatross (?Diomedea Sipe) were also taken. Kepler (1967) recorded exulans feeding on incubating Diomedea immutabilis on Kure, and noted the absence of chicks of Pterodroma hypoleuca. Lane (1962) thought that rattus were responsible for the destruction of eses of breeding, Pulfanuss pacwimicus vandysee griseus on Lion Island, Australia. Larson (1967) stated that rattus killed nestling Pterodroma phaeopygia on Maui, Hawaii. Merton (568) noted that Pterodroma neglecta had decreased on Kermadec Island following the introduction of rats. Munro (1945) thought that Pterodroma hypoleuca and Bulweria bulwerii would decline unless rats were destroyed on Midway. Murphy (1936) lists perhaps the most extensive series of observations on rats predating seabirds and their eggs. At Tristan da Cunha, he noted that Pelagodroma marina was "one of the species which would most quickly have been wiped out by »2e.. Lats," and he felt that rat predation waststtmlcwenitanico account for the vast reduction of Pachyptila desolata there. Similarly the decrease of P. forsteri on the same island was attributed to rats. On South Georgia, Murphy recorded great quantities of Pelecanoides georgicus bones in the rat burrows. the related Po urinatrax as res tele vedmiio jis) Fands wall HoUneraaass in the Tristan group. He also noted that rats were enemies of Loomelania melania at the nesting grounds. Murphy and Mowbray (1951) found no trace of Pterodroma cahow in localities where rats were present in Bermuda. Olstad (1930) recorded norvegicus living in burrows of Procellaria aequinoctialis and Cott suggested that they took "here as elsewhere .... toll of eggs and young as opportunity offers." Stead (1936) found Pterodroma pycrofti eggs eaten by rats (exulans) and stated that alien rats had almost exterminated the shearwater, Puffinus tenuirostris, on Stewart Island (New Zealand). Thorensen (1967) suspected that exulans was preying on eggs of Pelecanoides urinatrix on Stanley Island, New Zealand. Tickell (1962) considered that prions, Pachyptila desolata, and other burrowing petrels had suffered heavily from rat predation on the Falkland Islands. PELICANITFORMES Gross (GiO25) caught a rat (Mus alexandrinus = R. rattus) sucking an egg of Phaethon americanus (= lepturus ) in Bermuda. Murphy (1936) considered that Phaethon aethereus was greatly reduced on St. Helena, partly by plume hunters and "still more because of the ravages of rats and feral cats," and P. lepturus on Bermuda had as its principal enemy R. exulans. CICONITFORMES Layard (1850) recorded eggs of Ardea sacra as being sucked by ane in the Duke of York Islands (not seen, quoted from Cott LO52 ANSERIFORMES Berger (1970) considered that rats were destroying nests of Anas wyvilliana in Hawaii and thought that they were predators of A. laysanensis on Laysan. Beveridge and Daniel (1965) thought that ducks decreased on Mokoia Island, New Zealand, as a result of depradations by norvegicus. Coward (1914) recorded eggs of Anas platyrhynchos as being sucked by Epimys (= Rattus) norvegicus (not seen, quoted from Cott, 1952). Guiler (1966) mentioned that norvegicus was a predator of Cygnus atratus eggs in Tasmania. Guiler (1967) considered that introduced rats took eggs of Cereopsis novaehollandiae on breeding islands in Tasmania. Steiniger (1948) found remains of wild ducks in rat burrows in Germany. GALLIFORMES Alsatt (1945) thought that rattus had affected Porzanula palmeri on Laysan. Bailey (1956) also mentioned the disappearance of Porzanula following the overrunning of Midway islands by rats. Bent (1932) recorded egg losses in Phasianus colchicus, Colinus virginianus and Lophortyx gambelii nests in America. Berger (1970) considered rats were a serious predator of Gallinula chloropus on Hawaii and thought that rats (and other predators ) played a role in the destruction of Pennula sandwichensis. Coward 1914) recorded eggs of Fulica atra as being predated by norvegicus in England. Cott (1952) felt that there was little doubt that eggs of Gallinula chloropus were taken by rats in Britain. De Groot aera stated that norvegicus took eggs of Rallus obsoletus in California. Elliott (1957) considered that rattus was the second most important predator of Porphyriornis nesiotis in the Tristan da Cunha group, man being more important. Fisher and Baldwin (1946) thought that the "main factor in the extermination of the rail (Porzanula palmeri) was the overrunning of both islets by rats," at Midway. Holdgate and Wace (1961) thought that Porphyriornis populations had almost certainly decreased following the introduction of rats to Tristan. Johnston (1945) states that a decrease of Porzanula occurred following the introduction of rats onto Midway Atoll. Middleton (1935) mentioned that norvegicus would take eggs of Perdix perdix in Great Britain. Noble (1902) recorded rats taking eggs of Porzana pusilla and P. bailloni in Andalucia. ie) CHARADRITFORMES Austin (1948) in giving details of losses, considered that norvegicus was the main factor in losses of Sterna dougallii, S. hirundo, and S. *paradiisiea av Cape Codi auUgs an. Belcher (in Matthews 1910-27) considered that rats were taking eggs of Hydrochelida leucopareia in Australia. Beveridge and Daniel (1965) thought that rats were threatening the survival of Coenocorypha aucklandica on islands off New Zealand. Brown (1949) thought that rats were probably responsible for eggs losses) in nests of sRecunvalnos tina javiOsewuel skis Bietsicpiun, Campbell (1892) mentioned that rats took eggs and young of Fratercula arctica in the U.K. Harris (1964 recorded young Larus argentatus as being taken by norvegicus in England. Johnson (1945) reported that rattus was believed to have taken eggs and young of white terns (Gysui's alba) on Midway. Kepler (1967) Lecorded exullans Svalkens sess s Or Bowel fuscata and young of Anous stolidus on Kure Atoll. Merton (1968) Hound that sss of Stenna tuscuval were taken by norvegicus on Raoul Island. North (1946) considered that rats (?rattus) took eggs of Sterna fuscata, S. anaethetus, and Anous stolidus on Mait island ine thie Gui sods Adena. Rowan (1915) stated that rats took eggs of Sterna hirundo iia [syOaL BeLaLiAl Sprunt (1948) reported that 90 per cent of eggs of young Anous stolidus were taken by rats on Dry Tortugas Keys. Steiniger (1948) reported Haematopus ostralegus, Numenius arquata, Charadrius apricarius and Calidris testacea’ as victims of norvegicus on Norderoog, Germany. Ticehurst (1932) reported that rats took eggs of Burhinus oedicnemus in England (not seen, quoted from Cott 1952). Vesey-Fitzgerald (1941 ) mentioned that rats destroyed eges and young of Sterna fuscata in the Seychelle Islands. COLUMBIFORMES Layard (1880) recorded that rats stole eggs of Dacula pinon and D. pistrinaria on the Duke of York Islands. PSITTACTIFORMES Heaphy (in Moncrieff 1938) considered that rats had caused a reduction of Stringops habrophila in New Zealand. PASSERIFORMES Alsatt (1945) attributed the disappearance of Psittirostra cantans on Laysan to rats. Bailey (1956) also considered that rats caused the decline of Psittirostra in the Midway area. Beveridge and Daniel (1965) mentioned depradations of rare birds caused by rats and considered that populations of Philesturnus carunculatus and Xenicus longipes were threatened Dy them on Great South Cape Island, New Zealand. Blackburn (1968) thought that exulans apparently preyed upon eggs and young of certain species and that this "... predation seems to account for the disappearance of the Pied Tare (Petroica macrocephalus Oa FOr.) i,t! iPictonnel (Obhyaleie IES ievaKel > Wewarcl of the Yellow-breasted Tit (Petroica m. macrocephalus) from Inner Chetwock Island in Cook Strait," in New Zealand. Bull (1946) found that norvegicus was the major predator of eggs and young of Turdus merula and T. philomelos eggs in New Zealand. Habs and Heinz (1951) found several dead and half-eaten Sturnus vulgaris on Scharhtérn and attributed them to rats. Henderson (1965) stated that since the "recent rat infestation, the robin (Petroica australis), bush wren (Xenicus longipes), and fernbird (Bowdeia punctata) have, of course, gone from ..." Solomon Island, N New Zealand. Johnson (1945) considered that Psittirostra cantans disappeared following the introduction of rats onto Midway Islands. Kenyon (1961 ) thought that norvegicus had extermined Melospra melodia and Troglodytes troglodytes in Amchitka, Alaska. Merton (1965) stated that Philesturnus carunculatus has been all but exterminated following the arrival of rattus on South Cape Island, New Zealand. Stead (1936) recorded exulans eating deserted eggs and youngs of Prosthemadera novaeseelandiae on Taranga Island, New Zealand. Steiniger (1948) found rat burrows containing remains of Stunrnus vwulearus, saxicola tonquata, and Regulus resuius in Germany. Stoner (1937) recorded norvegicus as a predator of Riparia riparia in America. Wayne (1849) gave some evidence of predation by rats of eggs of Turdus merula and Erithacus rubecula in Britain. DISCUSSION Many authors have attributed the disappearance of bird populations, particularly those on islands, to the effects of introduced predators. Almost without exception rats have been proposed as the most important predator, and such suggestions have been generally accepted. Indeed, Lack (1966) considered that the threat of actual or even potential predation by rats (or other mammals) caused shearwaters and petrels to nest on islands without them, and suggested that extinction occurred where rats and cats have been introduced. More recently Fleming (1969), commenting on Kepler's (1967) observations on Kure, has postulated that exulans could have been responsible os) for the reduction of some 27 species (seven genera) of moas (Dinornithiformes ) and perhaps carinates such as Aptornis, Notornis and Cnemiornis. Such considerations are not supported by a closer examination of the references presented above. Attention has been paid to the more specific examples of rat predation on birds and their eggs in the references listed above, more generalised statements are legion. However, of the 75 references summarised, 39 (52 per cent ) refer to rats in general and only 36 relate to identified species, 17 to norve- gicus, 10 to rattus, and nine to exumlans. )) Mone impomvaninhy, only two authors record direct observations of active predation, these being Gross (O12), who caught @ rattus sucking on ess of Phaethon americanus and Kepler (1967), who photographed exulans feeding on nesting Diomedea immutabilis, and none gave evidence of having examined food habits for any area mentioned. Pertinent too is the distribution of predation records in relation to ordinal groups. Seabirds (Procellariiformes and Charadriiformes) predominate and account for some 35 references, but mortality in seabird colonies is frequently extensive, caused by a variety of factors including desertion, food shortages, etc., and subsequent carcases may have been eaten by the alien scavengers. Indeed most references to predation of seabirds (and other species) are circumstantial. Much of the alien rats' reputations as predators are based on suppositions and these have not been confirmed by food studies conducted on islands where birds and rats co-exist. Beveridge and Daniel (1965) showed that norvegicus fed mainly on plant material on Mokoia Island, New Zealand, and Best (1969) considered that birds were not important in the diet of norve- gicus sampled in forest areas of New Zealand. Fall et al. (ion) found that on EFniwetok Atoll in the Marshall Islands, the diets of both exulans and rattus were predominantly vegetarian though rattus did take insect material, and the investigators were unable to show evidence of predation of birds even though samples (and observations) were made in and near colonies of ground nesting terns. Norman (1970) showed that plant material made up most of the diet and considered that rattus, inhabiting an island in Tasmania where extensive numbers of Puffinus tenuirostris bred, did not actively predate, although unattended eggs were apparently taken. Confrontation experiments between rattus and the shearwater, though perhaps artificial, suggested that the rats avoided any contact, either with unattended young, or with incubating adults. Thus it appears that the rats' role as an avian predator has been overestimated, and apart from a very few statements supported by direct observation, there are few data to implicate rats as causative agents in localised population declines. Other introduced mammals, such as cats, could well have played a more substantial part in bird population reduction and the role of man himself has generally been ignored. Certainly 9 deserted eggs or young eaten by rats will not effect population size, and in most areas now colonised by the aliens a balance has probably been established between the rats and the local avifauna. For islands where the colonisation dates can be established, it would be profitable to determine such inter- actions which exist so as to examine ecological changes which may have taken place during a known period. Certainly the basic facts should be established before widespread control campaigns are undertaken. REFERENCES Abs Me wOurto le a kcramer, PP. and Neithammer, J. 1965, ZUr Ernahrungsweise der Eulen auf Galapagos. Jo Oleg, 5 Ij. NO6e 4O= 577. Misa, Ras ee 1 OU Sy (letter following article on tragedy in bied dife) BWlepaio 5: 49-51. Austin, O.L. 1948. Predation by the common rat (Rattus norvegicus ) an chesCape. Cod colonies, of nesting, Terns. Bird Banding 19: 60-65. Bailey, A.M. 1956. Birds of Midway and Laysan Islands. Denwer Mus. Nat. Hast., Mus. Pict..no.,12. Bailey, A.M. and Sorensen, J.H. 1962. Subantarctic Campbell stand. Proc., Denver Mus. Nat. Hist... 1.0.. Bent, AC. 19325 Late hastories of; North American, gallinaceous Dinrds we palin i. S. natn. Mus. 1622. 1—190. Berger, A.J. 1970. The present status of the birds of Hawaii. Pac. Seas sca, 29—12.. Best, 5-W. 19692" Pood of the roof—rat Rattus rattus rattus (i) anvtwortonest areas,of New Zealand. §N.Za > Ji.Sei. 12: 258-267) Beveridce, A.B. and Daniel, M.J. 1965. Observations ona high population of brown rats (Rattus norvegicus Berkenhout 1767) on Mokoia Island, Lake Rotorua. N.J. Jd Sede Ss 1 74—189). BilackburpipAem1OO>. a Murtonbard islands diary. Notvornas 1/27: 191-207. ---------- 1968S bnew bardinhe of Codtashy koland. .Notornuls Brown, P.B. 1949. The breeding of avocets in England, 1948. Beat. Bards 42: 2-13: 10 pwubils IPI. 1946. Notes on the breeding cycle of the thrush and blackbird in New Zealand. Emu 46: 198-208. Campbell, A.G. and Mattingeley, Aco bh. 1907. A cookeny. oF storm petrels. Emu 6: 185-192. Campbell, J.M. 1892. On the appearance of the brown rat (Mus decumanus PALS) om Ailsa Cane, Ain, SCObs Mat. Hast. ee 1 S21 Seo Cott, H.B. 19525 ~The palavaballhtty oto isndisme cesta antisite! by three seasons experiments (1947, 1948 and 1950) on the food preferences of the rat (Rattus norvegicus); with species reference to the protective adaptations on eggs considered in relation to vulnerability. Proc. zool. Soc.) Woudeai22 =o is Coward, T.A. 1914. Faunal survey of Rostherne Mere. II. Vertebrata (not seen, quoted from Cott 1952). Mem. Proc. Wietaeing ilalie, jolastilL, SOC, BSes 1—-3)7> De Groot, 1927. The Calitornian Clapper Ravi, aus nes tins habits, enemies and habitat. Condor 29: 259-270. Duffey, E. 1964. The terrestrial ecology of Ascension Island. Jo Gisoll, Weol, 1¢ 219=247. IDALILste bey lelglh oho IG9H75 A. COimeiralouUeom WO wla© Oris CA@QloOSsy Oil the Tristan da Cunha Group. Ibis 99: 545=586- bali, Mow.” Medina, A Bee andy Jackson Weibel O7 ithe eS eClians; patterns of Rattus rattus and Rattus exulans on Eniwetok Atoll, Marshall Islands. J. Mammal 52: 69-76. iitslaere, Ieljil, enc beslchviim, Dol, 1986, Wease amcl ilove loiirclss Ot Whichwehy NEO, Coméloir “Ss So 5. Pashier, J.) 19525) thew bh adinaice © omMsindis le olor Fleming, C.A. 1969. Rats and moa extinction. Notornis 16: 210-211. Gross, A.O. 1912. Observations on the yellow-billed tropic bird (Phaethon americanus Grant) at the Bermuda Islands. An 2920 9-75 Guiler, E.R. 1966. The breeding of Black Swan (Cygnis atrata Latham) in Tasmania with special reference to some management problems. Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm. 100: 31-52. ---------- 1967. The Cape Barren Goose, its environment, numbers and breeding. Emu 66: 211-235. 11 Habs, M. and Heinz, H.J. 1951. Beitrag zur Biologie freilebender Wandieraaprem. MAA. taye. Zoolls 39: 65=81 . Harris, M.P. 1964. Aspects of the breeding biology of the gulls Larus argentatus, L. fuscus and L. marinus. Ibis 106: 432-456. —---------- 1970. The biology of an endangered species, the Dark-rumped Petrel (Pterodroma phaeopygia) in the Galapagos Islands. Condor 72: 76-84. Hendessomo mE tgoane Tae trazedy of the muttonbird! aolands.. SHomesinand Bird 158: 6-8. Holtdoabe wal IOOn The Launa of the Tristan ida Cunha Uisdiands. Paola trans. Roy. Soc. 249: 361-402. Holdgate, M.W. and Wace, N.M. 1961. The influence of man on the floras and faunas of southern islands. Pollan wReecn) yilOF 475-193. Johnson, M.S. 1945. Rodent control on Midway Islands. Nav. med, Bull, 45: 364-398. Kenyon, K.W. 1961. Birds of Amchitka, Alaska. Ank a7er BOb—S2or Kepler, (C.B.) 1967. Polynesian rat predation on nesting Laysan Albatrosses and other Pacific seabirds. Auk 84: 426-430. waco De 1960—) Poputapion Studies of birds. ~O.U.P., London. Lane, S.G. 1962. A progress survey of breeding shearwaters on Lion Island Faunal Reserve. Emu 62: 202-204. Larson, J.W. 1967. The Dark-rumped petrel in Haleakala Crater, Mattie nawalma Nate Park Service, (Dept. nb. eulolk. Law, P.G. and Burstall, T. 1956. Macquarie Island. Interim Repe Austommato., Anubacet. Res. Exped 1/1. tayances bewyacetiocO. Nowmes) on Jay collectring, trap’ inthe New Hebrides, the Solomon Islands, New Britain and the Duke of York tslands. Tbis 4: 290-309. Manon aile e O55.) Ras sot eile Anno (At olla Mansina lus gussianicis:. Je Mammal. 36: 259-263. Mathews, G.M. 1910-1927. The Birds of Australia. Witherby and Co., London. Merton DEE Ob. vA bite nisitony, of the North ais land Saddleback. Notornis 12: 208-212. 12 Merton, D.V. 1968. Narrative of the Kermadec Islands Expedition, 10/10/66. =) 29/11/67) Notornusmlo eno aee ---------- 1970. Kermadec Islands expedition reports, a geeneral account of (burdiiike.s Notopnatcm 740 l-i7—9oe Middleton, A.D. 1935. Factors controlling the population of the partridge (Perdix perdix) in Great Britain. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. (1935): 795-815. Moncrieff, P. 1938. Birds of Nelson Province, New Zealand. Pm 37> 207=23'4. Morrison, J.P.E. 1954. Animal ecology of Raroia Atoll, Tuamotus. Moola Res, Will, SA ))s 1218, Mistage, (5G, ONG, Ureysechy alm Saiecl Islite, Dilepado 5s Heo. Nie sone, IC, O85 Oceanic birds of South America. Macmillan, New York. Murphy, R.C. and Mowbray, L.S. 1951. New light on the cahow, Pterodroma cahow. Auk 68: 266-280. Noble, H. 1902. Forty-four days' nesting in Andalucia. Ibis Bo 6789 . Norman, F.I. 1970. Food preferences of an insular population One Reb EwIS GeVEwUI. Wo WOOl., omc, 1622 “99-503. Norman, F.I. and Baudinette, R.V. 1969. Water economy and salt balance of an insular population of Rattus rattus Linnaeus. J. Mammal. 50: 487-493. North, MiBiW. 1946. ‘Madi! tslland=—a bard=erock in the Gulls on Nein, — Iaatsy Cites MFO . Olstad, O. 1930. Rats and reindeer in the Antarctic. Scient. Results. Norw. Antarct. Exped. 4: 3-20. Rowan, W. 1915. The Blakeney Point ternery. Brat. Bards (6): 250-266. s(omsiililerm. IWlb, Oo. Ecology and health of Rattus at Nome, Alaska. J. Mammal. 37: 181-188. Sprunt, A. 1948. The tern colonies of the Dry Tortugas Keys. hele Se 119), stead, b.F., 1936), (The maorisecateeenoe. Re SOCwEN TA eOOt iy o— Wels 13 Steiniger, F. 1948. Biologische Beobachtungen an freilebenden Wanderratten auf Hallig Norderoog. Zool. Anz., Suppl. 139 S25) 568 sconer, D). 1937. The house rat as an enemy of the Bank Swallow. J. Mammal: 18: 87-89. Thorensen, A.C. 1967. Ecological observations on Stanley and Green Islands, Mercury Group. Notornis 14: 182-200. mecehurst nC. b. 8932. A history of the birds of 7Suffolk. (not seen, quoted from Cott 1952). Gerney and Jackson, London. iickelil WeleN. 1962. The Dove Prion, Pachyptila desolata Cmevkimees. Det Do. oct. Rep. 33. mrouchton, |. weG. 1965. Furred animals of Australia. (8th edition). Angus and Robertson, Sydney. Vesey-Fitzgerald, D. 1941. Further contributions to the ornithology of the Seychelles Islands. Ione He HSH HB o Walker, E.P. 1964. Mammals of the World. John Hopkins, Baltimore. Wayne, R. 1849. Blackbird's eggs sucked by a rat. Zoologist WE PIES Nowe yt a a Vnrigeett 44. dino 004 wr paivie ine ior 4 Mi) “ - nary im ee smh te 4 sR 4 : 27 i i” aIKRD. - * re ar n : 7 gots one nds Gla ines Sybiaeieg. OREN wu " 5) ai bj ; vie tp) eng: 2A Md el A Xia Ee ce ht Aik g Me ‘art ' Tha de . Pina? a onda an a | his Ore) ae hd, Sah ontaae me Ee \3 Fae PRM; eth i" ae i he ra (aga yay ue yr watt. Re of rire bennan aa had oa $ = es" av nae al jet 1 Vene Gaya4 ‘et c htetan ated . nae) at Meee ary vera ies. a - bate : ty sean’ 4 ¥ yu se bd ‘ne ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 183 DUCIE ATOLL: ITS HISTORY, PHYSIOGRAPHY AND BIOTA by Harald A. Rehder and John E. Randall Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 Contents Page Introduction iL History Z Current Information on Ducie 9 Waste to Ducie in 1971 10 Physiography of Land Masses ital Lagoon 13 Channels and Water Exchange iS) Submarine Features of Ocean Reef 16 Botany 18 Zoology Mammals , 18 Birds 18 Reptiles 20 Fishes (by John E. Randall) alt Insects 26 Crustaceans 27 Marine Mollusks (by Harald A. Rehder) 28 Echinoderms 36 Corals 37 Literature Cited 38 Figures 1 to 29 follow page 40. aT. W . (phlei , so. 27, 28. Philadelphia, vita93 pp. Chapin, J. P. 1934-1935. Journal of the Templeton Crocker Expedition to Polynesia. Manuscript in library of American Museum of Natural History, New York. |e . 1936. Through Southern Polynesia. Natural History, 37 (4): 286-308, illustr. Chase, 0. 1821. Narrative of the most extraordinary and distressing shipwreck of the whale=ship Essex of Nantucket ... in the years 1819 and 1820. New York, 128 pp. Christian, Ae M- 1943. New administrative group. Three islands joined WHC etccaten., cdcitle Ustands Monthly, January W943), op. i. Bdwacds)) Fe, and Hamilton, G. 1915. Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Pandora?! dispatched to arrest the mutineers of the "Bounty" in the South Seas, 1790-91 .... Editor, Sir Basil Thompson. London, 177 pp. Findlay, A. G. 1851. A directory for the navigation of the Pacific Deca eace le LOndon. pps loc, ODL 3 Gor. iatatetetatatatetetatatel e 1884. A directory for the navigation of the South Pacific Ocean ... 5th edition. London, 1xit+1252 pp. ce ne ele ---, 1901. Addenda for the fifth edition of Findlay's Directory for the navigation of the South Pacific Ocean. London, 385 pp. Gough, B. M., Editor. 1973. To the Pacific and Arctic with Beechey. The Journal of Lieutenant George Peard of H.M.S. 'Blossom' 1825-1828. Hakluyt Society (ser. 2, vol. 143). London, viii + 272 pp., plates and maps. Hamilton, G. 1793. A voyage around the world, in His Majesty's frigate Pandora. Berwick, 164 pp. Johnson, I., and Johnson, E. 1939. Sailing to see: picture cruise in the schooner Yankee. New York, 222 pp., 346 illustr. Kelly, C., Editor. 1966. La Austrialia del Espiritu Santo, etc., vol. l. Hakitivtmsociety (sere 2. vol. 126). London, xviit270 spp... Lilustx. 40 King, W. B. 1967. Seabirds of the tropical Pacific Ocean (Preliminary Smithsonian Identification Manual). Smithsonian Institution, Washington, xxxiitl26 pp., plates and maps. Markham, C. Editor. 1904. The voyages of Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, , 1595 to 1608. Hakluyt Society (ser. 2, vol. 14). London, 2 vols. McKee, E. D., Chronic, J. S., and Leopold, E. B. 1959. Sedimentary belts in lagoon of Kapingamarangi atoll. Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petr. Geologists, 43 (3): 501-562. Moerenhout, J. A. 1837. Voyacestaux ilesndunGrandsOcecanmecashais ts a2 vols. Murphy, R. C., and Pennoyer, J. M. 1952. Larger petrels of the genus Pterodroma. Amer. Mus. Novit., no. 1580, 43 pp. Nichols, J. T. 1923. Two new fishes from the Pacific Ocean. Amer. MIG WOES 5 BOs Yl, 3 Pio, A uae e Quayle, E. H. 1921-1922, Journal of Whitney South Sea Expedition, vol. 3, September 1921 = March 1922, Manuscript in library of American Museum of Natural History, New York. Rivett-Carnac, J. Re. 1937. Report on aerial and ground survey of Henderson, Oeno and Ducie Islands. Western Pacific Archives, Western Pacific High Commission (South Pacific Office), File no. 3326/1937 (aval). Sachet, M.-H. 1962. Monographie physique et biologique de 1'fle de Clipperton. Ann. Inst. Océanogr., Paris, 40 (1): 1-107, illustr. Salvat! Be, and Erhard. J aera 970.5), Mol lusqueshider fi lenClapperton. eUbiLy Wits heles Bhisic, Weies (ees), Seren 2, 42 (ib)s Basovsile St. John, H. 1940. Itinerary of Hugh Cuming in Polynesia. Occas. Papers B. P. Bishop Museum, 16 (4): 81-90, 1 fig. Tracey, Jo fo, Ite) Abbott, Me se... and Acnow. flO a Natura lL ahtsitomy of Ifaluk Atoll: Physical environment. B. P. Bishop Museum RAE AAAS toi 5} Tsuda, R. T. Some marine benthic algae from Pitcairn Island. Revue Algologique. In press. Ward, R. G. Editor. 1967. American activities in the Central Pacific, 1790=1870, vol. 3.) Salem,ssctrtt-O>5 pp, Lilustrs DuctemAtolt EromeBEttish Admiralty Chart Now 176. Figure l. based on survey by F.W. Beechey, 1826. a % 50 Acadia Island 7 paninntene pS atti 10 aS Ss toe a "ae Aes ae agi 8 en eee ss eS = = 2 = 50 = e & Zz = y 2, = =< we “E $3 &6 —_— S. Va 49 oa S 0 é x0/4 A Le a = Big, » = Westward Islet 5 6 povacis Islet Faas x ye a ap mS Pandora Islet S = s \ADN 50 (Ss “i \ Wp se iy gaat, ; ie a: 50 at Fieune (2, )Ducie Atoll, from British Admiralty Chart No. 897 Ges mivaroeraphac Office) Chait Nol.. o9 Je) ;bals ed on survey by H.M.S. LEANDER, 1937, showing soundings from R.S. WESTWARD, 1971, and proposed names of islands. *ssed Jo pus uo0ose,T fo 3SeM SJETST preMAS IM JO @epts yzA0U uo 9snes Tepti 3e SUOTeAAISQO UOT UNEP Ea oni Aue nur Ol Shin OeTep Tl, 6 Bane fa oul | 0012 0002 0061 0081 OOLL 0091 O01 O0vL OOEL 0021 OOLL 0001 ajqiiifiayy yuaung s}OuUy Z ye uoofe] o}U! fuimo)4 Juan» Sv8l ye s93eA\ YoY payejodesxy 0060 sayou| Pipuxe 4) skeet along morthern coast of atoll, (Acadia Island with lagoon beyond. Sy ea a RT oy ee ae PRAT OE ESE ETE A Figure 5. Broad outer reef west of boat passage which is seen on right. Westward islet is in the right center. This and preceding picture taken from aloft on schooner WESTWARD. i ini pA ER Figure 6. Coral rubble of Westward Islet; looking towards western end of Acadia Island. wae, Ak d “< Gar” Ges Figure W7.. Close up of surface of rubble on Westward Islet, showing predominance of dead shells of Turbo argyrostomus e Figure 8. View towards Acadia island showing coral rubble rampart, and inner edge of reef flat on left. Figure 9. View towards Westward Islet showing coral rubble ridge between lagoon on left and reef flat on right; Pandora Islet in left background, Figure 10. View over reef flat west of pass from Westward Islet. The Schooner WESTWARD can be seen beyond the surf of the seaward edge of the reef. Figure 11. Old beach rock near Westward Islet, and dried reek tlatoon Lert. “Acadia srusVand in background. Figure 712. Ba cme ess. Rampart of coral rubble on lagoon side of western endo wNcadawva \isiland . Tournefortia trees in background. The black objects on the rubble are bodies of dead birds. CREST att" 4 A close-up of steeply sloping coral rubble ridge with lagoon in back. A windrow of dead birds’ lies at the base of the upper rubble slope, and a Japanese glass fishing float may be seen on Phemeconal sGubble eridge to the Wet t. Figure 14. Old rubble-strewn pavement on lagoon side Figure 15. of Acadia Island, showing coral rubble deposits near lagoon. Ocean side of Acadia Island with coral rubble rampart, and layers of fractured beach rock on left. or \ fie orl Figure 16. Tilted beach rock at inner edge of ocean reef, north side of Acadia Island. Bigure 17. Tilted layer of beach rock with solution channels; inner edge of ocean reef, north side of Acadia Island. Beach rock shown in Figure 16 is seen in upper right-hand corner. Figure 18. Thicket of Tournefortia argentea on Acadia Island, seen from lagoon side. FFG Ae. 2: Figure 19. Center of groove of Tournefortia argentea on Acadia Island. Figure 20. Coral head in lagoon with Montipora sp. aff. bilaminata as dominant coral. Eigure 21, Outer coral reef with diver Richard Costello taking sample from colony of Acropora nasuta. Just below this colony is a small nodule of Plesiastrea versipora. Figure 22. ¥ oy ‘ i Figure 23. Young Blue-faced booby, Sula dactylatra on con- solidated reef rock fragments on north coast of Acadia Island with reef flat in background. Echinoderms, Diadema sp., = Heterocentrotus mamillatus and on outer slope of oceanic reef. / CS) 5 ” . ‘ Ny ; ' . Re 4k . , is i sal, ? > ; 4 - a pe Figure 24. Butterflyfish, Chaetodon ulietensis, outside the oceanic reef. Saal mes, . =~ aa > | Figure 25. Three butterflyfish, Chaetodon ulietensis on coral aber 2G ¢ ihierenudidier fis hey ky pino sisi eh ulsiGWicgsO thtascag em stance reef. One fish displays the light. yellow jform. Figure (2713 The light yellow form of the rudderfish, Kyphosus fuscus outside the reef. Figure 28. Two of the WESTWARD's divers in 40 feet outside the reef off the channel. Numerous biack jacks, Caranx lupubris, and three yellowtail, Seriola Walamda sy) are visible. ea | * Figure 29. Two goatfish, Parupeneus bifasciatus outside the reef. TT. a. Aya | iy Z #0 ! Lay aad dct 4 i ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 184 MARINE TURTLES IN THE PHOENIX ISLANDS by George H. Balazs Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 puvjs] uojueg ‘| aanbi4 Seaie Hul}seu ajjin} aueyW Se MARINE TURTLES IN THE PHOENIX ISLANDS by George H. Balazs INTRODUCTION During the period February 13 to 20, 1973, a visit was made to Canton Island for the purpose of conducting a preliminary survey of marine turtle nesting populations. Although previous investigators have described the sea birds (Buddle, 1938; Murphy et al., 1954), insects (Van Zwaluwenburg, 1943, 1955), and vegetation (Hatheway, 1955), very little is known about the marine environment of Canton or the other seven atolls (Enderbury, Birnie, Phoenix, Sydney, Hull, Gardner and McKean) which comprise the Phoenix group. Publications dealing with marine life are limited to a description of fishes collected during the 1939 Bushnell Expedition at Canton, Hull, Enderbury and McKean (Schultz, 1943) and to an identification of some marine algae at Canton Island (Degener and Gillaspy, 1955; Dawson, 1959). The fact that marine turtles are present in these waters and nest on certain beaches has been only casually noted in the literature by a few authors. Wilkes (1845) recorded that one Frenchman and eleven Tahi- tians were found catching turtles on Hull Island when he first visited this atoll in August of 1840. Bryan (1939), in describing the natural history of the Phoenix group, stated that turtles are known to come out of the sea to lay eggs. Bryan (1942), Walker (1955) and Degener and Gillaspy (1955) each briefly noted that turtles could be found on Canton. In addition, Bryan (1942) speculated that turtles must occasionally come out on sand beaches at Phoenix Island since a skull and bones were found’ during a visit in 1924. Bryan (1942) also stated that turtles had, at one time, been caught frequently on Hull Island. The British Pacific Islands Pilot (1946) noted that Gardner, Hull and Sydney had turtles, while the United States Sailing Directions for the Pacific Islands (1952) listed turtles on Enderbury in addition to these three atolls. Although the presence of turtles has been recorded, no data is available on the species present, seasonality of nesting, relative abun- dance, beach utilization or migratory habits. Both Parsons (1962) and Hirth (1971) presented extensive biological information on green turtle (Chelonia sp.) colonies throughout the world, however no mention was made of this species in the Phoenix Islands. Wiens (1962) discussed marine turtles in relation to Pacific atoll environment but made no reference to Phoenix Island turtle populations. Apparently no scientific studies or 1/ — Hawaii Institute of Marine Biology, University of Hawaii, Kaneohe 96744 (Manuscript received August 1973--Eds). Le] descriptions of marine turtles in this area have been conducted. This has probably been due in part to the islands' remoteness and lack of suitable conditions for habitation by man. The occurrence of relatively large numbers of nesting turtles in the Phoenix Islands was brought to the author's attention in November of 1972 by personnel located on Canton Island. Immediate efforts were made to learn as much as possible about this little studied marine turtle popula- tion. Continuing pressures and overexploitation by man on the five genera of marine turtles has made it imperative that all colonies and nesting areas throughout the world be identified, described, and surveyed so that conservation programs can be formulated to protect these reptiles. Permis- sion was subsequently obtained to enter Canton Island to conduct a prelim- inary study. This paper covers the work accomplished during the study and presents information based upon the author's observations while surveying and mapping nesting areas. Although the field work was confined to Canton, information is also contained which was compiled from interviews conducted with resident personnel having knowledge about turtles on several of the other islands. FINDINGS Status Canton, a low sand and coral Central Pacific atoll, is located approximately 266 km below the equator at 2°50' S, 171°43' W. The island consists of a sparsely vegetated strip of land varying in width from 50 to 600 meters extending 43 km around a lagoon. A fringing reef, which in certain areas is exposed at low tide, surrounds most of the island. Can- ton is the largest and northernmost of the eight islands in the Phoenix group. Sporadic use has been made of several of the islands during the past 125 years for the purpose of mining guano, growing coconuts, refueling aircraft and tracking satellites. During World War II a major military installation was located on Canton. Past attempts to permanently colo- nize Sydney, Hull and Gardner with Gilbert Islanders did not meet with success. Bryan (1942) has given the historical background of each island in the group while Murphy et al. (1954) detailed more recent information concerning Canton. Although the Phoenix Islands are jointly claimed by both the United States and Great Britain, the U. S. Department of Defense has held author- ity on Canton, Birnie, Enderbury and Hull since 1970 to conduct research on terminal tracking of missile launches. Only personnel affiliated with this project are presently in the island group. Nesting Areas While on Canton the major portion of each day was spent surveying coastlines on foot in order to locate nesting areas. The author was fortunate in that partial transportation and assistance for this work was provided by personnel on their off-duty hours. Once identified, each nesting area was photographed and charted. Notes were taken on terrain, possible predators, and abundance as well as age of tracks and nesting pits. Because of the intensity of the equatorial sun, as much work as possible was conducted during nighttime hours. The principal nesting areas on Canton occur at four locations along the north, east and south coastlines (Fig. 1). A description of each area follows. Nesting area 1 is approximately 2.1 km long with a substrate com- posed chiefly of fine coral sands. It has a moderate to steep sloping beach whichleads up to a relatively flat, sparse vegetation zone consist- ing of Portulaca, Lepturus, Boerhavia and Scaevola. This sandy vegetation region is in some places narrow, dropping off abruptly toward the lagoon side to become rough coral fragments. An abandoned wood-framed structure is located at the western end of this area. The eastern end of an abandoned airstrip is almost directly inland from the structure. Initial reconnais- sance of this site revealed 16 sets of fresh turtle tracks as well as signs of recent digging. None of the tracts were estimated to be over ten days old. Unlike the subsequent areas examined, older pits from previous nesting were not seen at this location. Area 1 was found to have the most recent evidence of nesting of any of those investigated. The author made frequent visits to this location, and at 1800 hours on February 18th, a large turtle was observed inside the fringing reef. Upon return at 2300 hours two animals were found to be nesting well into the vegetation zone. Both turtles observed were identified to be of the genus Chelonia (green turtle). Several incomplete pits were dug by each turtle before egg deposition. Upon completion of nesting, the animals were tagged and found to have a straight line carapace length of 86 and 88 cm respectively. On February 20th, two additional fresh sets of tracks were observed in the same area. Although the coastline is very similar along a 2 km distance adja- cent to the western end of area 1, no signs of nesting activity were observed in this region. Extensive bulldozing during World War II for the construction of aircraft revetments took place immediately inland from this beach area. The destruction of a portion of this vegetation zone may be responsible for the absence of nesting at this time. ; Nesting area 2 extends for approximately 2.7 km. Two abandoned con- crete transmitter bunkers are located directly inland from the center of this location. Along this area of the coastline the beach slopes gently up to a sparse vegetation zone composed of Portulaca, Lepturus and Boer- havia. Fine coral sand was found to be mixed with broken fragments of coral, and in many places the beach was littered with large timber. It was felt that this area more than others investigated, hosted the largest number of nesting turtles during certain times of the year. Although only one set of fresh tracks (less than ten days old) was observed in this area, more than 100 pits were counted along the length of this coastline. Most of these were estimated to be not more than two to three months old. It was subsequently reported to the author that during the last week of June 1973, 13 sets of fresh tracks were seen in this area. Nesting area 3 was the smallest (0.4 km) of any located. This region covered the sandy beach area at the southern point of the island. More than 30 pits, probably the same age as those in area 2, were observed at this 4 location. Above the high tide mark the land is flat and devoid of any vegetation. Large pieces of coral were found on the surface and drift- wood was abundant. The underlying sand had a fine consistency but was mixed with large coral chunks, probably making nesting difficult. No fresh tracks were seen in this area. Area 4 extends for approximately 3.1 km and consists of a gently sloping, fine sand and coral rubble beach with moderate to thick vegeta- tion (Scaevola) above the high tide mark. Small clam shells (Tridacna sp.) are abundant on the beach. More than 40 pits were observed well into the vegetation zone and in many cases nesting sites were found behind large shrubs placing them out of sight of the ocean. The reef flat along this coastline contains large fragments of coral. Four fresh tracks were observed in this area. Predators Since hatching and nest emergence was not encountered during the survey work, no actual predation was witnessed by the author. The follow- ing observations were made on species present which are known to prey upon hatchling turtles and eggs in other areas of the world. The intertidal ghost crab, Ocypode sp., was found in large numbers at nesting areas 1 and 2. Although present at areas 3 and 4, relative population densities appeared to be considerably less. This crustacean represents a serious menace to both hatchlings and eggs when occurring in close proximity to nesting areas (Hendrickson, 1958). The land hermit crab (Coenobita sp.) which utilizes the gastropod shell Turbo was observed to be abundant and widespread on the island. Both Fosberg (1969) and Honegger (1967) have observed hermit crabs attacking hatchlings at other nesting beaches. Several land crabs of the genus Cardisoma were seen near area 2 but not in great enough numbers to represent a serious threat to young turtles. Numerous rodents estimated to be from 10 to 20 cm long were seen during night surveys. Fresh and brackish water pools located along the northeast coast may make it possible for their numbers to rapidly increase during certain times of the year. These animals are responsible for losses of hatchling turtles (Fosberg, 1969; Hendrickson, 1958). Sea birds probably contribute to hatchling mortality on Canton Island. Observations on the abundance of sea birds indicated that relatively few were present during the author's visit. However, it was interesting to note a small frigate bird (Fregata sp.) colony situated adjacent to area 2. This genus has been known to prey upon hatchlings (Honegger, 1967). A black tipped shark (Carcharhinus sp.) approximately one meter long was observed inside the fringing reef of area 2. Such sharks and carni- vorous reef fish account for hatchling losses (Carr and Hirth, 1962). Predation and interference with adults, hatchlings and eggs by personnel on the island has been held to a minimum. This is primarily due to the strict enforcement of Department of Defense regulations and to the education of personnel on the importance of protecting the environment. 5) It is not uncommon for personnel to find both hatchlings and mature females wandering inland from beach areas. This disorientation of the animal's sea finding ability may be caused by Canton's low profile and large lagoon. It has been determined that brightness cues from an open horizon are partly responsible for marine turtles being able to find their way to the ocean. The presence of lights on certain facilities in remote areas of Canton Island may also be a factor in causing turtles to travel inland. Identification and Incidence In addition to observing the nesting adults at area 1, seven young turtles held by personnel in a salt water pool were examined. All were identified as being of the genus Chelonia. Most of the personnel contacted on the island indicated that they had seen only one type of turtle during their encounters and photographic identification confirmed them to be Chelonia. Two reports were received describing turtles with distinct ridges on their carapace. In view of these observations it may be rea- sonable to assume that other genera of marine turtles may be present in the Phoenix Islands. Interviews with personnel familiar with the island revealed that marine turtles were commonly seen throughout the year both inside the lagoon and immediately outside the one major pass located on the western side. Divers reported that most turtles are large adults (over 90 cm carapace length) however, some smaller juveniles (under 60 cm carapace length) are occasionally seen. Nesting was reported to occur sporadically on Canton during all months of the year. However, turtles were more frequently seen in areas 2 and 3 during October and November. The similar age and abundance of pits in these areas suggest that seasonal nesting takes place in area 4 since this site is seldom frequented by personnel in comparison with the other three locations. Although the author did not visit other islands in the Phoenix group, some information was obtained on the incidence of nesting from personnel that frequented several of these atolls. Enderbury was reported to have heavy nesting along the eastern and western coasts during October and November, although some nesting takes place throughout the year. Nesting turtles have also been seen on the western and southern coasts of Hull Island throughout the year. Tracks were observed on the northwestern coast of Sydney and the southern coast of Gardner Island during the author's visit. On several occasions tracks have been seen on Birnie Island. No information could be obtained concerning activity on Phoenix or McKean Islands. Nesting populations on Hull, Sydney and Gardner were probably heavily exploited during the Gilbertese tenure at these locations thus reducing present day numbers. CONCLUSIONS On Canton Island nesting takes place on select beaches which display desirable characteristics for the successful excavation of a suitable egg chamber. Nesting occurs at several of these locations during the entire 6 year, however the presence of larger numbers of animals during October and November indicates that a seasonal nesting cycle may also be present. | In view of the fact that most green turtles display migratory breeding habits, it would be of value to determine what other locations in the Pacific are frequented by this colony. Although there is no basis at this time for making an estimate of the total size of the nesting population on Canton and other islands in the Phoenix group, this preliminary study indicates that a fairly large number of animals may be involved. The need to carry out more extensive research on all aspects of this population is particularly important at this time due to the continuing reduction in numbers of marine turtles throughout the world. REFERENCES Bryan, E.H., Jr. 1939. Natural history of the Phoenix Islands. Proc. Haw. Acad. Sci. 34: 6-7. Soa S355 55 1942. American Polynesia and the Hawaiian chain. Honolulu, Buddle, G. A. 1938. Notes on the birds of Canton Island. Auckland Inst. and Mus. Records 2: 125-132. Carr, A. & H. Hirth. 1962. The ecology and migration of sea turtles. 5. Comparative features of isolated green turtle colonies. Am. Mus. Novae 20915 S428 ppe Dawson, E. Y. 1959. Some marine algae from Canton Atoll. Atoll Res. BOIS (ose Ilo, Degener, O. & E. Gillaspie. 1955. Canton Island, South Pacific. Atoll Rec, ib, “je i350). Fosberg, F. R. 1969. Observations on the green turtle in the Marshall Welle, Neill Rac. Bills Sse Qota> Hatheway, W. H. 1955. The natural vegetation of Canton Island, an equa- torial Paced fie, atol IeAtol ie Res 5 Bully 43.0 E-Or Hendrickson, J. R. 1958. The green séa tuntie, Chelonia mydas (Linn. ) in Malaya and Sarawak. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 130: 455-535. Hirth, H. F. 1971. Synopsis of biological data on the Green Turtle Chelonia mydas (Linnaeus) 1758. FAO Fish. Syn. 85, Rome. Honegger, R. E. 1967. The green turtle (Chelonia mydas japonia) Thunberg in the Seychelles Islands. Br. J. Herpetol. 4: 8-1l. Murphy, R. C., A. M. Bailey & R. J. Niedrach. 1954. Canton Island. Denver Mus. Nat. Hilstg Muss) Pict pa nlOsmelR//5.. ' Pacific Islands Pilot. 1946. Great Britain Hydrographic Office, vol. 3. Parsons, J. J. 1962. The Green Turtle and Man. Gainesville, 126 pp. Sailing Directions for the Pacific Islands, South Central groups. 1952. U. S. Naval Oceanographic Office, vol. 3. Schultz, L. P. 1943. Fishes of the Phoenix and Samoan Islands collected PIS Iedurme Ehe expedition of the UsS.S. “Bushnelils" Ul. Sec Nat. Mass Babble s0s 316 pp. Van Zwaluwenburg, R. H. 1943. The insects of Canton Island. Proc. Haw. Ent. soe. tly 300-312. ---------- 1955. The insects and certain other arthropods of Canton island. “Atoll kes, Bull. 42: ¢-11. Walker, H. 1955. Air age brings life to Canton Island. Nat. Geogr. Mac. 57/2 117-132. Wiens, H. J. 1962. Atoll environment and ecology. New Haven, 532 pp. Wilkes, C. 1845. Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition. Now. 5. AL NS atta soi aeegk . ty! 7.) ee TY on rh yee Cae iil a ics r F > on ir har hy aa ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 185 ISLAND NEWS AND COMMENT Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. January 15, 1975 a a s,s ee) Foe =f ia ‘ M } » 1 ate 0 t Te fh ihe iy 9 BREE racine Ts | 4 ISLAND NEWS AND COMMENT In order not to delay further an already very tardy issue of ARB, the present News and Comment number will be restricted to a few already prepared items. We have much in the way of news and bibliographic informa- tion on hand, but the time is not readily available for editing it. Hence we will include most such items in the next Island News and Comment number. We apologize for this to those who have sent us news items, bibliography, or comments. We have received some very poorly prepared articles during the past several years. Our stated policy has always been to take no editorial responsibility for rewriting, and to return such material to its authors. On occasion we have carried out this policy, but frequently, if rather little work was required, if the material was of sufficient interest that we did not want to risk discouraging the author and losing it, or if the author's own language was not English, we have done the necessary editing or rewriting. We have found that some authors, even when rewriting their articles, cannot seem to produce a presentable or clear document, and we have then rewritten the second attempt. We have taken the time to do this not for the benefit of the authors, but for that of our readers. Now we have come to the point that we cannot afford to do extensive editing, and must adhere much more strictly to our policy, and return material that needs much editorial attention. This not only will relieve our time problem somewhat but may result in more prompt publication of the well- written papers that we receive. We would suggest, to avoid any return of manuscripts, that every author get a critical review from a colleague who can write clear English and understands the subject matter before submitting his paper to us. This may help avoid wounded pride and hurt feelings, as well as facilitating and speeding up publication of ARB. We very much appreciate the contributions to our ARB fund from those of you who have sent them in for this year without our reminding you. We hope to have enough issues out this year to justify your confidence. Con- tributions from others will be appreciated. NEWS SOUTH PACIFIC CORAL REEF STUDIES: On the occasion of the International Symposium on Oceanography of the South Pacific, sponsored by UNESCO and held in Wellington, New Zealand, during February 1972, a Special Working Committee on South Pacific Coral Reefs was formed and recommendations for future research activities and exchange of information within the South Pacific were forwarded to UNESCO as detailed in Cahiers du Pacifique 16: 224-228, 1972. This Committee met again during the Second International Symposium on Coral Reefs held along the Great Barrier Reef aboard the cruise ship ''Marco Polo" in June 1973. It was decided that a small international meeting of coral reef workers should be held at a suitable location in the Pacific during 1975 about the time of the Pacific Science Congress. A grant will be sought for this meeting from UNESCO's Participation Programme initiated through the New Zealand National Commission for UNESCO. It is also considered relevant to certain national contributions to the Man and the Biosphere programme. In anticipation of this meeting, review papers detailing the state of knowledge, problems and prospects, and future plans, supplemented where appropriate with a bibliography of previously published literature, will be solicited from workers in various taxonomic groups, and stressing, wherever possible, biogeographic and ecological aspects. This compila- tion, which is intended to be published in permanent form, would be prefaced with an account of the exploration and investigation of coral reefs of the region which is taken to include all the islands east of the Great Barrier Reef from the Solomons to Henderson and Ducie and from the Gilbert Islands south to the Kermadec Islands in the New Zealand Region. Track charts of expeditions and chronological tables of research programmes as in French Polynesia would also be included. Those who are being asked to prepare such papers would also be expected to present and discuss them at this meeting which will be limited to about 35 participants. It is planned to hold the meeting over a period of a week or ten days and the other propositions mainly concerning exchange of information, financing of expeditions and common problems may be dis- cussed in more detail. The Special Working Committee on South Pacific Coral Reefs consists of the following: E. W. Dawson, Senior Biologist, New Zealand Oceanographic Institute, Wellington, New Zealand (CHAIRMAN). M. Angot, Regional Expert in Marine Sciences for UNESCO, Djakarta, Indonesia. P. J. Beveridge, School of Biological Sciences, University of the South Pacrtlew Suva, Balas F, Doumenge, School of Biological Sciences, University of the South PaVvenseie,, Sibel, lola a. D. S. Devaney, Invertebrate Zoologist, Bernice P. Bishop Museum, Honolulu, Hawaii. J. E. Morton, Professor of Zoology, University of Auckland, New Zealand. H. A. Rehder, Malacologist, National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. B. Salvat, Directeur aux Hautes Etudes, Ecole Pratique des Hautes Etudes, 55, Rue de Buffon, Paris. D. R. Stoddart, Department of Geography, University of Cambridge, England (Chairman of Committee for International Symposia on Corals and Coral Reefs). PACIFIC SEABIRD GROUP AND BULLETIN: We are glad to announce the formation of the Pacific Seabird Group and the appearance, January 1974, of volume 1 number 1 of its Bulletin. The Group is composed of, and open to, ''persons known to have an interest in Pacific seabirds."’ It will provide coordina- tion and stimulation of the field activities of its members rather than initiating any field activities of its own." Judging by the contents of the first number of its Bulletin, a very important goal, also, is the promotion and encouragement of conservation activities concerning seabirds. Listed, also, are specific research projects on Pacific Seabirds. The membership list, of 162, among them some familiar names, is also in the Bulletin. Further information as to the contents of the Bulletin and the activities may best be obtained by joining the Group. Correspondence should be addressed to: Secretary, Pacific Seabird Group, 1412 Airport Way, Fairbanks, Alaska 99701. ATOLL POPULATIONS CONFERENCE, HAWAII, DECEMBER 1972: A conference on Pacific Atoll Populations was held at the East-West Center, Honolulu, Hawaii at the end of December, 1972. Sponsored by the East-West Popula- tion Institute, and organised by Dr. Vern Carroll of the University of Michigan, the conference brought together some two dozen anthropologists, demographers and geographers for four days of formal discussion on the comparative and historical demography and the changing social and cultural antecedents of atoll populations in the Pacific. The conference was convened as a workshop for the authors who are contributing to a forthcoming volume in the Association of Social Anthropologists in Oceania (ASAO) Monograph series, entitled "Oceanic Atoll Populations" (Vern Carroll, editor, University of Hawaii Press). In preparation for the Hawaii meeting, during 1972 monographic studies of selected atoll populations were prepared by the participants, using census and other ethnographic data previously collected during fieldwork. These papers were circulated before the conference to the fourteen participating Ethnographers and to the eight Session Chairmen and Discussants. Suggestions and queries were exchanged both before and during the conference, at which decisions were made concerning the standardized presentation of demographic and supporting data, in order to ensure the maximum degree of comparability between different atoll Studies. Revised versions of the papers together with concluding chapters written by some of the Session Chairmen will be submitted for the ASAO Monograph, which was to be in press by mid-1973. The atolls covered by the participant Ethnographers were as follows: Central Carolines Lamotrek-Woleai ....... William Alkire (Victoria, B.C.) Mortlock Islands pea aioe ete a adel gs isle Yo cai's 8 James Nason (Washington) MAM OM eet e see apc vaua 6/5, a08 Mac Marshall (Iowa) Marshall Islands INQ MUS rave a eefet eailoice’ a. of ela v0. co.tm is Nancy Pollock (Victoria U, Wellington) IE OU Mri ase i ale! wceica laa e Michael Rynkiewich (MacAlester) Gilbert Islands Ye a ps ena ha Nae Bernd Lambert (Cornell) Ellice-Tokelau Islands EVE cer Groupie Ivan Brady (Cincinnati) Tokelau Groups gacase Antony Hooper (Auckland) and Judith Huntsman (Auckland) Tuamotus PUR WrUal Oi hac ae tae Sachiko Hatanaka (E-W Culture Learning TinShters) Rampal rode ie ein cree cammetaes Paul Ottino (Tananarive, Madagascar) Polynesian Outliers NUkWOrol ioe oe eater ae ees Vern Carroll (E-W Population Inst. and Michigan) Ontong Java and other atolls north of the Solomon listtands) Wea: Tim Bayliss-Smith (Geography, Cambridge) Outer Reef Islands .... William Davenport (Philadelphia) During the conference, informal papers were presented as bases for discussion by the Session Chairmen and Discussants, on the following topics: The Definition of atoll populations ....... Vern Carroll Demographic analysis and small POPUWLAC TONS oi w pce cl ehes cue teloheee Ronee ee Reet Rove Griffith Feeney (E-W Population Inst.) Data requirements for comparative ANALYSIS Ic WS ahaha aiahsaboerete ret centres ana ovoketehe a etatete tone Ko Groenewegen (South Pacific Commission) Computer: technaques! cae cere ee rae cae Michael Levin (E-W Population Inst. and Michigan) Changing patterns of mortality and morbidity, epeecta gy. Glovel LAA CILOM cog000vc0 dase dec Peter Pirie (E-W Population Inst.) Role of inbreeding in fertility PEAUCELOM iin werctercsohernte store eg henner eens one Newton Morton (Population Genetics Kaba. Ue Hawaas) Biological-ecological-cultural antecedents to population change and normative HNevbeel Olbhciewkes soodendgasoocnmgoooo0deane Alan Howard (E-W Population Inst.), Aram Yemgoyan (Michigan) and Robert Harrison (Wisconsin) In addition to these conference participants, there were also a number of observers including members of the staff and students of the East-West Center, the University of Hawaii, and the Bishop Museum. Most people attending the conference felt that it was particularly successful in encouraging the mutual interchange of ideas between the anthropologists and the demographers, whose respective viewpoints did not always coincide. It soon became obvious, however, that the two disciplines had much to offer to each other, and that for both of them atoll populations provide distinct advantages for in-depth research. Not only is the atoll environment relatively uniform in the Pacific so that comparative studies become particularly meaningful, but also their human populations are normally sufficiently small and discrete to enable a rich array of data to be collected. For the anthropologist, it becomes possible to obtain census information not only for the total living population, resident and migrant, but also, by means of genealogies, for the recently deceased. From these data, unusually detailed studies can be made of the changing patterns of fertility and mortality. Similarly, atolls provide favourable conditions for the measurement and study of migration, which is becoming for many Pacific islands an increasingly dominant demographic process. Several of the conference ethnographers are colla- borating with Michael Levin of the University of Michigan in a computer project, using genealogical and census data from complete atoll populations. Computerized techniques should enable detailed, quantitative analyses to be carried out on a cross-cultural basis, in a way not yet attempted in either discipline. The Atoll Populations Conference and the publication arising from it could therefore do much to encourage what has been a relatively neglected genre of oceanic research. There is a pressing need to advance our understanding of demographic processes at the village level, especially in the Pacific where the threat of overpopulation is in places so urgent. More pragmatically, for some territories there is also considerable room for improvement in the accuracy and usefulness of official published census data. If the volume "Oceanic Atoll Populations'' were merely to point out the current deficiencies in fields such as these, it would serve a useful purpose. Hopefully, it will also achieve a good deal more. Tim Bayliss-Smith, Department of Geography, University of Cambridge, Cambridge, England. DEATHS: We are saddened to have to report the death, in April, 1974 of our old friend Professor Marston Bates, who participated in the Pacific Science Board expedition to Ifaluk Atoll, Carolines, in 1953, and was co-author with Don Abbott of Coral Island, 1958. Professor David Lack, of Galapagos bird population and evolution Studies fame, died on March 12, 1973. Island research lost an important participant. We wish to express our sympathy to Dora and Hank Banner for the loss, in a shark attach in Samoa, of their son, Alan Conrad Banner, a promising young marine biologist interested in islands. 6 SHORT PAPERS MARINE ALGAE OF GREAT SWAN ISLAND by Wm. Randolph Taylor Department of Botany and Herbariun, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 48104 | In the Spring of 1972 I received by the courtesy of Director C. Bernard Lewis of the Science Museum, Institute of Jamaica, Kingston, of the curator of algae, Mrs. Lena Green, and of the collector, Dr. George R. Proctor, a substantial number of algal samples from Great Swan Island. To all of these persons I am much indebted for the pleasure of receiving and reporting on this material, much of which had been identified by Mrs. Green before it came to me. Study of this collection was in part supported by Grant GB-3186 from the National Science Foundation, such help being gratefully acknowledged. The algae were collected between the 15th and 24th of August, 1971, and are distinguished by the Institute's accession numbers. The first set of specimens is in the Science Museum, Kingston, and a partial one at the University of Michigan. The Swan Island group lies at approximately 17° 21' N Lat., 83° 56! W Long., about 180 km. n.n.e. of Punta Patuca, Honduras. It was at one time called the Islas Santamilla, later the Islas del Cisne, and now as United States of America territory, the Swan Islands. Dr. Proctor kindly supplied useful information about the little islands of the group, of whose underwater vegetation we have not hither- to had any information. Great Swan Island, the one with which we are concerned, is of the order of 3 km in length and about a third as broad, lying at an angle a bit south of west to north of east. It is relatively flat, a hard limestone cover over an igneous base which is somewhat exposed locally, particularly along the south shore, and much of the shoreline is bordered by cliffs 6.5-13 meters high. The available chart shows an uneven bottom around the west end, quite shallow, but this rather open bay is the usual landing place. Collections were made in 4 of the 5 bay areas. Booby Islet lies just off Buffalo Point, and the largest collection was made on the shoal between them, about 30 species excluding microscopic forms. None of the other collections were half so large. Smith Bay, next on the south shore, appears by the chart to be rock-obstructed, which would not inhibit : algae; it had the next most varied flora. Jim Duff Hole or Goat Bay : appears not to have been examined. Jacobsons Bay on the northeast is : widely exposed. Fowlers Bay on the north is about as deep as broad, : open, but lies just east of an area of heavy breakers, of which the chart gives warning. No doubt considerable additional data could be had by diving, but faced by long stretches of cliff and in the apparent absence : of a fringing reef, the island offers little attraction to an underwater a botanist. The four areas contributed to the collection, and all the algae were collected in shallow water. No more habitat information accom- panied them. Much the longest list came from what seems to have been an accessible traverse, namely from Buffalo Point to Booby Cay, which apparently lies close offshore. About half as many came from Fowlers Bay and from Smith Bay, but least from Jacobsons Bay. Segregating the specimens from each area developed no very distinctive ecological group- ing to show very much habitat difference. In all cases there were algae from a sandy bottom, be it only local patches, such as Penicillus, Rhipocephalus or Udotea, and plants from reef rock or scattered coral fragments, such as s Stypopodium, Dictyota or Padina. The Caulerpas could have been on reef rock or merely attached to bits of coral or shell over the bottom, the Janias were epiphytic on larger algae limited to a firm substrate. Nothing suggested that areas exposed to severe surf were studied, or that hot muddy shallows were involved. The phytogeographic relationship is clearly to the flora of the northern Caribbean (Taylor 1960) as would be expected. In fact the same is true of Isla da Providencia about 520 km to the southeast (Taylor 1939, p.1). LIST OF ALGAE COLLECTED Species are listed in the order entered in Taylor 1960. Ch lorophyceae Chaetomorpha linum (Mull.) Kutz. Smith Bay, no. A.6746, Cladophora fuliginosa Kutz. Fowlers Bay, no. A.6684. Valonia ventricosa J. Ag. Shoals, Buffalo Point to Booby Cay (hereafter Simply listed as Buffalo Point), no. A.6733. Dictyosphaeria cavernosa (Forssk.) Bérg. Buffalo Point, no. A.6734. Caulerpa cupressoides (West) C. Ag., var. mamillosa (Mont.) Weber-van Bosse. Buffalo Point, no. A.6732; Jacobsons Bay, no. A.6680. Caulerpa racemosa (Forssk.) J. Ag., var racemosa. Smith Bay, no. A.6703. Caulerpa racemosa var. uvifera (Turn.) Weber-van Bosse. Buffalo Point, MO ANG 7/55). Udotea flabellum (Soland.) Lamx. Buffalo Point, no. A.6728; Jacobsons Bay, no. A.6681. Penicillus capitatus Lamk. Buffalo Point, no. 6730; Jacobsons Bay, no. A.6674; Fowlers Bay, A.6683 p.p. maj. Penicillus lamourouxii Dec. Buffalo Point, no. A.6727; Fowlers Bay, no. A.6683 p.p. min. Rhipocephalus phoenix (Soland.) Kutz., var. phoenix. Buffalo Point, no. A.6726; Jacobsons Bay, no. A.6676. Rhipocephalus phoenix var. brevifolius A. §& E. S. Gepp. Smith Bay, no. A.6708. Halimeda opuntia (L.) Lamx. Buffalo Point, no. A.6739; Smith Bay, no. A.6695. Halimeda tuna (Soland.) Lamx., var. tuna. Buffalo Point, no. A.6738. Halimeda tuna var. platydisca (Dec.) Bart. Smith Bay, no. A.6701. Halimeda simulans Howe. Smith Bay, no. A.6696. Halimeda incrassata (Ell.) Lamx., var. incrassata. Jacobsons Bay, no. A.6682. Halimeda incrassata var. ? gracilis Bérg. Buffalo Point, no. A.6731. Codium intertextum Coll. §& Herv. Buffalo Point, no. A.6759. Codium taylori Silva. Buffalo Point, no. A.6760. Phaeophyceae Dilophus guineensis (Kutza)) J. Ag Butta lowPoint- nos nAno755ehonlens Bay no. A.6747. Dictyota dichotoma (Huds.) Lamx. Fowlers Bay, no. A.6689. Dictyota divaricata Lamx. Buffalo Point, no. A.6754; Smith Bay, no. A.6702. Dictyota dentata Lamx. Buffalo Point, no. A.6723; Fowlers Bay, no. A.6694. Stypopodium zonale (Lamx.) Papenf. Buffalo Point, no. A.6724. Padina pavonica (L.) Thivy. Jacobsons Bay, no. A.6677. Padina vickersiae Hoyt. Buffalo Point, no. A.6720. Padina sanctae-crucis Bérg. Buffalo Point, no. A.6721. Sargassum ?polyceratium Mont. Fowlers Bay, no. A.6748. Turbinaria tricostata Bart. Buffalo Point, no. A.6722. Turbinaria turbinata Kuntze. Fowlers Bay, no. A.6686; Smith Bay, no. A.6699. Rhodophy ceae Liagora megagyna Bérg. Jacobsons Bay, no. A.6749. Galaxaura subverticillata Kjellm. Buffalo Point, no. A.6715. Galaxaura squalida Kjellm. Buffalo Point, no. A.6713. Galaxaura rugosa (Soland.) Lamx. Smith Bay, no. A.6705; Jacobsons Bay, None AW667/5% Galaxaura oblongata (Soland.) Lamx. Smith Bay, no. A.6704. Fosliella farinosa (Lamx.) Howe var. farinosa. Buffalo Point, on Valontasynos A[67335, p.p. min. Fosliella farinosa var. solmsiana (Falk.) Taylor. Buffalo Point, on Valonia, no. A.6733, p.p. min. Amphiroa fragilissima (L.) Lamx. Smith Bay, no. A.6707. Amphiroa rigida Lamour., var. antillana Bérg. Jacobsons Bay, no. A.6675. Corallina cubensis (Mont.) Kutz. Buffalo Point, no. A.6719; Fowlers Bay, no. A.6687, A.6688 p.p. min. Jania capillacea Harv. Fowlers Bay, on Digenia, no. A.6688 p.p. min. Jania adherens Lamx. Fowlers Bay on Sargassum, no. A.6748 p.p. min; on Digenia, A.6688 p.p. min. Ceramium brevizonatum H. E. Peters., v. caraibica Peters. § Béorg.: BuULtLal oy Pointe nos N.67 17. Ceramium nitens (C. Ag.) C. Ag. Smith Bay, no. A.6709. Spyridia aculeata (Schimp.) Kutz. Fowlers Bay, no. A.6690. Bryothamnion triquetrum (Gmel.) Howe. Buffalo Point, no. A.6718. Digenia simplex (Wulf.) C. Ag. Buffalo Point, no. A.6714; Fowlers Bay, no. A.6688. Herposiphonia secunda (C. Ag.) Ambron. Fowlers Bay, no. A.6691. Laurencia obtusa (Huds.) Lamx. Fowlers Bay, no. A.6693. Laurencia intricata Lamx. Smith Bay, no. A.6700. 10 ) LITERATURE CITED | Taylor, Wm. Randolph. 1939, Algae collected on the Presidential Cruise of 1938, Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 98(9): 1-18, 14 text-figs., | Zupl. / -------------------- . 1960, Marine Algae of the Eastern Tropical and Subtropical Coasts of the Americas. ix 870 pp., 14 photos, 80 pl. Ann Arbor. 11 PREDATION UPON HATCHLINGS AND EGGS OF THE GREEN TURTLE, CHELONIA MYDAS, ON ALDABRA ATOLL, INDIAN OCEAN by C. B. Frith Field observations of predation upon natural turtle hatchings are very rare (Frazier 1971); the author's observations, therefore, are recorded here. He was on Aldabra (latitude 9°24'S, longitude 46°20'E) for the period April 1972-April 1973 as a member of The Royal Society Research Station staff. I refer interested readers to the map and place names published by Stoddart (1971). Observations are headed under predator type. Crabs A. Dr. Dawn D. Alexander wrote the following in her field notes: "During early evening on 6 March 1972 a number of Green Turtle hatchlings, Chelonia mydas, were observed making their way to the sea edge at Dune Jean-Louis, South Island, where they met a line of hundreds of crabs, Ocypode ceratophthalmus."' These crabs were seen to attack, kill, and carry off several hatchlings. A single crab of the same species was found in its burrow with a torn and dying turtle hatchling. The burrow in this particular case was in the sand of the turtle nest itself. Frazier (1971) records finding Ocypode crabs burrowing into turtle nests. Bi A second observation of predation by the crab 0. ceratophthalmus was made by D. Bourn (pers. comm.) at the same locality as above almost exactly a year later: "At 20.00 hours on 4 March 1973 ten or more hatchling Green Turtles were seen making their way to the beach. This was four and a half hours after high tide. Two hatchlings were released from the ghost crabs, O. ceratophthalmus, and another three were seen to be devoured by crabs of the same species." Fish On Ist October 1972 a thirty pound specimen of the fish Caranx ignobilis was caught by rod and line off the reef by West Channels. Upon examination it proved to contain the partly digested remains of twenty five hatchling Green Turtles, C. mydas. If these were all caught from a single hatching it would represent over twenty five per cent predation upon an average Aldabran clutch (Frazier) by a single fish. Birds A. At 17.55 hours on 11 June 1972 a hatchling Green Turtle was seen erupting from a nest on Anse Malabar beach, Middle Island. This was 107 Minutes after high tide and in full sunlight. The first hatchling was directly followed by others until sixty two had emerged from the nest, all 12 breaking surface at exactly the same spot. Prior to the appearance of the young turtles a number of flightless White-throated Rails, Dryolimnas cuvieri aldabranus, had been observed about the beach area. As soon as these birds spotted the turtles they rushed at them in an excited fashion. The birds were most decisive in their attacks and did all they could to avoid the five people trying to protect the hatchling turtles. Within a few minutes there were five rails. Two birds did catch and kill a turtle each. These were picked up in the bill and carried off a short distance away from the people, and from the other rails. The top of the turtle carapace was pecked open in a neat round hole and the contents eaten through this bit by bit. As several rotten or unhatched turtle eggs were dug from the nest, rails immediately snatched them up in their bills and ran off with them. These were then pierced and the contents eaten through a small hole. Both the hatchlings and eggs appear to have been instantly recognised as food. One rail was robbed of its young turtle by a Pied Crow, Corvus albus, the crow flying to a perch where it was joined by another, and eating the turtle whilst holding it to the perch with the feet. B. Mr. D. Bourn gave the following information in his field notes for 16 March 1973: ''At 15.30 hours on the sand dune at Dune Jean-Louis. Twenty to thirty green Turtles were seen erupting from the sand. Ten Turnstones, Arenaria interpres, seven Pied Crows, Corvus albus, and a Sacred Ibis, Threskiornis aethiopica, were observed pecking and killing the young turtles. The birds were mostly picking at the neck of the hatchlings." Whilst the Sacred Ibis was seen to peck at, and shake, the hatchlings its bill would not be adequate to reduce them in size and it would presumably have to swallow them whole. This was not observed, but considerably larger prey is well known for this species. Acknowledgements I am most grateful to Dr. Dawn Alexander and Dr. David Bourn for making their notes available for incorporation here. I am grateful to The Royal Society of London for the opportunity to visit Aldabra and thank the staff of that institution for assistance. References Frazier, J. 1971. Observations on sea turtles at Aldabra Atoll. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc, Lond Bs) 260: 9375-410) Stoddart, D. R. 1971. Place names of Aldabra. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond. B. 260: 631-632. 1S RECONNAISANCE AND PLAT MAPPING OF CORAL ATOLLS: A SIMPLIFIED RANGEFINDER METHOD by James D. Nason In a recent issue of the Atoll Research Bulletin there appeared a short paper by S. B. Domm dealing with a one-man technique for the mapping of reefs cays (1971:15-17). The method described by Domm seems particularly useful for reconnaisance mapping over long distances where plant growth does not hamper lines of sight. Since only simple and relatively inexpensive equipment is involved, this was a most welcome addition to the available practicum of field research on coral landforms. As his paper pointed out, available time, equipment costs, and a general absence of aerial photographs either discourage or certainly hamper the production of maps for small Pacific islands. To these one might also add the difficulty of procuring good base maps of many islands, thereby making it necessary to produce field base,maps before recording surface features that are of particular interest. These basic pre-conditions can pose a variety of serious problems for researchers in many fields. This would not seem to be true for those engaged in anthropological research as this will, almost by defini- tion, be carried out on inhabited islands where necessary assistance can be secured. The presence of helpers can save one time and effort and change equipment requirements. This may not always be possible however, and may not be a particular blessing even when assistance can be obtained. Without some training and experience it is at best frustrating to have assistants in attendance while one attempts an investigative procedure, like mapping, which in the end seems primarily designed to entrench one's community position as resident idiot. Nonetheless it remains the rule rather than the exception that anthropological fieldwork should include the production of site maps of one kind or another. Whether one knows mapping procedures or not, the benefits to be derived from field maps usually out-weigh the trials that they may entail (vide RAI 1954:47, Pelto 1970:230). The utility of maps in anthropological research is particularly great for coral islands of the Pacific, where considerations of atoll geography are critically important data for the understanding of both man-land and man-man rela- tionships (cf. Alkire 1965, Crocombe 1964, TTPI 1958). Thus, the situa- tion in which many anthropologists may find themselves can be summarized as being one where maps should be produced, with or without local assis- tance, with any one or all of the following conditions making this a most difficult task: Ee ee ee 1, 2: All notes are at end of paper. 14 (1) A fundamental lack of pre-research training or | experience in mapping procedures and equipment, | with a severe limitation on the amount of pre- | field time in which to learn such procedures ; (2) An absence of up-to-date or accurate base maps to use as ‘starting points' for island maps; (3) A general limitation on the amount of fieldwork | time available for carrying out map making as a research enterprise, no matter how valuable maps might be for the project; (4) A lack of research funds available for the pur- chase of either any map 'gear' or certainly any "sophisticated' mapping equipment, e.g. tele- scopic alidade, plane table, transit, etc. Some of the above factors came into play during my own research on 3 small coral island in the United States Trust Territory in 1968-69. No base map indicating surface features for the island on which I planned to do research could be located before departure or when once in the field. A United States H.O. chart of the immediate three island area was available (at a scale of 1:72,830) but it quickly became apparent in the field that the island as shown on the chart was much in error | and, accordingly, that the chart could not be used. The research funds | that had been made available permitted only modest expenditures for map- ping equipment. In this instance I secured only a good quality hand | compass and a steel tape with other appropriate supplies. Research time | in the field was also limited. As a result, while maps of island features | were important to the research, island mapping was always in some danger of being omitted due to the press of other vital investigations. Using a compass-pace method, with steel tape checks, the requisite maps even- tually required in excess of 230 man-hours to complete. This was with prior experience with my equipment and with mapping procedures, starting from scratch (i.e. preparing my own base maps of this multi-islet atoll of less than one square mile yotal land area), and with the valuable assistance of two island men. The resultant maps have an estimated error of approximately 5% to 8%. While not accurate enough for any ‘legal' survey purpose, they were of sufficient caliber for research of the type in which I was engaged. The rather large time expenditure involved in the above research mapping is not, apparently, unique for anthropologists working under Similar conditions. Leonard Mason, for example, states that his compass - pace map of the islet of Laura (Majuro Island) required some 325 man-hours with the aid of one good assistant (1967:4-5). If at all characteristic, it represents by far too great an outlay of limited and valuable research time. The problems of time, background skills, and equipment or supplies can combine to provide obvious setbacks in this or other research. Cer- tainly, these problems should provide a considerable incentive for the search for an alternative survey technique which would yield accurate : results with a minimum of difficulty. Since funding for research is still 15 rather restrictive, there remains a monetary factor to contend with which automatically rules out any very costly equipment. A more satis- factory, if not ideal, mapping system, then, should incorporate minimal cost with equipment and procedures that will permit single person opera- tion which is not only rapid and accurate but simple to learn, given no prior experience. The procedure should involve a minimum of stations and, at best, either no or minimal need to establish stadia or other sighting markers. After considerable thought and some experimentation, I would like to suggest a mapping procedure which seems to best answer this problem, at least given my own goals and requirements. To my knowledge the only device available which will allow one- station, single person operation is an optical rangefinder. Since these devices depend upon the effects of optical parallax, their accuracy and range of effectiveness depend primarily upon the distance of separation between the two sighting apertures (assuming reasonable quality of mirrors and prisms and other critical components). This immediately introduces the problem of size and portability, since the 'larger' the rangefinder, i.e. the greater the separation between the two apertures, the greater the accuracy of sighted readings. For this reason, these devices have apparently not be usually considered for even rough survey usage. I would like to suggest, however, that there are rangefinders available to us that are well suited for the kinds of uses of interest here. I feel certain that the suggestion that rangefinders be employed for mapping is not original, but I have been unable to learn of prior instances where they have been used. There are a number of new rangefinder models presently on the market, but I have located one in particular that seems to best meet my own particular requirements. This is the 'Duo-Site Range Height Finder' manufactured by Tokyo Optical Co., Ltd. and sold, in the United States, through the Dietzgen Company. This is a double-image coincident focusing rangefinder that is very portable, has an acceptable accuracy range, and is available at a reasonable cost. The exact specifications as they are given by the manufacturer are as follows: (a) overall dimensions - 12 in. long, 1.75 in. thick, 4 in. wide (b) aperture separation - 9.8 in. (c) weight = 125. bs). (d) magnification - 3X (e) distance range - 17 ft to 1000 ft (scale intervals of less than 50 ft up to 400 ft) $64.50 US (f) listed retail price Since the types of maps I am interested in producing involve the mapping of a number of land areas of less than two acres each, the listed error range for this rangefinder and the scale intervals are both acceptable. Expectable errors, for instance, are less than 1% at 60 ft, approximately 2% at 165 ft, and approximately 4% at 330 ft. A simple one-screw adjust- ment is provided for correcting the distance scale after transit or during operation. In addition, the instrument's metal case is covered with a textured, waterproof vinyl material to inhibit rusting and other forms of similar wear (the entire instrument can be waterproofed by the dealers to enhance tropical use). Finally, this rangefinder is equipped with 16 a height gauge in the form of a semi-circular plate with attached pendu- lum arm. The pendulum arm is scaled for readings of oblique distances. The plate carries a grid scale for both vertical height and horizontal distance, with the periphery of the plate marked left and right up to 70° incline or decline (see fig. 1). Slope angles are taken by means of sights through an objective sight and aperture sight which are mounted on the distal ends of the top surface of the rangefinder. A pendulum stop is released to allow the pendulum arm to swing freely until it stops at the proper position on the plate. The four factors of slope angle, instrument height, oblique distance, and horizontal distance can then be variously utilized to determine: (a) vertical height - given oblique distance, horizontal distance, and instrument height (b) om " - given oblique distance, slope angle, and instrument height (c) horizontal distance - given vertical height, oblique dis- tance, and instrument height (d) Wy " - given oblique distance, slope angle, and instrument height The maximum vertical range (as shown on the pendulum arm) is 150 feet. This can be increased by using the slope angle with the horizontal distance, which is factored by some divisible integral number which is then used as the multiplier for the reduced vertical height reading obtained on the scale at that shorter horizontal distance. The manu- facturer's listed accuracy ranges for vertical readings are 2% at 66 feet and approximately 4% at 130 feet. This instrument, as is, would have to be used in conjunction with a compass and recording notebook as the minimum equipment necessary for field map production. Handling the rangefinder, compass, and book for each sight, however, seems in some respects a time-consuming procedure that might very well not warrant the added luxury of the rangefinder at all. The user, of course, would still find it necessary to translate his field notes into a workable map. To make the use of this instrument somewhat more direct and simple, therefore, I have added a ‘stand’ for the rangefinder and, in essence, a plane table (see fig. 2). The stand I am employing consists of a 4 by 12 in. base plate of 1/2 in. clear plexiglas with 1/8 by 1 in. aluminum bars supporting two 1/2 in. plexi- glas holding brackets. The stand is assembled with 1/4 in. flat head brass bolts and wing nuts, with one through the two-part aluminum support to facilitate movement of the rangefinder at an angle for oblique sights. The base plate has beveled edges to improve reading an attached plastic scale. For my ‘plane tablet I use a standard, good quality camera tripod and a small (24 by 18 by 3/8 in.) drawing board. The underside of the board has a 1/4 in. wood plate (3 by 4 in.) glued at the center. At the center of the plate a hexagonal head nut of the same size as the tripod plate screw has been inset and securely glued. ne a Wi Used in this manner, the rangefinder is essentially a specialized type of telescopic alidade with all of the latter's advantages, e.g. on-site production of a map, but without the requirement of complementary use of a stadia rod and two-man operation. The above arrangement has proved to be not only stable (at least in winds up to 30 mph) but also amenable to the rapid production of both reconnaissance and plat mans. The procedures for use are relatively simple. Once the 'plane table' is situated and the mapping paper (or drafting film) applied, a compass bearing marked at the arbitrary instrument station datum on the paper will provide sufficient orientation for all further sights taken at this station. Then, with the rangefinder on its stand, one can obtain distance sights 360° about the station, transferring these directly to the map by use of the scaled edge of the stand - as with an alidade. Foresights and backsights must, of course, be used when transferring to new stations. Any physical objective point may, in this manner, be directly transferred to the resultant map. Objectives that are obscured by plant growth for level line-of-sight readings present no difficulty, if they are themselves high enough, by virtue of obtaining horizontal distance through the vertical height scale. Any number of alternatives are available for leveling the instrument, but I use a magnetic base vial level. Field tests have indicated a number of points of interest for this assembly, as follow: (a) virtually 100% accuracy can be obtained, with practice, for any distances up to 200 feet; (b) for best use it would probably be advisable to add a centered reticle to the scope which will facilitate objective readings; (c) in situations where objectives are obscure due to poor light conditions or lack of contrastive feature, targets such as tin can sections, white cardboard squares, etc. may have to be provided -.although this does not materially add to the time involved unless there are a number to be so situated; (d) this equipment cuts by one-third or perhaps one-fourth the time otherwise spent if using a pace-compass method; and, (e) when distances to objectives greater than 180 feet are involved, the rangefinder can be slipped out of its stand and both backsights to the station and foresights to the objective quickly taken from a suitable station-to-objective midpoint. In my own area of research, islet widths are seldom greater than 1000 to 1500 feet. This would mean, if one employed this procedure, some two to four stations on a cross-islet survey. In all but a very few limited areas, natural or man-made landmarks would provide for a more than adequate number of objective features. The time required to explain and demonstrate the operation of this equipment and procedure has been less than one or two hours (to graduate students) with satis- factory results. The rangefinder itself constitutes the only major item that one could normally not be expected to have as field equipment. The provision of a stand and suitable platform should be within the skills of most individuals. Naturally, there is ample opportunity here for the exercise of one's mechanical ingenuity. Plexiglas, for example, does not have to be used for the base, but it does have the advantage Over a material like wood in that one can see the map areas otherwise obscured by the base plate. The end result is, I believe, a system that is simple to learn, rapid in use, accurate, and, for a procedure that has many of the best aspects of plane table-alidade mapping, involves 18 relatively little expense. It is certainly more than adequate for the types of reconnaissance and plat mapping endeavors that involved in my own research. I would think that it might be equally applicable to that of others. Notes Domm's technique employs field binoculars with inserted reticles for Sighting on a centrally located stadia rod. Those who wish to pursue this method further might be interested in investigating compass -bearing binoculars manufactured by Supermarine Products Company (1 Johnson Drive, Raritan, New Jersey, USA 08869). The maker claims accuracy to 1°. The price, unfortunately, is $275, which is quite high for those interested in relatively inexpensive field mapping procedures and equipment. An exception that has recently come to my attention is the United States Army Map series for the Pacific Islands, at a scale of 1:25,000. Many of these are photogrammetric and plane table maps with some recon- naissance verification. They include coastal nydrography based on United States and Japanese HO charts. This research was carried out with a grant and fellowship from the National Institute of Mental Health and with additional support from the Department of Anthropology, University of Washington. Only a few cross-island surface elevation transits were made. To this end I used a chain, a wood rod scaled in feet, and a small power rifle scope with centered reticle. This proved clumsy but reasonably accurate. References Alkire, William H. 1965. Lamotrek Atoll and Inter-island Socio- economic Ties. Univ. of Illinois Press, Urbana, I1l. Crocombe, R.G. 1964. Land Tenure In the Cook Islands. Oxford University Press, London. Domm, S.B. 1971. Mapping Reefs and Cays, A Quick Method for the Scientist Working Alone. Atoll Research Bulletin #148: 15- iin Mason, Leonard. 1967. The Mapping of Majuro Island (Laura), in The Laura Report, ed. by L. Mason. Honolulu. Pelto, Pertti J. 1970. Anthropological Research: The Structure of Inquiry. Harper & Row, New York. RAI [Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland]. 1954. Notes and Queries on Anthropology (6th ed.). Routledge and Kegan Paul Ltd., London. TTPI [United States Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands]. 1958. Land Tenure Patterns, Vol. I. Office of the High Commissioner, Guam. 19 Figure 1 - Height Gauge [Actual scaling reads to 1° and to 5 foot grids, rather than the 25 foot grid as shown above. Vertical height read across, hori- zontal distance up and down. Pendulum is clear plastic. ] Figure 2 - Rangefinder and Stand Assembly ZI A DIVER-OPERATED HYDRAULIC DRILL FOR CORING SUBMERGED SUBSTRATES 2/ by Ian G. Macintyre Division of Sedimentology, National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. 20560 INTRODUCTION A portable submersible drill was developed that will enable diver scientists to obtain cores 2 1/8 inches in diameter down to penetration depths of 50 feet or more. This hydraulically powered drill unit is a relatively inexpensive tool, consisting of equipment and parts that are readily available from U.S. manufacturers. The drill was successfully field tested both from a boat and from land. Marine geologists investigating shallow-water environments are in need of an inexpensive and portable device for sampling areas of sub- merged substrate with minimum logistical support. Some earlier coral- reef investigators undertook blasting, for example, to effectively expose sections of submerged substrates (e.g., Shinn, 1963; Ginsburg and Schroeder, 1969; Goreau and Land, in press; Glynn, personal commun., 1972), but this method of sampling has several drawbacks. In particular, penetration depths are limited and in places blasting may severely alter local environments. As well, the removal of rubble resulting from under- water quarrying requires long hours of diving time. The drilling unit described below, on the other hand, can produce a core representing a sequence of accumulated reef structure without undue disturbance to the local environment. It must be pointed out, however, that cores obtained with this unit represent only a partial section of the penetrated substrate, and that unconsolidated material thus far has not been fully cored; consequently, any given core may lack some sections of the sequence. Several types of submersible drill already have been developed and tested--among them, Land's (personal commun., 1970) electric submersible drill that produces a one-inch core, which is slightly larger than that obtained with the U.S. Navy's hydraulic drill (see Ocean Industries, 1973). To date, however, no diver-operated drill having the depth of penetration and core size of the hydraulic drill described here has been available to marine scientists. Numerous inquiries concerning the design and performance of this drill have prompted the following description, which is given in the hope that other scientists may be able to use the tool successfully in their research endeavors. Our knowledge of underwater substrates in Wy aone epson no. 8 of the National Museum of Natural History's Investigations of Marine Shallow Water Ecosystems (IMSWE) . 22 areas accessible to diver-scientists certainly will be enhanced by the use of such a tool in future marine research. DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS The basic concept employed in designing the submersible drill was to adapt an ''Ackley" hydraulic impact wrench to accommodate core pipe and NWM double-tube core barrels (2 1/8'' in diameter) that are standard drilling equipment manufactured by the "Acker" Drill Company. The drill unit was assembled from these two sources, with the drill being sent to the Acker Drill Company for fitting and final assembly. The overall specifications and design are given in Table l. A ring inserted in the drill by Ackley locks out the impact mechanism, which would otherwise shatter and displace the carbide teeth in the drill bit. During a drilling operation, a reverse control knob on the drill must be locked to ensure that the reverse assembly does not become engaged accidentally and release drill pipe. A manifold attachment on the hydraulic power unit allows both sides (i.e., pressure systems) to be operated on one pair of hydraulic lines. This attachment permits a fluid yield of 16 gal/min, which is required to drive the drill at optimum efficiency. A 3/4-inch hydraulic hose connects the hydraulic power unit to the drill, except for the last 10 feet, where 1/2-inch hose is used to give the hose-line more flexibility in the working area. Although the sub- merged operational limits of hose-line length have not been established, we know that the efficiency of drill operation does not change at distances of 300 ft from the hydraulic power unit on surface. We do not foresee any problems with the hose in submerged drilling operations to depths of IS0RfE (ch Black vands Outram 97/0). During initial testing it was found that offshore drilling requires the support of a research vessel large enough to accommodate the hydraulic power unit (cf. Table 1). The draft of such a vessel, however, might preclude drilling operations in areas where irregular shallow bathymetry is extensive. Carbide drill bits were more effective for drilling into coral-reef substrate than diamond drill bits, and they are an order of magnitude less expensive. It was also found that although the drill may be operated freely for shallow penetration (e.g., into a large coral head, cf. fig. 1), and passes little or no torque on to the diver drilling to core depths less than 5-10 ft, a tripod and winch are necessary for retrieving core from greater penetration depths (Fig. 2). The drill unit, which together with the short 2-ft core barrel weighs approximately 150 1b, can be handled readily by two divers. However, the weight increase following the addition of drill pipe also necessitates the use of a tripod-winch assembly. During field testing torque effects on the diver were noted mainly when pipe was pulled from a hole, but this situation was corrected by 23 the addition of a short piece of pipe (3-4 ft section) to the drill handle, so that it could be braced against one of the tripod legs, and thus take up any torque otherwise experienced by the diver (Fig. 2). FIELD TESTING The hydraulic submersible drill was first tested in water depth of 15 ft by drilling to depths of 20 ft, down to the volcanic tuff base of the loose framework of Pocillopora reefs located off Panama's Pacific coast. The compressor and back-up equipment were carried aboard Smithsonian Tropical Research Institute's vessel R.V. Tethys for the initial hand-held operations. Recovery was low from the loose framework and, in some cases, the core pipe was difficult to retrieve below 10 ft. Later, a winch on the vessel was used to facilitate retrieval of core pipe, but the difficulties experienced with a shipboard winch led to the building of a tripod for subsequent testing. In the next stage of tests the tripod was used above water on the fringe reefs off the Caribbean coast of Panama in order to perfect operating techniques prior to further underwater tests. The tripod improved drilling operations considerably by permitting retrieval of core pipe to depths of 46 ft. The drill operated efficiently throughout a five-week period of testing. Its outstanding features are that the diver may readily control the speed of drilling by a trigger device (Fig. 2), and that instant release is possible at any time during the drilling operation. Although the drill was easily hand-operated by one diver, drilling required a three-man team: one was needed to operate the drill, a second to operate the winch on the tripod, and a third to assist in adding and removing drill pipe. Despite the good performance of the drill, the operations were relatively time-consuming; for example, under ideal circumstances above water, a 40-ft hole was drilled in two days. Most of that time was spent in retrieving core pipe; when pipe was jammed in sections of a hole, the drill string had to be worked up and down in order to inch the pipe past the tight section. These problems arose in some cases because of poor control over the angle of penetration. With the development of expertise in operating this equipment, however, drilling time is expected to reduce appreciably. The maximum depth of core penetration to date was 46 ft. Recovery was excellent from solid substrates such as a coral head, or the Miocene siltstone foundation of the Panama Caribbean fringe reefs; in both cases, recovery was 100%. In coring the fringe reefs, however, recovery was considerably lower (33% or less), but this also should improve once water flow and rotation speed of the drill bit are properly controlled. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Special thanks are extended to Jeff King (Ackley Manufacturing Co.) 24 and Ed Wesolowski (Acker Drill Co. Inc.) for their assistance in assembling the drilling equipment. The generous assistance in field testing opera- tions, and valuable suggestions for improving field operations of Peter W. Glynn, Robert H. Stewart, Gordon W. McLeod and Barry Smith are grate- fully acknowledged. Thanks also to Ira Rubinoff, Smithsonian Tropical Research Institute, for providing ship time and other logistical support in Panama. F. R. Fosberg, PP.” Wo. Glynn, Js Kingaeiie oe adds Je uW os baercer and J. I. Tracey read the original MS and offered suggestions for its improvement. LITERATURE CITED Anon. 1973. U.S. Navy develops new underwater tools. Ocean Industry jae BAS SIS Black, S. A. and J. 1. Quirk. 1970. pydraulie tool sysitems for diverse Symposium Proc. Feb. 24-25, 1970. Columbus: Ohio Marine Technology SOCIE EY wma Ombre Ginsburg, R. N. and J. H. Schroeder. 1969. Introduction to the growth and diagenesis of Bermuda reefs. Bermuda Conference on Carbonates. Preprint, September 1969. 13 p- Goreau, T. F. and L. S. Land. In press. Fore-reef morphology and depositional processes, North Jamaica. In SEPM Reef Symposium, Spec. Pub. Shinn, E. A. 1963. Formation of spurs and grooves on the Florida reef tract. Ji, sed. Petrollogyass m29 505 25 TABLE 1.--SPECIFICATIONS OF HYDRAULIC SUBMERSIBLE DRILL Parts Hydraulic wrench Repair kit Hydraulic power unit Water pump Drill equipment Hydraulic hose * Description Approximate Costs Ackley impact wrench and $ 3,000 drill, model 23HS-OC (including weight: 80 1b lockout ring) overall length: 21 1/2" Chuck RPM: 600 torque rating: 6000-9000 ft/lb for 23HS hydraulic wrench 70 Ackley hydraulic power unit 4,500 PU 2-10-2000-Ge and manifold system weight: 1800 1b operating wt Saize's 50! x 157 x, 76" Acker model APS-7 pumping 800 station, 7.6 GPM at 75 PSI weight: 230 1b Sa Ze awnsO eee a x 7" core barrels, reamers, core 2,000 catchers, core bits, drill extension rods, water swivel, 100' water hose, custom-made springle to attach drill pipe to chuck (40' hole depth capability) Imperial Eastman hydraulic hose 300 and fittings for working distance up to 100' from hydraulic power unit Approx. Total Cost: 10,670 This rating is with impact mechanism in operation; with lockout ring, it is 159.25 ft/lb at 16 GPM and 2000 PSI. ° a Figure 1. Coring a large Pavona sp. coral head. Depth 15 ft. | Pearl Islands, Gulf of Panama. | Figure 2. Panama. Note pipe braced against leg of tripod and trigger control at operator's right hand. 27 PUBLICATIONS REVIEWS: Stone, B. C. 1970 (1971). The Flora of Guam, Micronesica 6: 1-659. A long standing need for an adequate and up-to-date discussion of the flora of Guam has finally been met. A careful student of systematic botany, building upon all that had gone before, together with his own collecting and study while a professor at the University of Guam, has produced an outstanding book of more than 600 pages, with descriptions, keys, illustrations, scientific and native names, bibliography, and phytogeographic and historical notes, all completely indexed. It was printed as Volume 6 of Micronesica, Journal of the University of Guam, with the date July 1970, although distributed more than a year later. Guam is a remarkable island. Although its area is only about 210 square miles, several types of habitat are combined: volcanic mountains, up to 1334 feet high, in the southern half, now largely covered by savannah, dominated by sword grass; rolling limestone hills to the north of a low, swampy isthmus, with remnants of native forest; patches of cultivation and gardens, and weeds from many parts of the Pacific and other tropical regions. The phytogeographic relations of the Guam flora are said by Dr. Stone to be Indomalaysian, and he should be in a position to know, being Curator of the herbarium at the University of Malaya, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. He lists 931 species as the present total flora: 6 gymnosperms, 58 ferns and their allies, 262 monocots, and 605 dicots. These represent 546 genera. He believes that 63% of the total have been introduced through the agency of man, including crops and experimental plantings (176 species), ornamental plants (205), weeds (174), and other escapes (30). He regards the other 346 as native, although about 20 of these may have been escapes. The other 327 are discussed under the categories of being endemic, Micronesian, Polynesian, Melanesian, Indomalaysian, Paleotropical, Pantropical and of obscure origin or special distribution. There is a concise, informative introduction giving the botanical history of Guam, with credit to the work of many; a description of the geographic setting and its environment, with soil and vegetation maps. The phytogeography, agriculture, horticulture and gardens are discussed. Notes are given on how to collect and preserve plants, with a plea for further work on unsolved problems. The main body of the book consists of a variety of comprehensive keys and the systematic treatment of species, with descriptions and notes about each. The fact that Guam has been a crossroads for shipping between many widely scattered areas in the Pacific, starting with yearly galleons from Manila to America (late 1500s to 1815), followed by extensive shipping from Manila and the Orient, and from Guam to many Pacific Islands, accounts for interesting distributions of plants from and to many regions. This 28 book should be basic to an understanding of the flora of many Pacific Islands. IB dale Wsuolechol lie. Pacific Scientific Information Center Bernice P, Bishop Museum, Honolulu. Delfinado, M, D., and D, E. Hardy, eds. 1973. A catalog of the Diptera of the Oriental Region. Volume 1, Suborder Nematocera, Honolulu, The University Press of Hawaii. 618 pages, maps on endsheets. Price not given. The Nematocera, including somewhat less that 1/3 of the Diptera (two-winged flies), comprise the great majority of aquatic forms. The 24 families, with 6,226 species, are treated by 20 authors who are leading authorities in their fields. The 2 remaining volumes are in preparation. The book is an excellent and handsome example of printing and binding and is on high-quality paper. References are cited with the listings of taxa, but there is also a 20-page "'selected bibliography.'' All taxa are included in an index. The region covered is the Oriental Region of Wallace, eastward to Weber's Line, but modified to extend to the political boundaries of West Pakistan, all of India and Burma, and the southern provinces of China. Individual islands are mentioned throughout in listing distribution of species. Especially when many authors are involved it is extremely difficult to avoid errors in gender-endings of species-names. A cursory examination reveals about a score of such in various families, This is the first time that a complete and critical catalogue of the Diptera of the region has appeared. It consequently fills a great need and will be of inestimable value. George C. Steyskal Systematic Entomology Laboratory Agr. Res. Serv. , USDA Ward, R. G., editor. 1972. Man in the Pacific Islands; essays on geo- graphical change in the Pacific Islands. 1-339, Oxford. Ten authors con- tribute to this book, eleven essays on quite diverse themes, but with consistently historical perspective and prefaced with introductory general statements that help give unity to the whole volume, With minor exception, the region treated is more particularly the South Pacific and Australian New Guinea. The articles, each comprising a separate chapter are: 1) The Pacific Islands and their prehistoric inhabitants, by J. Golson; 2) The alien and the land of Oceania, by B. H. Farrell; 3) Vegetation and man in the South-west Pacific and New Guinea, by R. G. Robbins; 4) The Pacific beche-de-mer trade with special reference to Fiji; 5) The labour trade, by 0. W. Parnaby; 6) Trade and plantations in eastern Polynesia; the emergence of a dependent economy, by C. Newbury; 7) the Makatea phosphate concession, by C. Newbury; 8) Population growth in the Pacific Islands: the example of Western Samoa, by P. Pirie; 9) Land tenure in the South Pacific, by R. G. Crocombe; 10) Indigenous horticulture in Melanesia: some recent changes in eastern New Guinea, the Solomon Islands, and the New Hebrides, by D. A. M. Lea; 11) Urbanization in the South Pacific and the case of Noumea, by W. D. McTaggart. Bryce Decker 29 Jennings, J. N. 1971. Karst (An Introduction to Systematic Geomorphol- Ope pcanbradget, Masser M1 lie Press) xviii, 252) pp. £4720). Sweeting, M. M. 1972. Karst landforms. London: Macmillan. xvi, 362 pp. £15.00. These are two important books for the reef geomorphologist. Dr. Sweeting (now at Oxford) and Dr. Jennings (at Canberra) were both originally Cambridge geomorphologists, and both have worked widely in the tropics, the former mainly in the West Indies and Central America, the latter in Australia and New Guinea. Their books become the standard textbooks on the subject. They are based on their own work, some of it joint, and that of their many students, and on a deep knowledge of the literature in many, often obscure, languages. Both begin with a consideration of lithology and processes, distinctive karst features--both small-scale such as karren, and larger scale such as dolines, dry valleys and hums. Both authors deal with tropical karst forms, which are of particular interest because of the probability of the inheritance of such features as sinkholes, dolines and hums formed by karst erosion during periods of low sea level in the present-day morphology of reefs. Neither author considers reefs as such, though Dr. Jennings draws attention to Ollier's recent work on raised reef limestones and cave systems in the Trobriand Islands. Both authors explicitly exclude coastal karst features, which, under a variety of regional names (feo, champignon, makatea, ironshore), are found in widely scattered reef areas. This omission is unfortunate, in view of the delicacy of sculpture, the interrelationships of biological, chemical and mechanical processes, and the speed of development of these forms, In spite of these limitations from a reef geomorphologist's point of view, both books are invaluable. I found Dr. Jennings's the best to turn to for a guide to problems of specific features, whereas Dr. Sweeting provides more extended argument and many more examples, many of them little known. One major point of criticism: Dr. Sweeting's referencing is quite unhelpful: citations are numbered and listed in the order of their appearance in the text, and the index does not cover bibliographic entries. Thus to find a citation for a given paper one must go to the index, note the pages on which a given author is cited, look these up and find a series of bibliography citation numbers, then check these one by one to find the reference required. Dr. Jennings gives a simple alphabetic listing by author and earns the gratitude of all. Dr RET tors Usinger, R. L., 1972. Robert Leslie Usinger, Autobiography of an entomologist, 1-330, San Francisco. Published by the California Entomolog- ical Society. Edited by E. G. Linsley, J. L. Gressitt, D. D. Linsdale, and H. V. Daly. During the summer of 1968, in the months before he died, our friend Bob Usinger was persuaded by his friend Gorton Linsley to dictate this remarkable autobiography. To have achieved this, knowing that time was running out, and to have never once let this awareness show in his story is an enviable accomplishment. A living, vital picture of himself was certainly the best gift he could have left to his multitude of friends and admirers. Our thanks go to him for writing the book, to his wife for encouraging him to do it, to her and his friends Linsley and Gressitt for seeing it through the press, and to the Society for publishing it. 30 As a portrayal of Bob's attractive personality and phenomenal scien- tific achievements the book leaves nothing to be desired. As a picture of the times, the early middle decades of the 20th Century, the picture seems brighter than the reality. Few people, during that period managed to avoid the complications and frustrations that lessen one's effective- ness the way he did. He succeeded in grasping the good features of his period and avoiding its booby-traps more successfully than any one of my acquaintance. Clearly this was due to much more than luck. His genius for attracting people and his enormous capacity for work, as well as his clear, uncluttered mind made an unequalled combination. His life was tragically short, but his accomplishments were greater than most Scientists even hope for. If one characteristic about Bob comes through in the book above all others, and probably the one that made his life so satisfying, it was that he never lost what Rachel Carson has called "The sense of wonder." In his approach to his entomology he never lost the excitement and delight that he felt in his "bug collecting" as a boy. This doubtless had a great deal to do with his continuous success and limitless energy all through his life. I had the privilege to be in the field with him in 1935 in Hawaii, and again in 1964 in the Galapagos, as well as working with him in the 1950's on the Pacific Science Board of the National Academy, and have first-hand knowledge that this impression running through the book is real. In his 55 years Bob must have had one of the most satisfying lives of all American naturalists. He was a living disproof of the theory that adversity is necessary to challenge a person and bring out his potentialities. I am glad he wrote this book. It will please his friends the most, but one could scarcely want anything better for young people to read who are looking around for motivation. RAI Bricker, OP. ed.) 971. Carbonate cements 5/76 pp Johns elopkains Press. Baltimore. The long-term stability or relative permanence of an island formed of clastic sedimentary materials exposed to the action of storm-driven waves depends in large measure on the lithification or bonding-together of these sediments to form hard rocks. In coral islands this lithification is to a large extent the result of carbonate cementa- tion. Therefore it was entirely appropriate and of great interest that a conference on carbonate cementation was held on Bermuda, a coral island, at the Bermuda Biological Station in 1969. This volume makes generally available the results of this conference, and it is certainly a major landmark in the course of research on this subject. The book is an extraordinary collection of succinct papers, each summarizing the results of an investigation relating to a particular example or kind of carbonate cement or bonding material, each paper illustrated with several well-reproduced photographs. Many of the om outstanding students of coral-reefs are among the contributors. The papers are arranged in six parts: I Beach-rock and intertidal cement. II Submarine cementation. III Meteoric water cementation. IV Cementation in ancient rocks. V Chemistry. VI Dolomite and non-carbonate cement. Each part is preceded by an introduction, attempting to summarize the papers and the discussions that they provoked, and indicating the current state of knowledge and what should be done next in the area. They very much reflect the majority views of the panels, and it is perhaps unfortunate that the names of the chairmen of the panels are not given. Of these, of course, the first two are of primary interest to coral reef and island students, though all have a strong bearing on the understanding of reefs and reef-like structures as geological, geographical, and ecolog- ical features. Few serious students of atolls and cays can help having a great interest in beach-rock. Reef-growth, development of vegetation, and beach-rock formation are three obvious stabilizing factors that make these accumulations of skeletal sediments more than transitory phenomena. Other factors have their roles, indeed, but are much less readily isolated and circumscribed. Therefore, the section on beach-rock will be read with great inter- est by our audience. However, if anyone expects that the ''beach-rock problem"' is solved he will be disappointed. The findings, though more precise and well substantiated than what we had before, are just as varied and contradictory as ever. If anything is indicated it is what we have long suspected, that we are lumping more than one phenomenon, with more than one process of origin, under the term "'beach-rock"’. The fascinating and important question of why beach-rock is present or absent in different stretches of the same or very similar beaches is scarcely approached, though it was obviously present in the minds of the panel- members . The existence of submarine and subaerial (non-intertidal) cementation seems fairly well established, though criteria for distinguishing them from intertidal cementation are not as clear as we might wish. The presence of part VI including "non carbonate cements" should not mislead anyone into looking for a discussion of phosphatic cementation, or, for that matter, anything else except one non-tropical paper on calcium sulfate cements. The role of organisms in cement-formation is variously suggested and discussed, though generally rather inconclusively. However, the obvious process of bonding-together of sediments and in-place reef com- ponents by the growth of encrusting lithothamnioid algae, Porites, worm- tubes, vermiform mollusks, and other such organisms is scarcely touched upon. Perhaps this was by the definition accepted of cementation, or perhaps by the fact that most of the participants were geologists. About the only real criticism of the book, from the viewpoint of the non-sedimentologist who wants to understand what holds coral islands 32 together is the use by many of the contributors of esoteric terminology with no suggestion of where one can go to find definitions. We non- mathematical ecologists may also find some of the mathematical expression and reasoning rather hard going, though it clearly makes the book less bulky. This volume will from now on be indispensable to anyone seriously interested in the processes responsible for the existence and nature of coral reefs and coral islands. We are indebted to those responsible for its editing and publication. [Ba a Lewis, David, Jr. 1972. We the Navigators, 345 pp., University Press of Hawaii, Honolulu, 1972. $10.50. With this book, Lewis has changed the subject of indigenous long-distance navigation in Polynesia and Micronesia from pure speculation and romanticism to a reality, based on a, to us, entirely new and unfamiliar conceptual system. We still lack most of the details. Much of what we know rests on extrapolation and on small pieces of the puzzle gleaned from many sources. But the astonishing fact is that a few practitioners of this vanishing art still exist and that voyages, even for long distances, are still being made with uncanny accuracy without the aid of sextant, chart, or compass. Thanks to this book, we can gain at least a modicum of understanding of how the Pacific Islands were peopled. Even more important, it is a humbling experience to learn of a totally different, and completely valid, conceptual system and frame of reference that served the Pacific peoples for far longer, and certainly as effectively, as our system of celestial navigation with instruments, charts and compass. To master this, even to the extent presented here, incomplete as Lewis realizes it is, is an intellectual achievement that is enviable, indeed. We can only suggest that, if these questions intrigue you, you read | the book. To our oceanographer readers, we commend the problem of "deep phosphorescence", which we first encountered in this book. We would appreciate any explanation that is available. EC Ree Ee Hawaiian cave faunas: Howarth, F. G., 1973. The cavernicolous fauna of Hawaiian lava tubes, 1. Introduction. Pacific Insects 15:139-151. For evolutionists, as well as those interested in island natural history and ecology, this is a "landmark" paper. It introduces the author's remark- able discovery of an endemic cave fauna in Hawaiian lava-tubes, describes the lava-tube ecosystem, and comments on the theoretical implications of this fauna. The lava tubes studied are listed and the ecosystem is diagrammed, both environmentally and as a food-chain-energy-flow system. The characteristics of lavas are described and related to possible dispersal of the cave organisms. Previous knowledge is summarized and a short bibliography provided. Subsequent numbers in the series, by specialist authors will treat the various groups of organisms. It is not often that a whole new biotope is discovered and described in such clear, understandable fashion. Other papers in the same issue: Schultz, G. A. 1973. The cavernicolous fauna of Hawaiian lava tubes, DS 2. Two new genera and species of blind isopod crustaceans (Oniscoidea: Philosciidae). Pacific Insects 15(1): 153-162. Gertsch, W. J. 3. Araneae (Spiders), 163-180. Fennah, R. G. 4. Two new blind Oliarus (Fulgoroidea: Cixiidae), 181-184. Bee Ree Be Armstrong, R. W., Atlas of Hawaii, 1973. 1-222, University Press of Hawaii, Honolulu. $15.00. This book is an absolute must for anyone dealing in any general way with, or at all broadly interested in, the State of Hawaii. The Department of Geography of the University of Hawaii is to be congratulated on the assembling and graphic presentation of an unbelievable amount of information on this island state. The data presented run the gamut from geography, geology and climate, through natural and applied biology of many branches, to the various aspects of land utilization, human activities of many sorts, and even the pollution that results from certain of these activities. Few fields are left out that are capable of being expressed by maps and diagrams. The graphic presentation of information, by maps, diagrams, photo- graphs and drawings is on a very effective level. Insofar as can be determined without special research, the quality of the information seems generally very good. Some of the best authorities in the state have been enlisted to provide this information, and the signed chapters are generally excellent. A few slips have occurred, for example (p.29) the Ieie is a vine, mop tree: (p. 26) the Halla is ‘Pandanus tectorius (sensu lato); not Pandanus odoratissimus; and (p. 82) the Ti is Cordyline fruticosa, to mention only some where we can speak with authority. The color and pattern separation in the maps have not in all cases been too successful, e.g. the vegetation map (pp.64-65) and the land use map (pp. 136-137). The metric system is studiously avoided. These small flaws are only pointed out because this book will unquestionably be the principal source of information on Hawaii to the general public for a long time to come. There undoubtedly will be repeated printings and, hopefully, periodic revisions. These will provide opportunity for continuing improvement. This will be a most useful book to all who are interested in islands. It is written in understandable language. It is a bit expensive, at $15, considering the probable volume of sales, but must certainly be a recommended addition to most libraries, public and private. Fe Ree ok Ladd, H. S., 1972. Cenozoic fossil mollusks from western Pacific islands; gastropods (Turritellidae through Strombidae). U.S.G.S. Prof. Pap. SoZ io pise=202 this excellent and scholarly paper adds to our rather meager data on the geological and zoogeographic history of the Pacific islands. It deals with fossils from drill-cores on Eniwetok and Bikini and from exposed elevated reefs in Fiji, Tonga, the Marianas and the New Hebrides. The paper is clear, the descriptions and citations admirable, and the illustrations superb. iRiver aia 34 Zoberi, M. H., 1972. Tropical Macrofungi, some common species. 1-158, Hafner, N. Y. $16.95. This small book does not treat especially the fungi of islands, but since the selection is mostly of widespread species, it will help place many island fleshy fungi at least to genus, some even to species. Directions are given for collection and study, a synopsis of the major groups, and a so-called key to the families treated. Each genus and species treated is briefly described, and many are illustrated either by line drawings or color photos. It is a useful book but the price is high. Fart Reapekr REVIEW OF RECENT LITERATURE: Biological Research in the Bonin Islands The Bonin (Ogasawara) and Volcano Islands form a nearly straight island arc (24°13'N - 27°34'N) between the Mariana Islands and Japan at Tokyo Bay. Chichi Jima, the largest of the Bonins, is 531 miles south of Tokyo. Longitudinally, the islands lie between Taiwan and the Hawaiian Islands at 140°51'E - 142°14'E in the North Pacific. They are strategically located for latitudinal distribution studies of marine organisms as they relate to the entire Indo-Pacific realm. Few studies have been carried out on these islands because of their isolation. Dr. Sixten Bock from Stockholm, Sweden, spent some time in the Bonins in 1914. The results of his studies have been published in several Swedish journals. Japanese studies continued through 1941. Following World War II, few biologists had an opportunity to visit these islands, which had come under the U. S. Naval administration. [A general article, The Bonins and Iwo Jima go Back to Japan, by Paul Sampson, appeared in the July, 1968, National Geographic Magazine (Vol. 134, No. 1). This is well illustrated and has several notes on the plants and animals of the islands.] The islands reverted to Japan in June, 1968, and several Japanese surveys have been carried out since then. The results of these expeditions are noted here in detail because most of them are published in Japanese and appear in relatively obscure journal series. All of these articles are held by the author. Acknowledgements are extended to the U. S. National Science Foundation Liaison office at the American Embassy, Tokyo, to Glenn Seglem and Masashi Yamaguchi of the University of Guam for some of the translations, and to the authors who supplied original copies. Scientists from Tokai University at Shimizu, Japan, visited the islands between June 29 and July 12, 1968, under the leadership of Professor Mitsuo Iwashita, Department of Ocean Engineering. The fishery resources were investigated by members of the Tokyo University of Fisheries between June 29 and July 27, 1968. Dr. Reizo Ishiyama directed this expedition. A group from Tokyo Metropolitan University made a general biological survey between August 6 and 20, 1968, under the auspices of Dr. Yuko Kitazawa of the Department of Biology. Members of the Faculty of Agriculture and Veterinary Medicine, Nihon University, travelled to the islands between August 14 and 24, 1968. They were investigating agriculture, stock raising, fisheries, and forestry. Between November 22 and December 20, 1968, officials from the Ministry of Health and Welfare and the Tokyo Metropolitan government carried out a general survey led by Dr. Minoru Imajima of the National Science Museum. The University of Tokyo and the Tokai 35 Regional Fishery Research Institute co-sponsored a fisheries investigation between July 16 and 24, 1969. This expedition was headed by Dr. Muneaki Abe from the Institute. One of the first reports to appear in print was the Survey Report on Nature Conservation of Bonin Islands, the first volume of which was published in March, 1969, by the Tokyo Metropolitan Government. The Table of Contents as translated is: Outline of the survey Park Division, Tokyo Metropolitan Government ............ 1 Geography and geology of the Bonin Islands Sa AS aU Seu e PAA A eee Saeed le suconenoncsacee 35 spre TAN A ete pea tate intauenis ayia, /s\.0) ws fata Kia! Sts ince 0 fern ls; 4 ans wale palieiee 6S 6 eye 79 So, RESTO): gob bc'526 8'o.00 0 OCC ROLE Sen Cameo ne ane aan om rE WAS 111 Marine organisms of the Bonin Islands A Pamn tert cla fF ere aaa eee aye eA hak cdc ences vor rt, 6 chia: wicells sila ve « -Syaneraseeuaereve roe 145 This volume is primarily text; however, lists are given for plants, a few marine invertebrates and algae, and fish. An expanded, 25l-page volume with the same title was published in March, 1970, as Volume 2. It contains more extensive information con- cerning the outline of the survey: Chronolorical remarks: on the Bonin Islands... s.,:2 2.6.00 550 29 Cenenaleremnatks SOnmcne) BOMUM: US VAM vier 2c iereusie sists, «so oye aieuelotoions 36 Pic ORV Oe MEME BOUUMIOlS PANGS. ..5 cc «6 s.s ges v eH 0 4 5 0.0 6 Sue sve oie wile 39 Natural envarenment of the Bonin Islands. ~......0s.s6cceeees 46 BS eS MOte COC E BOMMMeI SLATS. % iswasa-sle 0c 0 6) 5 (61due,(e4e's s+ wsevetera e145 sys elo 65 The remaining four chapters have the same titles and authors as Vol. 1 but each is expanded to include more listings of plants, land snails, and birds. Numerous color photos appear in both volumes. Nihon University released a short publication in 1969 entitled Expedition to the Bonin Islands (1968). Jt includes brief sections on soils, forests, shore fishes (with a list of 90 species), livestock, and a discussion of the future of agricultural economics and floriculture. During the summer of 1969, the Ministry of Education sponsored a Survey, the findings of which appeared in print in 1970 as The Nature of the Bonin and Volcano Islands. The translated Table of Contents is: The aims, organization and diary of the Scientific Investigation Party to the Bonin and the Volcano Islands K.., YOSN BOK: « s.sieis seis Srceaue’ Seana 6 Cyniecee ts Lane eon KORE rOeee 1 Insects of the Bonin and Volcano Islands T. Nakane. 2s See eee eee Bin clk Sarl eee ne 15 The arthropod fauna of Bonin Islands surveyed by the bait traps S. Kobayashi, Me Nishihara, i: Yajima’ vand a Mea ehatornne =e 33 Marine invertebrate fauna of the Bonin Islands Me SHUT GOR ook bold, erate to ce eteta Riser emeee ere aie oedema tenes enreae 54 The birds of the Bonin Islands and the Volcano Islands S. Takano,» Y< Uchidas, sands Ne esugivamasaeneee nee eens 61 The vascular plants in the Bonin Islands and the Volcano Islands Tos g VaAMAaZART: 2a. sree: oats: w5-atcelte m/w es at otros Sieeetes (eomemeatottet sotto c tourceattstecicertaviaereiramtettair 95 Terrestrial cryptogams of Chichijima and Hahajima, the Bonin Islands HE EMOUCS 65.5 S40, o's law & aries 4a are euemei tere wage ie saede eis iotensuet occ fe ronan eters 25 Vegetation and succession in Chichijima, Bonin Is lands Ml Numata™ and’ M. “Ohs'awae ican oes ac ec sarees ler elencu ome reneuarel es teiene ere 159 Report on geology of the Bonin Islands Yomlwasiak sand SMe ey A@Siiim ages teeie ei heretele tacts iene ienens ete ie meester 205 The micro-earthquake observation at Chichijima Island and the geophysical aspects of the Bonin Islands Keon KAM NIMs yererreieene Sascaadsanagcas oa soe Sggcdondaans soe Ava) This was published by the Higher Education and Science Bureau, Ministry of Education and Cultural Properties Protection Division, Agency for Cultural Affairs. It is quite well illustrated, and almost all the articles have relatively detailed English abstracts. The only exclusively marine-oriented publication to appear to date is Report on the Marine Biological Expedition to the Ogasawara (Bonin) Islands, 1968, sponsored by the Toba Aquarium and the Asahi Shimbun Publishing Company. Of the three articles, the last one is in English: Coral fishes of the Ogasawara (Bonin) Islands T. Kataoka, S.. Kitamura, eMensekdo,, and. K. Yamamoto we eee 7 Shells of the Ogasawara (Bonin) Islands Y. Matsumoto, H.* Komado) vandtise sii gash Ueawarnc: creer onsunrcuceeeebenene Al 57 Marine invertebrate fauna of the Ogasawara and Volcano Islands collected by S. Ooishi, Y. Tomida, K. Izawa, and S. Manabe See OO MISSI Wtmee mete aus cen ahiay skslis\ feta’. aiciedeieue sissies, Gos. 6,» eos gudeas aise a8 8 Ge boeue Ruacens 75 The first chapter lists 149 species and illustrates 30 specimens. The relative abundance--very abundant, commonly seen, few, or hardly ever seen--of the fishes is given for six of the different islands. A table giving the distribution of 76 butterfly fish species (Chaetodontidae) compares the Bonins with the Marshall and Mariana Islands, Kii Peninsula, Ryukyu Islands, and the Philippines. In Chapter 2, 282 species of gastro- pod and bivalve molluscs are listed, forty-six of which are illustrated by photographs. The marine invertebrate chapter lists 210 species col- lected in shallow waters. Identifications were made in collaboration with such other Japanese specialists as M. Eguichi, F. Utinomi, Y. Miya, S. Miyake, and T. Sakai. Thirteen species are considered new records from Japanese waters. This article is beautifully illustrated by photo- graphs of 206 of the species. Seventeen color photographs of this expedition appear in the October, 1968, Kagaku Asahi. Most comprehensive of all is the two-volume work Nature in the Bonin Islands, compiled by T. Tuyama and S. Asami and published by the Hirokawa Publishing Company in 1970. One volume is text; the other consists entirely of 566 color photographs keyed to the text volume. The photographs have both Japanese and English titles. Although these volumes are expensive, they are welcome additions to the natural history of these islands. The text volume, 271 pages, is in Japanese with extensive lists of scientific names of organisms with specific locations. Many of these lists are reviews of earlier published works. Each section has a different author. Three chapters are devoted to historical, geological, and developmental studies. The biological chapters are: (4) Plants, by T. Tuyama, contains a list of plants, eight black- and-white plates of vegetation, and separate lists of monocots and ferns. (5) Land Animals, by H. Hasuo, includes a section on birds with a note as to whether they are extinct, introduced or a subfossil, and fresh water snails with 3 species. (6) Marine Organisms, by M. Imajima, contains a list of 103 species of scleractinian corals, 16 species of octocorals, 20 species of crusta- ceans with 21 photographs, 11 species of shells with three pages of colored plates, 74 species of echinoderms, and 49 species of algae. (7) Fishes, by H. Sugiura, contains a listing of 238 species. The photograph volume contains some errors, perhaps typographical, such as Bufo marianus (P1. 5-46, 5-47) which should be B. marinus, and Acatina (Pl. 5-63, 5-64) which should be Achatina (as is given in the text, p. 177). Some misidentifications also appear: Pl. 7-8 is Runula tapeinosoma, not Aspidontus striolus; Pl. 7-18 is Pterois volitans, not Brachirus zebra; Pl. 7-39 is Cephalophilus urodelus, not Variola louti; and there are a few other names throughout the volume which are not now currently accepted. ee Gee lidredge 38 MISCELLANEOUS : List of recent publications of the Pacific Scientific Information Center, furnished by E. H. Bryan, Jr.: Life in the Marshall Islands, by E. H. Bryan, Jr. August, 1972. $5.00. Tells the story of plants, animals and man, and of their inter- relationship on the atolls of eastern Micronesia, against the background of the vast Pacific area. Some of the 22 chapters, which fill 237 pages are: Pacific geo- graphy made easy, Man comes into the Pacific, What is an atoll? It gives an introduction to the plants, birds, insects, fishes, marine shells, and the interrelationship of life on a coral reef. It describes "Making a living on an atoll," canoes, navigation, the day's work. There is a chapter on Decorative arts of the Marshall Islands by Dr. Adrienne Kaeppler. The story is told of the discovery and history of these islands through two World Wars, the beginning of reconstruction, and the displacement of persons by atomic bombs. All of these subjects are illustrated by 13 maps and diagrams and more than 200 drawings of plants, animals and artifacts. Field Guide to the Birds of French Polynesia, by Phillip L. Bruner, with 15 plates by O. G. Dykes, July, 1972, with soft cover, price by mail $3.00. Mr. Bruner spent a year in the Society, Tuamotu, and Marquesas Islands, from 1970 to 1971, making a survey of the bird life and its environment, as background for an extensive study of the bird genus Acrocephalus, family Sylviidae or Old World Warblers. So little information is available in print concerning the bird life of this portion of the South Pacific that he was persuaded to put his field observations into print. This book should be of much interest to all who thrill to the wildlife of the South Seas. This is Mr. Dykes' first attempt to depict live birds. Judging by the results, it is safe to say that it will not be his last. This book, with 135 pages and 15 plates, is one of a series of accounts of Pacific area natural history being produced by the Pacific Scientific Information Center. Land in Micronesia and its resources: An annotated bibliography. Com- piled by E. H. Bryan, Jr. and Staff for the Trust Territozy of the Paciticmisiandsemello pages, map. $3.00 Bryological Bibliography of the Tropical Pacific Islands. Compiled by H. A. Miller, H. O. Whittier, R. M. del Rosario, and D. S. Smith for the Standing Committee on Pacific Botany of the Pacific Science Association. 51 pages, 1971. $2.00 Guide to Place Names in the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands. Compiled by E. H. Bryan, Jr. for the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands. 406 pages, 114 maps, 1971. $5.00 So Pacific Anthropologists 1971. 88 pages and a folder of additions and corrections. $1.00 Guide to place names in the Hawaiian Islands. (In Preparation). This will be the first part of a guide to place names in Polynesia. All these publications may be ordered, prepaid, from Pacific Scien- tific Information Center, Bernice P. Bishop Museum, P.O. Box 6037, Honolulu, Hawaii 96818. Prices listed above included direct delivery by mail. [Endean, KR. G Mather, P., eds.7]. The Proceedings of the Second Inter- national Symposium on Coral Reefs. 2 volumes. (To be published in July 1974) $25.00 (Australian) per volume. Orders should be sent to Dr. Patricia Mather, Queensland Museum, Gregory Tee, Fortitude Valley, Brisbane 4006, Qld., Australia. Hoffmeister, John Edward, 1974: Land from the sea, The geologic history of South Florida. University of Miami Press, Coral Gables, Florida. 143 pages, 75 figs. $7.95. This story, written for the layman, describes the development of North America's most extensive coral reef area but the importance of the reefs in the building of South Florida is properly evaluated and they are fitted neatly into a broad setting that encompasses other environments, both marine and terrestrial. The book has the important attributes of a good story. It is soundly based, well organized, brief and, most importantly, it has been written by a talented story-teller. It reads smoothly and easily. It deals with swamps, including the Everglades, with coastal ridges, barrier islands and the remarkable Keys. It describes a petrified mangrove forest and even includes a section on the water resources of the area. The numerous maps, charts, diagrams and photographs (more than half the work of the author) are closely tied to the text and are conveniently placed in it. Several of the charts suffer from excessive reduction and the captions of one or two of the figures could be clarified but there is a notable lack of topographic and other minor errors. The book should have great appeal to the ever-growing numbers of residents and visitors who are interested in their surroundings. Anyone equipped with a hand lens can sally forth and see for himself some of the complexities hidden beneath and adjacent to the apparently featureless Florida landscape. 40 The geologic story in Land from the Sea brings together a number of the discoveries of recent years. Many of these discoveries were made by the author and his associates. Full credit is given in the section on acknowledgments and in the list of references. Perhaps the most surpris- ing of the several discoveries was the recognition of a new and important unit of the geologic formation long known as the Miami Oolite Limestone. This unit, whose significance was jointly discovered by the author and Axel Olsson, was found to extend over an area of some 2,000 square miles. It was named the Bryozoan facies and its interpretation was aided by a study of conditions existing today in the nearby Bahamas. Field work showed that the channeled Miami Oolite of Florida, now above sea level was closely similar to the undersea oolitic bank of the Bahamas that is channeled by tidal currents. Likewise, the same species of bryozoan that flourished in Florida during the Pleistocene now grows over the Bahama bank. Indeed, the Pleistocene features of Florida are, in effect, the mirror image of conditions now existing in the Bahamas. Hoffmeister and his associates have discovered one of the finest examples of the doctrine of Uniformitarianism that I know of. The past can be explained in terms of the present, as Mr. Lyell postulated nearly 150 years ago. Harry S. Ladd *% U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1975 O - 564-983 ee en ee NO. 186 February 15, 1975 ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN 186. THE NATURAL HISTORY OF LISIANSKI ISLAND, J fg ek eh PB RE fat ERGOT PRL NER A TO REN TN MI Re Efe ae ngage , hie : cot Lge rth aT eee re a eee Ss al be Coke Set ee eee ae - = os * ee $ Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. 5 an Tint Th le il Rial tia Ne cain x re le ‘ ATOLL RESEARCH BULLETIN NO. 186 THE NATURAL HISTORY OF LISIANSKI ISLAND, NORTHWESTERN HAWAIIAN ISLANDS by Roger B. Clapp and William O. Wirtz, Il Issued by THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Washington, D.C., U.S.A. February 15, 1975 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The Atoll Research Bulletin is issued by the Smithsonian Institution as a part of its Tropical Biology Program. It is co- sponsored by the Museum of Natural History, the Office of International and Environmental Programs, and the Smithsonian Press. The Press supports and handles production and distribution. The editing is done by the Tropical Biology staff, Botany Department, Museum of Natural History and by D. R. Stoddart. Most of the camera copy for this issue was prepared in the Department of Geography, Cambridge, using funds contributed by ARB readers. The Bulletin was founded and the first 117 numbers issued by the Pacific Science Board, National Academy of Sciences, with financial support from the Office of Naval Research. Its pages were largely devoted to reports resulting from the Pacific Science Board's Coral Atoll Program. The sole responsibility for all statements made by authors of papers in the Atoll Research Bulletin rests with them, and statements made in the Bulletin do not necessarily represent the views of the Smithsonian nor those of the editors of the Bulletin. Editors F. R. Fosberg M.-H. Sachet Smithsonian Institution Washington, D. C. 20560 D. R. Stoddart Department of Geography University of Cambridge Downing Place Cambridge, England TABLE OF CONTENTS Page {DAES OW TIGUIEE Ga ocdoooéonoK son oboDoD OD boon OOO dOn OO ODD ooGU Ono OOO0O Hlipiapre TTA OD HMTUINGEATT CNG 9 acy ov'e ts cc. cups a epane''e 0.00.60 6, overs ove 6, POT arte Tene er vii IFS OF NEP WMDIDS GWNPIARE oo oe coo Co oboe mood oo doo oo oUOo obo doo OO ob MoD ix Sea GHM@ Niemened onsen nite ts) cre) elas oie, ice oiln. a ee cos ote te one ere odes tins eeetemamerenemnTe 6 v Fis SEN Ga Tp aT NTL eRe eens la Su loo) Sisi/=9 ake ca.copsile icauames Spausummnyson uns EES EEO ee 2 ROTM Ss S89 oS 84 CUS CSRS 8 GAPS Sisio Dinic el beeinnS em IPEAIGn I OISTE Cling eearcmicmceniescncecmcacsnicrn 13 (GUINEA TENET ME NPR EA oat ch ole sate oes foy cy Sh nice, esis ob) opajcaparGind 6 Spin toyeilearaarmere ge wpecerean te eS AES SLR) RPE rg Weck oan aoibs ous, A sa avntin, Gh'd v.06. Busi sula: Gisei cl a erm eporeuntes tana as el Sst ees STHCON Me Scatter roan assests, ee ae sa Taina: ih 4 cw evdita ve, @ Rieleceree Meee Bete Mec ees 35 TRUAIITNAY <2 a 6 ote Coto Aa gE OD oe Ene ee oe Rn Ree Renee ONO ns Pacer ges. ne kg TaibIACCETEN Galo oc Op ooo oe oD OaDD OOO DOOD ODOM DUO ONO ON DODO OKO OUOOS Ke) Mammals and Reptiles sitanreltie elliot taney cicelorieiiallier Terceliay telela) falieiretemou tule meme eM omegeunaomanen cis 50 Bigs on coo dA sooner so0 FUT OOO ON eo DUNO OD OFOdOOD GOT OONd DU Sood 59 Species ACCOUNTS sss etter etter cere cere reer reer er eerrcerserees 56 Elle 655 onlahitln's cS clinton ain Bolblothigs gone ob cio bic aonb acoaa 59 Diomedea nigripes, Black-footed Albatross--+++++++++seeeeeeee 29 Diomedea immutabilis, Laysan Albatross:--++-++++++steeeeeeeeee 65 Piero mova, HapOleica,= BONA PEURE leis sic mck n :+::+t++ses reeset ter ecscee (3 Puffinus pacificus, Wedge-tailed Shearwater--+-+-+++++++++++> ( Puffinus nativitatis, Christmas Shearwater..-.---.-........-. 81 Phaethon rubricauda, Red-tailed Tropicbird......-+-++.+s+e0- 85 Sulaidactylaura, Blue-faced Booby. -+--2----+.++++:+322-2- 5 B9 Sula leucogaster, Brown BOODY......++-. eee essen reer ere eceee 98 Sula sula, Red-footed BOODY.--. +e sees cree terrence eee ceeece 102 Fregata minor, Great Frigatebird......--..sseesee es eeecees 108 IMG (PR) Soh WUC iGo me se oteducoduoueuDo ooo o CUO bon con ILS) Pandion haliaetus, OSprey---.- see ee cere eee cere eee reece ens 114 Falco peregrinus, Peregrine Falcon---++-++e-+eerse tree eee eeeee 114 Porzanula palmeri, Laysan Rail..----+eeeeee recess eee ee eeee TLS) Charadrius semipalmatus, Semipalmated Plover.----+---+-++.--- JIN Charadrius mongolus, Mongolian PlOver-++-+++e++ssereseeeees 116 Pluvialis dominica, Golden PlLOver--+--++++-+ceoeseceeescerene WILE Squatarola squatarola, Black-bellied Plover------+-+-++-++++:- 113 Numenius tahitiensis, Bristle-thighed Curlew---++-+++++++++:: IBS Limosa lapponica, Bar-tailed Godwit---:++++++sseeeseseeeeeee ee Heteroscelus incanum, Wandering Tattler--+--+++:++tsseeeeeees ee Arenaria interpres, Ruddy Turnstone--++--++++tsse seer e eee eeee Les Crocethia alba, SanderLing «= «= +222 «2 oie ee eis 0 ce) oe nie «oni eieis . 126 Erolia melanotos or acuminata, Pectoral or Sharp-tailed Sandpiper-----++e+s eter ee rece s sees saatehatencusaeh 12s Larus argentatus, Herring @pllLoooooo Godan ccDboG50KD0G0000000 128 Larus glaucescens, Glaucous-winged Gull---+--++-+++++-eeeee- 29 Page Sterna lunaita, Grayebacked’ Mere rr irate s\sepslclcustsia Oooo tn 129 Sterna fuscata., SOOby Weienij. score oie crajedane lorem cee iclsisteuete tenets ttre 132 Anousistolidus, Brown Neddyesiwe. ws -meeree ce aoe DEPP 3 136 Anous) enuinGstiuis,, Bilacky NodGye ete aici mercrennel ar graraoens EL Gyeis sillba. WHiter Tern... otic co sore iste Wee Micke rene ects mee ents Lh6 NifeYariite WISP Raat crates cid OMG bce. ceSiciceths Sic Bits CAOMaiA Pac ovdiol ceo biosolids iLO Oryctolasus cuniculus, Huropean Rabbit...--....-+.. Ue rt a ee 150 INOCISEM SOHN SS HGOH OBE GoUEK Ooo DOO DO OOOO ODO OED MCOOomOK OCC aD Nope Monachus schauinslandi, Hawaiian Monk Seal................. LSI REpULLGS. soe esc ewe cree sce tints ettatete Miers a ncUh Netter ne ho eae 154 Chelona mydss, Greem MurtWeot: st sete ieee ene eaenen ae 154 A CKINOWDEDGMENIES cere ic cisye cpevtis x 45s cc wre ote terestel ttete invite elemer etait Made nere tate Me tae nie STi LITERATURE CITED....... aie el one see O aaseolee tone ce ron nett SEEM IRAS rE heh LOR BAL CT 158 APPEND Tete HANS TBs reece ten ee een Foe gee Lp tle oth nH oa 166 Or KOR Lk. Ie) 13). FIGURES The Hawaiian Islands. Aerial photograph of Lisianski Island, January 1966. U.S. Navy photograph. Map of Lisianski Island and surrounding shoal, 1930-1931. Modified from USC&GS Chart 4186, issued December 1942. Rocky eastern beach north of ledge shown in Figure 5. This area and the rock ledge are much used for roosting by shore- birds, particularly Ruddy Turnstones. POBSP photograph, March 1965, by William O. Wirtz, II. Looking north at rock ledge from narrow eastern beach, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B.Clapp. Immature Blue-faced Boobies roosting on log at edge of east beach, September 1907. POBSP photograph by R-B Clapp. View, looking south, of east beach as it widens towards the southeastern corner of the island, 19 June 1966. Young alba- trosses and a Brown Noddy in left fore and middle ground. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. View from southeastern high point of small cut inland from beach just west of large southwestern beach, 12 March 196}. POBSP photograph by A B. Amerson, Jr. Looking towards south point along steep beach at eastern edge of south beach, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. Looking west towards the broad sandy beach at the south point of the island, 12 March 1964. In September 1967, this beach apparently extended further south than is shown in this photo- graph. POBSP photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. Looking north along west cove toward Casuarina trees, October 1966. POBSP photograph by P.J. Gould. Looking south from the northern portion of the west beach, June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Looking northeast from the west side of the island, 19 June 1966. Note relatively sparse growth of Scaevola. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. i ab at 10 10 LL ILL 2 15. i Si ye Oke 19. 20. (dbo Gets 22), Clump of low Scaevola in island interior, looking east, 18 June 1966. Coconut trees and eastern group of Casuarina trees in background. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Interior of island, showing dense growth of bunchgrass, March 1965. Looking from south of eastern group of ironwood trees toward south ironwood tree. POBSP photograph by W.O. Wile) alls Map of Lisianski Island in 1905. Redrawn and modified from Lisiansky (1814). Map of Lisianski Island in 1923. Modified after Bryan (1938). The mode of the monthly means for a ten-year period, 1953- 1963, and the range of the maximum and minimum modes of temperature for Midway Atoll. Mean monthly precipitation in inches (histograms) and mean number of days with measurable precipitation (line graph) for Midway Atoll, 1953-63. Wind direction and speed at Midway Atoll, 1953-63. Length of directional line indicates percent of observations from that direction; figure at end of the direcvionall Line is mean wind speed in knots. Aerial photograph of Lisianski Island, May 1943. Assembled from U.S. Air Force photographs. Ipomoea indica and Boerhavia repens in association with Eragrostis, interior of island, looking south, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Cocos growing on northeastern portion of island, February 1963. POBSP photograph by W.O. Wirtz, II. Casuarina trees at top of northwest beach. Young Black-footed Albatross in foreground, 6 June 1967. POBSP photograph by R-L. DeLong. Casuarina trees near palms on northeast portion of island, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Live and dead Casuarina trees on southwest portion of island, 12 March 1964. By September 1967 many of the branches had fallen from the dead tree and it had become heavily overgrown with Ipomoea indica. POBSP photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. Page We! 14 16 19 19 ho LO 41 Te Zee 29. 308 31. 22). 35. 30. Sy 38. 39. LO. Almost pure stand of Boerhavia in kragrostis association in the north central interior. Young Laysan Albatross in mid- ground. POBSP photograph, 19 June 1966, by P.C. Shelton. Portulaca lutea and Eragrostis, top of west beach, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C Shelton. Tribulus in decadent Scaevola near the north shore, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Ipomoea indica growing over Scaevola, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Pure stand of Ipomoea indica within Eragrostis association in the interior of the island, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Nama sandwicensis var. laysanicum below the fringeof Scaevola on the northeast shore, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by RoC Slaelkicoyay- Solanum nigrum near center of -island, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Sicyos growing with Tribulus and in Scaevola, 19 June 1966. Young Laysan Albatross in foreground. POBSP photograph by Pac. puclLron-. Dead Sicyos and Scaevola near the northeast shore, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Lush Scaevola on southeastern portion of island, 12 March 1964. Looking east-northeast from the southeast high point of the island. POBSP photograph by A-B. Amerson, Jr. Bonin Petrel resting on sand near burrow under Ipomoea, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. Bonin Petrel nest and egg on surface of ground under dense Seaevola, 14 February 1963. POBSP photograph. Pair of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters near mouth of burrow, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. Wedge-tailed Shearwaters near burrows in sand area at edge of Boerhavia-Eragrostis association, 19 June 1966. Young Laysan Albatross in mid-ground. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Page he he Wy hh h6 h6 M7 47 48 ie {f ae ie. M5. - 46. ie 50: Sule: 52a Wedge-tailed Shearwater chick at base of southwestern Casuarina tree, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. Christmas Shearwater chick in nest site under Scaevola along the northeast beach, September 1967. POBSP photograph by Re Ba Cllatome Red-tailed Tropicbird on nest under Scaevola, 6 June 1967. POBSP photograph by Robert L. DeLong. Typical Blue-faced Booby nest with egg and recently hatched young, 12 March 1954. POBSP photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. Blue-faced Booby brooding young in nest at edge of vegeta- tion, February 1903. POBSP photograph. Club of roosting Blue-faced Boobies on the south point, September 1967. Brown Boobies (note fifth bird from right) occasionally roost in such clubs. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. Red-footed Boobies on nests in Scaevola, 12 March 196}. POBSP photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. Adult female and several young Great Frigatebirds on nests in Scaevola along the west side of the island, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Prebreeding Sooty Terns on ground among Eragrostis clumps near the north end of the island, 18 June 1966. POBSP photograph joy Iola Slaeiliwojalc Brown Noddy incubating egg in nest under Scaevola, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Recently hatched Black Noddy chick in nest in Casuarina, 12 March 1964. POBSP photograph by A-.B.Amerson, Jr. Recently hatched White Tern chick on nest site in Casuarina, 12 March 1904. POBSP photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. Page 78 33 37 Je 98 104 LLO 134 138 143 147 Or 22. TABLES Recent surveys of Lisianski Island by the POBSP and BSFW. The avifauna of Lisianski Island. Breeding cycles of seabirds on Lisianski Island compared with breeding cycles on Laysan Island. Months of occurrence of non-breeding birds on Lisianski Island. Banding totals, by year, of birds banded on Lisianski by the POBSP and BSFW. Interisland movements of banded birds involving Lisianski Island. Observations of Black-footed Albatross on Lisianski Island. Black-footed Albatross banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Laysan Albatross on Lisianski Island. Specimens of Laysan Albatross from Lisianski Island. Laysan Albatross banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Bonin Petrels on Lisianski Island. Specimens of Bonin Petrels from Lisianski Island. Observations of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters on Lisianski Island. Specimens of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters from Lisianski Island. Observations of Christmas Shearwaters on Lisianski Island. Observations of Red-tailed Tropicbirds on Lisianski Island. Red-tailed Tropicbirds banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Blue-faced Boobies on Lisianski Island. Locations and sizes of Blue-faced Booby clubs on Lisianski Island. Blue-faced Boobies banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Brown Boobies on Lisianski Island. WAL a 100 Specimens of Brown Boobies from Lisianski Island. Brown Boobies banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Red-footed Boobies on Lisianski Island. Heights of Red-footed Booby nests on Lisianski Island. Red-footed Boobies banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Great Frigatebirds on Lisianski Island. Great Frigatebirds banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Golden Plovers on Lisianski Island. Observations of Bristle-thighed Curlews on Lisianski Island. Bristle-thighed Curlews banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Wandering Tattlers on Lisianski Island. Observations of Ruddy Turnstones on Lisianski Island. Specimens of Ruddy Turnstones from Lisianski Island. Ruddy Turnstones banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Sanderling on Lisianski Island. Observations of Gray-backed Terns on Lisianski Island. Observations of Sooty Terns on Lisianski Island. sooty Terns banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of Brown Noddies on Lisianski Island. Observations of Black Noddies on Lisianski Island. Black Noddies banded on Lisianski Island. Observations of White Terns on Lisianski Island. White Terns banded on Lisianski Island. Opservations of Hawaiian Monk Seals on Lisianski Island. Observations of Green Turtles on Lisianski Island. ha. 4b. lha. l4b. eee 16a. 16b. ix APPENDIX TABLES Page Scientific visits to Lisianski Island, 1828-1969. 166 Results of scientific visits to Lisianski Island, 1828-1969. 170 Publications on collections and studies (with the exception of birds) made on Lisianski Island, 1828-1969. Lys Movements of Black-footed Albatross from Lisianski. fate Movements of Black-footed Albatross to Lisianski. Li Movements of Laysan Albatross from Lisianski. LIT Movements of Bonin Petrels from Lisianski. 178 Movements of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters from Lisianski. Lye Movements of Blue-faced Boobies from Lisianski. 178 Movements of Blue-faced Boobies to Lisianski. 180 Movements of Brown Boobies to Lisianski. 133 . Movements of Red-footed Boobies from Lisianski. 183 . Movements of Red-footed Boobies to Lisianski. 185 . Movements of Great Frigatebirds from Lisianski. 189 . Movements of Great Frigatebirds to Lisianski. 190 Movements of Golden Plovers from Lisianski. gy Movements of Ruddy Turnstones to Lisianski. gt Movements of Sooty Terns from Lisianski. es) Movements of Sooty Terns to Lisianski. lUug)s) Movements of Brown Noddies to Lisianski. ye Movements of Black Noddies from Lisianski. u)5 Movements of Black Noddies to Lisianski. | 196 *SpueLlsT LIVWAAVH = po Invw @B IVNV1 eS Iv HO1OW 5 vinv» NHVO > = * @ lovin VOHIN * N UBTTeMeY OU °L dan3Ty NOlv NOISNHOTS * Y3DIN* SIVOHS J1VOINd HONIY4 * SAIDVNNid Y3NGYVD & NVSAV1, DISNVISIT® 333 S3WY3H GNV 1¥V3d . AVMGIW © THE NATURAL HISTORY OF LISIANSKI ISLAND, NORTHWESTERN HAWAIIAN ISLANDS * by Roger B. Clapp? and William O. Wirtz, II? INTRODUCTION Lisianski, a low sandy island in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands (Figure 1), is located at 26°02' North and 174°00' West (Off. of Geog., 1956: 47), approximately 905 nautical miles north- west of Honolulu (Bryan, 1942: 190). The island is situated at the northern edge of a large reef bank which lies between 25°26' and 25°25' north latitude and between 173°52' and 174°O1' west longitude. Previous knowledge of the history and biota of the island is remarkably scant considering Lisianski's relatively close proximity to Honolulu. Most of what is now Known about the island stems from work done by the Tanager Expedition in 1923. Publications resulting from that visit dealt primarily with vascular plants, fish, arthropods, and marine invertebrates. Information on the terrestrial biota gath- ered by the Tanager Expedition was necessarily slight, however, since the flora, and consequently, fauna, had been greatly reduced due to the desecuction or Weeetacion by rabbits imtroduced cartier am vhe 20th Century. Other primary sources of information on Lisianski prior to recent investigations are Munter's (1915) obscure and little known report of a visit made in March 1915 and Bryan's (1942) account--to date the best descriptive and historical summary of the island. In 1963 the Smithsonian Institution's Pacific Ocean Biological Survey Program (hereafter POBSP), directed by Dr. Philip S. Humphrey, began a series of extensive surveys of Central Pacific islands. © During the study period (1963-1969), Lisianski was visited thirteen times by POBSP personnel. On four of these visits POBSP personnel accompanied paper Number 77, Pacific Ocean Biological Survey Program, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. “Present address: Bird and Mammal Laboratories, Bureau of Sport Fish- eries and Wildlife, National Museum of Natural History, Washington, DOS ORO). 5 Present address: Department of Zoology, Pomona College, Claremont, California 91711. personnel from the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife (hereafter BSFW), who, through 1969, had made eight visits to Lisianski (Table 1). From 1963 through 1969 about 27 days were spent on the island by both agencies. Data obtained on these visits form the primary basis of our recent knowledge of the island. Also incorporated in this report is a considerable amount of un- published data from earlier visits to Lisianski, most notably the information gathered on the birdlife in 1923 by Alexander Wetmore. the purposes of Unis’ report ane several.) One the one whandy y wen wcll to compile from diverse sources as complete and as accurate a summary } of available information regarding the island as possible. On the other, | we wish to report our recent studies, which have dealt primarily with the birdlife of Lisianski. We hope that this report, one of a series on \ the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands, will accomplish these aims as well as point out areas where our knowledge of the biota is still inadequate or | incomplete. | The final draft was largely completed by late 1970 and few emenda- tions or additions have been made since then. Data reported herein includes only that available through 1969. DESCRIPTION Lisianski (Fig. 2) is a low sand and coral island of approximately 450 acres (Freeman, 1951: 331). It is situated at the northern end of a large reef bank (Fig. 3) which is about 65 square miles or 41,322 acres in area. The island, somewhat resembling a parallelogram, is approximately 2,000 yards long, north to south, and 1,100 yards wide, being somewhat wider to the north. Its circumference is about 3.23 statute miles. The eastern beach is dominated by an exposed ledge of reef rock, with small tidal pools, behind which a narrow, “rocky beach 2 ises soc lapoue suem feet to the vegetated interior (Fig. 4). South of the rock ledge a low curving beach extends to the southeastern corner (Fig. 5). This beach rises sharply for about three to five feet to the vegetated interior. At the edge of this beach, about 300 yards south of the rock ledge, is the cross-section of a log, probably a redwood, that is much used as a roosting site by Blue-faced Boobies (Fig. 6). The beach widens (Fig. 7) as one moves toward the southeastern corner where a large unvegetated cut, about 225 feet across at its mouth, extends inland for a somewhat greater distance. Beginning just beyond this cut is a wide triangular sandy beach. the point on, whwch usmenc southeasternmost part of the island. To the north of the cut the terrain above the beach is fairly level, while to the south the terrain is com- posed of rolling sand dunes densely covered with Scaevola. The large cut and a smaller one (Fig. 8) just to the southwest of the dense stand of scaevola and the southeast and south beaches are the areas in which the densest concentrations of nesting Black-footed Albatrosses are found. There is a seven foot vertical drop from the vegetated interior to the Northwest po : OF ge Beach’ I, %, a Northwest Ga ri foe | Sandy East - Aerial photograph of Lisianski Island, January 1966. U.S. Navy photograph. nautical miles SS ° i Figure 3. LISIANSKI ISLAND 1930 —1931 NEVA SHOAL 2 Map of Lisianski Island and surrounding shoal, 1930-1931. Modified from USC&GS Chart 4186, issued December 1942. “TT ‘2941M *O WeTTTIm Aq “GQ61 youew ‘udesrScacyd dsqoqd “seucysuiny Appny AT aetnotz1ed ‘spatqaacys Aq Zuyyscea acy pasn yonw are aSpay yoo ay} pue vote STU, °G SINFTq ut uMcys eSpe] fo yzsoU yoeaq usaqsea Ayocy +} ammBty Figure 5. Looking north at rock ledge from narrow eastern beach, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. / Figure 6. Immature Blue-faced Boobies roosting on log at edge of east beach, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. ee qcud qsqod “WIS 2ols} COOer Mop Wielisseee "9961 eUunL 61 ‘pUeTST ‘MoTA ‘J oansTa “puncis aTrplw pue o103 4yeaT ut AppcN umoag e pue sassozzeqte Sunc ey} JO T3UuICD ULayseay4nos 3y} SpieMOJ SUSPIM 41 Se YoRaq 4sea Jo ‘yyncs Sutyooy il es ee cal * met eel deed Lee aac a: peu ee mage - - ad * oe a -~ = pa * Bs bad Se | * ie, # = si Ree o_o @ - leat : o : - ig Sey gies - — Oe et a ae ee = : : ee i mn 2 “ oi : ‘ ips pe ge As é med -~ — — * eS . : = « ee ae sae Oe - a ae "4 eR : eee . “ap ‘uosteuly -q°y fq ydersoqcud qgqoq “hO61 UOTE ZT ‘Yoeeq ureysamyqnos asreqT gO ysem qsnf yoesq wory puelUtT 4yno [[eWs Jc yuTCd ySty usaqseayqnos wor MOTA beach at the eastern corner of the southern beach (Fig. 9). A short distamee west of this area a series of dunes rises to 20 feet or more, the southeastern high point of the island. These rolling dunes, thickly covered with Scaevola, gradually decrease in height across the south end of the island (mis. 10): The southwest beach, relatively broad, forms two small coves (see Fig. 2). The beach along the west side of the island is fairly steep and there is a slight vertical cut and overhang at the edge of the vegetated area where erosion has occurred. A small cove, present near the middle of the west beach, is designa- ted as a small boat landing on the hydrographic charts. There are only a few small coral heads in the lagoon area west of this landing and a large area of clear green water lies between the landing and the reef roc tole Westen Towards the morth end of this cove is a group of Casuarina trees (Fig. 11), under or about which were the campsites of most recent BSFW and POBSP survey parties. (On two visits, March 1965 and September 1967, the campsite was on the east shore of the island, a few hundred feet to the south of the ledge shown in Figure 5.) North of this cove the beach curves toward the northwest (Fig. 12). The northwest beach (see Fig. 2) is 20 to 30 feet wide and slightly in- elined up to the vegetated interior. Coral rubble is scattered in the sand and several large tree trunks are buried in the beach here. Aerial photographs from 1943 and 1957 show that the southwestern end on this beach was once several hundred feet from its apex to the vegetated interior. To the east of the straight northwest beach is a crescent-shaped beach, ZORUSsEoOuye sis wide. Wwilehcoralicubble and abou LOO; yands. longs sihere iis 2S PetceiwOpEEromenrtc VaLerior to the beach here. The northeast beach, for the most party sandy, rises gently to the iMpemioqt@ maa niiompeuLe! > yacds Wade. Av the Yop on bins beach tnevemis more coral rubble mixed with sand. The beach becomes steeper and narrower as it approaches the rocky east beach. Island Interior A rim of Scaevola grows along the entire perimeter with most dense growth from the north point of the island, south along the east beach and across the south end of the island. The least dense growth is found along the northern third of the west beach and behind the northwest beach. Com- parison of earlier aerial photographs with Figure 2 reveals that the Scaevola has been progressively invading the interior, particularly in the northeast and southwest portions of the island. The growth in the northeast sector is lusher than that on the southwest portion of the island (Fig. 13). Oc- casional patches of Scaevola are to be found in the interior but most are low, seldom exceeding 3 to 4 feet in height (Fig. 14). The interior of the island is covered primarily with a lush growth of bunchgrass (Eragrostis) Srdowmnio tora) Me Laie (Oi) Gace ron mone. ciwa Ula Looking towards south point along steep beach at eastern edge of south beach, September 1967. FOBSP chotograph by R.B. Clapp. Looking west towards the broad sandy beach at the south point of the island, 12 March 1964. In September 1967, this beach apparently extended further south than is shown in this photo- sraph. FPOBSP photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. Figure ll. Looking north along west cove toward Casuarina 1966. POBSP photograph by P.J. Gould. Looking south from the northern portion of the June 1966. TOBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. trees, October west beach, Figure Lu vo He fc hl Looking northeast from the west side of the island, 19 June 1966. Note relatively sparse growth of Scaevola. FOBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Clump of Low Seaevola in island interior, Looking east, 18 June 1966. Coconut trees and eastern sroup of Casuarina trees in backsround. FOBSP photograph by. PoC. isneilton’. 13 several other associated plants. There are several large nearly pure stands of morning-glory (Ipomoea ), notably in the south in the central depression, and at the north end, interspersed with the bunchgrass (Fig. 15). Two large palm trees grow inland from the beach in the northeast section and a few hundred feet south of them grows a small group of ironwood trees (Casuarina). Several other live Casuarina are also present; the group at the north end of the west cove mentioned previously; two, one live and one dead, found together towards the south end of the island; and a large dead ironwood, much used for roosting by Red-footed Boobies and frigatebirds, which is to the southwest of the latter group. Accordance tou seudye by therUlS. Coast ‘and Geodetic Survey in 1931 (see Fig. 3), the topography of the island is dominated by a crescent- shaped ridge which extends from the northeast side of the island around the north and down the west side to the southwest corner. Judging from Lisiansky's description of the island, this area has been more or less elevated since 1805 (Fig. 16). A second ridge along the southern side of the island which curves northward at the southwest and southeast cor- ners is currently obvious, and is figured on a map of the island made in 1912~(Big Maley ye Wetmore (ms.) described the island in May 1923 as absolutely devoid of vegetation except for a narrow strip of grass and pigweed about two acres in area along the ridge at the northwest corner of the island. "It is roughly a parallelogram a nautical mile long by slightly less than a half mile wide. A low ridge on the northeast marks the highest point and there is a central depression bounded by a raised rim protecting it from the ocean that must in an earlier stage of development have been the basin of a lagoon similar to that at Laysan." GEOLOGY The Hawaiian Islands are the summits of a range of volcanic mountains that stretches for more than 1,500 nautical miles in a southeast-northwest direction across the floor of the North Pacific Ocean. The entire chain is normally divided into two groups. The islands from Niihau and Kauai southeast to Hawaii are considered the main or windward group, while the tiny points of protruding land from Nihoa northwest to Kure are called the leeward group. Stearns (1966) is the most recent and comprehensive of the several papers dealing with the geological history of the group, and the following summary is based on that book. There are no papers that deal specifically with the geology of Lisianski Island. Geological evidence suggests that the range was formed during the Tertiary Period, and that the peaks at the northwestern end of the chain were formed earlier than those to the southeast. The islands were built coral 0 1000 Shock ESE FEET Figure Lf. Map of Lisianski Island in 1923. Modified after Bryan (1938). Lf The formation of these volcanic islands occurred in several stages. During the submarine stage, development is due primarily to the addition of quantities of pillow lava and the production of ash and pumice as a result of the contact of magma with sea water. The soft cone is easily eroded by the sea when the peak reaches sea level. A shieldshaped dome is built from thin sheets of highly fluid olivine basalts once the cone reaches sea level. The volcano gradually collapses over the vent areas to form a caldera on the summit, and as fresh lava pours from the cone this caldera is obliterated. Erosion partly destroys the volcanic dome, and submergence may drown the dome and provide an environment suited to the development of coral reefs. Rejuvenation of volcanic activity may destroy coralline growth and the island may continue to emerge, as in the case of the main islands. Or submergence or erosion may continue with the subsequent development of an atoll. Erosion by wind, waves, and rain reached its maximum in the fluc- tuating seas of the Pleistocene, when sea level may have dropped to 1,000 feet lower than it is today, and risen to 95 feet higher. Sea temperatures during glacial maxima dropped so low, corals barely survived in Hawaiian waters. But during interglacials and after the last glacial retreat, conditions were favorable for growth of corals and the coralline algae necessary to bind the more fragile corals into a resistant mass. The islands of the northwest chain result from accumulation of this material some hundreds of feet thick, overlying the volcanic bases. The forms we see of the islands are relatively transitory in terms of geological time, and depend upon the stage of submergence or emergence, and on existing wind and current patterns. The most recent event in the northwest chain was an emergence of 1 to 2 meters, as measured at Kure, Midway, and Pearl and Hermes Reef, where emergent rock ledges composed of coral aged by carbon-14 at between 1,200 and 2,400 years occur (Gross et al., 1969: 22). Such ledges do not occur on Lisianski, at least not separated from the island. If any existed formerly they were eroded away. Lisianski Island itself is a small emergent portion of a coral platform several miles across. There is no enclosed lagoon, but the island appears to have had a small central lagoon which has been filled in with sand. Soils on Lisianski range from pure sand and coralline gravel on the beaches, through coarse coral rock areas above the beach zone, to humus- sandy mixtures in the vegetated areas. Elschner (1915: 5/) reported that the surface was bleached sand to 4 or 5 centimeters, and that the deeper strata were moist and gray. There are no more recent soil determinations for the island. Elschner (ibid. ) reported that the entire surface was partially ohosphatized, there being a more or less fine film of phosphates on aula sand particles. He noted that the best guano was found in the central basin, supposed by him to have once been a lagoon. Phosphate determina- tions (as CazP208 im the original) by Hischner varied from 2.2 to 11.12 percent in surface sand and from 14.24 to 62.17 percent in the area of the former lagoon. CLIMATE Climatic data for this area of the Pacific are available only from the Midway Naval Station, 255 miles northwest of Lisianski. No signifi- cant difference is to be expected between the general weather conditions of the two islands. The data used in this section are from a summary of the years 1953-1963 (Air Weather Service [MATS] Climatic Center, USAF). Climate in this region of the Pacific is marine, influenced by marine tropical or marine Pacific air masses depending upon the season. During summer the Pacific High becomes dominant, with the ridge line ex- tending across the Pacific north of Midway. This places the region under the influence of easterlies with marine tropical and trade winds prevail- ing. During the winter, especially from November through January, the Aleutian Low moves southward over the North Pacific, displacing the Pacific High before it.| The) Midway’ region is ‘then attiected by either) marine pacific or marine tropical air, depending upon the relative intensity of the Aleutian Low and the Pacific High. Monthly maximum, minimum, and mean temperatures for a lO-year period are shown in Figure 18. The temperature variation shown is indicative of a marine environment. The mean annual range is 16°F. From December through April the means range between 66°F and 69°F, and during the re- mainder of the year between 70°F and 81°F, the warmest months being July, August and September, and the coolest January, February, and April. An inexplicable departure from the normal curve occurs in maximum, minimum and) mean fagtxes mor) Aprilia wAnsWadesres dittherencevextsMs perween serene absolute high of 89°F and the absolute low of 52°F for this 10-year period. Mean monthly precipitation and the number of days with measurable precipitation are tabulated in Figure 19. Rain or drizzle occur most frequently from December through May, and least frequently in June and July. The mean annual precipitation for the period is 42.59 inches, with a maximum of 5.07 inches occurring in January and August, and a minimum of 2/03 inches in November. A secondary maximum of 4.92 inches occurs in October. Combining amount of precipitation and days with measurable pre- cipitation shows May and June to be the driest months of the year. During the remaining months measurable rain falls on from 10 to 1/ days. MThun- derstorms have been recorded in all months except February, March, and April but peak activity seems to occur during August, September, and Novem- ber. The annual average relative humidity is 76 percent with a high monthly mean of 89 percent and a low of 62 percent. During the periods for which data are available, no tropical storm or typhoon has passed through the area, though storms of tropical character have passed within 500 miles, causing a noticeable increase in precipita- tion and winds, especially in September of 1957, 1958 and 1959, October and November 1962, and December 1964. Surface wind speeds and directions are shown in Figure 20. The prevailing wind direction 10 months of the year is easterly, and during 85 80 75 Temp. - (°F) 70 65 60 Jan. Feb. Mar Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dee, Figure 18. Tne mode of the monthly means for a ten-year period, 1952- 1963, and the range of the maximum and minimum modes of temperature for Midway Atoll. Figure 19. Mean monthly precipitation in inches (histograms) end mean number of days with measurable precipitation (line graph) for Midway Atoll, 1953-63. Jan Feb. Mar Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. December and January westerly. The annual mean wind speed is 10 knots with a range of 5 knots. Winds of over 4} knots generally range from northeast to southeast, while greatest mean wind speeds are recorded from south-southwest to west-northwest. The maximum sustained wind recorded for Midway is 44 knots in January. Maximum winds are lowest in June, July and August, and high in September and December, and also Low in October. Maximum winds occur generally from the east from July through October, and from the west the remainder of the year. Peak gusts of 77 and 67 knots have been recorded in December and January respectively, during the period of prevailing westerlies. From May through August peaks range from 35 to 41 knots and in the remaining months from 42 to 55 knots. Gusts are generally from the west. The mean tenths of total sky cover is fairly uniform throughout the year, ranging from a Low of 5.3 in yvAucust ova nileh lof 7.8) to Maren The yearly mean is 6.2. The occurrence of fog and haze is negligible, but highest in January and March. Conditions with visibility of less than one mile occur rarely (2 percent) at Midway, but most often from December through April, when due to rain. t 12,6 9.2 Figure 20. Wind direction and speed at Midway Atoll. 1953-63. Length of directional line indicates percent of observations from that direction; figure at end of the directional line is mean wind speed in knots. HISTORY Discovery of Lisianski Island Lisianski was discovered when the Russian exploring vessel Neva, captained by Urey Lisiansky, grounded on a nearby reef. At the time the Neva was sailing from Sitka to rendezvous at Macao with the Nadeshda, her companion on the first Russian circum-global expedition (Buck, 1953: Tas The Neva ran aground at 2200 on 15 October 1805 but the crew was able to refloat the vessel by throwing cannons and other heavy objects over- board. At dawn the crew observed a low sandy island to the west. Shortly thereafter the ship was driven onto another reef by a sudden squall but was refloated by 17 October when cables, anchors, and all remaining heavy items were thrown overboard. That evening some of the ship's officers landed on the island and returned with four large seals that had been killed with hand spikes. On the 18th the crew retrieved the items that had been thrown overboard and went ashore. They found birds very numerous; at almost every step they sank almost to their knees in burrows dug by the birds. They saw seals and turtles but did not find water. A tall pole was fixed in the sand, and a bottle containing an account of the island was buried near it. Lisiansky (1814: 256) concluded his comments on the island by stating that "this island promises nothing to the adventurous voyager but certain danger....tO the southeast point of the bank where the vessel grounded, I gave the name of Neva; while the island itself, in compliance with the unanimous wishes of my ship's company, received the appelation of Lisiansky." The next recorded visit to Lisianski occurred when Capt. Benjamin Morrell, Jr., of the ship Tartar landed there 6 July 1825. Morrell com- mented in some detail on the surrounding reefs but only made a few remarks about the island itself. He stated that it was "only about six miles in circumference, presenting a few small spots of vegetation, consisting of coarse grass and a little shrubery. The whole surface...[was] nearly cov- ered with rookeries of different kinds of birds, among which are whale- birds, wake-up-kittles, man-of-war birds, gulls, and tropic-birds. On the shores we found an abundance of sea-elephants and green turtles, but nowhere...could obtain fresh water" (Morrell, 1841: 216). Pics: Seis weie Wisc The next known visit to the island was by another Russian exploring vessel, the Moller, commanded by Capt. Stanikowitch. A party landed on the island.on 3 April 1826 and the ship's surgeon, Herr C. Isenbeck, "did his best to bear all he saw in mind, and to prepare and keep as many of the birds, which were mostly caught by hand, as the very unfavorable cir- cumstances allowed him to do” (von Kittlitz in Rothschild, 1893-1900: ii). Several years later his observations were reported to F.H. von Kittlitz who subsequently wrote a paper that was translated by Rothschild (op. GU. )c Isenbeck's observations comprise the first list of birds from the island, but in many instances his observations are of doubtful validity, both as to specific identifications and as to observations on breeding biology. Shipwrecks Lisianski, like other Northwestern Hawaiian Islands, has had its share of shipwrecks. The accounts of these wrecks clearly show the tenacity and resourcefulness of early voyagers in the Pacific. Wreck of the Holder Borden - 1844 The first known wreck was that of the 442-ton whaler Holder Borden of Fall River, Massachusetts. The ship, captained by Javes J. Pell (from whom Lisianski derived one of its earlier, alternative names), ran aground on a sandbank at O300 on 12 April 1844.1 Shortly thereafter the ship Swung around onto a coral reef from which she could not be extricated. By morning there was 4 feet of water in the hola and the crew, observing a low sandy island some 4 or 5 miles away, abandoned the ship, taking everyching of value with them to the island. Members of the crew spent some 5 months on the island, living on ship's provisions and on seals, turtles, and birds. During their stay they built a 38-ton schooner from the wreckage of the Holder Borden. By September 8 they had completed their vessel, "painted, sheath, and copper- fastened throughout," which was named the Hope. On 14 September she sailed for Honolulu with Captain Pell and most of the crew and arrived there on 8 October. Eleven men were left on the island to look after the rest of the wreckage anc its cargo of whale oil (Ward, 1967: 31-54). Pell then purchased the American brig Delaware and set forth on 20 October t5 recover the men and supplies left on Lisianski. He arrived there on 1 November and spent 42 days loading oil and other salvage from the wreck. Before departing on 14 December, Pell planted about 80 coco- nuts on the southeast point of the island (Ward, op. cit.). Wreck of the Konohasset’ - 1846 Two years later another whaler, the 426-ton Konohasset, of Sag Harbor, met a similar fate. This ship, captained by Theron B. Worth, struck a reef under full sail about 17 miles from Lisianski at O100O on on 24 May 1846. All hands were forced to leave in lifeboats when the ship was bilged by increasing swells over the reef. The following morning they reboarded the ship and sighted Lisianski from aloft. They proceeded to the island where they found the remains of the Holder Borden, and a house and well that had been constructed by the crew of that ship. “Not November 1844 as indicated by Bryan, 1942: 192. Another account spelled the name Conohasset but we did not resolve which 1 is} (CQIACOENG - During the following days the crew returned to the wreck and sal- vaged materials from which they built an 8-ton, 22-1/2-foot sailing sloop which they named the Konohasset, Jr. The keel was laid on 28 May and the ship was completed but 18 days later. Captain Worth and six other crew members then sailed for Honolulu, arriving there 31 July 1846 after 42 days at sea. The rest of the crew was subsequently taken off the island by the Hawaiian schooner Halileo, which the American Consul had dispatched to rescue them (Ward, 1967: 55-67). Wreck of the Wanderer - 1872 In 1872 Captain E. Wood of the Kamehameha V found the remains of yet another ship that was lost on the treacherous reefs surrounding Lisianski. When the Kamehameha V arrived at Lisianski on 24 July the crew saw a wreck on the reefs to the southeast. During the afternoon two boats from the Kamehameha V went ashore and found evidence that the crew of the ill- fated Wanderer had landed there. On the beach were the remains of clothing, some food, water, and other debris. The ship's longboat, rigged for sea, was found on the northeast corner of the island where it had drifted ashore and the Wanderer's quarterboat was found moored to two water casks and a grapnel offshore. The wrecked ship itself was visited the following day. On board was found the log, its last entry dated May 9, which identified the ship as the North German brig Wanderer of Hamburg (The Friend, 2 October 1872: 81). The crew was never found, leaving this one of the great shipwreck mysteries Che elven ieteae ye Wreck of the Afton - 1887 In 1887 still another ship was wrecked on the reefs. The bark Afton, carrying a cargo of coal from New South Wales to California, went aground i Sw lor a amdmeould suet Gbereoutentort: WaptainiGilmour sand sGhemenew abandoned the ship on the 16th and sailed for Honolulu in the ship's two 28-foot lifeboats. After sailing about 120 miles to the E-SE, they found they could make no headway against the Northeast Trades; they then decided to turn about and run before the wind to Guam. Despite much suffering from thirst and the loss of the first mate overboard, the lifeboats eventually arrived at Guam, covering some 3,000 miles of open sea in 29 days (Cresswell, 1939: 5B) Nc Other Visits in the 19th Century Visit of the Manuokawai On 1O May 18573 Captain John Paty landed on the island from the Hawaiian schooner Manuokawai. His purpose in visiting the island was to 3Hewaiian Privy Couneil documents, vol. 10: 154. State of Hawaii Archives, Honolulu. i ascertain the nature and amount of guano deposits and to take possession of the island for the Hawaiian Kingdom. He reported that the surface was obtained by digging a hole 5 feet deep in the center of the former lagoon. His party found lumber, a house, and other artifacts left from the wreck of the Holder Borden, and noted that birds, fish, seals, and turtles were plentiful, though not so abundant as on Laysan. No trace,was found of the coconuts planted by Pell (Paty, 1857: 40; Bryan, 1942: 191-192). Visit of the Gambia Captain N.C. Brooks visited Lisianski on the Hawaiian bark Gambia about May 1859. His comments on its position, the surrounding reef, sailing directions for the island, and observations om the island scarcely differ from Paty's. One observation of note was the discovery on the west beach of a notice that had been left by the San Diego, 27 April 1859, tak- ing possession of the island for parties in San Francisco (Brooks, 1860: 501-502). Visit of the Ada In 1882 Lisianski was twice visited by the crew of the Ada, a British schooner that was engaged in harvesting fish, sharks, turtles, and béche- de-mer in the Hawaiian leewards. On her first visit to Lisianski on 24 January, 13 turtles and 47 béthe-de-mer were collected. On her second Wise aie Seely Meni, Gh ilheeles, eine S07 beche-de-mer were taken (Hornell, 1934: 432-433). Visit by the Rothschild Expedition The second visit to Lisianski of ornithological interest occurred during the summer of 1891 when the island was surveyed for a few days by the Rothschild Expedition. Henry Palmer and his assistant, George C. Munro, had been engaged by Walter Rothschild to collect birds in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. The schooner Kaalokai, captained by F.D. Walker, had been hired to transport them to the various islands. They landed on Lisianski on 29 June and remainea there until 7 July. In all, 16 species of birds, four of them shorebirds, were recorded and bird specimens were obtained. (See Appendix Tables 1 to 3 for additional de- tails and references. ) Cemeron's Visits John Cameron visited Lisianski on the sloop Ebon in the 1890's to kill seals and turtiies for meat and to fish) for sharks. On a) visit ia the summer of 1893 he noted "miriads of mice" that overran the island but made little reference to other animal life (Farrell, 1928: 397-399). Since the account of Cameron's visit was written many years after his trips to the Hawaiian leewards, and since no other observer from that period reported "mice," we suspect that his observations of Lisianski were probably con- fused with those of another atoll. “This is the only, VeL§eVence To cher Vel mE olgnu Mey oan DESZOr ne) al Cameron revisited the island twice during the summer of 1894. On the second visit the crew fished for sharks for a few days and then spent the remainder of the visit killing turtles and seals (Farrell, 1928: 414). histansky and its leases On 29 March 1890 rights to remove phosphates and guano from Lisianski (and Laysan) were granted to Charles N. Spencer and George D. Freeth by the Hawaiian Kingdom.? These rights were subsequently signed over to the North Pacific Phosphate and Fertilizer Company which formally leased Laysan and Lisianski on 17 April 1893 for a period to extend until 29 March 1910. The island was visited in July 1890 by George D. Freeth on the schooner Kaalokai, presumably to investigate the status of guano deposits. © With him was A.B. Lyons, who, with Freeth, had just previously visited Laysan Island. Lyons (1890) later published an account of his visit to Laysan but no details of the visit to Lisianski are now available. In March 1904 Max Schlemmer, the "King of Laysan," applied for a lease to Lisianski, Laysan, and French Frigate Shoals, but his plea was rejected. Shortly thereafter, 6 May 1904, the Pacific Guano and Fertilizer Company, / which had ceased to work Laysan for guano, made Schlemmer an agent who could represent it with the power to act in accordance with the terms of its contract and lease with the Hawaiian Government. In late 1907 Schlemmer again applied to the Hawaiian Government for a lease to Laysan and Lisianski but did not obtain it until 8 February 1909. (This lease was later declared invalid since it postdated Theodore Roose- velt's Presidential Executive Order of 3 February that had placed these islands within the Hawaiian Islands Reservation. ) Schlemmer had previously visited Japan and there, on 22 December 1908, had concluded a contract with a Japanese, Genkichi Yamanouchi, in which he granted the Japanese whatever rights he held or would hold to the two islands. Genkichi was in the feather trade and later sent a crew of Japanese to Lisianski and Laysan to harvest feathers (for more details on this raid, see below). Such rights as Schlemmer had accorded the Japanese were soon value- less since the Pacific Guano and Fertilizer Company surr€ndered its lease to the Hawaiian Government on 31 December 1908. Exploitation of Lisianski's Guano Deposits Various authors--e.g., Bryan (1942: 192) and Hutchinson (1950: 207)-- have recorded that guano was removed from Lisianski, but a reconsideration D For a more detailed account of this and other contracts dealing with Lisianski, see the historical account of Laysan in Ely and Clapp, 1973. 6 (The North Pacific Phosphate and Fertilizer Company had changed its name to he Pacific Guano and Fertilizer Company on 3 April 1894. Freeth visited Lisianski again during the summer of 1894 (Farrell, 1928; 414). of the evidence indicates that no guano, other than small samples for chemical testing, was ever taken. Both Bryan's and Hutchinson's state- ments refer to a comment by Carl Elschner, who visited the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands, including Lisianski, in September 1914, long after the Pacific Guano and Fertilizer Company had ceased operations in that area. Elschner (1915: 56) stated that "at some time or other guano and phos- phates were shipped...." However, the historical absence of structures such as wharfs used for loading guano, and the lack of any other physical evidence of guano operations, as well as the vagueness of Elschner's comment, strongly suggest that Hlschner was only reporting hearsay and had no direct evidence of guano operations. In addition, an anonymous article in a Honolulu trade magazine, "The Sales Builder," states that the Saal island worked by the company for guano was Laysan (Anon., 1939: 19). Plumage Hunters on Lisianski - 1904 On 8 January 1904 a party of 38 Japanese landed on Lisianski from the schooner Yeiju Maru for the purpose of securing birds! feathers that eventually were to be used in the French millinery trade.? About 18 January the ship broke loose from her anchorage in a heavy gale and was evidently lost on the reef as much debris from this ship later washed ashore. in late Hebrnuamy the Giivo MarunpuG tan addiht onal so emenyashore and departed for Tokyo with no cargo (Hamlet, ms. ). On 11 April 1904 Captain A.P. Niblaeck of the U.S.S. Iroquois went ashore and warned the Japanese of their violation of customs and immigration This article contains many details of the history of guano operations on Laysan that are to be found in no other account. The nature of the statements suggests that the author had access to the files of the guano company which are apparently no longer available. This was probably not the first time that Lisianski had been visited by feather hunters. The previous year, Hugh Rodman, then commander of the U.S.S. Iroquois, had ordered from Lisianski some Japanese that he had previously found killing birds on Midway (Hugh Rodman to the Assistant Seeretary of the Nawysn lecuisyn HOOsm Ree mccolin IAG). sUnoe Nat. Archives, Washington). 19this account of Japanese activities, derived from an interview con- ducted by Hamlet with the leader of the Japanese, Tsunetare Sugiye, has the ring of authenticity. When the Japanese reached Honolulu they presented a different story, reported by Bryan (1942: 194), who re- lates: "The leader of the bird poachers told Acting Governor Atkinson that the party has been stranded....when the schooner, Aju, sank. He said that they had put up a signal of distress, seen by the Tiyo Maru, which had spared them some provisions and removed one of their party." ef laws. ++ This warning probably had little effect since Niblack spoke no Japanese and the Japanese spoke no English. Niblack reported their presence on Lisianski when he returned to Honolulu and the U.S. Revenue Cutter Thetis was dispatched to remove the Japanese from the island. The Thetis anchored off Lisianski on 16 June and Captain 0.C. Hamlet and a party, including an interpreter, went ashore to investigate. There they found a camp, consisting of four thatched-roof shacks, and a party of 77 Japanese. If anything, the Japanes2 were pleased at being apprehended. They had been short of food for some time prior to the arrival of the Thetis and were down to 600 pounds of rice, a few beans and some dried tern meat which they had been preparing against the day that their rice would be gone (Hamlet, ms. ). Hamlet's party also found great quantities of dead birds as well as many packages of dried birds and skins. The manager of the feather- gathering operation, Tsunetare Sugiye, stated that 110 sacks of wings, 100 crates of whole dried birds, and 116 cases of birds and wings had been gathered up to the time of the Thetis' arrival. His records indi- cated that these packages contained approximately 121,768 whole birds and 162,223 pairs of wings. Nearly all of the approximately 284, 000 birds killed had been "black and white terns" [= Sooty Terns], but both Laysan and Black-footed Albatrosses, Gray-backed Terns, and Red-tailed Tropicbirds had also been: killed. The most highly prized catch was the "all white tern" [= White Tern] which, however, was scarce on Lisianski. "Black terns [= Noddy sp.] were not killed as they had no practical use for ornament (Hamlet, ms.). Hamlet brought all the Japanese and their personal effects, as well as some bird specimens, 14 on the Thetis the same day, and departed for Honolulu that evening. All the rest of the birds and plumage was left on Lisianski since Hamlet, in a discussion with the Japanese consul- general, had previously stated that another Japanese vessel would be allowed to remove the catch from Lisianski (Hamlet, ms.). Lt og of the U.S.S. Iroquois, Rec. Group 24, U.S. Nat. Archives, Washington. léyemlet states that "Examples of black and white and gray and white Terns and one Boatswain Bird, as put up on the island, and heads and necks of white Gonies...and a bottle of coral sand...has been mailed to The Department today [23 June 1904]." Some of these birds (2 Laysan Albatross, a Red-tailed Tropicbird, < Gray-backed Terns, 4 Sooty Terns, and a White Tern) were subsequently donated to the U.S. National Museum. DQ oS Feather Poachers Visit Lisianski Again On 3 February 1909, probably partly as a result of pressure by conservation groups, Theodore Roosevelt issued Presidential Executive Order No. 1019 which included Lisianski in the Hawaiian Islands Reservation. This order stipulated that the islands were to be set aside as a preserve for the native birds. The Department of Agriculture received jurisdiction over the refuge. Nonetheless, the Japanese raided Lisianski again that same year. Early in the year, probably in April, a party of 10 Japanese landed on Lisianski and began harvesting feathers. On or about 21 August the party was removed from the island by the schooner Tempou. A new party of eight Japanese, under the direction of Nichichi Odaka, went ashore to continue harvesting feathers. At that time about 50 bales of birds' wings were taken onto the schooner for shipment to Japan, most of them from petrels and terns (Jacobs, ms.).1 Rumors that Japanese poachers were again at work in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands reached American ears in late 1909. As a result, the U.S. Revenue Cutter Thetis, commanded by W.V.E. Jacobs, was dispatched in January 1910 to investigate. After finding no poachers on the inner islands, and after apprehending the poachers on Laysan, the Thetis pro- GSSelsol iwi) Is wewelse ewerp ili dialex elalSiwe) Nal WwlalS imlonerauilrayer One rela IChela, — JAvn officer and armed boat's crew went ashore and arrested the Jeoanese 2” The following day the plumage that had been harvested was brought aboard ship. It consisted of 19 bales of feathers, a box of stuffed birds, and 1 box and 65 bags of birds' wings. The feathers weighed about 1-1/4 tons and the number of wings was calculated at about 140,400 (Jacobs, ms. ). The value of the birds' feathers collected on Lisianski in 1909 would have been about $97, 000.15 While ashore the crew of the Thetis found four small buildings, probably constructed by the Japanese. These structures consisted of a frame building with a corrugated tin roof where the Japanese dwelt, a similar shed used as a cookhouse, and two huts built of bamboo and mats used for storing cured plumage. 13at an estimated 1,830 wings to the bale (Jacobs, ms.), ca. 108,000 bird wings were harvested; judging from the present composition of the Lisianski avifauna, the species killed in greatest numbers were probably Bonin Petrels and Sooty Terns. |The Japanese presented a document signed by Max Schlemmer which they believed pave them/the right to harvesr heavhers- Hor deuaiicvon this contract and ensuing legal action, see Ely and Clapp, 1973. 15 : “The Japanese overseers stated that the lowest price for the plumage gathered was $.33 per wing and $6.00 per pound of feathers (Jacobs, ms.). Inv) \O After investigating the rest of the islands of the chain, the Thetis returned to Honolulu on 2 February and delivered the Japanese ‘into the custody of the U.S. Marshall (Jacobs, ms.). Subsequent Visits by the Thetis In the years following the capture of the feather poachers, Lisianski Was often visited by the Thetis which made regular tours of inspection of the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. On several occasions scientists ac- companied the Thetis on her voyages but most of their efforts were concen- trated on Laysan and relatively little information on the fauna and flora of Lisianski was obtained. A short resume of these visits by the Thetis is given below. On 1 September 1910 two boats were sent ashore from the Thetis to investigate conditions on Lisianski. No signs of habitation were found. The following spring, on 28 April, another investigation by the Thetis again revealed no evidence of habitation. The Thetis visited Lisianski next on 23 April 1912 and found no evidence that the island had been in- habited since the previous visit. When the Thetis next visited the island, 12 March 1913, George Willett and Alfred M. Bailey, members of a party from the Bureau of Biological Survey that had recently completed a survey of Laysan, went ashore for about half a day. y Aq uderscoqycud qsqod “BeoTpuT eascowodyT yyTm uMoauSteac AT TABeay awCosq psu YT pue 3az4 peap auj wcIy Ud[Tez PeyY Sayouerq ayy jo Auew )96 daqueydeg Aq “4961 Youre gi ‘ouelsSt jo uctjz10d 4semyygnes uc Ssai4 euTrTenseg Eeap pue SsATT ee past 2 Te : . Ss ee ae 7 Figure 27. Almost pure stand of Boerhavia in Eragrostis association in | the north central interior. Young Laysan Albatross in mid- sround. POBSP photograph, 19 June 1966, by P.C. Shelton. Figure 28. Portulaca lutea and Eragrostis, top of west beach, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. 43 the Scaevola association. Some seedlings were observed in these areas in September 1964. Plants were in bloom and had mature fruits developed in June 1966. Leguminosae Young 137 (UH). A sterile specimen that resembles Canavalia or Vigna. Zygophyllaceae Tribulus cistoides L. Sibley 102 (USNM), Young 139 (UH), Long 2348 (UH), Shelton 401 (UH). Most common in sandy soil around outer rim of island on outer half of Scaevola association; decidedly less common in the interior. Found in association with Ipomoea, Eragrostis, Boerhavia, and Scaevola. Nearly pure stands found growing over dead or decadent Scaevola along the inner edge of the Scaevola association (Fig. 29) with occasional blackened dead patches in dead Scaevola. In flower and with green fruit in June 1966. Lecythidaceae Barringtonia asiatica (L.) Kurz. Seeds sowed by Wilder in 1923 (Christophersen and Caum, 1931: U5) Not subsequently found. Convolvulaceae Ipomoea indica (Burm. f.) Merr. Sibley 103 (USNM), Young 140 (UH), Long 2339, 2349 (UH), Shelton 408 (UH). Common as climber in Scaevola, often covering and choking it (Fig. 30). Widespread in the Eragrostis association, often forming pure stands on level, sandy areas in the interior (Fig. 31), and occasionally on the inward and seaward slopes, In full flower in June 1966. Ipomoea pes-caprae (L.) Sw. Shelton 404 (UH). A single seedling found near the top of the beach on the north shore in June 1966. Ipomoea sp. Two poor specimens of an unidentified Ipomoea were seen in 1914 by Elschner and a seed of Ipomoea was picked up inland by Ball in 1923 (Christophersen and Caum, 1931; 15). Figure 29. Figure 30. Tribulus in decadent Scaevola near the north shore, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Ipomoea indica growing over Scaevola, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Hydrophyllaceae Nama sandwicensis var. Laysanicum Brand Wilder 8 (BPBM), Young 136 (UH), Long 2325, 2331 (UH), Shelton 405 (UH). BacoiMLoaos ae presen scaree, scattered in sand on the south, east, and particularly the northward facing shores. Occurs below outer fringe of Scaevola (Fig. 32), often in association with Boerhavia. Many seedlings seen in September 1964 and June 1966 and plants in flower on the latter visit. Solanaceae Nicotiana tabacum L. Reported to be growing in small patches on Lisianski in 1914 by Elschner who stated that it had been introduced by Captain [Max] Schlemmer (Christophersen and Caum, 1931; 14). Not found on any recent visit. Solanum nigrum lly Long 2318 (UH), Shelton 406, 407 (UH). Rare, several plants were found growing in gravel pockets in coral rock just above the high water- line on the east side in September 1964. In June 1966 three plants were found; two growing with Ipomoea at the inner edge of the Scaevola fringe on the east side and one near the center of the island (Fig. 33). Plants were in flower and with fruit on both visits. Cuecurbitaceae Sicyos lamoureauxii St. John Vounae135 (Ue), ahone 231) 23175 2356 (UM). “The Sicyos: occurring has been described recently as a new species by St. John (1970). Two additional specimens, Long 2315 (UH), Shelton 403 (UH), were not men- tioned by St. John but are likely this species. Common, but scattered; on the east and northwest sides of the island. Often found climbing on Scaevola (Fig. 34). Some patches of dead Sicyos found on dead Scaevola near the northeast shore in June 1966 (Fig. 35). In bloom and with well-developed fruits on that visit. Goodeniaceae Seaevola taccada (Gaertn. ) Roxb. Vou Re tons 2322, 2320, 2330, 12334, 2340, 234i) 23h2, 23h3, Po eBuben 2252. 2e5o, 235), 2355 (UH), Shelton “12> 413" (UH). Worms found in scattered patches in the interior. Thickest and tallest growth .securs on the southeast portion of the island (Fig. 36), an area rela- olvely= tecennly collonized. Figure 3c. Pure stand of Ipomcea indica within Eragrostis essociation in the interior of the island, 19 June 1966. FOBSP photo- arapheiby biG.) one von . Nama sandwicensis var. laysanicum below the fringe of Seaevola on the northeast shore, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Figure 34. Solanum nigrum near center of island, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by F.C. Shelton. Sicyos growing with Tribulus and in Scaevola, 19 June 1966. Young Laysan Albatross in foreground. POBSP photograph by F.C. Shelton. ¢ 7 \ if Hi 4? gg | AA Wd a [ee Dead Sicyos and Scaevola near the northeast shore, 19 June 1966. POBSP photograph by P.C. Shelton. Lush Seaevola on southeastern portion of island, 12 March 1964. Looking east-northeast from the southeast high point of the island. POBSP photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. ); 9 FAUNA Introduction Despite having large seabird populations, very little has been Bop tie HU vOUL iE Nembomucstieha ly yerveprave, hauha on Mistanska Wslanmd. Most information prior to recent investigations has consisted of scattered comments in a variety of papers usually largely devoted to studies of nearby Laysan Island (Rothschild, 1893-1900; Bailey, 1956) or appearing in poorly known sources (Munro, 1941a Gs SiSle Gf Milbronnere, HOTS DE or appearing in papers that considered aspects of the Northwestern Hawaiian Island fauna as a whole (Bailey, 1918, 1952a, 1952b; Wetmore, 1925; Richardson, 1957). Still other papers considered the status of individual species (Kenyon and Rice, 1959; Rice and Kenyon, 1962) but these papers were derived largely from aerial photographs and from the Seative prema tEe tigeracure. Only the paper by Munver, who was! nor yery tamiliar with the avifauna, attempted a complete list of the birds seen on the island. Historically only the papers by Rothschild and Munro give data on EhMerstarus OuNSPpeelcs Prior to the time when the vegetation of the island was laid waste by introduced rabbits. Information in these sources is very scanty, So scanty in fact that it is impossible to adequately esti- mate what the total breeding avifauna may have been nor to obtain any substantial idea of what the populations may have been like. One wonders, fi oeCeexanipley tthe SoGky peorm Petrel may net haye once occurred on itstanskt Dit the historical data is insufficient to tell. The papers by both Munter and Wetmore, as well as Wetmore's unpub- Jished field notes, taken in conjunction with several other unpublished LenS rear omuben period ea.) 1915 OZ3 5 vain, Least allow some. idea! i the nature of the fauna during the period when the island was largely denuded of vegetation. There have been a relatively greater number of papers reporting on the invertebrate fauna, particularly arthropods, largely as a result of the investigations by the Tanager expedition in 1923 (see Appendix Tables 2 and ane Some information, no doubt faunistically incomplete, has also been reported on the fish fauna. Virtually all these papers have been Varecely distributvonal or taxonomic in nature. Tt is evident that much yet may be learned about the occurrence and distribution of these groups on Lisianski and certainly Little or nothing is known of their biology or ecology as regards Lisianski Island. This report deals primarily with the terrestrial vertebrate fauna and with the vascular flora, the areas toward which the POBSP devoted most of its efforts. Nonetheless, we have attempted to indicate the principal accomplishments of previous surveys, particularly with regard to faunal (and ilorall) Bejgogs yWabela (lao wlatss ave oome ssi Tele Coldeeicaetl Appendix Tables 1 and 2 list the itineraries and personnel of the more important biological surveys and the principal activities undertaken. Appendix Table 3 summarizes papers dealing with all groups but birds and hovefully will prove useful to those interested in taxa not con- sidered herein. The latter table lists 52 papers dealing with Protozoa (1); Aschelminthes (1); Annelida (3); Arthropoda (21); Echinodermata (2); Pisces (3) Reptilia (4); Mammalia (12); Flora (3); and geophysical phenomena (2). Although the information presented in @ number of these papers is relatively trivial or only consists ofva taxonomically revised list based on previously reported data, this list- ing should at least give a fairly representative picture of what is known of these faunal groups on Lisianski. We have attempted to search thoroughly at least the more obvious literature sources available to us, but can make no claims as) to the compileveness of his Hist, parvieulariiy as Lefards Here yrecemuspapease Mammals and Reptiles Three species of mammals and one species of reptile are known to have occurred on Lisianski but two of these, the Huropean Rabbit and an unidentified mouse or rat, were introductions that survived but a short while. The other mammal, the Hawaiian Monk Seal, and the reptile, the Green Turtle, are narwtvers peels, elaiem MalvieMs Ulin cigec mate ciblly ae Vi Snemnuae years as a result of predation by man. Where appropriate, the species accounts for these animals rollow the format that ts outlined tor! bards below. Birds iia sult, 35) SioeCnes oi loticcls Inve; loeein wecoimclecl aicsiil IMIS LeiaSlen (Table 2), but this total includes two birds (a duck and a sandpiper) whose specific identity is unknown. Also included are one species (Osprey) whose occurrence is unconfirmed and another (Laysan Rail) which was an unsuccessful introduction. Ohi icles 1eielialios 29) SoSeres. I eice Seaiowiecs, ei ow Wliwela, ex cepting the vagrant Jouanin's Petrel, formerly bred on the island. Fifteen species stilt breed on Lisianski but the present breeding status of a 16th (Bulwer's Petrel) still requires clarification. Indeed, more than one-third of all surveys of Lisianski that obtained some useful data on populations or breeding status took place in March. Nonetheless, ig Versione Olelsjoseiene koja) felblerereleie wwlaeue iwlasacs BicS SOS, wor iwlls wos [Oe e\O= parently rather slight, differences in breeding cycles from those observed on the nearest seabird colonies, those on Laysan Island (Table 3). Of the 10 remaining species, 12 are shorebirds, but only 5 of these usually occur on Lisianski during migration. The two additional species are gulls that have relatively seldom been recorded from Lisianski as compared with its neighboring atolls. The relative paucity of accidental species recorded from Lisianski, as compared with other nearby Northwestern Hawaiian Islands, probably reflects in part the greater homogeneity of habitat found on Lisianski, but likely also reflects the relative infrequency with which observations ae have been made there. It seems likely that further observations during the spring and fall may considerably extend the list of birds known from the island. As on Laysan Island, all breeding species have a distinct annual eycle, the precise timing of which may vary somewhat from year to year. Four species, Black-footed Albatross, Laysan Albatross, Bonin Petrel and Black Noddy, have peak breeding periods from the winter through the early (northern) summer. The remainder of the breeding species breed primarily from March or April through September or October (Table 3), although several of these species (e.g., Blue-faced Booby, Brown Noddy, White Tern) may occasionally or even regularly have at least a few indi- viduals nesting in every month of the year. Most species breeding on Lisianski, however, have a period of at least one to several months when no birds are breeding and when populations are markedly reduced or entirely absent (e.g., the albatrosses, shearwaters, Bonin Petrel, Gray-backed and Sooty Terns). Our data on the occurrence and population and breeding cycles for the birds of Lisianski are much more Limited than for several of the other Northwestern Hawaiian Islands, since very few observations have been made in the period from October through February (Table 4). Table 2. The avifauna of Lisianski Island Maximum Estimate since 1960 and Taxa Current Status when recorded ORDER PROCELLARIIFORMES FAMILY DIOMEDEIDAE Diomedea nigripes Common breeder 3, 000-4, O00* Black-footed Albatross Mar. 1964 Diomedea immutabilis Common breeder 8, O0O* Laysan Albatross June 1966 FAMILY PROCELLARIIDAE Pterodroma hypoleuca Abundant breeder 1, O00, OOO Bonin Petrel Mar. 1965 Bulweria bulwerii Uncertain, formerly "a few" Bulwer's Petrel bred July 1965 +Bulweria fallax Accidental Ji Jouanin's Petrel (one record) Sept. 1967 Puffinus pacificus Abundant breeder 500, OOO Wedge-tailed Shearwater June 1967 Table 2. (continued) Taxa Puffinus nativitatis Christmas Shearwater ORDER PELECANIFORMES FAMILY PHAETHONTIDAE Phaethon rubricauda Red-tailed Tropicbird FAMILY SULIDAE Sula dactylatra Blue-faced Booby Sula leucogaster Brown Booby Sula sula Red-footed Booby FAMILY FREGATIDAE Fregata minor Great Frigatebird ORDER ANSERIFORMES FAMILY ANATIDAE Duck sp. ORDER FALCONIFORMES FAMILY PANDIONIDAE Pandion haliaetus Osprey FAMILY FALCONIDAE +Falco peregrinus Peregrine Falcon ORDER GRUIFORMES FAMILY RALLIDAE Porzanula palmeri Laysan Rail Current Status Common breeder Common breeder Common breeder Uneommon breeder Common breeder Common breeder Ext inet Hypothetical Accidental (one record) Introduced in 1913, now ext inct Maximum Estimate since 1960 and when recorded 2, 000 June 1967 4, 500 June 1967 1, 200 Oct. 1966 200 Oct. 1966 3, 000 June 1967 2, 000-3, O00 Mar. 1965 Not present Not recorded Not present Table 2. (continued) Taxa ORDER CHARADRIIFORMES FAMILY CHARADRIIDAE +Charadrius semipalmatus Semipalmated Plover +Charadrius mongolus Mongolian Plover Pluvialis dominica Golden Plover +Squatarola squatarola Black-bellied Plover FAMILY SCOLOPACIDAE Numenius tahitiensis Bristle-thighed Curlew +Limosa lapponica Bar-tailed Godwit Heteroscelus incanum Wandering Tattler Arenaria interpres Ruddy Turnstone Crocethia alba Sanderling +Hrolia melanotos or acuminata PSC Ciel Oe Sialek@io—icel eer Sandpiper FAMILY LARIDAE +tLarus argentatus Herring Gull +Larus glaucescens Glaucous-winged Gull Current Status Accidental (one record) Accidental (one record) Abundant migrant INZEAS W/iLSsig one (two records ) Common migrant Accidental (one record) Uncommon migrant Abundant migrant Uncommon migrant Accidental (sne record) Accidental (one record) Rare visitor (two records ) Maximum Estimate since 1960 and when recorded IL Sept. 1967 dL Sept. 1967 2, 000 Mar. 1965 Ze Mar. 1965 200 Feb. 1963 AL Mar. 1964 25 Mar. 1968 1, 000-2, 000 Mar. 1965 20 Feb. 1963, Mar. 1964 IL Oct. 1966 L ' Feb. 1963 dL Mar. 1965 Mar. 1968 Tatle 2. (continued) Maximum Hstimate | since 1960 and Taxa Current Status when recorded Sterna lunata Common breeder 15, 000 | Gray-backed Tern June 1967 | Sterna fuscata Abundant breeder ES O05 COO Sooty Tern June 1967 Anous stolidus Common breeder 1}, COO Brown Noddy June 1967 Anous tenuirostris Common breeder 5, 000 Black Noddy June 1966 | | | Gygis alba Uncommon breeder 500 White Tern July 1965 *“Pstimate is of the breeding population. All other estimates are of the maximum) number on tTiiyiine. bamds present. +Indicates species was unknown from Lisianski prior to POBSP investigations. Table 3. Breeding cycles of seabirds on Lisianski Island compared with breeding cycles on Laysan Island. Primary Breeding Period on Primary Breeding Period on Species Laysan Island* Lisianski Island Black-footed Albatross mid-November to Similar+ mid-July Laysan Albatross mid-November to Similar early July Bonin Petrel mid-January to Similar, possibly somewhat late June earlier. Wedge-tailed Shearwater June to November Similar Christmas Shearwater mid-April to Similar early October Red-tailed Tropicbird late April to Similar, apparently slightly early October earlier (1966) or later (1967) in some seasons. Table 2. (continued ) Primary Breeding Period on Primary Breeding Period on Species Laysan Island* Lisianski Island late March to September Blue-faced Booby Brown Booby late March to October Red-footed Booby March to September Great Frigatebird March to October Gray-backed Tern March to early August Sooty Tern early April to early September Brown Noddy March to September Black Noddy November to July White Tern April or May to August Initiation of peak breeding is consistently ca. 2-4 weeks earlier. Similar, but initiation of laying may be earlier in some years (1965), later in others (1966) . Similar, but initiation of laying may be slightly earlier in some years (1964, 1967, 1968), later in others (1965, 1966, 1969). Similar, with initiation of laying perhaps slightly later in some years (1965, 19662, 1968) . Similar, possibly cycle tends to be initiated somewhat earlier in some years (1965, possibly 1966) . Similar, but in some seasons (19655) 1966, ) possibly valiso lgG)r 1968) is apparently slightly earlier. Similar. May tend to later initiation of laying. Probably similar. Recent spring and summer observations suggest that Lisianski cycles during these periods are somewhat in advance of those on Laysan. Similar * Data from Ely and Clapp (1973). The timespan indicated is that period through which the majority of eggs and/or dependent, non-flying young are present. + That the data do not show any clear difference in breeding cycles between Laysan and Lisianski does not necessarily mean that such differences may not exist. Se PS Table 4. Months of occurrence of non-breeding birds on Lisianski Island” Species Heb Mer ApGe Mey POUMe yee AWel eS Our Oeler. Bulwer's Petrel*” XK x me Jouanin's Petrel x Duck spe K Osprey+ xX Peregrine Falcon Laysan Rail++ xX Semipalmated Plover xX Mongolian Plover X Golden Plover X xX Black-bellied Plover igi sice—ieilaveiaeil Cluciley) 1 Bar-tailed Godwit Wandering Tattler Ruddy Turnstone Sanderling Pectoral or Sharp- tailed Sandpiper xX Herring Gull Xx Glaucous-winged Gull X x PS Ps PS PS PS PS PS PS mx PS PS ms PS PS “This table only includes months during which observations were actually made on Lisianski. Data for the months of February, April, and October are) based on buv a sinpile survey. Dt seems) seasonabpile to assume that the more abundant migrants such as turnstones, tattlers, curllewsand Golden Pile vernsmarespEeschia mos emacs MoOt mate mole met months as well. **May breed, but present breeding unconfirmed. PoaNo longer present. Undoubtedly occurred throughout the year if it was an endemic species or subspecies. *Occurrence hypothetical. ++An introduction that, while present, undoubtedly occurred throughout the year. Species Accounts In the following species accounts, the common names of seabirds follow King (1967). Names of species not included in that manual follow standard references such as the A.O.U. Checklist (1957). Taxonomic order follows that of Peter's (1931, 1934, 1937) Checklist of Birds of the World, volumes I, II, and III, with the exception of the Procellariiformes, which follow Alexander et al. (1965), the Charadriidae and Scolopacidae which follow Jehl (1968), and the Sulidae, which follow the A.0.U. Checklist (1957). The taxonomic order utilized for mammalian species follows Tomich (1969). mal A standard format is used for each species as indicated below: Status: Intended to provide a very brief summary of the occurrence and activity of each species while on Lisianski. Included are: A. Relative abundance: For breeding seabirds the following scale is used: (aa) abundant--peak populations in excess of 50,000 individuals; (2) common--peak populations of about 1,000-50,000 individuals (3) un- common--peak populations of 500 individuals or less. These limits were chosen because estimated populations of all species for the most part fall readily within one of these categories. A different scale is used for transient shorebirds and vagrants because of the much smaller numbers involved: (a) abundant--peak populations in excess of 1,000 individuals; (2) common--peak populations of 100-1,000 individuals; (3) uncommon-- regular in occurrence but peak populations less than 100 individuals; (4) rare--has occurred on Lisianski two times or more but numbers of individuals always very small; (5) accidental--has been recorded but once from Lisianski. B. Status; Two categories are used for the species regularly oc- curring on Lisianski; (1) brecden-—ay species yKrecdi nor one neml stands varying numbers of non-breeding birds (of local origin, from other island, or both) may be present during the non-nesting season; (2) migrant =--a species that visits the island primarily during non-reproductive periods; may visit the island only briefly while in transit elsewhere or may remain for a substantial period, usually during the winter months. C. Maximum recent estimate: These are maximum estimates obtained during the 1960's. All extreme estimates have been evaluated and those that we believe are probably erroneous are enclosed in brackets in the appropriate table of observations or wherever mentioned in the text. These estimates and those in the observation tables are of the maximum number of flying birds present during any one survey unless otherwise indicated. Such an estimate includes both breeding and non-breeding adults as well as recently fledged young and flying immature and subadult birds. It does not include the number of unfledged, dependent young present on the island. D. Period present: The inclusive period of usual presence on iitstanskiiiismindteaved. (~Perloa of absence, tf Known, isialso noted: E. Nesting period: Indicates that span of time when the majority of birds has eggs or dependent young. F. Nesting area: A summary statement that includes both the usual nesting habitat and the areas most utilized on the island. Populations; All available data (published and unpublished) on population size and breeding status of regularly occurring representatives of the avifauna are summarized in a chronological table. Where available, actuel counts or numerical population estimates are presented; when un- available, more qualitative data are given. Absence of data‘in these tables is indicated by a question mark. If a given survey failed to mention the occurrence of a species, this survey is omitted from the chronological listing. Where sufficient data exist, the variation in population estimates is discussed. Many of the estimates are quite subjeeulve and) thus may ern Losa ereateryor Vessenidesree. SyuninSeeis spore) oll kyanmarausl ciple ava rtaaiies for species with very large populations and for species that are pri- marily nocturnal. In general, estimates are believed to be more trust- worthy for surveys that handled large numbers or a large proportion of birds present or for surveys during which adequate counts or sample counts were made. Estimates of breeding populations are clearly distinguished from total population estimates in both tables and text. Such estimates usually represent twice the number of nests with contents and/or the number of dependent, non-fledged young. Thus breeding populations, in a less re- stricted sense, may actually be larger than indicated, even if estimates are relatively highly accurate. Breeding population estimates would likely be low both at the beginning of the nesting season when the number of courting and paired pre-laying birds may be omitted from the estimate and at the end of the nesting season when the number of birds with fledged, yet dependent, young may be omitted. Annual Cycle: A generalized annual cycle based chiefly on observa- tional data is presented. Where actual observations are lacking, interpolations based on incubation and fledgling periods are often Ut itazed. Vandal Jon tngijhe mestinesicyelle Wer di scussecdm asm arcemsuch Opes as brced ino peaksuander nce proddeolueines Olanb nem ecyieler Heology: This includes such data as habitat preference. A. Breeding: Both historical and recent data are presented and where possible, the two are compared. Details concerning preferred nesting areas and nest sites are included. B. ) Nonsbrecdina: \Urailiizatlonvotmehe) tslandi by mon birced ine aiei cals is discussed on the basis of available data. Specimens: To our knowledge, the great majority of museum skins of the birds of Lisianski is housed in the National Museum of Natural History (USNM). We have included brief statements or tabulations indicating where all specimens of whose existence we are aware are currently located. Lo- cation of additional specimens (alcoholics and skeletons) is also briefly noted. Hopefully, this information may be useful to those who may be interested in studying those facets of bird biology that can be determined from such material. It should also indicate areas in which future collect- ing might prove most profitable. Banding and Movements: From 1963 through 1968, 65,163 birds of 19 species were banded on Lisianski. Of this total, 98.5% were banded by the POBSP (Table 5). In each species account the number banded on each visit 59 during this period is briefly stated or tabulated by age class and sex when known. Interisland movements recorded from POBSP-banded birds and involving Lisianski Island are briefly summarized in each account with details of the banding and recapture listed in Appendix Tables. A sum- mary of the overall number of interisland recaptures or recoveries is given in Table 6. Birds BLACK-FOOTED ALBATROSS Diomedea nigripes Status Common breeder; maximum recent estimate of breeding population 3,000-4,000. Present from about late October through late July with breeding occurring almost throughout this period; absent remainder of year. Nests on ground, principally in open areas around the perimeter of Lhe 2asilend. Populations Recent estimates (Table 7), although variable, suggest March to June breeding populations on the order of 2,000 to 4,000 birds. This figure is somewhat lower than the 5,400 derived by Rice and Kenyon from aerial surveys in 1957. In view of the differences in methods of estimation and in the periods during which various recent estimates were made, the fig- ives are probably net Significantly different. The three early estimates (1913, 1915, 1923) are not consistent, nor probably comparable inter se. Wetmore's May (1923) estimate, certainly the most accurate of the three, compares quite favorably with recent June (1966, 1967) estimates. Annual Cyete ObServat tons one beecding Status au dilierent times) of year are mar less detailed and extensive than for nearby Laysan Island (Ely and Clapp, oie Seyi but what data are available indicate no differences in the breeding cycle. Birds presumably return to the island in late October or early November and eggs are probably present from the latter half of November through January. The earliest date on which young have been recorded is 9 March (1961), but the size of the young seen then and on other March visits makes it clear that young are probably present for at least one or two months previous to March. Young evidently fledge from June through July and perhaps early August. Keology Breeding: Almost all observers who have noted the nesting area of this Species have indicated that it nested primarily along the perimeter of the island. Munter (1915: 135) is the only exception. He reported that Black- footed Albatross "were found scattered all over the island, but were more thickly settled along the shores." *pepueq-sTqnop erem 7eU1 SPITq TereAes sapntTout Te4CJ, - *% Z6T “NO €9T “59 092 2G B65OC BOS WO Cine STe104, G6 O2T 08 ONL O€ UIeT, syTUM OnE One HE 96T OWE Appon YoeTa L0S *T L0S *T LOS *T Appon uMosrg 1,60 ‘0S 1,60 £0S Lee °S) 000‘0€ 000% 006 ‘9 uray, £100g HLe HLe HLE utey, peyoeq-Kkery QLT Gen tale 902 dd) QZ eauoysurny, Appny € Uh, Z + I I2TIIeL Sutzepuem 4S 61T 92 28 ! C MeTINO peystyi-eTIST I qT Ch, 9 GG Pall IOACTA wepTey Tat Zon TST 2ST T9 QS patqe esti yeery £98 S98 2th 6h Z Z OT kqocg peyocy-pey T9 19 9€ CT 6 9 C kqoog umcaig Wi. Wi Tr QT Le GOT [92 6QT Qe2 kqoog paoey-antTg 92t QZe Hh! QT 69 i patqotdoay, peTTei-pew oT OT 6 }, TOVeMIesys semystzyo 614 *T moun pal 6LL 66T 00S i Tayenresys peTTei-sspom OoL*€ OO/RE 002 000 *E 00S Tery4ed uTuog S16 “2 Gt2*e 00S TE €Qe 2 TOE sscrqeqtTy uesfkeyT 20S ZOl, 00S Z 002 ssorjeqTy pe ycoy-yoeTd dSd0d Aq STe4O7, 996T L96T 9945T SQ6T 196T £96T pepueg sTeicL MHSG pue dSq0d 9uq Aq TySsueTSTT uO papueq spatq jo ‘teak Aq ‘sTejoq, Sutpueg °*S eTqel 61 +27 I) 2 Th G i), +, Z GE T sTe4c] uedep S G eysely 28S 1V pueTsI xtTusocud ul T Z T pueTsI eyem on I OT 92 I t TT°e1y ucisuyor OIL I S fe) € L TIOIW Sany tL 1 9 tt TIO Aemptw Tl 3 3 a + Z joey sourzeH pue Tr1e9q €S Tt 02 qT el pueTsT uesfey Ze Z I Z € OT Q sTeous e.eStaig youerg q jes) tg ! Hd Earep) ww to ww > to “WOLF THSUCTSTT Of (e) bh BR oO iS {S Exits oO 5 OF bP er o [e) oO Ij} fou hb: © O o) Os Oo a fe = ct 53 da © o I = oO O 9 0 = x 5 ca NM mo ct Si) 5 < | oh A ai ct Oo av) RoI —> = = | oO ) ©) ies) a) OM Ge fo) fe) ) 5 o ct O Q a O (e) Qu Qu K (@) PP @) oO @) n O WH Qu Qs 1) Ky Qu lor Q ct ce eS a ca @ ,OUBTSI TysueTsTT SUTATOAUT SPITq pepueq JO SjuSMeACM PUBTSTJEeIUT “9 9SeTqQeL % 6: -— = a a — = = « “SjUSMSAOM UT PeATOAUT Spueq JO JequNU Te}O} SY} ST SeseyjUeTed uT requnN+ *SpueTST OM} UeY S1CM UO pamydeosr ortoM Spitq JO Jequnu e sdUTS SuTAOCW SpATq FO TOquNU TejIO} UeY} TAazeeTF aq Kem syuewsAOM JO szequnU TeIOTy (Ge) Cem) (ry) Gy) (Ze) (92) 99 (= (Ceres (9) (T) Ge atone Gl H > bd 707 TYSuUeTSTT Wooly Fy ) ra O fe) RA Oo © OF a oO O Eo a 09 = 99 O bE @ o a OQ © © O 5 o < oo ES say) Q co Qs oa ior “Il for (q)) © 0g be o n o OQ Qu = tan I O (y) ar S| FH Cz R oO IS) t+ © jr Py +) ou oO Fh =e 1S} mf) tH — A Ky @) (©) o oO ct rd O © Tray (6) Fh Oo @) td (oy (ar Q + (a) n n oO ct K Q K = P @ @) @O Gu n NM O 9 O oY 5 O R Qu fof RE q ct io B kt 2 at’ Kure Atoll, I at Laysan Island;/ 1 in Japan, and 1 at sea (Appendix Table 5). No Laysan Albatross banded on other Northwestern Hawaiian Islands have yet been found at Lisianski. Table 9. Observations of Laysan Albatross on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References UB2Siin ee Aer. ei Occurrence noted by Isenbeck (Rothschild, 1893-1900: iii). 1891 29 June- thousands (Palmer in Rothschild, 1893-1900: xi); 4 July large young (Munro, 1942: 8). 1913) O22) Mar: 200* (Willett, ms.). Apparently less numerous than Black-footed Albatross (Bailey, 1952a: 19 )) TODS ee Wien), 10, 000 Well-grown young in pin-feathers fairly numerous (Munter, 1915; 135). 1923 15-20 May 1, 600 Young molting in juvenal breast plumage (Wetmore, ms.). 1951 13 May 2 Half-grown young (POFI). 1954 26 Mar. 4, OOO* Ca. 2,000 young seen (Richardson, pers. comm. ). 1955 8 May 2 Young; relatively few adults present (POFI). OS me ei. ca. 60, 000* Estimate of 29,141 nests from aerial sur- vey (Rice and Kenyon, 1962: 374). 28 Dec. 1961 9 Mar. 2 (Woodside and Kramer, us. ). 1963 14 Feb. thousands Nesting (POBSP). 68 Table 9. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1964 11-12 Mar. a 00- Ca. 2,600 young (BSFW, POBSP). \ 10, 000 | (5,200)* | 2i=23 Aug. ? Ca. 30 large young seen (POBSP). | | 18 Sept. 0 (BSFW, POBSP). | 1965 12-1) Mar. 5, 000- 2,200 young banded; ca. 2,500-3, 000 6, O0OO* present (POBSP). 14-17 July 2 Ca. 2,000 young present (POBSP). } 1966 16-19 June 2 2,705 young counted and an estimated 4,000 present; most young with down still covering head, nape, and abdomen. | A few had lost down from head and neck (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. 0 (POBSP). | 1967 20 Mar. 4, 000- Ca. 2, 000-3, 000 young (BSFW, POBSP). | 6, 000* 2-6 June 8, 000* 2,858 young counted and an estimated . 4,000 present. Very few adults seen | (POBSP). 31 Aug.- 2 Two starving young still present (POBSP). 5 Sept. 1968 20-21 Mar. 4, OOO* Only downy young present (BSFW, POBSP). *Estimate is of the breeding population. 69 Table 10. Specimens of Laysan Albatross from Lisianski Island 228 Mus. oo Mus. Nos. 92 Mus. Nos. ye. Mus. Nos. When Coll. Coll. AMNH 2 526869- 3 July 1891 Palmer 870 USNM 2 191497- 2 UASeeuicease 498 Dept. USNM 2 300850- 1 300849 17,19 May Wetmore 851 1923 USNM a) OG Or; 17 July 1965 POBSP Table 11. lLaysan Albatross banded on Lisianski Island Period of Survey Bander Adults Young Totals 1964 March BSFW ©) 300 300 August POBSP O dt IL 1965 March POBSP 0 By OO 2, 200 July POBSP O 183 183 1966 June POBSP 0 Syl Bal 1967 June POBSP ) 500 500 Totals O Shp zclb) Bq dls BONIN PETREL Pterodroma hypoleuca Status Abundant breeder; maximum recent estimate 1,000,000. At least a few birds present in all months but most numerous from late August through March or perhaps April. Breeding cycle poorly known but breeds from February, or perhaps January, through June or July. Nests in burrows. Populations Although undoubtedly inaccurate to some degree, estimates (Table 12) indicate that this species is extremely abundant.©9 The largest estimate 2OBonin Petrels are more abundant on Lisianski than on any other of the Hawaiian Islands. We believe it likely that this island supports a population as large as, or larger than, the combined populations for all other Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. (0 (March 1965) may seem extremely large, but it was based on more careful calculations than were made on most surveys. On two nights in March, intensive banding operations were conducted in one small area and, since this species occurs rather uniformly over the entire surface of the island, the resulting density figure was applied to the total acreage of the island. This estimate is crude but it probably represents peak popula- tion levels far better than many other estimates. We have no doubt that, at a minimum, the island supports 500,000 to 700,000 birds. Diurnal estimates in March 1954 and September 1964, periods when these birds would be expected to be abundant, are very low. This does not mean that the birds were not abundant during these months but points up the remarkable difference between the numbers and conspicuousness of diurnal and nocturnal populations. Unlike the other procellariiforms occurring on the island, this species departs the island en masse early in the morning and returns in large numbers only at dusk. Thus, diurnal surveys may fail to indicate accurately the numbers present. The low numbers reported for May 1923 strongly suggest that the population was considerably smaller then than in 1891 and at present. Wetmore (ms.) suggested that the reduction in numbers was caused by the InNSehe ElosieiaOS Out WAsledsieene toa iwlaeye lee wells classe josicicells MeSclecl wia oiccleie to construct their burrows. Even recently many burrows were found caved in by the weight of the sand. dm some instances, starving, bul (Staikh aaivane. birds were found half-buried in loose sand. Such caved-in burrows were typically found in areas of open sand near the island perimeter or in areas of the interior where vegetation was scanty. Presumably the root systems of the vegetation, particularly Hragrostis, reintoree the subsiumiace soul and make the burrows less vulnerable to destruction. Annual Cycle Little attention was paid to the breeding status of this species on many recent visits. Consequently, only the broad outlines of the mesting eycle are known. The cycle is very similar to that found on Laysan< Most on Ene popuU= lation leaves the island when the young fledge (about June) and are absent for about two months. They begin to return to the island about mid-August and are apparently abundant within only a few weeks. (Note the remarkable difference between the size of the estimates for 21 to 23 August 1964 and cap 3 Augie OGiep) él1in July 1965 apparently new arrivals were present on Lisianski the 14th to 17th, but none was on Laysan the 17th to 2lst. In June 1966 Crossin (POBSP) stated that this species was further along in its breeding cycle on Lisianski than on Laysan. Both sets of observations suggest that the Lisianski cycle is somewhat in advance of that on Laysan. Considerably more detailed work with sample nest counts is needed to determine whether the cycle is essentially the same on all the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands or whether there are regularly occurring, discrete differences between populations on different islands. a ie Large numbers are present for the next four or five months while birds court and dig burrows. Although observations are few from this time of year, those available, and those from nearby islands where the cycle is presumably similar, indicate that no eggs are laid until mid- winter. Egg laying begins at least by early or mid-February (1963, 1965) and eggs are present through at least late March. A few are possibly present in April, but the two sets of June observations (1966, 1967) suggest that most eggs have hatched by April since it is likely that this species takes at least two months to fledge. Most young probably hatch in late March and early April, and most young are fledged by late June with a few possibly present into July. Ecology Breeding: Recent Observers found burrows throughout the vegetated portion of the island. Burrow density was greatest under Eragrostis and lowest under the Scaevola on the perimeter of the island. Rarely, birds nest on the surface of the ground under dense vegetation (Figs. 37-38). Non-breeding: Most birds are apparently absent from the island after nesting. : Mortality: On some surveys many dead Bonin Petrels were encountered. Aside from mortality caused by natural collapse of burrows as mentioned above, a considerable amount of burrow destruction probably was caused by parties visiting the island. The interior is honeycombed with burrows and it is almost impossible to traverse the island without stumbling into four or five of them. Probably no less than 1,500 burrows were so destroyed from February 1963 through March 1968. This does not mean that 1,500 nests were destroyed; many burrows are inactive and several recent visits were made at times of year when burrow destruction probably had little effect on nesting success. Since burrows are sO numerous and since sO many are unoccupied, we estimate that less than .2 percent of the nesting population was adversely affected by recent visitors. On several occasions dead or starving birds were found entangled, usually by the wing, in vegetation, mostly Ipomoea. One was found so entangled in August 1964, several in July 1965, and one observer estimated that 1,000 birds were so found in March 1965. Specimens Table 13 lists the present location of thirteen specimens known to have been collected on Lisianski. Banding and Movements The POBSP banded 3,700 adult Bonin Petrels on Lisianski: 300 in: March 1964, 200 in August 1964, 3,000 in March 1965, and 200 in September 1967. Three of these birds, all banded as adults in March 1965, were recaptured on Kure Atoll during the period from February through April 1969 (Appendix Table 6). None was recaptured on any other island, and none banded on Other islands was recaptured on Lisianski. «Se, Le DRS Sif Figure 38. Bonin Petrel resting on sand near burrow under Ipomoea, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. Bonin Petrel nest and eggs on surface of ground under dense Scaevola, 14 February 1963. POBSP photograph. (3 Table 12. Observations of Bonin Petrels on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1891 29 June- ? Young birds, some alive and some dead 4 July (Munro, 1944: 28). 1913 12 Mar. 40, 000 (Willett, ms.). 1923 15-20 May 50 No eggs or young found, specimens col- lected were sexually inactive (Wetmore, Ss )\- 1954 26 Mar. 500 Overhead (Richardson, pers. comm.). 1961 9 Mar. 0 Thought to be present (Woodside and Kramer, ms. ). 1963 14 Feb. abundant Egg-laying begun (Kramer, ms., POBSP). 1964 11-12 Mar. 100, 000 Numerous nests (BSFW, POBSP). a2l=23 Aug. 15, 000 Much calling but no other courtship behavior observed (POBSP). 18 Sept. 30 Seen flying in to island at dusk, no evidence of breeding; no nocturnal obser- vations made (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar. 1,000, 000 Nests with eggs and small young, 1 egg opened contained a near-hatching young; more eggs than young found (POBSP). 14-17 July 200 No evidence of nesting (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June 500 Ca. 500 young, some still being fed by parents, remaining on island; all had attained juvenal plumage and were near fledging (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. 500,000 Mostly engaged in courtship behavior; no burrow examined held either eggs or young (POBSP) . 1967 20 Mar. hundreds None found in burrows during day; no eggs offshore or young (BSFW, POBSP).* 2-6 June 100 No more than ca. 250 prefledging chicks still present; very few adults (POBSP). Th Table 12. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1967 31 Aug.- 500, 000 Burrows being excavated; no eggs or young 5 Sept. (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 800,000 Many burrows being excavated, none of very few burrows examined contained eggs or young (BSFW, POBSP). *Little effort made to discover nests. Table 13. Specimens of Bonin Petrels from Lisianski Island* 22& Mus. oo Mus. Nos. 92 Mus. Nos. Mus, Nes, Date Coll, Coll, AMNH I SAORzE) 3 July 1891 Palmer USIM 2 300663, 2 300662, 17 May 1923 Wetmore 665 664 USNM 1 494125 1 494126 13 March 1965 POBSP USIM 1 496585 1 496586 18,19 June POBSP 1966 USNM 1 545021 lL SREOLO: lL €evrtemper FOBSE L967 ¥Not included are e skull (USNM 789187) collected by Wetmore 16 May 1923. and e@ skeleton (UENM 497951) collected by the FOBSF 11 February 1963. BULWER'S PETREL Bulweria bulwerii Status Uncertain; maximum recent estimate "a few;" may no longer breed on blsm@amnsieis, Observations Bulwer's Petrels have been recorded from Lisianski four times. Munro (1941c: 2), the first to record the species, found birds incubating under grass in late June 1891. He also noted that large numbers flew in to the island at dusk. Wetmore (ms.) observed that they were fairly common at dusk 16 to 19 May 1923. Although his notes do not state whether they were breeding, the numbers seen and collected suggest that this may have been the case. © More recently, POBSP personnel saw a few flying over the island 14 to 17 July 1965 but found none on the ground and discovered no nests. On 4 September 1967 Ely collected one as it sat alone on the narrow, sandy northeast beach. The area nearby, which contained a large log and a few rocks overgrown with Scaevola, was carefully searched for a nest burrow but none was found. The specimen (USNM 544002) is an adult female with a small ovary. The absence of other observations during many recent visits suggests that the breeding population, if extant, probably consists of no more than a very few pairs. Specimens We know of six study skins from Lisianski, the one mentioned above, and five adult females (USNM 300501-505) collected by Wetmore 17 May 1923. In addition, there is a skeleton (USNM 289201) of an adult female col- lected by Wetmore the same date. Banding and Movements None has been banded on Lisianski. JOUANIN'S PETREL Bulweria fallax Status Accidental; one record September 1967. Observations On 4 September 1967 Clapp collected a small dark petrel as it sat near some Bonin Petrels in an open, sandy area on the northwestern corner of the island (Clapp, 1971). The specimen (USNM 543185), identified as Jouanin's Petrel by G.E. Watson, W.R.P. Bourne and C. Jouanin, was a male that was molting the body feathers, had little fat, and had undeveloped testes. Jouanin's Petrel, whose breeding area has not yet been found, occurs principally in the northwestern Indian Ocean (Bailey, MQEHS 29). Maile specimen thus constitutes not only the first record for the Hawaiian Islands, but also for the entire Pacific area. WEDGE-TAILED SHEARWATER Puffinus pacificus Status Abundant breeder; maximum recent estimate [ 500, COO), iresigiae apr) about March through at least October; probably absent from late November through February. Nests primarily in burrows but occasionally on the Surface of the ground. oe | {O Populations | POBSP estimates (Table 14) varied considerably from survey to survey, even at the same time of year. This is almost surely because of the small | proportion of any survey period spent studying the smaller Procellariiformes. | Relatively few observations were made of these species and little effort was expended in banding them since other commitments were thought to be of greater importance. These birds' nocturnal habits and often inconspicuous nesting sites have undoubtedly contributed to miscalculations of numbers present. Consequently, population estimates for Wedge-tailed Shearwaters, and for other petrels and shearwaters occurring on Lisianski, are less accurate than for any other seabirds occurring on the island. We do feel that, since most estimates made independently by different field parties agree rather well, maximum populations are tens of thousands rather than hundreds of thousands. There were only three estimates of numbers prior to the 1960's. Both Richardson's (1957) and Wetmore's (1923) estimates agree with the majority of POBSP estimates. Munter's 1915 estimate, on the other hand, is 100 times larger than any other estimate made during March. Annual Cycle The annual cycle of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters on Lisianski appears to } be very similar to, ai noe the same) as, whan pound mont haycan a Most.—ltanel: all, of these shearwaters are probably absent during late fall and winter. They return to Lisianski in March and from then through May court and dig burrows. Egg-laying begins in June and probably reaches its peak late in the month. Young begin to hatch in late July or early August. Varying sizes of young have been seen on all visits during succeeding months. MIf, as seems likely, the cycle is as extended as on Kure Atoll (Woodward, 1972: 125), young will be on the island until early December. Ecology Breeding: Almost all visitors to Lisianski (Munter, Wetmore, many POBSP survey parties) noted that Wedge-tailed Shearwaters nested everywhere. Subterranean burrows were found beneath all sorts of vegetative cover, e.g., under Scaevola bushes, in Boerhavia-Eragrostis, or in sand-Eragrostis associations (Figs. 39, 40). POBSP observers Shelton and Crossin noted that densities of nests and numbers of breeding birds were decidedly lower in the lowest (southwest-central) portion of the interior. Active nests are not infrequently found on the surface of the ground. Most such nests were beneath Scaevola bushes but others were found in more exposed situations such as beside a tuft of Hragrostis or beneath a Casuarina tree (Fig. 41). Non-breeding: After breeding, the Wedge-tailed Shearwaters evidently leave the island for the winter. Figure ho. Figure 39. Wedge-tailed Shearwaters near burrows in sand area at edge of Boerhavia-Eragrostis association, 19 June 1966. Young Laysan Albatross in mid-ground. POBSF photograph by P.C. Shelton. Pair of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters near mouth of burrow, September 1967. POBSP photograph by R.B. Clapp. “Ti - 4 G 1 aq Ws adag ‘3a1} eultense9 uteysamuinos jo aseq ‘ddeto -a@°y 4q ydeascycud asgog 7@ YOTYD Ta ,eniesyg palte4-aSpsamy ie Other Clubs: At night and during the morning hours, up to several hundred shearwaters roost in different parts of the island. In August 1964 two large clubs were observed on bare sand near the beach, one club at each end of the island. In September 1967 a club containing 75 to 100 birds was found in an open sand-Eragrostis-Boerhavia association above the north- east beach crest. The breeding status of birds found in such clubs is yet to be determined. Color phases: The only reference we have found that gives proportions of different color morphs in the Lisianski population is Wetmore's (ms.) observation that "gray-breasted birds" comprised about 3 to 5 percent of the population. POBSP banding data indicate that at present the propor- tion of dark-phase morphs in the population is considerably less than indicated by Wetmore. Only 1 of 88 (1.1 percent) banded birds of known color phase was a dark-phase morph. It should be noted here that all POBSP and other USNM specimens from Lisianski assessed as "dark-phase morphs" are the color phase described by Murphy (1951: 9-10) as "intermediate." None of the "dark-phase morphs" from the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands in the USNM collection is as dark as those from south-central Pacific Islands (e.g., the Phoenix Islands). Thus, the above banding data expresses the proportion of "dark-appearing" shearwaters (including both "dark" and "intermediate" phases) in the population. Specimens There are, in addition to the 12 study skins listed in Table 15, a skull (USNM 289186) and an alcoholic (USNM 289348) collected by Wetmore on 19 May 1923. Banding and Movements POBSP personnel banded 1,479 adult Wedge-tailed Shearwaters on Lisianski: 1 in March 1963, 500 in August 1964; 100 in June 1966; 99 in October 1966; 693 in June 1967; and 86 in August-September 1967. Fourteen of these birds were subsequently returned, 13 of them on Lisianski (1 in June 1966, 12 in June 1967). The l4th bird, banded on Lisianski in late August 1964, was recaptured and released on Laysan in early August 1965 (see Appendix Table 7). 2om5tal includes several birds that were double-banded. an) V/ Table 14. Observations of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1828 1891 1915 1923 1954 1961 1964 1965 1966 1967 3 iAeie 29 June- 4 July 2h Mar. 15-20 May 26 Mer. 9 Mar. Juba Ie2, Wiese. 21-23 Aug. 18 Sept. 12-14 Mar. 1-17 July 16-19 June 18-20 Oct. cO Mer. 2-6 June 31 Aug. - 5 Sept. 4 One of Isenbeck's descriptions (see below) may have referred to this species (Roth- schild, 1893-1900: v).* @ Most birds on eggs in late June (Munro, nes 13) 15, 000 No eggs (Munter, 1915: 136). 25, O0OO** Copulation and courting but no nests with eggs found (Wetmore, ms.). 10-15 (Richardson, pers. comm.). ? Evidently nesting (Woodside and Kramer, ims) 25 Courting pairs (BSFW, POBSP). 50, 000 Nesting (POBSP). 60, 000 Many downy young (BSFW, POBSP). 100-200 No burrows with eggs or young (POBSP). 45, 000 All nests examined contained eggs in vary- ing stages of incubation (POBSP). HO, OOO Breeding cycle just beginning; digging, and fresh eggs found; ca. 1,000 nests with eggs (POBSP). [ 250, 000] Young birds molting in juvenal plumage; no eggs or young at other stages of develop- ment (POBSP). @) (BSFW, POBSP). [ 500, 000] No data on stage of nesting obtained (POBSP). 40, OOO Medium-sized to large downy young (POBSP). SIL Table 14. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1968 20-21 Mar. 0) A few may have been present (BSFW, POBSP). *Rothschild's record, based on Isenbeck's description, may be erroneous. Rothschild's translation of the description reads "Another Petrel, a thle wanser jrhanvabout 9 inehes]; breast, abdomen, and meck white; upper surface mixed white and brown; the forked tail only moderately emarginate." While most of these characters fit the Wedge-tailed Shearwater, the moderately emarginate tail most certainly does not. ** Noted as most abundant species on island. Table 15. Specimens of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters from Lisianski Island 22& Mus.) oe oMus. Nos. . 99 Mus. Nos: Mus. Nos. When Coll. Coll. USNM 3 300730, BN AOOTAT= i 300731 IGp G75 US) Wetmore 732, 734 TESS May 1923 (Bo USNM 1 492959 12 March 1963 POBSP USINM Z 495 631- 16 July 1965 POBSP 632 CHRISTMAS SHEARWATER Puffinus nativitatis Status Common breeder; maximum recent estimate 2,000. Present from at least February through October, but most breeding occurs from April or May through October. Nests primarily on the surface of the ground in shallow depressions under dense vegetation. Populations Various numerical estimates (Table 16) consistently suggest only a few Christmas Shearwaters are found on Lisianski, probably no more than several thousand when largest numbers are present. Of the two early estimates, Wetmore's (ms.) agrees well with the series of recent estimates made by POBSP, but Munter's (1915) is about 20 times as large as the largest estimate made recently at the same time of year. With the notable exception of the Wedge-tailed Shearwater, most of Munter's estimates for species on this island agree with most recent estimates, both in numbers and in relative abundance of species. Therefore, we cannot dismiss the possibility that this species was once much more common on Lisianski than at present. Annual Cycle The Christmas Shearwater annual cycle on Lisianski appears to be quite similar to that of the Wedge-vatlied™ Shearwaver execepun tore pomma about a month earlier. Detailed data on nesting status from various visits is scant, and the island has not been visited during several months from which data are needed to round out the schedule of the annual cycle: Nonetheless, the general schedule of events is about as follows: Birds arrive at the island in) Pebruary, o~ perhaps) carlier) |buL verses are not aid for one or two monehs-S whe tecamimcsim™= thaumeres smevempeem found is mid-May (1923), but observations on nearby islands such as Laysan Suggest that at least a few eggs may be laid a month earlier. EHggs have | been present through at least mid-June (1966). | The earliest that young have been recorded is late August (1964) but the size of the young indicates that it was probably hatched at Teast two | months earlier. | Young are present until at least mid-October and a few are possibly present into November. Beology Breeding: These shearwaters breed primarily under Scaevola bushes around the perimeter of the island. They are found to a much lesser ex- tent under other vegetation in’ the interior. On almost Mall on al yustes (particularly those from June through October), POBSP observers noted that Christmas Shearwaters were more abundant at the north and south ends of the island than on the eastern and western perimeters. The few nests found have for the most part been above ground (Fig. 42). These nests have typically been shallow, partially leaf-filled depressions under densely leaved Scaevola bushes. In March 1965 several nests were found beneath pieces of corrugated tin in an Hragrostis- Ipomoea-Boerhavia association in the interior of the island. Wetmore (ms. ) found an egg under a board "merely broad and deep enough to conceal the bated. Non-breeding;: Judging from their behavior on other Northwestern Hawaiian Islands, Christmas Shearwaters are probably absent from Lisianski during most of the winter months. Specimens a We know of five study skins from Lisianski: a male and a female (USNM 300697-698) collected by Wetmore 17 May 1923, and two males and a “ddeto -a*ey Aq ydesscqacyud qsqod “1961 teqmaydag ‘yoeeq 4Seeyztcu ayj4 suc,Te e[CAeeog Tapun ays 4SaU UT YoTYD Taj,emteayg sewasyTasyg "oy eansty Q} 34 female (USNM 492967, 494123, 494122), collected by the POBSP 12 and 13 March 1965. Banding and Movements Only 16 Christmas Shearwaters, all of them adults, have been banded on Lisianski by the POBSP: 7 in March 1963 and 9 in August and September None have yet been recaptured. 1967. Table 16. Observations of Christmas Shearwaters on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1891 29 June- less numerous (Munro, 1941d: 16). 4 July on Lisianski than Laysan 1913 12 Mar. 2 1 pair seen (Willett, ms. ). isis 2k iene. 10, 000 No eggs found (Munter, 1915: 136). 1923 15-20 May 600 Eggs, some fresh, but no young (Wetmore, ms. ). 1950 24 June 2 Nesting (POFI). 1963 14 Feb. 15 No nests (POBSP). 1964 11-12 Mar. very few (BSFW). 21-23 Aug. 2 1 almost fledged (POBSP). 18 Sept. 6 No evidence of breeding (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar. 300-500 Burrows contained pairs by day but no nests with eggs or young found (POBSP). 14-17 July 400 No burrows found (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June 1, 000 Birds courting and incubating eggs; 50 nests with eggs present (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. 50 Adults not seen; estimate based 9n number of near-fledging young (POBSP). 1967 20 Mar. 25 No nests with eggs (BSFW, POBSP). 2-6 June 2, 000 Only nests with eggs; an estimated 500 nests (POBSP). 35 Table 16. (continued) Population IDer vey ih SWebeieny Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1967 31 Aug.- 250 3 large, near-fledging young; small number 5 Sept. of adults scattered about the island (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 100 No evidence of breeding activity (BSFW, POBSP). RED-TATLED TROPICBIRD Phaethon rubricauda Status Common breeder; maximum recent estimate 4,500. A few birds probably present in all months but maximal numbers present from about May or June through August; probably few present from late September through February. Breeds from March through at least November but most nesting occurs from April through September or early October. Nests either solitarily or semi-colonially on the ground under dense vegetation. Populations Although estimates made during periods when few birds were present are rather consistent from visit to visit, those made during the periods of peak breeding activity are highly variable (Table 17). This variability perhaps does not indicate changes in population size from year to year but merely reflects the lack of accuracy in the estimates. The June 1967 estimate of 4,500 birds seems particularly large and is probably erroneous. Other estimates from the June to August period are variable but suggest maximal populations of 500 to 1,000 birds. i Although they were undoubtedly numerous in earlier years, Wetmore's observations, made at a time of year when the present population is large, indicate that the population had been extirpated by 1923. We cannot explain why this species was not reported by Palmer and Munrs in June 1891--before rabbits had been introduced, before the Japanese were known to poach on the island, and at a period when breeding populations should have been at a peak. The absence of other early observations is not Surprising since all other early observations were made in March, when very few tropiebirds are present. Annual Cycle Population estimates and the composition of sample nest counts: suggest that more than 9O percent of the population complletes its breed- ing cycle between April and October. On only two of six recent March visits (1965, 1968) were nesting birds found. This, and the small size of population estimates in March, indicates that the birds have just begun 86 to arrive on the island at this time. Observations from both June 1966 and 1967 suggest that the egg peak occurred in May and early June. If this is true, most fledging probably occurs) abour seiiomuhis aw er. ior from August through early September. The nest count taken in August and September 1967 generally agrees with this conclusion, but indicates that a fair number of birds fledge throughout September. Small numbers fledge in October and through at least late November (if the nests begun late in the year are successful). No observations have been made on Lisianski from November through January but it seems likely that few birds are present and breeding then. Keology Breeding: Tropicbirds on Listanski breed primarily around the perimeter of the island but scattered pairs nest inland. Birds nesting on the perimeter almost invariably choose to mest under the larger and denser Scaevola bushes (Fig. 43), but when maximum numbers are breeding, the lower Scaevola may be utilized as well. In this perimeter area the tropicbirds are semi—collontall Sthree sox oun oa Wsies mmc s eel emUl Orciamct Ral ome clump of Seaevola from 15 to 20 feet in diameter. Areas of denser growth which usually held greatest numbers of nesting birds were just behind the crests of the cast and "souuhy beaches rand behimdicncy Momuieacimmc tte north beaches. Wewer nestine birds) were Hound above the wesc Decdenmwidere the Scaevola is considerably less luxuriant. Tropicbirds nésting in the interior seem vo prefer’ Dpomoca which had grown in mounds over stunted, dying, or dead Scaevola. Most of this Scaevola was less than 3 feet tall, considerably lower than much of that found about the perimeter of the island. Non-breeding: The large decrease in numbers of tropicbirds during periods of non=breeding, “or much reduced brecding, “and the absence on observations of immatures flying over the island, indicates that most, if not all, adult and youns tropiecbinds Leave the ustand ishomuiy an eemcon. pletion of the nesting cycle. Specimens To our knowledge, there are but two specimens of the Red-tailed Tropicbird: USNM 191499, lacking a collection date on the label, was confiscated from the Japanese 16 June 1904; a male (USNM 300983) was collected by Wetmore 17 May 1923. Banding and Movements Table 18 gives the number of Red-tailed Tropicbirds banded on Lisianski by the POBSP and BSFW through 1969. None has yet been recap- tured oioOrier ls landsrorm aw scare POBSP photograph by Red-tailed Tropicbird on nest under Scaevola, 6 June 1967. Robert L. DeLone. Figure 43. 5 CO Table 17. Observations of Red-tailed Tropicbirds on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1923 17 May 2 No nests found (Wetmore, ms.). 1951 13 May 2 (POF). 1954 26 Mar. Cane (Richardson, pers. comm. ). 1961 Q Mar. many No eggs or young seen (Woodside and Kramer, ms.). 1963 14 Feb. ©) (Kramer, ms.; POBSP). 12-13 Mar. a few No nests found (POBSP). 1964 11-12 Mar. 100-150 No nests found (BSFW, POBSP). 2l-c3 Aug. 300 Eggs to large young, but most nests with large young; estimated 10 nests with eggs, 140 with young (POBSP). 18 Sept. 50-100 5 large immatures (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar. 20-30 1 nest with egg found; several more birds seen on ground (POBSP). 14-17 July 1, 000 Partially incubated eggs to near-fledging young; estimated 200 nests with young. Sample count of 60 nests: 3 (5%) with eggs, 4 (7%) with small downy chicks, 25 (42%) with medium-sized to large downy chicks, and 28 (47%) with dependent im- matures (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June 600 Estimated 300 nests, half with eggs, half with young (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. a5) Ca. 10 near-fledging young, no nests with eggs or small young observed (POBSP). 1967 20 Mar. 25 No nests found; 20 birds in flight but only Avon erouna, Moy special Scareh smade (BSFW, POBSP). 2-6 June 4,500 Eggs to medium-sized downy young; most nests with eggs; an estimated 1,500 nests on is- land. Sample count of 53 nests: 50 (94%) with eggs, 1 (2%) with a small downy young, and 2 (4%) with medium-sized downy young (POBSP). 39 Table 17. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1967 31 Aug.- 800 Recently hatched young to dependent imma- 5 Sept. tures. Most nests with large downy young or dependent immatures. Sample count of 128 nests: 4 (3%) with recently hatched young, 16 (13%) with small downy young, 50 (39%) with medium-sized or large downy young, and 58 (45%) with dependent imma- tures (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 100 Only 2 nests with eggs found (BSFW, POBSP). Table 18. Red-tailed Tropicbirds banded on Lisianski Island Period of Survey Bander Adults Young Totals 1963 March POBSP iy O alt 1964 March BSFW 2 O 2 August POBSP i 56 63 1965 March POBSP 18 O 18 1967 June POBSP 79 O 79 August- September POBSP 58 106 165* Totals 165 162 328% *TIneludes 1 bird of unknown age. BLUE-FACED BOOBY Sula dactylatra Status Common breeder; maximum recent estimate 1,200. Present with some birds probably breeding in all months but most nesting occurring from late February or early March through late August or early September. Nests on ground, primarily in open sandy areas among the vegetation rimming the island's perimeter. Populations Recent estimates of Blue-faced Boobies (Table 19) on Lisianski in- dicate that maximal populations are on the order of 1,000 to 1,200 birds, 90 but the larger estimates almost invariably include several hundred non- breeding birds found roosting in clubs (see below). Many of these birds are probably from other breeding populations in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. The number breeding each year is considerably smaller, probably seldom exceeding 450 to 500 birds at any one time. The total number that breed on the island or attempt to breed in any one year may be one to two hundred birds larger, since a large proportion of the 955 adults banded on the island are known to have bred in one year or another. The present population is clearly two ts three times larger than in 1923 when Wetmore visited Lisianski, but earlier numerical records sre too vague for us to speculate on whether numbers were formerly greater. Annual Cycle Blue-faced Boobies on Lisianski have an extended breeding season that in some years may encompass all months. The population breeds on an annual eyelle whieh ani secenit yecausinas,) Viacteds ei ahyiclkvameimeedacs Egg laying may begin as early as November (1962), December (1967), or December to January (1964-65; 1966-68), but recent sample nest counts indicate that less than 1 percent of the number breeding yearly initiate nesting in November or December. “Hunthermore cela tiyve ly new bisrdism pear laying in January but in some years they comprise a significant proportion of the March nesting population. Of the nesting birds present in March 1964, 1965, 1967, and 1968, perhaps as many as 25 percent, 20 percent, 10 perecni and Ib percent, srespeeu Myeihy. saci De Sula Mes EH ie meer melchalUcranyes Considerably larger numbers of birds begin nesting in February or March with the peak probably usually falling between late February and late April or even May. Many pre-breeding pairs were observed in March 1965 and 1967, indicating that laying would occur in the following months. On the latter survey, an estimated 47 percent of the nesting population had nov yer Laid. Laying icontinuesmay Weacc sent onJUne wand sa tewNes as possibly are laid as late as August. The nest count data from June through Oet ober “sugPesir, however, that little laying occurs in July and that laying probably does not usually occur in August. (The egg observed in August 1964 may well have been an abandoned, sterile egg.) Recently hatched young have been recorded as early as February but hatching has probably occurred as early as December (1962). Recently hatched young have been recorded as late as mid-July. Most hatching prob- ably falls into the period from early April through early June. Fledged or near-fledging young have twice been recorded in June (1891, 1966) and, if July nests are successful, could occur as late as November. Most young, however, probably fledge from early July through late August to mid-September. Eeology Breeding: In 1923, when there was little vegetation, the birds moved inland and nested near the remaining patch of grass. All the more recent QL observations indicate that these birds nest primarily along the perimeter jt Tie island. icon tine edge of ihe beach fear a short distance imland (Figs. 44,45). Areas which have many bare areas of sand interspersed among thicker vegetation are particularly favored and few or no birds nest in the interior of the island which is densely covered with low vegetation (primarily clumps of Eragrostis). No nests were found in the central portion of the island on POBSP surveys from 1963 through 1968, but they were found as far as 50 yards inland in areas where bare sand extended between dense Scaevola growth. Most inland nests were found along the south and southeast perimeters. The limited data on nest distribution suggest that these boobies nest uniformly around the island perimeter, except they are less abundant along the north perimeter and perhaps a little more abundant along the Perimerer of ihe Southern half of the island: There seems ito beilittle tendeney for distinct colonial concentrations except birds nest somewhat more densely in areas that afford more suitable habitat. Non-breeding: Most non-breeding birds (and some breeding birds) are found in roosting aggregations (clubs) on beaches that are not used for breeding (Fig. 46). Data on the location and sizes of such clubs were not taken consistently but those available suggest that some areas were more favored than others (Table 20). The largest clubs were most fre- quently seen on the south and southwest beaches (which are considerably larger than most others), but large clubs also were seen consistently on hes pescheseae ene snortm cnd of the island. The proportion of birds in clubs in June 1966 is probably consider- ablivelerrcrumnanets Usually found atsthat Lime ,om wean, Lhere were rar fewer nests than in June 1967 which may indicate that 1966 was a particu- larly unfavorable year for nest ing.¢3 it ehis Wis reve. it seems likely that many of the birds in clubs were ones whose nests failed earlier in the season. Specimens To our knowledge only four Blue-faced Booby specimens have been col- lected on Lisianski. Wetmore collected an immature female (USM 300942 ) and two adult males (USNM 300943-944) 17 and 18 May 1923, respectively. There is also a specimen in the Bishop Museum for which we know neither collecrom mor collect ion date. Banding and Movements The POBSP has banded 1,247 Blue-faced Boobies on Lisianski (Table 21), Twenty-one have been subsequently found on other islands or at sea. Some “Woodward (pers. comm.) states that on Kure Atoll the 1966 Blue-faced Booby breeding cycle was different from any other during the 1963 to 1968 study period. The breeding population decreased by about 25 percent and the eycle was later than in any other year. Figure 4h. Figure 45. Typical Blue-faced Booby nest with egg and recently hatched young, 12 March 1964. POBSP photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. Blue-faced Booby brooding young in nest at edge of vegeta- tion, February 1963. POBSP photograph. *ddel9 °a°u kq ydeaSoicud gsqoq °SQnzo yons ut 4yscca AT TeuctTsesoc (445TI WCIE patq uqsTs 230Uu ) satqocg umcig ~-)O6T Taquaydag ‘yutod yynos 044 uC saTtqocg peaoej-an{g suTyscor Je qnip “Ot SINS FT have been recorded from more than one other island and some have been recaptured on Lisianski after having been previously recaptured on other islands. Eight have been recaptured at Laysan, 5 each at Kure Atoll ana French Frigate Shoals, 3 at Johnston Atoll, and 1 at sea (Appendix Table 8a). In addition, 33 birds banded on other islands have been recaptured on Lisianski: 17 were banded on Laysan Island, 7 at French Frigate Shoals, 4 at Johnston Atoll, 3 at Kure Atoll, and 2 at Pearl and Hermes Reef (Appendix Table 8b). Table 19. Observations of Blue-faced Boobies on Lisianski Islana Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1828 3 Apr. 2 Probably seen by Isenbeck but his obser- vations do not clearly distinguish between this species and the Rea-footed Booby (see Rothschild, 1893-1900; v). 1891 29 June- 2 Palmer noted on 30 June that young "some 4 July ...being just able to fly" were found with the adults "all along the beach" (Roth- eyolautaliGl, TSR) aes scat, ) We N2, — ) iviene. rather (Bailey, 1956: 74; Willett, ms. ). common WOM 2h Meg, fairly large Eggs and variously sized young; 3 or 4 numbers near fledging young (Munter, 1915: 135). 1923 15-20 May ZOO Nest sites selected, large and fledged young (Wetmore, ms.). 1951 13 May 2 With half-grown young (POFI). 1954 26 Mar. 400 (Richardson, pers. comm. ). 1955 8 May u Ca. 50 on nests; a few nests with 2 eggs and some with an egg and a young bird (POFI). 1961 9 Mar. 2 (Woodside and Kramer, ms. ). 1963 14 Feb. 500 Mostly on eggs, but recently hatched young, small and large downy young, also present (POBSP; Kramer, ms.). 1964 11-12 Mar. 500-650 Ca. 200 nests; most nests with eggs. Sam- 4O0-450* ple count of 134 nests: 95 (71%) with eggs, 14 (10%) with an egg and a young bird; 25 (19%) with young (BSFW, POBSP). 2 Table 19. (continued) Population Date of Survey Est imate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1964 21-23 Aug. 600 1 nest with egg, 1 with a half-grown ehtekss Ca OOmmlec aed) saimmerauiess rom island (POBSP). 18 Sept. 250 54 flying immatures counted (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar. 750-1, 000 90-110 nests with eggs and very small chicks; at least 2 chicks about 1 month old and many pre-nesting birds. Sample count of 71 nests: 53 (75%) with eggs, 10 (14%) with recently hatched young, 7 (10%) with small downy young, and 1 (14%) with a large downy young (POBSP). 14-17 July 300 Eggs to fledged young; ca. 100 young on island (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June eo Eggs to fledged young; most nests with 1/4- to 1/2-grown young. An estimated 85 nests present. Sample count of 55 nests: 3 (5%) with eges, 5 (9%) with recently hatched young, 23 (42%) with small downy young, 14 (25%) with medium downy young, and 10 (18%) with large downy young. 1 fledged young seen (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. Ts OO Most of young fledged or fledging; no nests with eggs or small young (POBSP). 1967 20 Mar. 300 Eggs to large downy young; most nests with eges. Sample count of 64 nests: 52 (81%) with eggs, 7 (11%) with recently hatched young, 4 (6%) with small downy chicks; and 1 (2%) with a large downy chick (BSFW, POSSP). 2-6 June 1, 000 Eggs to large downy young; most nests with downy young. Count of 165 nests; 32 (19%) with eggs, 28 (17%) with small downy young, and 105 (64%) with medium or large downy young (POBSP). 31 Aug.- 800 No nests with eggs or downy young; esti- 5 Sept. mated 200 dependent immatures (POBSP). Table 19. (continued) Population DaAceroLoUnVeN Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1968 20-21 Mar. 430 Eggs to medium downy young; most nests with eggs. Sample count of 98** nests: 76 (78%) with eggs, 6 (6%) with nakea young, 15 (15%) with smell downy young, and 1 (1%) with a medium downy young. An estimated 225 breeding birds (nearly 50% of the population) still in pre-nesting pairs (BSFW, POBSP). 1969 30 Mar. LOYUX** Eggs to young; most nests with eggs. Sam- ple count of 92 nests: 87 (95%) with eggs, 1 (1%) with an egg and young bird, 4 (44%) with young. 4 pairs of pre-laying birds also seen (BSFW). *xHstimate by Walker. **Count probably within 5 nests of total present ***Hstimate of the number of nesting birds, estimate probably very close ED ACCU wey. Table 20. Locations and sizes of Blue-faced Booby clubs on Lisianski Island Approx % of Total #s free-flying jPrSreioyel «(Cit Not SE S SW N& NW birds population Observation given jbeach beachy beachy wbeachese in elubs ianelubs 1964 late Aug. 100 "large # filoek"™ 1965 mid-Mar. 100 2 1966 mid-June 300 200-300 500-600 70-85 mid-Oct. "many clubs" ca. 5O= 70 1967 early June >300 100 ca. 400 LO early Sept. 15-20 200 4O© ea. 100 ea. 350 Ws 1968 late Mar. No clubs present 0 De Srl Gé2 sTeqcL bd éé &é éé Sy1NPV é% easy suTT}SeN 2inj}euW~ 4 Tnpeqns Te4¢3qns INV pepueg sseTO xeG/esy yoeg Jc szequnyl pueTST TYSUeTSTT UC G22 to) FTOPV FTOPV pepueq satqccg peoey-entTg sTeicy, "TOW *1deG-"anVy Sune *700 aune ATnL * TEN “ony "TEN * TeW B96T LO6T 996T S96T HO6T €961 KabIimg jc pctszag ‘Ta 9T9deL ag J BROWN BOOBY Sula leucogaster Status Uncommon breeder; maximum recent estimate 200. Probably present all year but most nesting occurs from about April through late September. Builas nests on the ground in small openings in the perimeter of Scaevola above the beaches, and in areas covered with low vegetation near Scaevola in the interior of the island. Some nests rather isolated but most birds breed in small loose colonies of 6 to 14 birds, Populations Recent estimates consistently indicate populations reach a zenith of no more than 200 birds (Table 22). The more careful recent surveys of nesting populations (July 1965; June 1966; June, August- September 1967) give a maximal breeding population of no more than 40 birds (July 1965) for any one visit. The breeding population may be somewhat larger as nests are often hard to find and can be overlooked, and breeding may have occurred outside periods covered by our surveys. In 1967, however, two careful counts revealed a maximum nesting population for almost the entire year of no more than 50 birds. If, as seems likely, the 4 large downy young and 3 | immatures seen in August and September24 are from the nests seen in June, then no more than 38 birds bred in 1967. In any case we doubt whether the | breeding population has exceeded 60 birds in any year since 1963. If this | number bred and had 1OO oercent nesting success, then a maximum population og JOO sey ikialer |oalierelis) Syeisjuls} aloe Vichestesornsiollo,! INO ib wlae dkeicweie Leese Ssicis mates (July 1965, October 1966) may be somewhat too large but could repre- sent instances in which the island had been visited by a number of wandering birds from other colonies in the area, or when maximal numbers of young birds had returned to the island. Early estimates by Munter and Wetmore compare favorably with recent estimates, giving no indication of population change in this century. Annual Cycle | Too few Brown Booby nests have been found on Lisianski by POBSP per- sonnel to enable us to do more than outline the general aspects of the breeding cycle. Most egg-laying apparently occurs from March through May Bigy ibiaver Two nests with eggs were found outside this period (October 24 In August and September 1967 a major effort was made to determine very accurately the Brown Boody population. We feel that we banded or re- turned all Brown Boobies on the island and are certain that the nest count is exact. Thus, we have a more firm basis for determining the 1967 breeding population than other years when nesting data were either not taken, or were subject to a greater probability of error. 25Two of the more detailed nest counts (June 1966, June 1967) both suggest that an egg-laying peak occurred in April or May. Dg 1966, September 1967) but probably only the September 1967 eggs were viable. Young are usually present from about May through September or October although a few young from late nests may be present later. The young Munter saw in March 1915 are the only ones seen that early in the year. The absence of data from November through January precludes definite statements about nesting during that period, but March observations sug- gest that these birds breed only rarely during those months. Ecology Breeding: About equal numbers nest in small openings in the Scaevola above the beach crests and in the interior. Nests were found most frequently above the west and northwest beaches (June 1966; June 1967). In the in- terior, nests were most numerous in two areas covered by Ipomoea and near low Scaevola on the south-central and southeastern portions. In most instances, nesting "colonies" were composed of three or four pairs of birds. In mid-July 1965, however, about seven pairs nested to- gether above the west shore. Non-breeding: Non-breeding adults and immatures frequently roosted near breeding areas, but other scattered individual birds roosted on Seaevola around much of the beach perimeter. Occasionally individuals roosted in nocturnal aggregations of Red-footed Boobies, and an occasional bird roosted with the Blue-faced Boobies on the beaches. In October 1966 two small clubs of about 30 each were seen on the beaches. Judging from the relatively low populations observed in spring, some of the population probably departs the island after the breeding season. Specimens Present museum distribution of 17 study skins of Brown Boobies from Lisianski is given in Table 23. Banding and Movements The POBSP and BSFW have banded 67 Brown Boobies on Lisianski (Table 24). None of these has yet been recaptured elsewhere but two adults banded on other islands, one at Wake Island, the other at Johnston Atoll, were recaptured on Lisianski (Appendix Table 9). Table 22. Observations of Brown Boobies on Lisianski Island Population } Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1891 29 June- least common Only evidence of nesting found was @ young, 4 July BE wae iwlareSe both of which were collected by Palmer (Rot h- booby species schild, 1893-1900; xii). 100 Table 22° (cont inued) Populat ion Date of Survey Est imate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1913 1915 1923 1951 1954 1961 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 12 Mar. 2u Mar. 15-20 May 13 May 26 Mar. 9 Mar. 14 Feb. 12-13 Mar. ILLS Ib) MBC G 21-23 Aug. Sm Seioie 12-14 Mar. 14-17 July 16-19 June 18-20 Oct. 2O Mar. 2-6 June abe Del OlO 80 200 15 15 (Bailey, 1956: 59; Willett, ms.). Eggs and young; some of young well-developed (Munter, 1915: 135-136). Eggs to about 2-week-old young; most nests apparently with eggs (Wetmore, ms. ). No nest sites found (POFT). (Richardson, pers. comm. ). Several boobies seen building (Woodside and Kramer, ms. ). Flying immatures on beach, no nests found (POBSP). (POBSP). No nests found (BSFW, POBSP). No nests found (POBSP). 1 immature, no nests found (BSFW, POBSP). 1 nest with eggs (POBSP). Colony with 6 pairs with nearly full-grown young; estimated 20 young on island, (POBSP). Eggs to small young; estimated 15 nests. Sample count of 11 nests: 3 (27%) with eggs, 8 (73%) with small young (POBSP). 1 nest with eggs, one of them a runt (POBSP). 15 adults; no nests found (BSFW, POBSP). Eggs to medium-sized young; ca. half of the nests with eggs, ca. half with young. Count of 18 nests: 10 (56%) with eggs, 5 (28%) with small young, and 3 (17%) with medium- sized young (POBSP). LOL Table 22. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1967 31 Aug.- LO Eggs to dependent immatures; mostly large SeiISepe - downy young and immatures. Count of 5 nests: 1 with egg, 4 with large downy young 2 de- pendent immatures seen (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 20 Primary breeding areas not visited (BSFW, POBSP). Tabs ioe Spee nen skins* of Brown Boobies from Lisianski Island Mus. oo Mus. Num. 99 Mus. Nim. val Mus. Numn Daives Cole Gouge AMNH 5 72°9471- 5 729u76- ze eG) uel. 30 June- UTS 480 498 3 July 1891 Palmer BPBM il 2 2 i USNM 1 240994 12 March 1913 Willett USIM 1 300874 1 300873 i Ye BCO8T5 ees May Wetmore *There is in addition an alcoholic specimen of a young bird (USNM 289299) collected by Wetmore 17 May 1923. Table 24. Brown Boobies banded on Lisianski Islana Méltedbe ANclbukie JN\oltulie Swlotcorell shine Nesic= Period of Survey Bander od Be LE Adults tures Wings: Totals 1963 March POBSP 0 ) 3 3 O O 3 1964 March BSFW O 3 3 6 O O 6 1965 July POBSP O 0) 5 5 4 ) 9 1966 June POBSP @) O 8 8 O O 8 October POBSP 2 3 O 5 O om 5 1967 August- POBSP ) 19 i 29 3 u 36 September Totals aa 25 20 56 of y 67 10¢ RED-FOOTED BOOBY Sula sula Status Common breeder; maximum recent estimate 3,000, Present throushout year but most abundant from March through at least October. Breeds from at least February through October or November; most breeding occurs from March through September. Builds bulky nests in Scaevola bushes wherever they OcCcum on he euciand). Populations Recent numerical estimates (Table 25), although not highly accurate, suggest that the number of Red-footed Boobies on Lisianski varies with the season, smaller numbers being present in late fall (?) and winter. There are no observations from November through January; we do not know how much populations decrease during that period. Moreover, when only a small proportion of the population is breeding (as in early spring and fall), most of the population is present only as nocturnal roosters. Since no nocturnal observations were made by the POBSP in February 1963 and March 1967, we cannot establish whether there was any real difference between estimates made then and on other March surveys. It seems likely, however, that the spring estimates are small enough sd that they represent a real difference in population size from peak populations recorded dur- ing summer and fall. Since the September 1964 survey was made during daylight hours, it is probably somewhat low. We also believe that the estimates from August 1964 and July 1965 are too low. However, data from other islands such as Johnston Atoll indicate that the size of the roosting population may vary fmeereliediny “itaesyin iailerohe ilo) ialalfedale - Comparisons of recent estimates with those made in 1913 and 1923 clearly indicate that present populations are much larger than during the earlier period. This) mercase iss mose Pikely, aurmibuvable i omruncs aMemeace of Mesting sites concomitant with the revegetation of the sland: Annual Cycle Egg-laying evidently begins in late February or early March, but probably does not reach a peak until late March or April (see below). Young birds were present in March 1915, but no young were founda on March visits between 1964 and 1969. The 1964 season evidently began earlier than subsequent seasons since about half the active nests had eggs by early March. Surveys in early Merch 1965, and late March 1967, 1968, and 1969, suggest that no more than a third of the active nests contained eggs. The latest that eggs have been recorded is 19 June, and at least a few eggs are probably present until the end of the month. The single set of recent July observations (1965) indicates that no eggs were present past mid-June that year; the August-September 1967 observations also indi- cate no eggs past June. However, the large young observed in October 1966 UO) S) were probably no more than three months from hatching, which shows that esos (couldmpempgesenu vas) lavelasmd ulay. The POBSP made no visits to Lisianski in April or May so we cannot with certainty document the peak month or period of egg laying. The large proportion of empty, completed, or nearly completed nests present on various March surveys suggests that the egg peak probably occurred at least several weeks after the surveys were made. The two June nest counts (1966, 1967) indicate that some laying probably occurred in May, but the proportion of eggs to young suggests that most laying occurred from late March through April. If most of the population lays between late March and late April, then most hatching probably occurs from early May through the first half — of June. Vikewclatively high proporeiom of recently hatched young in early June 1967 lends support to this contention. If the fledging period is taken to be 80 to 100 days, most young fledge from late July through mid-September. A few birds fledge later in the year, but they probably comprise a very small proportion of the total number fledging. We found no evidence of winter nesting on any of the POBSP March visits, but the observations by Munter of well-grown young in March 1915 indicate that eggs had been laid from 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 months earlier, or sometime in November or December. Ecology Breeding: On Lisianski Red-footed Boobies nest exclusively in Scaevola (Fig. 47). They nest individually, in groups of about four to eleht binds aor Gunusmall colonies. These boobies irequentiy nest in "oure™ colonies but often are found in small numbers among frigatebirds, occasionally nesting in the same bushes with the latter. In June 1967 detailed notes were taken on sites, nesting materials, and heights of 100 nests. All nests were in forks of Scaevola branches. A major portion of the nesting material, particularly the bases of the nests, consisted of branches and twigs of Scaevola. The upper portion of the nest consisted primarily of Tribulus and/or Sicyos stems and branches; occasionally Scaevola leaves were added. No Boernavia vines were found in the nests examined in June, but observations made in March 1967 indicate that it is fairly frequently used. Most nests examined were about four inches deep and over a foot in width; many appeared to have been built on sites utilized in previous years. Half of the 100 nests examined were on the west side of the island; half were on the east side. In the 50 nests on the west side, Scaevola was used as nesting material in all nests, and Tribulus was used in all but two nests. Scaevola and Tribulus were used in all nests examined on the east side. Sicyos was much more prevalent in nests on the west side of the island (in 38 percent of the nests) than it was on the east side (in "Ip ‘uostouy *q°y Aq udeascy0ud qsqod “961 UOTeEN eT ‘BlTOhoeog UT SsqySau UO SaTqocg payccy-pay “)h emnsty * id \ EB ES Sy > z ~ rat A aw LO5 4 percent of the nests). Thisdifference suggests the nesting material used may depend in part on the nesting material immediately available. Difference in the heights of nests on the west and ease sides of the island (Table 26) are almost certainly the results of differences in Scaevola height in the two areas. The Scaevola on the west siae of the island is, on the whole, much larger than that found on the east side. Non-breeding: Non-breeding birds roost in a wide variety of situa- tions, both in active colonies and in areas where no nests are found. Most roost in Scaevola and there seems to be a tendency for birds to con- prepare iM roosts im a particular area, but little information is available from most surveys. Casuarina trees, coconut palms, and dead trees are also utilized as roosting sites. Specimens We know of four specimens. Two were study skins of males (USNM 300909-910) collected by Wetmore 19 May 1923. He also colledted two alcoholic specimens, an embryo (USNM 289296, 18 May 1923) and a young bird (USNM 289298, 17 May 1923). Banding and Movements Table 27 summarizes banding of Red-footed Boobies on Lisianski by the POBSP and BSFW. Twenty-five of these birds were recaptured on other islands, some of them having been recaptured more than once and on more than one island. Nine of the birds captured elsewhere were recaptured on French Frigate Shoals; six were recaptured at Laysan Island and at Kure Atoll and five were recaptured on Johnston Atoll (Appendix Table 10a). Seventy that were banded on other islands had been recaptured at Lisianski through 1969: 23 at Johnston Atoll, 15 at French Frigate Shoals, 14 at Laysan Island, 8 at Kure Atoll, 4 each at Midway Atoll and Pearl and Hermes Reef, and 2 at Wake Island (Appendix Table 10b). Table 25. Observations of Red-footed Boobies on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References WS28.eF 3 Apr. 2 Seen by Isenbeck but his observations do not clearly distinguish between breeding of this species and of the Blue-faced Booby (see Rothschild, 1893-1900: iv-v). 1891 29 June- 2 Palmer noted these birds sitting on their 4 July nests on 30 June and indicated that young were seen on 1 July (Rothschild, 1893- 1900: xii). 1913 12 Mar. 60* 30 pairs nesting, some with fresh eggs (Willett, ms.). 106 Table 25. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1915 2h Mar. 10 Eggs and young birds (Munter, 1915: 135). 1923 15-20 May LO Most not nesting, 2 nests with eggs (Wetmore, ms. ). TST XS) Me. 40-60 (Richardson, pers. comm. ). 1961 9 Mar. comparatively Nesting (Woodside and Kramer, ms.). rarex** 1963 14 Feb. 50 Nesting (POBSP). | | 12-13 Mar. 2 (POBSP ). 1964 11-12 Mar. 500% Ca. 250 nests, 50-60% with eggs, none with young (BSFW, POBSP). ! 21-23 Aug. 300 None found nesting*** (POBSP). | 18 Sept. 500 17 very large young, about 1/4 of popu- | lation composed of flying immatures (BSFW, | POBSP ). ! 1965 12-14 Mar. 500-750 Many nests completed but only a few eggs | laid (POBSP). i 14-17 July 500 Ca. 200 young from about half-grown nest- lings to fully feathered juveniles (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June 2, 000 Sample count of 56 nests showed: 23 (41%) with eggs, 33 (59%) with young; an estimated 50-60 nests with eggs and 65-85 nests with young on island (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. 2,500 Ca. 15 very large young and unfledged im- matures; no new nests or nests with eggs (POBSP). 1967 20 Mar. 170% 18 of 85 (21%) completed nests checked con- tained eggs; the rest were empty (BSFW, POBSP ). 2-6 June 3, 000 Eggs to large downy young, most nests with eggs or small young. Count of 516 nests: 236 (46%) with eggs, 88 (17%) with recently hatched young, 73 (14%) with small downy young, and 119 (23%) with medium-sized or large downy young (POBSP). LOW, Table 25. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1967 31 Aug.- yD O0= Large downy young to fledged immatures. 5 Sept. 2, OOO Most birds with dependent immatures. Ca. 14 large downy young and ca. 400 depen- dent immatures present. Ca. 3% of popu- lation consisting of fledged immatures (POBSP ). 1968 21-21 Mar. 250 Only eggs present. Sample count of 16 nests: 11 (69%) active but empty; 5 (31%) with eggs. An estimated 150-200 nesting birds present (BSFW, POBSP). 1969 30 Mar. >21h* 107 nests counted around shoreline; of 8 whose contents were investigated, 6 (75%) were empty but active and 2 (25%) contained eggs (BSFW). *Hstimate of the number of breeding birds. **¥Compared ts Blue-faced Boobies. **¥The September 1964 observations indicate that a number of nests were overlooked by the August survey Table 26. Heights of Red-footed Booby nests on Lisianski Island. Height of Nests above Nests located on west Nests located on east All nests Ground side of Lisianski side of Lisianski examined No. Pet. No. Rec No. Rec. EOD Ic 2c y 5) ILO W i 2 feet thal 22 26 52 39 39 3 feet att 54 LS) 30 he he 4 feet 7 14 4 8 abit ual § feet 2 4 O -- Z 2 6 feet il 2 O -- a 1 Mean height 3,80) Both AaT 108 Table 27. Red-footed Boobies banded on Lisianski Island. Sub- Imma- Nest- Period of Survey Bander Adults adults tures lings Unknown Totals 1963 March POBSP 10 O O O O 10 1964 March BSFW 2 O ©) O O 2 1965 July POBSP 0 ©) 2 0 O 2 1966 June POBSP 26 O iL O ©) eG Oct ober POBSP 350 4S 8 2 ig 412 1967 June POBSP 16 0) ©) O O 16 August- POBSP 262 66 L7 2A 0 396 Sept ember Motels COEF SP er Oe het nt an ent GREAT FRIGATEBIRD Fregata minor Status Commisie joreeecleies wercmulvlin wees Sse mMesce 25 WOW cD 35,000, Reale joapuH lations probably occur from March through September or October concurrent With breeding: Some beeeding may oceum anany month ybUE Teh ne mon meced ums probably occurs from late November through early February. Builds bulky Hest In Seaevollay anywhere on viel island bur wir vemtablenlocalneoncen— trations. Populations Recent population estimates rather consistently suggest maximum populations on the order of 3,000 birds with maximal breeding populations af 900. to“, 000) bindsa. -Presene populavions-are=abouu- rive times) the size out iwlaric) alial IUCYze) (Table 28); presumably revegetation since then now affords the species many more nest sites. The single numerical estimate prior to 1923 (in 1915) suggests populations about equal to those now present. Populations were probably larger prior to 1915 (and to now) since the island had several times been visited by feather hunters prior to Munter's visit and since Munter's comments suggest that the island had been par- tially defoliated by rabbits by 1915. Annual Cycle As on Laysan Island, populations are probably considerably smaller in mid-winter but the absence of observations from November through January makes it impossible adequately to document the decrease in numbers when few birds are breeding. LOG Laying may begin as early as February (1963 ) and probably earlier, but the peak laying period apparently falls in March. The peak laying period evidently varies by as much as a week or more with birds laying earlier in some years (1964, 1965) and later in others (1967-66). The presence of eggs and recently hatched young in June 1966 and 1967 im- plies that eggs may be laid through at least late May. Young may hatch as early as early March (or earlier) and fledge as early as late August or early Sseptembex. (Immat ures seen from March through early August are almost all certainly birds from preceding breeding seasons.) Peak hatch- ing and fledging periods usually fall between late May and June and from early October through early November, but late young may sometimes fledge astlave aemimd-Nevember oar even, later. Ecology Breeding: Great Frigatebirds nest in Scaevola bushes (Fig. 48) wherever they occur, but the locations of the larger nesting concentrations apparently vary from year to year. In August 1964 most of the nesting birds were found on the southern half of the island whereas in June 1966 most were found on the northern half. In June 1967 the largest concentra- Elon of Hesesuwasr Hound an the Mortheastern corner; nm August this varca still contained large numbers of young birds but an area in the southeast- ern corner contained almost as many. Wetmore (ms.) found these birds nesting solely in the tops of clumps of grass (Eragrostis). Such sites are exceedingly unusual in colonies in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands except at French Frigate Shoals (Amerson, 1y71: 220) and were probably used in 1923 only because no other vegetation was available. Neither Munter (1915: 135), who recorded that this species nested in "bushlike growth," nor recent observers have founda frigatebirds nesting in grass clumps. In recent years, all nests found have been built in Scaevola. Most nests observed have been from one to three feet off the grounc and the nests themselves ranged from about a foot to a foot and a half in diameter, Nests are usually constructed primarily of Tribulus and/or Scaevola but pieces of Portulaca, Boerhavia, Ipomoea, and Sicyos have also been found in “the neges. Non-breeding: Roosting birds occur in the same areas as breeding birds: but "often roost apart from them. We have noted on several occasions that non-breeding adults form sexually segregated roosting aggregations. A small group of 4 to 10 adult females will be found roosting together while 50 feet away will be found a similar small group of roosting males. Fledged immatures and subadults are often found in these groups of males or females, and others roost either individually or in small groups throughout the Scaevola. Both adults and young occasionally use the Casuarina trees as roost sites. Recently fledged young apparently return to the nest site to roost. "uozTSUS “O°d Aq Uderzoycud qsqOd ‘9961 aun 61 ‘pue{sT aud Jo apts JSen 944 SUCTe B[OASBOG UT sqsau uC SPITQS4e5TIq Yeain SuncAk [etacas pue ateway FINpY “St eansTy aerate gL Specimens We know of six specimens from Lisianski. Two, an adult male (USNM 464439) and an adult female (USNM 464438) sre study skins of birds col- lected by Wetmore 18 and 17 May 1923, respectively. The other four (USNM 289288-291) collected by Wetmore on 18 May, are alcoholic specimens Cictewet=s baeomrsemt to heninerad. Banding and Movements In all, 422 Great Frigatebirds have been banded on Lisianski, one by the BSFW and the rest by the POBSP (Table 2). Four have been recap- tured subsequently on other islands, three at Kure Atoll and one at French Frigate Shoals. In addition, seven banded on other atolls have been re- co pEiredvon its tanpms three cach from French Prigate Shoals and Kure Atoll, aud one trom Pearl and” Hermes Reef. Table 28. Observations of Great Frigatebirds on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 16263) © 3'vapre ? Many nests with eggs; immatures or sub- adults scarce (Isenbeck in Rothschild, 1893-1900: iii-iv). 1891 29 June- in large Nesting (Palmer in Rothschila, 1893- 4 July numbers GOO x11) Oey ele Mar’. ? Nesting (Bailey, 1956: 79); substantial Mesting Colonies (Willett, ms. ). 1915 24 Mar. 3,500 Nesting in three colonies (Munter, 1915: 135). 1923 15-20 May 650 Ca. 80 pairs nesting; eggs and young (Wetmore, ms.). 1951 13 May 2 Nesting (POFI) 1954 26 Mar. LOO (Richardson, pers. comm. ) 1963 14 Feb. 1, 000 Some eggs (POBSP). 12-13 Mar. 2 Nesting (POFI). 1964 11-12 Mar. 1,750 Ca. 450 nests, ca 80% with eggs (BSFW, POBSP). Ze oues | ayll0; 000 Ca. 100 nests with from 1/3 to 2/3 grown young (POBSP). 18 Sept. 1, 600 No eggs or nestlings (BSFW, POBSP). 130 Rote Table 28. (cont inued ) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 12-14 Mar. 14-17 July 16-19 June 18-20 Oct. 20 Mar. 2-6 June Bye /Nblers = Ssemiee 2O-cl Mar. 30 Mar. EL OOOE 3, 000 1,200 2,790 1, 500 1, 000 2, 000 1, 000 1, 000 >clO Ca. 300-400 nests, ca. 75% with eggs (mostly fresh), none with young (POBSP). Ca. 400 nests with recently hatched to near- fledging young; immatures on the wing (POBSP). Ca. 300 nests, ca. 25% with eggs, ca. 75% with recently hatched to half-grown young (POBSP ) . 324 near-fledging or fledged young, no nests with eggs or small young (POBSP). Ca. 200 active nests, 20 of 60 (33%) nests echeicked Weont aimed eres, reste empny. Over 300 flying immatures (BSFW, POBSP). Hggs to large downy young; most nests with eggs or small young. Count of 473 nests: 237 (50%) with eggs, 27 (6%) with recently hatched young, 93 (20%) with small downy young, and 116 (25%) with medium-sized or large downy young (POBSP). Small downy young to dependent immatures, mostly large dependent young and dependent immatures; 1 small downy young and il medium or large downy young counted (POBSP). Fresh to very slightly incubated eggs and a few dependent immatures from the pre- vious breeding season. Sample count of 36 nests: 23 (64%) empty but active and 13 (36%) with eggs (POBSP). 105 nests counted around shoreline; of 46 investigated, 14 (30%) were empty but active and 32 (70%) contained eggs (BSFW). pales Table 29. Great Frigatebirds banded on Lisianski Island Numbers of Each Age/Sex Class Banded Sub- Sulo= Siwlo= Adult Adult total adult adult Imma- Nest- Un- Period of Survey Bander od OOP AGIs oor 2? tures lings known Totals 1963 Mar. POBSP 1964 Mar. BSFW Aug. POBSP 1966 June POBSP October POBSP 1967 Aug.- POBSP Sept. Totals 93 243% 3 43 215) 1O7 *Includes 2 unsexed adults. DUCK sp. Anas 1(?))\esioe Status Extinet. First recorded in 1828 ana possibly present through about 18h), Observations "A species of Duck, “2 with no conspicuous plumage, [was found] living in small flocks on Moller [= Laysan] and Lisiansky, but not breeding" by Isenbeck in April 1828 (Rothschild, 1893-1900: v). A newspaper account of the wreck of the Holder Borden in 1844 (Ward, 1967: 34) stated that ie enliddvekss waren plent iris. and|))...were readily K-amedh ly i iriic account also implied that these ducks were eaten by members of the crew. Another account (Ward, 1967: 42) stated that "The ducks seemed peculiarly inclined to renounce their wild and roving propensities and adopt the domestic habits of civilized life. A flock of 4O had attached themselves to the settlement." This duck, which Warner (1963: 6) and others thought might be the same as the endemic Laysan Teal (Anas laysanensis), esulld have been a distinet Subspecies or species. 114 Although it is possible that the ducks were some other species, this does not seem too likely. Jabes Pell, Captain of the vessel and evidently the primary source for the accounts of the shipwreck (Ward, 1967: 38), was from New England and should have been able to distinguish ducks from cur- tews, the only Sther Species oceliecine on Tistansicigrt Meicenis ielin ac omilen ye exhibited the habits ascribed to the ducks. ,We think it likely that the last of the endemic ducks on Lisianski were killed for food between 1844 and 1846 by the shipwrecked crews of the Holder Borden or Konohasset. OSPREY Pandion halieatus Status Hypothetical; one unconfirmed record June 1950. Remarks King (a) (1956: 42) remarked that in June 1950 he saw "an eagle- like bird on Lisiansky [sic] Island, which I decided later was most probably an osprey." This species has been sighted several times in the main Hawaiian Islands but has not been certainly identified from any of the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. PEREGRINE FALCON Falco peregrinus Status Accidental; one sight record March 1965. Observations Wirtz saw a falcon, presumably the same bird seen subsequently on 13 and 14 March, flying offshore Lisianski on 12 March 1965 apparently in pursuit of a Bonin Petrel. Judging from the "reddish-brown" plumage, the bard was) evidently Giver va demaile soreraneimmelmuader. One March Clapp) founda whaviencoosu, sua CasUcaiMe wiEccemeatamaiie center of the island. Beneath the tree were many carcasses of shorebirds and a few of terns. One,of the carcasses (a Ruddy Turnstone) had been recent Lyekitled.. win jail, sphere were macninants sole sa iCiec oc CMieGa ern Wise els Black Noddy, at least 47 Ruddy Turnstones and 20 Golden Plovers. Most of the shorebirds had been either completely eaten with only disarticulated Wines Not wneesvied, sormva LL Spaidcs jo the sbodykad been icanenmoxeeian gisax the wings which were stilll attached to one another by bane bomes. The terns, on the other hand, were only partially ecaten, perhaps indicating that the falcon had found these birds less tasteful. During the POBSP survey of the island, the roost was watched from dusk until dark on several evenings but the falcon was not seen. POBSP oersonnel searched beneath other Casuarina trees for evidence that they were being used as roosts but no other bird kills were found. palmer 2.2% LS, This record, a sight record from Midway, and a specimen from Kure, constitute the only records of Peregrines in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands (Clapp and Woodward, 1968: 15-16). LAYSAN RAIL Porzanula palmeri Status Possibly present in 1828 and subsequently extinct; introduced in 1913 but disappeared from the island between February 1916 and May 1923. Observations On Laysan and Lisianski in March and April 1828, Isenbeck saw "A kind of Fowl, about as large as a Ptarmigan; mixed grey and brown; running oeuneeround., (singly. butsat the same ijtime rether mMumerous),..very rapid and rather shy" (translation from Kittlitz in Rothschild, 1893-1900: v). Rothschild (op. ei. )is commenting on this description, stated that "Although the description is very different, nothing else can be meant but Porzanula " In view of the vagueness of many of Isenbeck's descriptions, we doubt the aceuracy of Rothschild's statement, particularly since the feseriptonmieh also fit the Bristille-thighed Curlew, On 12 March 1913, 45 rails that had been brought from Laysan were re- leased on Lisianski by George Willett and Alfred M. Bailey. Although no rails were noted by Elschner the following year, in March 1915 Munter (1915: 136) noted that several were seen and remarked that "One was seen breaking into a tern's egg and greedily eating of the contents...." In Hepalaryeot Ene following year, one or two birds were Seen by the crew on the Thetis. At that time no vascular plants grew on the island and it seems doubtful if the last few rails survived much Jonger. In any case, none was found during the visit of the Tanager Expedition in May 1923. SEMIPALMATED PLOVER Charadrius semipalmatus Status Accidental; one record September 1967. Observations On 4 September 1967 Ely shot a Semipalmated Plover at the north end of Lisianski. When first seen, the plover was feeding along the flat, rocky shoreline. The specimen (USNM 544001) is a very fat immature fe- Hac emit keameti tubes Lhe Lirsuumscond fom Tistanskiin) These jpilovyers age regular visitors in small numbers to the main Hawaiian Islands and have been recorded from French Frigate Shoals (Amerson, 1971: 237), Laysan Island (Ely and Clapp, 1973 ) and Midway Atoll (Clapp, 1968: 76), in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. 116 MONGOLIAN PLOVER Charadrius mongolus Status Accidental; one record September 1967. Observations At O400, 4 September 1967, Clapp collected by hand a Mongolian Plover that was roosting solitarily on the wave-sculpted rocks along the northeast perimeter. The specimen (USNM 543063) is an immature female that had only light fat. On the basis of range and wing length (133 mm.), the specimen is tentatively assigned to the race Charadrius mongolus stegmanni. It constitutes the first record for hisianskivand for the entire Hawaiian area. The Mongolian Plover breeds from northeastern Siberia to western Alaska (CANE OS UL. LO5% 169) and has previously been re- corded as tar veast invthe tropical Pacinietas Majuxcoehtoll iniehesMarciiena Islands (Amerson, 1969: 100). GOLDEN PLOVER Pluvialis dominica Status Abundant migrant; maximum recent estimate 2,000. Probably occurs in all months but more abundant in spring and fall. Found primarily around perimeter of island. Populations and Annual Cycle The largest numbers have been present in February and March, and late August, September, and October (Table 30). Numbers present during these migratory periods were variable, suggesting rapid turnover in the popula- tion. Minimal numbers are apparently present June through August. Since scientific visits have not been made November through January, we do not know the size of the wintering population. Beology Like most other shorebirds occurring on Lisianski, plovers are most common around the perimeter of the island. The largest flocksamost often roost on the wilder expanses of the south and southwest beaches. On the south beach in March 1965, a flock of about 950 was present, and in August and September 1967, a flock of about 200 was seen there. In March 1968, about 500 roosted on the southwest beach. During periods of peak abundance (March 1965, 1968), these birds were so numerous that they were founa around the entire “perimeter of vhe island. Individuals and small flocks frequently feed in the interior of the island, but the preferred area is within several hundred yards of the beach erest. In March 1968, Kenyon noted that this species (and the turnstones and curlews) apparently preferred to forage in areas of low growth such as Tribulus and Ipomoea. At night many plovers roost inland, JOLT usually solitarily. On several visits (August and September 1967, March 1968), they were found commonly in little clearings in the Scaevola and Eragrostis above the beach crests, and were commonest above the beach crests on the south, west, and north- northwest perimeter. Specimens eollected on Lisianski. Banding and Movements and BSFW. We have found no records indicating that Golden Plovers have been In all, 73 Golden Plovers have been banded on Lisianski by the POBSP The BSFW banded 12 in March 1964, 41 in September 1967, and 6 in March 1968; the POBSP banded 14 in September 1967. One of these birds, banded in March 1964, was found subsequently on two other atolls, Kure Atoll and Pearl and Hermes Reef (Appendix Table 12). Table 30. Date of Survey 1828 1891 1913 1964 3 Apr. 29 June- 4 July lé Mar. 15-20 May 24 June 26 Mar. 9 Mar. 14 Feb. dhaals Mines 11-12 Mar. fe Abyasy J NUL eee 18 Sept. Population Estimate plentiful liz abundant Observations of Golden Plovers on Lisianski Island Remarks and References Some "Snipe" or "a species of Sandpiper" seen in flocks by Isenbeck; may have been this species (Rothschild, 1893-1900: v). Noted by Palmer 30 June (Rothschild, 1893- UGOGis, Kasia) (Willett, ms.). 1 flock on 19 May (Wetmore, ms. ). (POFL). (Richardson, pers. comm. ). Circling island (Woodside and Kramer, misi5 Large flocks on eastern and southeastern beaches (POBSP). (POBSP ). Count of 520 made 12 March (BSFW, POBSP). 1 flock on SW shore (POBSP). Count of 50 (BSFW, POBSP). 118 Table 30. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate 1965 12-14 Mar. 2, 000 14-17 July O 1966 16-19 June m5) US) SSOeo 3 18-20 Oct. 300 IGG . AO Mee 75-100 2-6 June 200 SeAuies 450 5 Sst. 1968 20-21 Mar. 600 1969 30 Mar. ® BLACK-BELLIED PLOVER Status Remarks and References Hiock of about L000 seen fiying off the south beach 14 March; large flocks seen in complex aerial maneuvers offshore (POBSP). (POBSP). Count of 56 sn 18 June; most birds along beaches. 5-10% in full breeding plumage (POBSP ). Along shoreline (BSFW). Count of 61 on 16 October; many seen Singly in interior asswell as with flocks of turnstones on beaches (POBSP). 35 counted along beaches; all seen in winter plumage (BSFW, POBSP). Ca. 80% in breeding plumage (POBSP). Estimate based on partial count around perinever) ji AusuSt: mone comnonsomaaorinkin west, and south beaches than on east beach; many small flocks of 20-50 birds and a IhengaS aillo@x or gic Ieasn, BOO sid tine Soulela beach; none seen in full breeding plumage but many still revarning pavches on bilaek on the belly (POBSP). Most iscen iin lemioek or cae [00h birds jor southwest beach; many coming into breeding plumage (BSFW, POBSP). 5 along shoreline (BSFW). Squatarola squatarola Rare visitor; two records March 1965, June 1966. Remarks Three Black-bellied Plovers collected by POBSP personnel are the only records of this species from Lisianski. A male (USNM 494120) and + ey LLY They were first observed feeding among exposed rocky suteroprings ar a female (USNM 4G4121) were collected oy Clapp on the east beacn 13 March { i allow water. A female (USNM 496779) was collected 18 June 1966 by in as it fed along the shoreline of the southeast beach, occasionally Sociation with Golden Plovers. lack-bellied Plovers are found infrequently in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands, but have been recorded also from Kure, Midway, and Laysan (Clapp and Woodward, 1968: 16). BRISTLE-THIGHED CURLEW Numenius tahitiensis Status Common migrant; maximum recent estimate 200. A few are probably present in all months with larger numbers present February to March and August to September. Populations and Annual Cycle This species, like other shorebirds scecurring on Lisianski, shows pronounced population fluctuations (Table 31). Lack of counts or esti- mates from November through Jénuary ana from April make it impossible to determine exactly periods of peak numbers and numbers wintering on the igland. Observations from June through October suggest that the fall peak of migration may occur from late August through early September. Two estimates prior to that ceriod (July 1965, June 1966) and two there- after (September 1964, October 1966) aren> more than 50 percent of the two extimates from intervening periods. Ecology Unlike other species of shorebirds occurring on Lisianski, Bristle- thighed Curlews are often found in as large numbers in the vegetation on Che beach crest as alongs the beaches. Moreover. this species seems to exhibit a preference for some areas of the island. although birds can usually be found in small numbers all around the perimeter. On four surveys©O these shorebirds occurred most densely on the northwest beach and beach crest of the island and along the rocky northeastern beach. Large flocks were seen in the former area in February 1963 (ca. 20 birds): in September 1967 (ca. 30): and in March 1968 (21). In the latter area, eae flocks were seen in March 1965 (ca. 30-40) and in September 1967 ea lO) At night curlews were found individually or by twos in clearings in the vegetation of the beach crest, and even well into the center of the island. They were rarely seen on the beaches at night. €©n 1 though the largest flocks were recorded on a number of other visits (ca. 35 in August 1964, 17 in July 1965, 12 in June 1967), the area in which they were found was not noted. 120 Specimens We know of but two specimens, a female (USNM 301042) collected by Wetmore 19 May 1923 and a male (USNM 493202) collected by the POBSP 12 March 1963. Banding and Movements 54 by the POBSP and 65 by the BSFW (Table 32). captured on any other island. Haier sik Population In all, 119 Bristle-thighed Curlews have been banded on Lisianski, None has yet been re- Observations of Bristle-thighed Curlews on Lisianski Island Date of Survey Estimate Remarks and References 1923) 913) Sor. 1891 29 June- 4k July 1913 12 Mar. 1915 2h Mar. 1923 15-20 May 1950 2h June 1954 26 Mar. 1961 9 Mar. 1963 14 Feb. 12-13 Mar. 1964 11-12 Mar. 21-23 Aug. 18 Sept. 1965 12-14 Mar. rather numerous a few common L hy abundant 35 30-4O 100-200 "A kind of fowl, about as large as a mixed gray and brown" seen by Isenbeck (Rothschild. 1893-1900: 4) was most likely this species. Ptarmigan: A few "in poor plumage" noted by Palmer on 29 June (Rothschild, 1893-1900: xiii). (Willett msee Along the shore (Munter, 1915: 136). Feeding along beach 19 May (Wetmore, ms.). (POFI). (Richardson, pers. comm.). "Common in the interior grass land" (Wsod- side and Kramer, ms.). Ll flock of ca. 20 on northwest beach (POBSP). More than a dozen along shoreline (POBSP). Count of 67 on 12 March (BSFW, POBSP). I, HOCK Sif C2lc in interior (POBSP). 35 on beach; Count of 24 (BSFW, POBSP). on beaches and Flocks of 30-40 on beaches, particularly the rocky northeastern beach (POBSP). Teble 31. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Remarks and References a 1965 14-17 July 50 (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June Ne) Count of (28 on 18 June mostly on ibtrds on outer beaches (POBSP). 19 Sept. Lyf Along shoreline (BSFW). 18-20 Oct. ie) ( POBSP) 1967 20 Mar. 15 15 seen on beaches and in interior on partial survey of island (BSFW, POBSP). 2-6 June 20 (POBSP). 31 Aug. - 100 On beaches and in interior. Most com- 5 Sept. monly seen in partially open areas on the crests of northern beaches. Ca. 30 seen in largest flock. 49 banded (POBSP). 25-26 Sept. 2 32 banded (BSFW). 1968 20-21 Mar. 100-125 Most abundant along northern perimeter but scattered individuals seen around perimeter. Largest flock contained 21 birds (BSFW, POBSP). Table 32. Bristle-thighed Curlews banded on Lisianski Island Period Bander Number Banded 1963 March FOBSP 3 1964 March BSFW 7 1965 March POBSP iL i967 June POBSP L September POBSP hg BSFW 32 1968 March BSFW 26 Total 119 r~ n> BAR-TAILED GODWIT Limosa lepponica baueri Status Accidental; one record March 196h. Rhemerks A female collected by Wislocki 11 March 1964 constitutes the only record for Lisianski Island. The specimen (USNM 493478) nad a minute ovary, very light fat. and worn plumage. These godwits, casual visitors to the Nortnwestern Hawaiian Isianas. heve also been heosnded from Kure, Midway. and Laysan (Clapp and Woodward, 1968: 17). WANDERING TATTLER Heteroscelus incanum Status Uncommon migrant; maximum recent estimate 25. A few probably present in all months. Recorded solely from the shoreline of the island, par- ticularly in more rocky areas. Populations and Annual Cycle Although frequently recorded from Lisiaenski, tattlers are not abundant there (Table 33). ‘The largest estimates have been made in March and September, but differences in estimates from month to month are too slight to justify delineating peak periods of abundance. Eeology All observers who have noted locations where these birds were seen have indicated that they were found along the shoreline. 4 few tattlers were usually seen along stretcnes of sandy beach but most birds were tyvically found along the perimeter.in areas where rocky Suteroppings line the shore (from the northwest point to the northeast side of the island) and where low tides exposed rocky tide pools (most of the southern half of the eastern perimeter). oSpecimens We know of the location of five specimens of tattlers from Lisianski: two females (USNM 301020-21) collected by Wetmore in May 1923; and a mele (USNM 544562). a female (USNM 496688) and an unsexed specimen (USNM 544561) collected by the POBSP on 17 end 13 June 1966. Banding and Movements Seven Wandering Tattlers heve been banded by the POBSF ana BSFW: lL in March 1964 (BSFW) , 4 in September 1967 (3 POBSP, 1 BSFW), and 2 in March 1968 (BSFW). One of the birds banded py the FOBSP in September 1967 was recartured on Lisianski the following March but none hes been re- eaptured on other islands. Table 33. Date of Survey 1391 1923 1963 1965 1967 1968 29 June- k July 15-20 May 14 Feb. 1ll-1le Mar. el-23 Aug. 13 Sept. 12-14 Mar. L4-17 July 16-19 June 19 Sept. 18220" Oct: 2O Mar. 2-6 June 31 Aug.- 5 Sept. 20-21 Mar. RUDDY TURNSTONE Status present all year. able data. island. the Population Estimate ? 25 2 3) Observations of wandering Tattlers on Lisianski Island Remarks and keferences ————— Noted by Palmer on 29 June (Rothschild, 1893519002 xi i): Seen on 19 May (Wetmore, ms.). Half seen along the rocky northeastern beach (POBSP). Count of 7 on L2 March (BSFW, POBSP). (POBSP). Count of 16 (BSFW, FOBSP). Most seen along rocks of northeastern beach (POBSP). (POBSP) . Count of 15 made 18 June. Most seen along the edge of the water. At least 3 in breeding plumage (POBSP). Along shoreline (BSFW). Count of 7 made 18 October (POBSP) Seen during partial survey (BSFW, POBSP). (POBSP) . Based on partial counts around perimeter; singly or in pairs along beach perimeter (POBSP). Seen sparsely around perimeter of island (BSFW, POBSP). Arenaria interpres Abundant migrant; maximum recent estimate 1,000 to 2,000. Probably Most abundant in March and September on basis of avail- Occurs most abundantly on beaches around outer perimeter of 124 Populations and Annual Cycle This species is usually the most abundant shorebird on Lisianski but occasionally is equalled in numbers by the Gslden Plover. Peak numbers were recorded in March and September; typically fewest birds were present June to August (Table 34). The few observations made August to November indicate that September is the fall migratory peak; there are too few ob- servations from February and April for us to be certain that the spring peak is March. Observations from February to Avril on Kure indicate March is the period of peak migration; it seems likely the same is true for Lisianski. Some probably winter on Lisianski, but no data are available that would indicate the size of the population then. Feology Turnstones were usually found all around the beaches but on some visits were noted as more common in certain areas. Largest flocks ob- served were: on or near the rock ledge on the northeast side of the island (175 - August 1964, 82 - June 1966); in an area of low grass at the north end of the island (150 - September 1967); on the wide south beach (400 to 500 - September 1967); and on the broad point of the south- west beach (200 - September 1967). On some visits (March 1965, 1968), birds were so abundant that they almost covered all beaches. On such visite it was difficult if not impossible to pick out discrete flocks. At night these birds roost under vegetation or in small clearings in the vegetation, and on rock outcroppings on the island perimeter. Most birds seen at night in the interior are widely scattered. usually roosting solitarily or by twos. In March 1965 birds were particularly common at night under dense Scaevola along the northeast perimeter. Largest nocturnal roosting concentrations were twice noted on the wave-sculpted rocks along the north and northeast perimeters. In August and September 1967 and March 1968 up to several hundred birds roosted in this area, crouching down in the hollows of the rock. Specimens Twenty-four Ruddy Turnstones, 11 males, 11 females, and 2 of un- determined sex, were collected by the POBSP (Tdble 35). Banding and Movements Ruddy Turnstones totalling 485 have been banded on Lisianski, 178 by the POBSP and 307 by the BSFW (Table 36). On 20 March 1968, six of the oirds banded the previous September were recaptured on Lisianski. None of the birds banded on Lisianski has been recaptured elsewhere. In addition, five turnstones that were banded by the POBSP on St. George Island, Alaska, were subsequently collected or recaptured on Lisianski (Appendix Table 13). Table 34. Observations of Ruddy Turnstones on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Remarks and References 1823 3 Apr. 2 Some "Snipe" or a species of "Sandpiper" seen in flocks by Isenbeck (Rothschild, 1893-1900: 4). 1891 29 June- ? Noted by Palmer on 29 June (Rothschild, kh July 1893-1900: xii). 1915 2h Mar. 12 (Munter. 1915: 136). 1923 15-20 May 4 Seen on 16 May (Wetmore, ms.). 1954 26 Mar. 200 - 300 (Richardson, pers. comm.). 1961 9 Mar. ? Flock of 100+ (Woodside and Kramer, ms.). 1963 14 Feb. 200 - 300 Large flocks on eastern and southern beaches (POBSP). 12-13 Mar. ? Flock of several hundred on rocks along east shore (POBSP). 1964 11-12 Mar. 1,000 Count of 725 on 12 March (BSFW, POBSP). 21-23 Aug. 200 Flock of ca. 175 om rocks at northeast end (POBSP). 18 Sept. 900-1 ,000 Count of 868. Flocks of from 250-600 (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar. 1,000-2,000 lLerge flocks (POBSP). 14-17 July 200 Flock of LOO+ on rocks along shore (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June 150 Count of 119 on 18 June; includes flock of 82 on rocky outcropping at northeast end of island. About 25% in or near full breeding plumage (POBSP). 19 Sept. 150 Along shoreline (BSFW). 18=20 Oct. 700 Count of 500 en) 1S) October.) Mostmbands along beaches in flocks of 30-100+. Most in winter plumage (POBSP). 1967 20 Mar. 100 Seen during partial survey of island (BSFW, POBSP) . 2-6 June 100-300 (POBSP). i>) 1é5 126 Table 34. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Remarks and References 1967 31 Aug.- b;700 Estimate based on partial counts around 5 Sept. perimeter on 31 August. Considerably more common on north, west. and south beaches than on east beach. Largest flock contained 4oO-500 birds. Tlumage ranged from drab winter plumage to full breeding plumage (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 1,000 Abundant along beaches; commonly observed in interior (ESFW, POBSP). Table 35. Specimens of Ruddy Turnstones from Listanski Island Mus. Col Mus: Nos’. 992. Mus. Nos. 9 270 Mus. Nos. Date Coll. Coll: USNM 1 4gh143 ee Aug. 1964 POBSP USNM 11 497536, oe Geeen 2 ho7538 17-18 June POBSP SiS joey 333), S4uuhs 1966 543332, SUMS , SLUT, 448 450, 449,531, 533,534, 58255494 549-551 29259515 Table 36. Ruddy Turnstones banded on Lisianski Island Period Bender Number Banded 1963 Mar. POBSP 28 1964 Mar. BSEW TT 1967 Aug.-Sept. FOBSP 150 Sept. BSFW 56 1963 Mar. BSFW ah Total 435 SANDERLING Crocethia alba Status Uncommon migrant; maximum recent estimate 2O. kecorded in February, March, May, June, August and September. Found primarily along the sandy beaches. 27 Populations and Annual Cycle Table 37 lists all known observations of Sanderlings on Lisianski. Although only recently reported from the island (Clapp and Woodward, 1968: 22), this species probably occurs in small numbers every year. Ecology These birds have been seen all around the outer beaches of the is- land, most frequently along the sandy beaches on the south and west. Four were seen sitting on a rocky outcrop off the east shore in March 1965 where some may roost at night. The only nocturnal observations were of two or three birds found roosting along the west beach above the waterline on 20 March 1968. Specimens A wnale that was captured by Clapp with a hand net along the west beach on 20 March 1968 is the only specimen that has been collected. This bird (USNM 543338) was very fat, weighing 52.8 grams, and was molting in the body feathers. The largest testis measured 2.5 x 1.5 mm. Table 37. Oodservations of Sanderlings on Lisianski Island © Population Date or Survey Estimate Remarks and Keferences 1913 12 Mar. fairly (Willett, ms.). common 1923 15-20 May 0 (Wetmore, ms.). 1954 26 Mar. 25-30 (Richardson, pers. comm.). 1955 8 May 10-15 (POBSP). 1963 14 Feb. 20 At numerous points around the beaches: 8-10 in mixed shorebird flock on south- east beach; 9 in one flock on north beach (POBSP). 1964 11-12 Mar. 20 Count of 12 on outer beach on 12 March (BSFW, POBSP). 21-23 Aug. 0 (POBSP) . 18 Sept. 2 (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar. h-6 4 sitting on reef off east shore: 2 flying in flocks of plovers and turn- stones (POBSP). Table 37. (continued) Population Dete of Survey Estimate Kkemarks and Keferences 1965 14-17 July 0 (POBSF). 1966 16-19 June 9) (FOBSP) . 13-29) Octe @) (POBSP) . 1967 20 Mar. 3) Seen on west beach during partial survey (BSFW, FPOBSP). 2-6 June 3 Birds in winter plumage on northwest beach (POBSP).. 31 Aug.- 3 All in winter plumage. Occasionally seen FSS TONe 5 along east beaches but usually along sandy margins of west and southwest beaches (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 6-8 All in winter plumage; 4 seen at once along northwest beach but 1-3 birds most often seen along west beach (BSFW, POBSP). PECTORAL or SHARP-TAILED SANDPIPER Erolia melanotos or acuminata Status Accidental; sight records October 1966. Observations Lewis reported a "Pectoral?" Sandpiper in the interior of Lisisanski on 18 October 1966. On the same date Harrington noted "2 Sharp-tails (?)." No details were given in field notes but it seems likely that one or the other of the above species was seen since both species regularly occur in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. Their occurrence on Lisianski, which has no interior pool or lagoon, is undoubtedly considerably less frequent than on atolls (such as Midway and Laysan) that possess them. HERRING GULL larus argentatus vegae Accidental; one record February 1963. Observations Wirtz saw and shot at a Herring Gull offshore Lisianski on 14 Feb- ruary 1963. Sibley collected it on the east beach later that day. This 129 gull (USNM 493353), a female in first nuptial plumage, is the only record of the Herring Gull from the island (Clapp and Woodward, 1968: 26). GLAUCOUS-WINGED GULL Larus glaucescens eee oe eee Status Rare visitor; two records March 1965, March 1968. Remarks A male in first nuptial plumegea (USNM 494133) was collected by Clapp on 12 March 1965. It was shot near the southeast point of the island but was only wounded and swam out to sea. Late the same night, Stadel and Clapp captured it on the south beach about = mile from where it had been shot. A second gull was seen by Clapp on 20 March 1968 as it flew along the crest of the northeast beach. He collected the bird on the southweet beach the following day. The specimen (USNM 543339), not reported hereto- fore, is a very fat female in second winter plumage. Glaucous-winged Gulls are frequent visitors to the main Hawaiian islands in winter and have been recorded previously from most of the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands (Clapp and Woodward. 1968: 27). GRAY-BACKED TERN Sterna lunata Status Common breeder; maximum recent estimate 15.000. Present from at least February through early September but most breeding occurs from mid- March through late July. fFrobably absent from the island when not breeding or forming breeding colonies. Nests in scattered colonies on the ground over much of the island surface. Populations Since several recent March surveys were diurnal only, and since numbers may be much greater at night during the inception of the breeding season, most of the differences between March estimates (Table 38) probably are not significant. The difference between the March 1964 and March 1965 estimates, when nocturnal surveys were made, may indicate a real difference in population levels--a difference that probably resulted from differences in the timing of the breeding cycle in these years. Wetmore's estimate is significantly Lower than recent estimates made in June. The present breeding population is evidently 10 to 30 times as large as in 1923, presumably because far more nesting habitat is now avail- able. 13) Annual Cycle Lisianski Gray-backed Terns have an annual breeding cycle, which varies little from year to year. These terns arrive at the island a month or more before egg-laying begins and leave the island shortly after the breeding season is completed. On Lisianski, as on other Northwestern Hewaiian Islands, the breeding cycle of the Gray-backed Tern is several weeks earlier than that of the Sooty Tern. Initiation of laying usually oecurs about mid-March but occasionally occurs earlier or later. The presence of a recently hatched young in mid-March 1965 indicates that at least some eggs were laid by mid-Feoruary that year. In the previous year none was known to be laid until the latter half of March. ‘The small number of birds and nests with eges seen in late March 1967 and 1968 suggests that in both these years laying began in Merch. In addition, the predominance of fledged young in mid-June 1966 suggests that a laying peak occurred about three months earlier, or in mid-March. ‘The June 1967 observations, on the other hand, suggest a somewhat later laying peak, probably late April or early May. On the whole, the data suggest that the egg peak usually falls between mid- or late Merch and mid- or late April but laying probably continues at a reduced level through mid-May. If this is true, the hatching peak probably occurs from mid- or late April through mid- or late May. The single set of observations made during this period (1923) . while not detailed, seems to fit this pattern. Most fledging probably occurs about two-months after the hatching peak, or from mid- or late June through mid- or late July. A few birds from eggs laid in May fledge in August, primarily during the first two weeks of the month. Ecology Breeding: During FOBSP surveys, Gray-backed Terns have nested over much of the island. Eggs were usually placed under vegetation--the thick Scaevola on the island perimeter, the more open, partially dead Scaevola in the interior, or the clumps of Eragrostis in the sandy areas. On at least one occasion (July 1965), most of the Gray-backed Terns were found nesting around the perimeter of the Sooty Tern colony. Non-breeding: The decreasing numbers of Gray-backed Terns towards the end of the nesting season, and the relatively small numbers present at its beginning, suggest that these terns are absent from the island during non- breeding periods. aiaceae Specimens We have records or tive study skins ot Gray-backed Terns from Lisianski: two unsexed birds (USNM 191501-502) contiscated trom the Japanese 16 June 1904 by the U.S. Treasury: a male (USNM 200627) col- lected by Wetmore 18 May 1923; and two birds collected by the POBSP, mele (USNM 494124) collected 13 March 1965 and an unsexed bird (USNM 45022) collected 2 September 1967. There is, in addition. a skull a : (USNM 289225) collected by Wetmore 17 May 1923. Bending and Movements Tn March 1965 POBSP personnel banded 374 adults, 200 of them on eggs. None. has been recaptured. Table 38. Observations of Gray-backed Terns on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, HKemarks and References 1828 3 Apr. ? Probably seen by Isenbeck (see Rothschild, 1893-1900: v-vi). 1891 29 June- 2 Palmer noted that a few Gray-backed Terns k July were on the island on 30 June (in Rothschild, 1893r xis). [RSE Beebe 2 Nesting in considerable numbers (Willett, ms.) 1915 24 Mar. 500 l eggs found (Munter, 1915: 136). 1923 15-20 May 509 Eggs and young present, but mostly recently hatched to well-grown young (Wetmore, ms.). 1951l 13 May ? (POFI). 1954 26 Mer. 300 (Richardson, pers. comm.). 1961 9 Mar. few seen Usually on eggs (Woodside and Kramer, ms.). 1963 14 Feb. 200 No nests found (POBSP) 12-13 Mar. 2 No nests found (POBSP). 1964 11-12 Mar. 500 Ca. 50-100 on ground but no nests found (BSFW, POBSP). 21-23 Aug. 3 2 immatures; not breeding (POBSP). 18 Sept. ) (BSFW, FOBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar. 2 ,000- At least 1,000 nests with eggs but only 1 3 ,000 recently hatched young seen (POBSP). 14-17 July 300 Only fledged or near-fledging immatures (ca. 100) present (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June 500 Ca. 1,000 nests with eggs and 2,500 young; mostly fledged young but some small young (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. ©) (POBSP) . Le Table 38. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1967 20 Mar. low 100's 26 nests with eggs, 1 at least slightly incubated (BSFW, POBSP). 2-6 June ILS) JO10) From eggs to nalf-grown young; most nests with eggs; estimated 5,000 nests (POBSP). 31 Aug.- 20 Nesting season essentially completed; only 5 Sept. a few large young found, most of them ap- parently abandoned and starving: very few adults (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 1,000 Only eggs present (BSFW, POBSP). SOOTY TERN Sterna fuscata Status Abundant breeder; maximum recent estimate 1,700,000. Present from mid-February through October but most nesting occurs from April through early September. Nests on the ground over much of the interior of the island. Fopulations Although the largest recent estimate, made in early June 1957, seems large compared with ail other population estimates (excepting perhaps the June 1966 estimate), it was based on density counts applied to total nest- ing area and is perhaps more accurate than some of the other estimates. POBSP estimates for other islands where careful attempts have been made to determine population size have consistently shown that visual estimates often greatly underestimate numbers present. Thus we feel that peak popu- lations on Lisianski reach a million birds and very possibly more. Comparison of recent estimates (Table 39) with those made in 1923 clearly show that populations are much larger now than then. Like both the Great Frigatebird and White Tern, this species was abundant at the turn of the century; numbers decreased markedly as a result of feather gathering activities and devegetation of the island and have increased markedly with the return of the vegetation. Annual Cycle Sooty Terns usually return to Lisianski about February but for a month to six weeks swirl over the island in pre-breeding flocks. The various recent March observations indicate that although numbers may oe fairly large, few birds may be on the ground. Judging from recent 133 observations, laying begins in April but the peak laying period is usually from mid-May through early June (probably 1891, and 1964 through 1967). A few young may hatch in late April but the reak hatching period usually falls from mid-June through early July. Birds may fledge from early July through September or October, but probably only a very small proportion fledze im the Latter month. Our data are not precise enough to allow any extended discussion of yearly variations in breeding cycles. The Sooty Tern cycle on Lisianski seems quite consistent from year to year. Data from 1964, 1966, and 1967 seem quite comparable. The July 1965 observations, on the other hand, perhaps indicate an earlier than usual termination of the breeding cycle. Beology Breeding: At least in recent years the population has been distributed among a number of colonies (about 8 in August 1964) marked by slight dif- ferences in nesting cycle. Nesting occurs chiefly in the Eragrostis association in the center of the island (Fig. ho). Smaller numbers nest under the edges of Scaevola clumps (occasionally in fairly dense Scaevola patches) and in open areas in Ipomoea. In June 1966 some birds nested in thicker Scaevola than is typical for this species in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. Non-breeding: After breeding. most adults desert the colony or return only at night. Most nightly concentrations form in the vicinity of chicks or in open areas. Birds may form “roosting flocks” composed entirely of adults or of adults and flying immatures. In 1966 and 1967 a few non- incubating birds were observed resting on Scaevola bushes. Specimens We have records of €4 study skins of specimens collected on Lisianski: 4 unsexed birds (USNM 191503-506) confiscated from the Japanese 16 June 1904 by the U.S. Treasury; an adult male (USNM 200584), an edult female (USNM 300585). and a juvenile female (USNM 300586) collected by Wetmore 16-19 May 1923; and 17 specimens collected by the FOBSP: 1 adult female (USNM 495461) collected just offshore 16 July 1965, 9 adult males (USNM 542927, 543020. 544620, 544625, 544783, 544785-786, 544789, 544791), 6 adult females (USNM 542925-926, 544784 544787-788 544790) and 1 unsexed adult (USNM 544705). The latter 16 birds were all collected 19 June 1966. Banding and Movements The POBSP banded 50,097 Sooty Terns on Lisianski (Table 40). Eighteen of these birds were subsequently recaptured on other islands or at sea: 10 on nearby Laysan Island, 2 on Johnston Atoll, and 1 each at Midway Atoll, at sea, in Japan, and at Phoenix Island (Appendix Table tha). In addition, 41 Sooty Terns banded on other islands were recaptured on Lisianski: 20 from Laysan Island, 10 from Johnston Atoll, 6 from Midway Atoll, © each from French Frigaté Shoals and Pearl and Hermes Reef, and one from Wake Island (Appendix Table 14b). au gc pue -ucy1eus °O°d Aq ydeasojyoud qsqol “9961 euNr gT ‘pueTSt ooo ujyszou 3sy4 Teou sdunys s TUSCIsely suo we puncis uc Suzay, Ayocg Sutpeaiqetg Ls ESp Table 39. Observations of Sooty Terns on Lisianski Island i Fopulation Fopu Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1891 29 June- "ia great "Young very small" (Palmer in Rothschild, 4 July abundance... 1893-1900: xi). by far the most numerous paleccy’ 1913 12 Mer. plentiful (Willett, ms.). 1915 24 Mer. 1,000 Not yet nesting (Munter, 1915: 136). 1923 15-20 May 500 Mostly on eggs, no young present (Wetmore, ms.). 1954 26 Mar. 2,000 Richardson, pers. comm.). 1955 8 May Z No eggs seen (FPOFI). 1961 Q Mar. large Flocks swirling overhead (Woodside and numbers Kramer, ms.). 1963 14 Feb. ? Flocks swirling overhead, none on ground (POBSF). 12-13 Mar. large Flocks swirling overhead; only a few sit- numbers ting on ground. No nests with eggs found (POBSP). 1964 11-12 Mar. 50 ,000- Most swirling overhead; only about 800- 100 ,OOO 1,000 on ground. No nests with eggs found (POBSP). 21-23, Auge 60 ,000 Ca. 40,000 young from about 1/3 grown to near-fledging. Small numbers of fledged young (POBSP). 18 Sept. 4 ,000- ledged and near-fledging young observed 5 ,090 (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mer. 3 ,500- One flock of ca. 3,000-4,000 swirling over 4 ,600 south end; one of 500-600 swirling over north end. Only terns from former group sitting on ground. No nests with eggs found (POBSP). 14-17 July 300 ,000 Ca. 50,000 young, most of them near fledg- ing; a few nests with eggs. Population estimate includes ca. 50,000 fledged young ( POBSP) . Table 39. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1966 16-19 June 1,000,000 Ca. 250,000 nests wigh eggs (95%); ca. 10,000 young (5%). Almost all young recently hatched (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. ho Non-breeding. Several flying immatures and cripoled immatures present from preceding breeding season (POBSP). 1967 20 Mar. 5 ,000- Swirling overhead; no nests found (BSFW, 8,000 POBSP) . 2-6 June IL HOO .COO Most birds preparing to lay or with fresh eggs. Some moderate and heavily incubated eggs and a few small chicks present. An estimated 400,000 birds with nests (POBSP). 31 Aug.- 15,000 Large chicks to flying young. Most birds 5 Sept. with large chicks (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 5500 On ground by day but no nests found (BSFW, POBSP). Table 40. Sooty Terns banded on Lisianski Island Period of Survey Adults Young loses 1964 August 5,400 1,500 6 ,900 1965 July 5,500 1,500 7,000 1966 June 30 ,000 @) 30 ,O00 1967 June 6 ,000 @) 6,000 September 197 O 197 Totals 47,097 3,000 50 ,097 BROWN NODDY Anous stoLlidus Status Common breeder; maximum recent estimate 15,000. Probably present throughout year but decidedly fewer present during early spring and pre- sumably winter. Breeds primarily from March or April through September Ushi or October. Nests in loose colonies or in widely scattered individual sites. Most nests built on the ground under Scaevola or other dense vege- tation, but some built off the ground in Sceaevola. Populations Although variable, the population estimates are consistent enough from year to year to show thet numbers of birds present in March are far fewer than in June through October (Table #1). The large difference between the February and March estimates suggests that much, if not most, of the population is absent from the island during periods of non- or reduced breeding. One of the two early estimates (1915) does not very significantly from recent estimates made at the same time of year. Wetmore's late May (1923 estimate of 1,000 btirds, however. seems significantly lower than either of the recent June estimates. Ftresumably the population suffered some re- duction in numbers as did most other species when the island was nearly pare of vegetation. Annual Cycle The Lisianski Brown Noddy population apparently breeds on an annual basis, although the beginning and end of the nesting season may not coincide from year to year. Laying evidently begins in March or April, but some birds have laid as early as February (1965) On many March visits (1915, 1964, 1967) no nests were found, which suggests that the laying peek occurs in subsequent months. The observations from June 1966 and 1967 suggest a May to June laying peak, and the July 1965 observations. while not as com-, plete, appear to fit this schedule. Relatively few eggs were seen on August and September visits, and none was found on the single October visit. This suggests that laying was largely completed by July. If, as we suspect, the normal laying peak is in May and June, it follows that the hatching peak occurs from June through July, and that most fledging occurs about two months later in August and Septemoer. Most of the observations fit well into this proposed scheme of breed- ing. The observations from August 1964, which indicate no breeding. are Ddviously erroneous in view of observations made a month later. Keo loay Breeding: During the peak of the nesting season in mid-summer. Brown Yoddies nest over the entire vegetated portion of the island. ‘They seem to prefer nesting under fairly dense vegetation, such ae Scaevola, Ivomoea- covered Scaevola, or thick clumps of Eragrostis (iar SO). An occasional nest is built one to three feet off the ground in Scaevola, but well over 90 percent are built on the ground. Greater nesting densities are found in areas which have more luxuriant Scaevola (i.e. the outer perimeter of the "ucy aug *O°d Aq yderseyoud gsdo{ ‘9961 euNL 61 ‘e[CAaebog Tapun 4seu ut SSa SutTgeqnout Appcn umerg *CG eunsTy Le) island). Of 26 nests tabulated in June 1967, 16 (62 percent) were under Scaevola; 4 (15 percent) were under Scaevola and Ipomoea; 4 (15 percent) were under Eragrostis; 1 (4 percent) was under Scaevola and Eragrostis; eee St ee and 1 (4 percent) was found beneath Ipomoea. In 1923 Wetmore (ms. ) found these noddies nesting principally in the interior and along the eastern shore. At that time they preferred to nest in little depressions in the sand, often at the entrance td an oid shear- water burrow. The nests themselves are often bulky constructions of vegetation and debris. Thirty nests were examined to determine what nesting materials were used: 28 (93 percent) contained Eragrostis; 26 (87 percent) contained Scaevola; 5 (17 percent) contained bones; and 1 (3 percent) contained Tribulus. Most of the nests (28) contained more than one material in varying proportions, but two were built solely of Eragrostis leaves and stems. Wetmore (ms.) noted that nest depressions were "filled with a varied collection of small bones and feathers in lieu of other nesting material.” Non-breeding: Non-breeding Brown Noddies commonly occurred in sev- eraleauedc oureno une day, flocks of from 10 to 50 birds xroosted on the beaches. At night many roosted solitarily or in small flocks in the Scae- vola in the interior of the island. During both day and night, scattered individual adults and immatures roosted under Scaevola or overhanging tufts of Eragrostis. Occasionally Brown Noddies roosted in Casuarina trees, but, proportionately. this species utilized these trees for roosting far less than did the Black Noddies. Specimens We know of 2O Brown Noddy specimens from Lisianski, all of which are in the USNM. Two males (USNM 300518-519) were collected by Wetmore 17 May 1923. Eighteen, 7 males (USNM 496602, 604. 606, 608, 611, 613, 615) and Ll females (USNM 495541, 496601, 503. 605, 607, 609-610, 612, 614, 616- 617) were collected by the POBSP 17 to 19 June 1966. Banding and Movements POBSP personnel banded Brown Noddies only during the August and September 1967 survey. At this time, 1,507 were banded: 1,330 adults, 107 immatures, 20 nestlings, and 50 whose age was unrecorded. Two returns have been made of birds banded on other islands. A nestling banded on Kure Atoll in July 1964 was found roosting on Lisianski in September 1967, and a local young banded on Whale-Skate Island, French Frigate Shoals. in June 1963, was recaptured on Lisianski in August 1964 (Appendix Table 15). | L40 | Teble 41. Observations of Brown Noddies on Lisianski Islend | Population Date of Survey Ectimate Breeding Status, Kemarks and keferences 1891 29 June- ws Evidently present and nesting (Munro. | 4 July 194le: 2). LORS o ) ke Man. i Nesting in moderate numbers (Willett. | ies )) 1915 eh Mar. 300 No breeding (Munter, 1915: 136). 1923 15-20 May COO Most nests empty but a few contained eggs (Wetmore, ms.) 1950 2h June ? Nesting on the ground (POFI). 1951L 13 May 2 (POFL). | 1954 26 Mar. 10-20 (Richardson, pers. comm.). 1963 14 Feb. 200 (POBSP) . 1964 11-12 Mer. 25 Not breeding (BSFW, POBSP) | 100-200 (Walker, ms.). | 21-23 Aug. 2,000 No evidence of breeding; 20% of population | composed of fledged immatures (POBSP) | 18 Sept. 3,000 Egzs to flying young (BSFW, POBSP). 1965) 12-1) Wari. 2002500 Fges and small chicks (POBSP). Ly-17 July, 110),090 Ca. 3.000 young; partly incubated eggs to near-fledging young (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June 15,000 Ca. 5.000 nests with eggs; ca. 100 with recently hatched young; no large young seen (POBSP). 18-20 Oct. 4,000 Not breeding; estimate includes flying im- matures (POBSP). 1967 20 Mar. 15 No evidence of breeding (BSFW, POBSP). 2-6 June 15 ,000 Eggs to medium-sized young; more than GU% ol nests with eggs; estimated 5,000 nests (POBSP). i de ps) Table 41. (continued) Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References — L967) Se Aue. KOE OCS Eggs to flying young; mostly large young 5 Sept. ana dependent immatures. many recently fledged; estimated 100 small downy young; be0GO" lance chucks, andicax 27000) dependent immatures (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mar. 160 Few eggs (BSFW, POBSP) BLACK NODDY Anous tenuirostris Common breeder; maximum recent estimate 5,000. Breeding has occurred from late December through eariy August but most breeding probably occurs from late January through late July. Nests in Scaevola bushes end Casuarina trees. Populations Maximal populations on Lisianski ere in the Low thousands (Table 42) but we do not know whether most of the birds present on a given visit are part of the breeding population. when not breeding, this species is often found in large numbers both in the Northwestern Haweiian Islands and on islands to the south, sometimes in large roosting flocks on islands on which it does not breed. In addition, band return data suggest that for central Pacific seabirds these terns are e@mong the most frequent inter- island visitors. It is likely that large fall populations, such as that seen in October 1966, may contain many birds whose nesting island is not Lisianski. ‘The extreme range of the few estimates from late August through October (100 to 1,500) suggests that Lisianski Black Noddies frequently move in large qumbers out to sea or to other islands. Comparisons of recent numerical estimates with those made in 1915 and 1923 do not indicate any clearcut change in populations since that time. Annual Cycle Too little data are available on nesting in winter months to deter- mine adequately when nesting is usually initiated. Interpolation from avéilable observations indicates that laying often occurs in January (ONS, 1965. 1967 1968) and once occurred in late December (1963). On nearby laysan, a few birds have laid as early as November and it seems likely that similar early laying may occur on Lisianski. lLeying continues through April and May and eggs are present into June. The absence of young on two So” r= ND August visits suggests either that no eggs are laid in June or that no nests initiated in June are successful. The various sample counts do not indicate an egg peak but rather suggest that laying occurs continually over & fairly Long period from at) least early February throushy late April. The earliest and latest that hatching is known to have occurred is Late January (1964) and mid-June (1966 and probably 1967). The earliest and letest times of fledging that are indicated by our data are'mid-March (1964) and late July or early August (1965, probably 1967). Beolosy Breeding: Black Noddies nest both in Scaevola bushes and Casuarina trees on Lisianski but seem to prefer the taller. somewhat more open suarina (Fig. 51). POBSP field notes do not indicate that any specific Evole area ms favored for nest ne oven icin wolme ter Nests in the Casuarina trees are on tne whole situated furtner off the ground than the nests found, in Seaevola.. Heights of Jia nests inivone Casuarina tree measured in March 1967 ranged frome anchesi colo eat soit the ground snd had a mean height of 4.5 feet. Nests in Secaevola during the same survey were all at heights between 18 and 32 inches. Nests in the Casuarina trees were usually saddled on forks of Limbs, but one aest was placed on a number of small branches. ‘The ic nests men- tioned above had maximum widths varying from 6 to 13 inches and a mean maximum width of 7.4 inches. ‘Their maximum depths ranged from 2.5 to 6 inches with a mean of 4.4 inches. Nest meterials in the nests in the Cesuarina trees arpeaned 1G Dp icl= more varied than in nests in Scaevola, at least in March 196/. All neste in €caevola that were examined were built solely sf grass and mornings Ba lbropeayy (Ipomoea) . Wests in the Casuarina tree were big bu of poeaeuola Portulaca, Boerhavia, Tribulus, “Eragrostis leaves of Ivromoea, and seversl minds of jseaweed.., One, nest, contaaned) five ‘en Fortuguesce men-of-wer. Hoarbree ding: Non-breeding Black Noddies roost primarily in Scaevols end Casuarina. ema bl, numbens,, usua Why, individual) binds: on small syrours si up’ to 10 birds, “occasionally roost with Browmloddiles Goa Whe socaches faz rocks of the island perimeter. Certain areas of Scaevola apvear t5> be pre- ferred for roosting. Larger flocks and greater numbers of roosting birds were usually found in the higher Scaevola at the southeast end of the island and above the west shore, than in the Scaevola above the eest beach and in the interior. Svecimens We kaow of 15 study skins: 2 males (USNM 200454-455) collected by j Wetmore 17 and 19 May 1923 respectively; 9 males (USNM 544112. 113, 11 120-123), 3 females (USNM 544114, 118, 119), and an unsexed bird (USNM 544124) collected by the POBSP 19 June 1966. Seu FOBSP Recently hatched Black Noddy chick in nest in Casuarine, 12 March 1964. photograph by A.B. Amerson, Jr. Figure 51. 7 ) Lay Banding and Movements POBSP personnel banded 3240 Black Noddies on Lisianski (Table 43). Seven have been recaptured subsequently on other islands: 5 at French Frigate Shoals. and 1 each at Kure Atoll and Jchnston Atoll (Anpendix Table 16a). Seven Black Noddies banded on other islands have been re- captured on Lisianski: 2 each from French Frigate Shoals and Fearl and Hermes Kkeef, and 1 each from J hnston Atoll, Laysan Island, and Midway Atoll (Appendix Table’ 16b). Table 42. Observations of Black Noddies on Lisianski Island Dete of Eurvey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and Feferences 1891 #9 June- ? i Stated to breed on Lisianski by Rothschild 4 July (1893-1900: 43) evidently as a result o£ Palmer's observations. 1913 12 Mar. ? (Willett, ms.) 1915 2) Mer: 1,000 Eggs and young in 2 colonies (Munter, LOLS LAGNre 1923 15-20 May LOO) None found nesting (Wetmore, ms.) 1950 24 June 2 Nesting in Casuarina (POFI). 1951 13 Msy g (POFI). 1954 26 Mer. 60-80 (Richardson, pers. comm.) 1963 J Feb: 300 Many building nests but no eggs (Kramer, ms.). 12-13 Mar. 2 Nesting (POBSP). 1964 - 11-12 Mar. L000 Ca. 200 nests present; ca. 50% with eggs, 400-5001 ca. 50% with young: young from recently hatched to fledglinzs (BSFW, POBSP). 21-23 Aug 400 Not breeding (POBSP). 18 Sept 100 Not breeding (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar 1,000- Ce. 4OO nests, most with pre-laying birds . 5 .000 or eggs (some fresh): a few with small young (POBSP). 14-17 July 1,500 Ca. 300 young from half-grown to flying Population immatures (POBSP). Table 42. (continued) 1967 1968 1969 Table Date of fSurve —) = Soin Papulat lon 18-20 Oct. 1D Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 000 A few dozen nests with young froma few days oid to near-fledging; ca. 20% of population composed of fledged immatures (POBSP). 500 Not breeding (POBSP). ©O Mar. 350-500 Nest construction to nearly fledged young. 2-6 June 34 3 Ang. = l, 5 Sept. 20-21 Mar. 5 30 Mer. >5 Loe vacrn Nod da. Of e sample 45 nests with contents, 30 (67%) contained eggs, 5 (11%) contained small downy young, and LO (22%) contained near-fledging young. O90 large young; most nests with egzs; s counted. Sample count of 290 ele (73%) with eggs, 60 (21%) with young, and 18 (6%) with medium-sized ge young (FOBSP). 000 No nests with eggs or young present (POBSP). elo ins 00 Fresh eggs to large young; most eggs (ca. 75%) moderately to heavily incubated. Sample nest count of 156 nests with con- tents: 105 (67%) with eggs, 30 (19%) with small downy young, 10 (6%) with medium-sized young, and 11 (7%) with large downy young (BSFW, POBSP). 20 260 nests counted. Ca. half of nests with eggs, half with young. es banded on Lisianski Period of Survey Adults Young Totals 1964 Mar fe) 100 LOO Aug 10 0) 10 i967 Sept: 196 0) 196 1968 Mar. 20 14 2h Totals 226 it 346 WHITE TERN Gygis alba Uncommon breeder; maximum recent estimate 500. trobably present throughout year but most breeding occurs from March or April through August. Single egg is laid on limbs of Casuarina trees or in Ecaevola bushes. Populations Recent population estimates (Table 44) are too variable to assess accurately variation in numbers throughout the year. but they seem to indicate that maximal numbers are present in summer anda fall witn smaller numbers present in spring. The August and September 1964 estimates are inexplicably Lower than other estimates for about that time of year. Judging from the trend of estimates, the maximal population present at any one time is less than 2 thousand birds--probably 250 or more. It is evident that the copulation has increased considerably since 1923 when Wetmore saw these birds only twice--one bird on 15 May and two hovering over the camp on the evening of the l/th. In less than /O years this species went from "great abundance” (1891) to near extirpation (1923) to dace again fairly abundant (1960's) Annuel Cyele The svailable data on White Tern breeding activities on Lisianski suggest that breeding can occur from late January or early February (1964) through October (1967). Observations on neerby Laysan indicate that some individuals breed November to January; it seems likely that some winter breeding occasionally occurs here. Data from most surveys are too sparse adequately to document yearly peaks of breeding, but the few summer observations suggest that a breeding peak is reached in June and July, with most of the population breeding from March or April through July and August.» Most eggs are iaid from late March through about late June. The egs peak probably occurs about April or May. Heolos Breeding: White Tern nests have been found oniy in Casuarina trees and in Scaevola bushes. By far the larger proportion of nests found was in Casuarina trees (Fig. 52) probably tecause these nests are more readily observed than those in Scaevola. POBSP field notes indicate that nests of White Terns were found in Scaevole wherever it occurs on the island. They do not indicate any preference for one height of Scaevola nor for one Aaned oin baer sulandl. All nests found were above the substrate but in some instances they were but a few inches above ground. An egg observed in Casuarine in March OO "If ‘ucsiauy *gey Aq ydersoycud dSdOd “961 YOLEN CT ‘eUTIeNSeD UT a4TSs 4YSeU UO YOTYO utay aqTym payorey ATAQUAaDOy "2G eansty 148 1965 was no more than 6 inches above the ground: another observed in a Casuarina in March 1967 was 1l inches above the ground. Non-breeding: The smaller population estimates made at the beginning and end of the breeding season suggest that at least some non-breeding birds leave the island. Veta from banding activities. however, suggest thet at least some birds present during the breeding season are non-breeding birds. Most of these birds Poosusum the anecac sedi ionneG ine: Specimens We know of only one specimen from Lisianski, an unsexed bird (USNM 191500) confiscated by the U.S. Treasury Department 16 June 1904. Bandins and Movements Table © lists the numbers of White Terns banded on various surveys by the FORSF snd BSFW. Four POBSP-banded birds have been recaptured on Lisianski, one of them twice. Although the returns were made in years other than the year of panding, returns on two terns banded as adults suggest that these birds remain on the island for much of the year. One bird (6832-46193) banded in mid-Msrch 1965 was vresent in both early June and early September 1967. Another (682-46226), probably banded in mid-March 1965, was present in mid-October 1960. None has been recaptured on other islands and none banded on other islands has been recaptured on Lisianski. Tsble 44. Observations of White Terns on Lisianski Island Population Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Kemarns and heferences i391 29 June- in great Presence of eggs suggested by Rothschild 4 July abundance (1893-1900: 36). Occurrence also noted by Munro (1941b: 2). 1923 15-20 May. 2 None found nesting (Wetmore, ms.) 1950 24 June ? Nesting in Casuarina (POFI). 1954 €6 Mar. 20 - 30 (Richardson, pers. comm. ). 1963 14 Feo. 50 No evidence of breeding (POBSP). 1964 11-12 Mar. L5O=209 Ca. 1O='5 nests Mos LyaiWwieneSaS wey OUas (BSFW, POBSF). 21-23 Aug. 50 No nests found but an adult seen carrying A agL isin sa ies foil (ROSE). 1k9 Table 44. (continued) Population Dste of Surve Estimate Breeding Status. Remarks and References 1964 18 Sept. 15-25 Several immatures capable of flight (BSFW, POBSP) 1965 12-14 Mer. 100 = 1°50 Ca. 15 nests with eggs: no young (POBSP). 14-17 July 500 Young. from recently hatched to fledged; no eggs (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June 250 3 nests with eggs and 1 with a week-old nestling (FOBSP) 18-20 Oct. 350 None breeding (FOBSP). 1967 20° Mar. 4O* 1 nest with egg and 1 with a half-grown 20 young (FOBSP). e-6 June 500 Eggs to half-grown young: most nests with eggs. Estimated £00 nests (BSFW, FOBSP). 31 Aug.- 250 > nests, Liwivh van eso obhers with youns 5 Sept. from large downy to stub-tailed immatures; at least 5 other dependent flyins’ imme- tures (POBSP). 1968 20-21 Mer. 100 No nests (BSFW, POBSP). 1969 30 Mer. 13* No nests seen (BSFW). *Counted along the beach rim. Teble 45. White Terns banded on Lisianski Island Fennad oF Survey Bander Adjults Immatures Nesmaimuess meets 1964 Merch BSFW 25 - - 25 August POBSP 5, = = D 1965 March POBSP 10 - ~ 10 1967 August- POBSF ie 5 nM 80 Sevtember Totals LLL 5 in Leo mmels EUROPEAN RABBIT Oryctolagus cuniculus Status Introduced, probably from Leysan after 1904. Extinct between March 1915 and February 1916. Observations The exact date when rabbits were introduced to Lisianski is unknown Bryan (1942: 192) quite accurately stated that "At some time prior to Elschner's visit fin 1914] . rebbits had been introduced. probably from Leysan. whence they had been brought by Max Schlemmer.” Subsequent authors have apparently taken this comment and others about rabbits on Leysan and have given more specific (but apparently fictitious) dstes for their in- troduction to Lisianski. Warner (1963: 7) has the rabbits as beings intro- duced “ebout 1903 by the same individuals responsible for the introduction on Laysan." ‘Tomich (1969: 30) mwas the “rabbits introduced here [laysan end bisitanski|) im L902 and l9O3466. | soca cis) weucanudetermine relpiecmeemlc have well as been introduced by Javanese feather gatherers as by Schlemmer and at almost any time between 1904 and Oommen In any case, the earliest record of rabbits on Lisianski that we have been able to discover is Jacob's (ms.) observation that a few rabbits were present in January 1910. By March 1913. rabbits were abundant but according toa Sslisbury©2 had not harmed the vegetation very much. Bailey (1956: 30), on the other hand, stated that Lisianski “..-was a barren waste of sand, due tos the destruction of the vegetation by the rabbits... By September of the following fall there was no question of the harm done to the vegetation “lHemlet's (ms.) report of the epprehension of feather munters in June 1904 fails to mention the occurrence of any rabbits on Lisianski des- pite the fact that he notes the diet of the Javanese in detail and remarks that the Japanese had been preparing dried tern meat against the eventuality ot runnine sout of food... pAmthouche Uni ceaibiseice vet mention of rabbits is nov conclusive Evidence that none was there, we strongly suspect that no rabbits were present and that it is most likely that they were subsequently introduced from Laysan. PStetter from G aR. salisbury to iss. Palmer. davedacoy Maren TOUS. Record Group 22. U.S. National Archives. IWS as Elsehner (1915: 56) reported that the only vegetation left was a few small patches of tobacco. The rabbit population had evidently already overeaten its food supply and nad suffered a sharp decrease in numbers since Elschner saw many dead rabbits but very few living ones. Mueh the same situation prevailed six months Later wnen W.H. Munter of the Thetis visited the island on 24 March 1915. He was "...struck with the lack of vegetation growing. What little was found was not in a very flourishing condition” (Munter, 1915: 135). The party that landed saw but seven rabbits. all of which were captured and removed from the island. if these were not all the rabbits remaining; the last rabbit died sometime during the ensuing year as none (nor any living vegetation) was found when Lisianski was again visited by the Thetis in February 1916. RODENT sp. Mus. or Rattus sp.? Status Extinet; possibly introduced one or more times in the 1800's. Observations Iwo accounts. neither probably highly reliable, report the presence of rodents on Lisianski. One newspaper account of the wreck of the Konohasset in 1846 (Ward, 1967: 60) indicated that many mice were present. Possibly these "mice" (which could have equally likely been the small Polynesian Rat, Rattus exulans) were introduced during the wreck of the Holder Borden. two years earlier. John Cameron. who visited Lisianski during the summer of 1893. report- ed great numbers of mice were present and that hundreds were killed (Farrell, 1928: 397-399). We think it possible, if not likely, that this report was erroneous. George Munro, who visited Lisianski two years earlier. makes no mention of mice in notes subsequently published by him in the Elepaio. HAWAIIAN MONK SEAL Monachus schauinslandi Status Common breeder, present throughout the year. Maximum recent estimates 281 for an aerial count (1957); 187 for a ground count (1964). Observations Observations on populations and breeding status are summarized in Table 46. Clearly the seal was much less common in the late 1800's and early 1900's due primarily to the activities of sealers in the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. The most useful of recent counts (March 1963-1969) might suggest that the population has declined somewhat in recent years 152 (from an average of 184 for 1964-1965 to an average of 131 for 1967-1969). How significant this decline may be is not certainly revealed by the data since during much of this period the BSFW has been conducting an intensive tagging program (See Appendix Table 2). Consequently the lower recent counts may only reflect that the present population is more sensitive to disturbance and less easily counted than previously. Kenyon (i972) has recently suggested that the decline of populations of this seal on Midway and Kure Atolls was probably due to excessive dis- turbance by man. The level of harassment to which those seals were rezularly subjected is much greater than that experienced by the Lisianski seals. A comparison of the number of pups counted on March visits from 1963 to 1969, while variable, does not suggest that there has necessari‘y been any decrease in the productivity of the population. (An average of 12 pups was counted March 1963-1965 as opposed to an average of 13 pups March 1967-1969.) Certainly it would seem worthwhile to conduct another series of aerial surveys such as those made in 1957 and 1958 so as to better assess the degree to which the Lisianski seal populations may have changed. Variations in age-class terminologies used by different sbservers make it impossible to accurately determine annual production of young but it appears that on the order of 30-40 young are produced yearly. "Pups, presumably indicating young less than a month old. have been recorded from as early as 14 February (1963) through 20 October (1966) but the peak pupping season appears to be from about March through May or June. Other facets of the biology of this seal on Lisianski are Likely very similar to those recorded by Kenyon and Rice (1959, et B.D Details of the tagging program and its results, as well as more detailed information on the life history of the seal, are to be presented at a later date by the BSFW. Table 46. Observations of Hawaiian Monk Seals on Lisianski Isiand* Popultetion Date of Survey Estimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References ESOS eS Gn Ocite none Four large seals killed with handspikes made (Lisiansky, 1844). 1891 29 June- [ evidently Three seals killed (Palmer in Rothschild, 4 July few] 1893-1900: xii. cf. Munro, 1942). 1913 12 Mer. e A male and female found asleep on the beach. The latter (USNM 181252) was collected by Willett (Bailey, 1952b: 7). 1923 15-19 May 2 Ten specimens (USNM 243847-56) collected (Bailey, 1952b: 11). Table 46. 1950 TD: 1954 1959 ES 1958 1961 1963 1964 1965 1966 D:te of Surve 24 June 13 May 26 Mer. spring spring 9-10 Mar. 14 Feb. lée-13 Mar. JLRS Sy Wren, 21-23 Aug. 18 Sept. 12-14 Mar. ULI nay 16-19 June 19 Sept. Population Ectimate "at least (continued) OO 281 ie 144 210 180 iS) Breeding Siatus, Remarks and References (POFT). Estimate by Brock (in Bailey, 1952b: 25). Counted. Total includes about a half- dozen recently born pups (POFI). Counted by Frank Richardson (Svihla, 1959: 227). Counted. 5 recently born pups included in TOca Lan ORBLE) I= Based on aerial counts. Total includes 15 pups (Kenyon and Rice, 1959: 221). Based on aerial counts. Total includes 34 pups (hice. 1960: 377) Counted on 9 March. Total includes 19 pups and 36 yearlings** (Woodside and Kramer, ms.). Counted. Total includes 3 pups, one of which was dead (POBSP). Count of 82 adults and subadults and 13 pups (2 dead) on 12 March (POBSP). Counted on 12 March. Total includes / pups (BSFW). Counted on 21 August. T5tal includes 1 pup (POBSP). Count includes 33 yearlings (BSFW). Counted on 1lé March. Total includes 15 pups and 1 deed adult (POBSP). Counted on 14 July (POBSP). Counted on 19 June. Total includes 33 yearlings and 3 pups (POBSP). Count includes 17 pups (BSFW). 15h Table 46. (continued) Population Date of Survey Eetimate Breeding Status, Remarks and References 1966 18=20 Oct. JUL Counted on 18 October. Total includes 9 pups. An unspecified number of yearling seals were also present (POBSP). 1967 20 Mer. 139 Count includes lO pups and 1/ yearlings (BSFW). 2-6 June 128 Counted on 6 June. Todtal includes le pups and 11 yearlings (POBSP). 31 Aug.- 141 Counted on 2 September. ‘l'ostal includes 5 Sept. LO pups (POBSP). 25-26 Sept. 181 Counted on 25 September. Total includes 28 yearlings (BSFW). 1963, S20=eI ware 123 Counted on 20 March. Total includes 10 pups and 19 yearlings (BSFW). 1969 30 Mer. 130 Count includes 18 pups and 17 juveniles [= yearlings] (BSFW). 12 pups born recently (Laycock, 1970: 59). 4 June LZ Count includes 26 pups and 2 yearlings (BSFW) . *Table does not include several mentions of seals on Lisianski in the 1800's that add nothing to our knowledge other than the fact that they occurred there. **Seals aged as yearlings in March are young from the preceding breeding season, while many. if not most, of those aged as yearlings on summer and fall surveys are young born that year. Reptiles GREEN TURTLE Chelonia mydés Formerly 6 common to abundant breeder; now uncommon and not known to breed; maximum recent count 15. KS) Observations Comments by early observers (Table 47) clearly indicate that Green Turtles were once a conspicuous and numerous element in the Lisianski fauna. Although hundreds were present in 1923. the population was almost certainly even then much reduced in abundance. More recent observations, primarily by the BSFW. show a great re- duction in numbers since 1923. Much of this decrease is probably attributable to poaching by fishermen in the decade after the Tanager Expedition. The number currently utilizing Lisianski is undoubtedly higher than the maximal count but it seems doubtful that the breeding population, if in fact there is one, consists of more than a very few turtles. No nests or hatchlings have been seen by any recent observer. This fact, and the preponderance of rather small turtles seen on most recent visits, suggests that many of the turtles are probably visitors from other islands in the chain, particularly from French Frigate Shoals, the primary breeding area: and possibly to some extent from Fearl and Hermes Reef, the only other atoll in the chain where fairly large numbers of turtles may stili be found. Hopefully, the intensive tagging program being con- ducted by the BSFW will show to what extent the current ‘Lisianski popula- tion" consists of turtles from other islands. Table 47. Observations of Green Turtles on Lisianski Island Number Date of Survey seen Remarks and References 1805 15-18 Oct. many (Lisiansky, L814). SIS 16) cilia in (Morrell, 1841: 216). abundance 1857 10 May plentiful (Paty, 1857: 40) 1382 2 Jan: ? 13 captured by crew of the Ada (Hornell, 1934: 432-433). early May 1G? captured by the crew of the Ada (Hornell, 1934: 432-433). 1894 summer k Many turtles undoubtedly killed by the crew of the Ebon (Farrell, 1928: 414). 1923 15-20 May large 80 from 15" to 4' long counted in one 300- numbers yard stretch of beach (Wetmore, 1925: 97). 25-50 frequently seen at one time; some females killed contained eggs ready to be laid (Wetmore, in Mellen, 1925: 181). Table 47. (continued) Number Dete of Survey Seen Kkemarks and References 1934 25 June > 400 (GSE eaten be Ga. 25 Large turtles (Baylis, ms.). 1950 2h June 6 Count (POFT). 1951 13 May 0) (POFT). 1961 Q Mar. LL Counted along shoreline 9 March; several fairly small individuals seen (Woodside and Kramer, ms.). 1963 14 Feb. ca. 30 Seen on the beach and offshore. Several small individuals weighing less than 15 pounds seen (POBSP; Kramer, ms.). 1964 11-12 Mar. 13 Counted by BSFW: 6 males and 7 females, 3 platter-sized (BSFW, POBSP). 21-23 Aug. 2 A few seen (POBSP). 18 Sept. 5 Counted by BSFW: 2 ca. 30" and 3 ca. 18" (BSFW, POBSP). 1965 12-14 Mar. 6 5, 2-3' in length counted on 12 March, a smaller individual seen on 14 March (POBSP). Lua duly, 13 Counted on 13 July (POBSP). 1966 16-19 June \ Count (POBSP). 19 Sept. \ Counted by BSFW; 1 large and 3 small (ca. 18") (BSFW). 18-20 Oct. 15 Counted on 18th; 5 large (3 males, 2 fe- males) and 10 small (ca. 15") (POBSP). 1967 20 Mer. 10 Counted by BSFW: 6 large and 4 small; 2 males and 8 females (BSFW, POBSP). 25-26 Sept. 2 At least 6 seen (BSFW). 1968 20-21 Mar. 13 Counted by BSFW (BSFW, POBSP). 1969 30 Mar. alt All tagged or recaptures (BSFW). 4 June 13 Counted; 3 ca. 150 lbs., and the rest small (BSFW). XA Ni ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Many persons contributed much of their time and knowledge towards the completion of this account. Eugene Kridler, Kefuge Manager of the Hawaiian Islands National Wildlife Refuge. not only permitted the FOBSP access to Lisianski but allowed us to use many of his unpublished notes and reports in this account. We also thank him for allowing various POBSP personnel to accompany the BSFW inspection teems during several visits to Lisianski. Michio Takata, Director, Hawaii Division of Fish and Game, very kindly let us use many unpublished reports and notes in the Division's files. Others whom we thank for allowing us use of unpublished material are Alexander Wetmore of the Smithsonian Institution who gave us full use of extensive notes taken during the 1923 Tanager Expedition, and Frank Richardson of the University of Weshington who communicated to us popu- lation estimates made during his 1954 visit to Lisianski. Special mention must also be made of E.H. Bryan, Jr.. Manager of the Pacific Scientific Information Center of the Bernice P. Bishop Museum, who was unfailingly courteous and helpful during our many in- cursions into his files and the Bishop bird collection. Many POBSP, BSFW, and HDFG personnel, listed in Appendix Table 1, collected much of the data presented in this report. Among them, A. Binion Amerson, Jr., Charles A. Ely, Philip C. Shelton, and Paul W. Woodward were particularly helpful during preparation of various stages of the manuscript. They. and F. Raymond Fosberg, Smithsonian Institution. and Eugene Kridler, BSFW, all aided by reading and criticizing various portions of the manuscript. A. Binion Amerson, Jr.. critically read the entire final manuscript. Tina C. Clapp is also acknowledged for preparing several of the figures. Philip S. Humphrey, Principal Investigator of the POBSP, is also to be thanked for his constant encouragement throughout the course of the study. Transportation to and from the island was provided by the U.S. Navy and the U.S. Coast Guard. The camera copy was typed by Barbara B. Anderson with funding through @ contract with the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Department of the Interior (contract number 14-16-008-596, February 3, 1971). LITERATURE CITED Air Weather Service [MATS] Climatic Center, USAF. Midway Island, Hawaii. USN. Summaries 1953-1963. Asheville, North Carolina. Alexander, W.B. et al. 1965. The families aud genera of petrels and their names. Ibis 107: 401-405. Amerson, A.B., Jr. 1963. Tick distribution in the central Pacific as influenced by seabird movement. J. Med. Ent. 5: 332-339. ----1969. Ornithology of the Marshall and Gilbert Islands. Atoll Res. Builder le oe) tow ----671." Whe natural history ot French Frigaver shoals, Northwestern Hawaiian Islands. Atoll Res. Bull. 150: xv and 383 p. =e IC, liiermsom, Il, Inecowcls oi Welloplege iticoml Rae wLe loliccls - Atoll Res. Bull. 146: 30 p. Anon. 1939. Manure. The Sales Builder 12(1): 2-22. NOU, | WNuleieileeiat Olealcaoloeiscs'! Unload. ls. Ciecklisic ot Norcia Amer itean’ Discs) >it be cdeey LomdesBakeumone IPSs balay lite Rename lla ainGl 691 p. Bailey, A.M. 1918. The monk seal of the southern Pacific. Nat. Hist. 18: 396-399. -———lO572,. ihaysean and Billeick-fooved Albavrosses. 1 DeMvicig MUS sNaian Hlssius Mus. Pict. 6: 80 p. SSSI Salo, Blas ine wleia migmlk Sell, Deiayver Mus. Mac, Bist., MMS. PLC. (5 3S 2 ----1956. Birds of Midway and Laysan Islands. Denver Mus. Nat. Hist., Mus, Piet, tae IO -. Bailey, R. 1966. The sea-birds of the southeast coast of Arabia. Ibis 108(2): 22h-264. Ball, S.C. (ms.). Field Note Book [taken during the visit of the Tanager Expedition to the Northwestern Hawaiian Islands in April and May 1923]. Orig. in the Bernice P. Bishop Mus., Honolulu, Hawaii. Baylis, J.S. (ms. ). Cruise report for the Itasca for the month of June 19634. Ree. Group 26. U.S. Nat. Arehives) Washington. 6 p. Beardsley, J.W. 1966. Insects and other terrestrial arthropods from the Leeward Hawaiian Islands. Proc. Haw. Ent. Soc. 19: 157-185. Bequaert, J.C. 1941. The Hippoboscidae of Oceania (Diptera). B.P. Bishop Mus. Occ. Papers 16(11): 247-292. iy Brennan, J.M. 1965. A small collection of chiggers (Acarina: Trombiculi- dae) from the north central Pacific. J. Parasitol. 51: 888-892. Brooks, N.C. 1860. Islands and reefs west-north-west of the Sandwich Islands, Pacific. Naut. Mag. 29: 499-50h. Buyen.) Hele, wc. L926. mphyrid fly mew to Hawaii. Proc, Haw. Ent. "Soc. 2279 ----1938. Lisianski, an island of Hawaii. Paradise of the Pacific 50: 3 33-34. ----1942. American Polynesia and the Hawaiian Chain. Tongg Publ. Co., EIS ire Te UI DIAS wren5)S mole Bryan, H.H., Jr. et al. 1926. Insects of Hawaii, Johnston Island, and Wake Island. B.P. Bishop Mus. Bull. 31: 9 p. BSFW [Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife], U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Kailua, Hawaii [unpublished reports and notes]. Kridler, E. pers. corr., 1968-1970 ----[1964]. [Report on] Hawaiian Islands National Wildlife Refuge [survey]...September 16 through 27, 1964. 31 p. ----[ 1966]. Hawaiian Islands National Wildlife Refuge trip - September S=26, 1966. 3 p.; ----[1967]. Refuge log book for 6 March - 1 April 1967. 39 p. ----[1967]. Refuge log book for 19-29 September 1967. 12 p. ----[1969]. Hawaiian Islands National Wildlife Refuge spring trip. Manchimtow— tori 6, O69. 32° p: Olsen, D.L. [1969]. Hawaiian Islands National Wildlife Refuge Field eIoia, MEKR 2S) = Alias MLL MLO GS Walissy, Bicle, IPL, G52. Wbsellouvenciss ont? elas) IPeemabhes | 18,125 BTS IMIS. SoS > Pull: I CMAIAS 105 Chap erste Lon > DS ceri Ons mor new | inverse yoarachtes . y PTOCam Uso. Nat. Mus. 68(2); 1-4. Chemscropheuseme i. and Hol. Caum. Woe 9 Vascullan planus on vie meewand Islands, Hawaii. B.P. Bishop Mus. Bull. 81: 41 p. Clapp, R.B. 1968. Three unusual shorebirds from Midway Atoll, Pacific Ocean. Elepaio 28: 76-77. ----1971. A specimen of Jouanin's Petrel from Lisianski Island, North- western Hawaiian Islands. Condor 73(4): 490. L600 Clapp, R.B. and P.W. Woodward. 1968. New records of birds from the Hawaiian Leeward Islands. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 124 (No. 3640): 39 p. Clark, A.H. 1949. Ophiuroidea of the Hawaiian Islands. B.P. Bishop MUSts HBS Ob ie eller Cresswell, M. 1939. Open boat voyages. The Marine Observer 16(134): see Hdmandson, C.H., Wok. Hisher, sik. Clarke A slo limeadwekl anc iin. Cusiamerne sas 5 Wekeiuis ~oaolleyen, se ili wicooleall Ceimcewel Paciiie, i3,P, Bisiacp Muse. Budde ain sande te on Hilsehner, C. £915. The Leeward Islands of the Hawallan Group. Honolulu Advertiser, Honolulu. 68 op. Ely, C.A. and R.B. Clapp. MO(soe Unewmalvunela acu omy of Laysan Island. Northwestern taualianedelande: Acollikece: Billa lg aclrcindagolune: Fain, A. and A.B. Amerson, Jr. 1968. Two new heteromorphic deutonymphs (hypopi) (Acarina: Hypoderidae) from the Great Frigatebird (Fregata imibaore)), ds WMagla Wate 5((3)\e 3Q0=32hie pecealils Nao (Pech) 1928. John Cameron's Odyssey. The MacMillan Co., New York. 461 op. iedleres iis euch SAG, wells UWGa255 Wiss ot Here, dloldidscom Isileiacl, Hake Uses. B62, Bislhoo Mus, ieiwiliks 26s Sik jo Haeeysiieia, OW, (ecls lo dUgbils €Geosicaoay ot cae Reeitic, Jolin Wiley eiac Sows, iNew MGidke sinh each 573 oc Gross, MiG. J.D.) Mintimer. ibe inaeyeciGl He. Seyilmac Cento ooh muMetclas geology of Kure and Midway Atolls, Hawaii: a preliminary report. PAG, Sei, Zeoll(=25 + Hamlet, O.C. (ms.). Letter to the U.S. Secretary of the Treasury dated 23 June 1904...fgiving details of apprehension of feather harvesters] s2Ree. Group 26, U.S. Nat. Ageatves a Washinevoun Olga. Hardwick, D.F. 1965. ‘The corn earworm complex. Mem. Ent. Soc. Canada hO: 247 p. Hardy, D.E. 1964. Insects of Hawaii. Vol. 11. Diptera: Brachycera IL = (ehelkenm@ateyojora lh MG, Amimnsigneia, iicle 5 Way oe Sits WeleiEl ha IIeSSs\, Honolulu. vii and 458 p. Hartman, O. 1966. Polychaetous annelids of the Hawaiian Islands. B.P. Bishop Mus. Occ. Papers 23(11): 163-252. Holly, M. 1935. Polychaeta from Hawaii. 9B.P. Bishop Mus. Bul Tags Ss) eo: Horne mints. Lost hoe oN Ulery SehoonereAda ona tisha eruice insite North Pacific, 1882. Mariner's Mirror 20: 436-437. Hutchinson, G.E. 1950. Survey of existing knowledge of biogeo-chemistry. Spee Me Nas Hist “Bulla S64 65 5.) oe Jacobs, W.V.E. (ms.). Report to the Secretary of the Treasury of investigation and apprehension of Japanese plumage hunters in January ijt? heer eral Zo. UIs. Naan Anchivess. Washtnatcone lola, Jeni, J.R., Jr. 1968. Relationships in the Charadrii (shorebirds): a taxonomic study based on color patterns of the downy young. San Diego Spero Nauemicte ae Memonr 3., 54) a0. Kenyon, K.W. 1972. Man versus the Monk Seal. J. Mamm. 53: 687-696. ----and D.W. Rice. 1959. Life history of the Hawaiian monk seal. Pac. yeaa dey os Aili yasyae King (a), J[oseph] E. 1956. Two unusual birds sighted. Elepaio 17: 41-2. King (b), J[udith] E. 1956. The monk seals (Genus Monachus). Bull. of Price Must (Nate Hist. )) Zool. 315) 201-256. King, W.B. 1967. Seabirds of the Tropical Pacific Ocean. Preliminary Smithsonian Identification Manual. Smithsonian Institution, Washington, DiC oan and lAG p. Keramer Rel < (nisin A report on a survey trip to the Hawaiian Islands National Wildlife Refuge, February 1963. Hawaii Dept. of Fish and Game, Honoiuluc. "25, 90. Kroenke, L.W. and G.P. Woollerd. 1965. Gravity investigations on the Leeward Islands of the Hawaiian Ridge and Johnston Island. Pac. Sci. 19: 361-366. Laycock, G. 1970. The Hawaiian Islands of birds. Audubon Mag. 72: 44-61. Lisiansky, U. 1814. A voyage round the world in the years 1803,4,5,6... nm chess nipe Neva. Joh Booth, Mondoms | xii sand {co pe hate Or inibiec Wand.) Part otmuney joucnali omy anvil tito Laysan Island. The Friend, December 1890: 90-91. Maa, T.C. 1962. Notes on the Hippoboscidae (Diptera), 1. Pac. Insects 4(3): 583-614. ----1968. Records of Hippoboscidae (Diptera) from the Central Pacific. TeWeds inte 514) 325-320. Mellen, I.M. 1925. Marine turtles asleep on Hawaiian sands. Bull. ipa vool Sock, 26° 1o60- lel, Morrells, B., Je. Shi, A narrative of tour voyages) tor the South Sea, north and south Pacific Ocean...from the year 1822 to 1831....Harper & Brothers, New York. 492 p. Munro, G.C. 1941la. Birds of Hawaii...[ the Wedge-tailed Shearwater ]. Elepaio 1(7): 1-3, 1(8); 1-4. ----1941b. Birds of Hawaii...The White or Love Tern. Elepaio 1(10);: ele ----194le. Birds of Hawaii...Bulwer's Petrel. Elepaio 2: 1-3. ----1941d. Birds of Hawaii...The Christmas Island Shearwater. Elepaio 2: 16-18. ----194le. Birds of Hawaii...The Noddy in Hawaii. Elepaio 1(12); 1-4. =--=--19l\2, Birds of Hawaii...An Ocean Gruise. No. 9. Flepailo 3-7-6. ----1944, Birds of Hawaii. Tongs Publ. Co., Honolulu. 189 p. iMiebakeciay VWiqisig | AUCH, i@\ooiaic Oi Cleisiciebieie ola “out: jodie! liste oi IWeayseia Is lleiacl Ann. Rept. Coast Guard for 1915: 130-140. Murphy, R.C. 1951. The populations of the Wedge-tailed Shearwater (CRUE AIS joeCiehous |) Nise, WHS, Wowie, 151g 2. jo. Office of Geography. U.S. Dept. of the Interior. 1956. NIS [National inpeittsenice: Suaveyl| GaZzevvcec.s Hewen cia pislancs ss Ce MiuuaclainiCc MiaEoeniee Agency, Washington, D.C. iii and 89 p. Paty, J. 1857. Account of the Manuokawai-Interesting account of her explorattons. Lhe Polynesians 6 sune: lO5i. | or tO. eeigeias) Jfqibg W IUGB IL. Cas@sIlisic on lomccls, out iclae Worle.) Wells IL, inleuew Univ. Press, Cambridge, Mass. xviii and 345 p. ----1934. Check-list of birds of the world. Vol. II. Harv. Univ. Press, Cambridge, Mass. xvii and 401 p. ----1937. Check-list of birds of the world. Vol. III. Harv. Univ. Press, Cambridge, Mass. vii and 311 p. Pietschmann, V. 1938. Hawaiian shore fishes. B.P. Bishop Mus. Bull. SOE Spt (0: P.O.B.S.P. [Pacific Ocean Biological Survey Program]. Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. [unpublished reports]: Sibley, F.C. [1964]. Preliminary report on ATF trip No. l, February-March 1963. 13 p. Amerson, A.B., Jr. fi964]. Northwest Hawaiian Islands trip report, March 1964. 20 p. 163 Amerman, K.E. [1964]. lLeewards Islands Survey, Pearl & Hermes Reef, histanskn stand, August LOGS <7 pe Fleet, R.R. [1964]. Leewards Islands Survey No. 5, September 1964. ILO) De Wirtz, W.O., II. [1965]. lLeewards Islands Survey...March 1965. 26 p. Crossin, R.S. [1965]. Island report---July 1965. 14 p. ----[1966]. Leeward Island Survey No. 13, June 1966. 18 p. Shelton, P.C. [1966]. Lisianski Island, Leeward Islands Survey No. (ee unend-966. bay op. Balcomb, K.C. [1966]. Summary report on the status of the Hawaiian Monk Seal, Monachus schauinslandi - Laysan and Lisianski Islands, 10-22 June 1966. 7 p. ----[1966]. Preliminary Report on Lisianski Island. 9 p. Hackman, C.D. [1967]. Preliminary report of Leeward Island Survey Noe U6. Mameh 6 to March 27, 1967. 12 p. Stadel, D.L. [1967]. Lisianski Island, Leeward Islands, Survey No. ioe 2-6 gune 1667. 13) p. DeLong, R.L. [1967]. Census and observations of Hawaiian Monk Seal on Pearl & Hermes Reef, Lisianski, and Laysan Islands, May 31 to Funeis MOET haG ap: Clapp, R.B. and C.A. Ely. [1967]. Preliminary Report, Lisianski Island, 31 August-5 September 1967. 11 p. Clapp, R.B. [1968]. Leeward Survey No. 22, Preliminary report, Lisianski Island. ll p. P.O.F.I. [Pacific Ocean Fisheries Investigations]. Bureau of Commercial Fisheries, Honolulu. [unpublished notes and reports]: Narrative report of the June-August 1950 cruise of the H.M. Smith (H.M. Smith Cruise No. 5). Scientists’ log for the June-August 1950 cruise of the H.M. Smith (H.M. Smith Cruise No. 5). Narrative report of the May-July 1951 cruise of the H.M. Smith (H.M. Smith Cruise No. Q). Scientists’ log for the May-July 1951 cruise of the H.M. Smith (H.M. Smith Cruise No. 9). Cruise report of the May 1955 cruise of the J.R. Manning (J.R. Manning Cruise No. ye opti oe + £), LOo4& Rice, D.W. 1960. Population dynamics of the Hawaiian monk seal. J. Mammal. 41: 376-385. Rice, D.W. and K.W. Kenyon. 1962. Breeding distribution, history and populations of north Pacific albatrosses. Auk 79: 365-386. Richardson, PH. W957. Whe breeding, eycllesmon haweshtan sealbiaqdisnn | Wshtas Bushop MUS es BUdaiaw cil cero. IROeEla, 15 In, (wes). dase ReCLi le Stuovey RPaese I, WoSo8, Duwed Cowinivy LST 758. (lypeseript copy of report im the iles) or iuhe ycalavel Dils trices Honoluidus). Rothschild, W. 1893-1900. The avifauna of Laysan and the neighboring isilaiacs, IR kl, oieceie, Ibolacloias ~3 poems. 26 gine slw eiacl 32O jo. St. John, H. 1970. The genus Sicyos (Cucurbitaceae) on the Hawaiian Leeward Islands. Hawaiian Plant Studies 35. Pacific Sci. 24(4): 439-456. Sehindler, 0. 1932. Sexually mature larval Hemirhampidae from the Hawaiian Islands. B.P. Bishop Mus. Bull. 97: 28 p. Stearns, H.T. 1966. Geology of the State of Hawaii. Pacific Books, Pals Mico, Cellaicoraies social eimcl 266 jo Svihla, A. 1959. Notes on the Hawaiian Monk Seal. J. Mammal. 40: 226-229. Tomich, P.Q@. 1969. Mammals in Hawaii. A synopsis and notational bib- liography. B.P. Bishop Mus., Spec. Publ. 57: 238 p. Tsuda, R.T. 1966. Marine benthic algae from the leeward Hawaiian group. MNGoILIL RES, IwULIL, IIs 13 jo. Usinger, R.L. 1942. The genus Nysius and its allies in the Hawaiian Islands (Hemiptera, Lygaeidae, Orsellini). B.P. Bishop Mus. Bull. Wo WET Bo Walker, F.D. 1909. Log of the Kaalokai. The Hawaiian Gazette, Ltd., Honolulu. “6 pe: Weil RAGs (etl |. 1967. American activities in the central Pacific 1790-1870. Vol. 4. Gregg Press, Ridgewood, New Jersey. xiii and EC 695 p.- Warner, R.E. 1963. Recent History and Ecology of the Laysan Duck. Condor 65; 3-23. Wetmore, A. 1925. Bird life among lava rock and coral sand. Nat Geogr. Mag. 48: 77-108. ----(ms.). Field notes taken on the 1923 Tanager Expedition (original in the possession of A. Wetmore). 165 Willett, G. (ms.). Extracts from a report made to the Bureau of Biolootea snc v HU ReaU Om (Spee Huishemnres: amd | Waelidline, Kailua, Hawaii. Woodside, D.H. and R.J. Kramer. (ms.). A report on a survey trip to the Hawaiian Islands National Wildlife Refuge, March 1961. Hawaii Dept. Suse eoweanduGame, Honoluling 9372" Visodward., eave L9ifa. The natural hisvory omehuce Atoll lorthwesirexn Hawaiian Islands. Atoll Res. Bull. 164: 316 p. Zimmerman, F.C. iGUGan edinsecks of Hawaiie Voll, 2. Apterygota to Thysanoptera. Univ. of Hawaii Press, Honolulu. vii and 475 p. ----1948b. Insects of Hawaii. Vol. 3. Heteroptera. Univ. of Hawaii Pecss omens Vv wand 255 pe ----1958. Insects of Hawaii. Vol. 7. Macrolepidoptera. Univ. of Hawaii Press, Honolulu. ix and 542 p. 166 Appendix Table 1. Scientific visits to Lisianski Island, 1828-1969 Date 1828 L3SOL Bo AnE = 25 June- 4 July 16-17 June Le Mar. 13 May Co Mar. _Fersonnel Vessel C. Isenbeck Moller Crew Kaa lokei Rothschild Expedition Henry C. Falmer George C. Munro Crew Thetis Altred M Beiley (BBS) Thetis George Willett (BBS) Carl Elschner Thetis William H. Munter (USCG) Crew members Thetis USS Tanacer Tanager Expedition 2 Alexander Wetmore (BBS, ornithologist) John Beker (collector) Stanley C. Ball (BPBM, biologist) T. Dranga (collector) Chapman Grant (naturalist) G. Higgs (cook) F.R. Lawrence (naturalist, photographer) F.C. Reno (BBS, rabbit killing expert) Fric L. Schlemmer (asst. to Wetmore) Ditlev Thaanum (conchoLlogist) L.A. Thurston (HA, conchologist) Gerrit P. Wilder (botanist) Capt. William G. Anderson Lanikai \ Joseph E. King (FPOFT) USFWS M/V Vernon E. Brock (HDFG) Other FOFI personnel POFI versonnel USFWS M/V Hugh M. Smith Frank Kichardson (UW) ki apparently visited ofishore only. USCGC Buttonwood . “sO ee 167 Appendix Table 1. (continued) Date Personne]. au Vessel 1954. -1 Nov. Philip A. Dumont (BSFW) Aerial survey* Johnson A. Neff (BSFW) 1955 8 May POFI personnel USFWS M/V John R. Manning 1957 7 Jan. Karl W. Kenyon (BSFW) Aerial survey Dale W. Rice (BSFW) 15 Apr. Karl W. Kenyon (BSFW) Aerial survey Dale W. Rice (BSFW) 28 Dec. Dale W. Rice (BSFW) Aerial survey 1958 28 June Dale W. Rice (BSFW) Aerial survey 1961 9-10 Mar.** (1330-1700 :9th) (0800-1500 :10th) 1962 18 July 1963 14. Feb. (1000-1630) 12-13 Mar. (1830-0830) 1964 11-13 Mer. (2000-1700) Raymond J. Kramer (HDFG) David H. Woodside (HDFG) Harvey I. Fisher (SIU) William O Wirtz. II (POBSP) A. Binion Amerson, Jr. (POBSP) F. Allen Blagden (POBSP) Raymond J. Kramer (HDFG) Robert W. McFarlane (POBEP) Fred C. Sibley (POBSP) William O. Wirtz, II (POBSP) A. Binion Amerson, Jr. (POBSP) Robert W. McFarlane (POBSP) Eugene Kridler (BSFW) A. Binion Amerson, Jr. (POBSP) Loren Kroenke (UH) Edward O'Neill (BSFW) Ronald L. Walker (HDFG) George S. WisLlocki (POBSP) USCGC Planetree Naval vessel USS Moctobi USS Moctobi USCGC Planetree *An aerial survey may also have been made on 5 December. **¥Time of arrival and departure, where known, is listed under the dates of visit for surveys made during the 1960's. L68 Appendix Table Ll. Date 1964 21-23 Aug. (0900-0600) 18 Sept. (1050-18900) 1965 12-14 Mar. (1100-1500) WR anwilsy (1130-0500) 1966 16-19 June (1630-2130) 19 Eept. (1030-1510) 18-20 Oct. (1945-0800) 1967 20 Mer. (0900-1630) (continued) Personne L Kenneth E. Amerman (POBSP) Alan H. Anderson (POBSP) Robert Banner (UH) Richard W. Merrill (POBSP) J. Douglas Whitman (POBSP) Paul W. Woodward (POBSP) Alan Lee Young (UH) Eugene Kridler (BSFW) John W. Beardsley (UH) Robert R. Fleet (POBSP) Charles R. Long (POBSP) Ronald L. Walker (HDFG) William O. Wirtz, II (POBSP) Kenneth E. Amerman (POBSP) Roger B. Clapp (POBSP) J. Vincent Hoeman (POBSP) Dennis L. Stadel ( POBSP) Charles Williams, Jr. (USN) Richard S. Crossin (POBSP) Brian A. Harrington (POBSP) Dayle N. Husted (POBSP) Jeffrey P. Tordoff (POBSP) Richard S. Crossin (POBSP) Kenneth C. Balcomb (POBSP) Richard D. Chandler (POBSP) David I. Hoff (POBSP) David L. Pearson (POBSP) Philip C. Shelton (POBSP) Frank H. Smith (POBSP) Fugene Kridler (BSFW) Sherwin Carlquist (CC) Karl W. Kenyon (BSFW) Warren Koll (HSB) Ronald L. Walker (HDFG) Kenneth C. Balcomb (POBSP) Patrick J. Gould (POBSP) Brian A. Harrington (POBSP) T. James Lewis (POBSP) Eugene Kridler (BSFW) C. Douglas Hackman (POBSP) Ernest Kosaka (HDFG) John Maciolek (BSFW) Richard Wass (UH) Vessel USNS Shearwater USCGC Basswood USNS Shearwater USNS Shearwater USNS Shearwater USCGC Ironwood USS Tawakoni USCGC Basswood Appendix Table l. Date 196) 2-6 June (1000-1800) 31 Aug.- 5 Sept. (1130-1030) 25-26 Sept. (1000-1430) 1968 20-21 Mar. (1100-1500) 1969 30 Mer. (0915-1500) 1969 4 June (0630-1530) (continued) Personnel Robert L. DeLong (POBSP) Ronald R. Amerson (USN) David L. Burckhalter (POBSP) Dennis L. €tadel (POBSP) F. Christian Thompson (POBSF) Robert Tuxson (POBSP) Charles A. Fiy (POBSP) Roger B. Clapp (POBSP) David I. Hoff (POBSP) Ronald R. Amerson (USN) Fugene Kridler (BSFW) Robert Ballou (BSFW) John L. Sincock (BSFW) Ronald L. Walker (HDFG) Eugene Kridler (BSFW) Roger B. Clapp (POBSP) Karl W. Kenyon (BSFW) Ernest Kosaka (HDFG) John L. Sincock (BSFW) Eugene Kridler (BSFW) Karl W. Kenyon (BSFW) George Laycock (NAS) David L. Olsen (BSFW) John L. Sincock (BSFW) David L. Olsen (BSFW) Karl Bathen (UH) Tom Clark (UH) Ronald Kent Ernest Kosaka (HDFG) James McVay (UH) William Pstzert (UH) John L. Sineock (BSFW) 169 Vessel USN light tugs 2081 ,2086 , 2087 USN light tugs 2081 .2086 .2087 USCGC Buttonwood USCGC Ironwood USCGC Buttonwood USFWS M/V Mahi 170 Appendix Table 2. Results of scientific visits to Lisianski Island. 1828-1969. * Date Results 1828 24 Mar. 1é species of birds described. but some records of doubtful validity; turtles and seale noted. 1891 29 June- Bird observations (Rothschild, 1893-1900; Munro 1941a, 4 July 1941b. 1941e, 1941d, 194le,. 1942). 16 bird specimens of 3 species collected; seals seen and killed. 1904 16-17 June 10 specimens of 5 bird species, seized by the Treasury Department, were later deposited in the USNM. 1913 12 Mar. Brief observations of birds (Bailey, 1952a, 1956); 45 Laysan Rails released. Seals observed and one collected. Vols 12 Sept. Description of island; analysis of phosphates. 1915 2h Mar. Observations on birds anc their breeding status (Munter . 1915). Rabbits removed from island. 1923 15-19 May Collections of: fish, hippoboseid end other flies and insects. crustacea. echinoderms, polychaetous annelids, nematode, foraminifera, algae and vascular plants. 10 seal specimens and ca. 43 bird specimens of 15 species collected. Seeds of Barringtonia trees planted by Wilder. Turtles observed. OZ Severn Collected: offshore fishes, polychaete. 1950 2h June Shoreline scouted for fishbait; seals estimated: turtles counted: brief notes made on birdlife. 951 13 May Shoreline scouted for fishbait; seals censused; brief notes made on birdlife. 1954 26 Mar. Brief notes made on birds and their breeding status (Richardson. 1957); census of seals. 1 Nov. Aerial seal count. 1955 8 May Island scouted for bait: brief notes made on turtles, seals, end several species of birds. 1957 { Jan. Aerial census of seals and nesting albatross. LS Nope Aerial census of seals and nesting albatross. 28 Dec. Aerial census: seals; albatross (Rice and Kenyon, 1962). 1958 28 June Aerial census of seals end seabirds. e7el Avpendix Table 2. (continued) Date Results 1961 9-10 Mar. Brief observations on wildlife: seals and turtles censused; refuge signs posted; photographic stations established. 1962 18 July Leysan Albatross nestlings. captured on Midway Atoll, rensported to Lisianski, banded and released. 1963 14 Feb. Observations of birds;* examination of island for degree of disturbance caused py HIRAN project; 5 turtles and 325 seals tagged; 2 bird specimens of 2 seeieies collected: 12-13 Mer. Observations of birds;* 349 birds sf 9 species banded. Collected: 4 bird specimens of 3 species and »ne hybrid, 1 new species of chigger, 2 new species of mites. ticks. 1964 11-13 Mer. Survey of numbers and breeding status of birds; census of seals and turtles: 1] Bar-tailed Godwit collected:* several Mallophaga collected; 1.133 birds of 14 species banded; gravity observations made. 21-23 Aug. Survey of numbers and breeding status of birds; census of turtles and seals; 7.328 birds of 9 species banded. Collected: 1 bird specimen, algae. 18 Sept. Observations of birds;* census of seals and turtles. Collected: algae, arachnids, insects. 1965 12-14 Mar. Census of turtles; observations of birds;* 5.855 birds of 7 species banded. Collected: 66 Berlese samples from 56 nests of 9 bird species and 10 samples of litter; 8 bird specimens of 5 species. 14-17 July Survey of numbers and breeding status of birds; turtles and seals censused; ectoparasites studied; /,cO/ birds of 6 species banded; 5 bird specimens of 4 species col- lected. 1966 16-19 June Survey of numbers and breeding status of birds;* census of seals, turtles; refuge signs erected; 30,200 birds of 7 species banded. Collected: ectoparasites, Berlese samples, plants. 75 bird specimens of / species. 19 Sept. A few scanty observations of birds; census of turtles r, and seals; 15 seals and 2 turtles tagged. lve Appendix Table e. 1967 aD LSS 2ONOc tis 20 Mar. 2-6 June 4 June (continued) Results Survey of numbers and breeding status of birds; census of turtles. seals, and shore birds; collections made for nasal-parasite studies; 799 birds of 5 species cvanded. Observations of birds,* census of seals and turtles; 27 seals and 9 turtles tagged; Chenopodium seeds planted. Survey of numbers and breeding status of birds; census of seals; 7 seals tagged; 7,940 birds of 8 species banded. Survey of numbers and breeding status of birds; census ab seals) 30453 birds ot lorcpectes banded.) sColleeredh hippoboscid flies, ticks, 7 bird specimens of 6 species. ** Seanty observations of birdlife; census of turtles and seals; > turtles: "iG seals tassaed; vesetation phous station photographs obtained and a new station established: 130 birds of 4 species banded. Observations of birds; census of turtles and seals; 9 turtles and 24 seals tagged; canvas resolution target laid out on beach; 260 birds of 6 species banded; 3 bird specimens of 2 species and 1 hybrid collected. A few observations of birds; census of turtles and seals; 9 turtles and 13 seais tagged; vegetation photo- station photographs obtained. Turtles and seals censused; 14 seals tagged. +Number of specimens listed as collected may represent something less than the total number collected in the fieid as some birds were sub- sequently discarded or destroyed before they entered the collections of the National Museum of Netural History. Totals given herein represent known number of bird specimens in the collection through March L974. *A new bird distribution record from these visits was reported by Clapp and Woodward (1968). **, new bird distribution record from this visit was reported by Clapp (1971). LYS Appendix Teble 3. Publications 2n collections and studies (with the exception of birds) made on Lisianski Island, 1828- 1969* IGS ea VAE! Cushman in Edmondson Records 22 species of, Fonaminidera coldieebed ey Glow U2 offshore by the Tanager Expedition. Aschelminthes Chapin, 1925 Describes a nematode from a Black Noddy eol- lected by the Tanager Expedition. Annelida Treadwell in Edmondson Reports 2 species of polychaetes collected by etre, 1925 the Tanager Expedition. Holy oe Records 4 species of polychaetes from Pietschmann's 1928 collection. Hsrtman, 1966 Summarizes earlier records and gives current taxonomy of 4 species of polychaetes. Arthropoda Arachnomorpha - Arachnida Bryan et al., 1926 States that a species of bird tick was found abundantly. Munro, 192 Reports biting of humans by bird ticks in 1891 and that several species of spiders were present. Brennan. 1965 Describes a chigger (Acarina Trombiculidae) from POBSP csliections in March 1963 Beardsley, 1966 hecords 3 species on spiders) collected ain September 196). Amerson, 1968 Reports the distribution and hosts of ticks eollected by the POBSP. Fain and Amerson, 1968 Describes © new heteromorphic deutonymphs (Hypoderidae, Acarina) from a Great Frigatebird collected in March 1963. *Authors listed in chronological order. 174 Appendix Table 3. (continued) Crustacea Edmondson in Edmondson Gt, Allisy, 1O25 Bryan et al., 1926 Reports 31 species of decapods collected by the Tanager Expedition. States that isopods were collected by the Tanager Expedition. Labiata - Hexopoda - Insecta Bryan, 1926 Bryan et al., 1926 Bequaert, 1941 Usinger. 1942 Zimmerman, 1948a* Zimmerman, 1948b Zimmerman, 1958 Maa, 1962 Hardy, 1964 Herdwick, 1965 Beardsley, 1966 Records an ephydrid fly from collections by the Tenager Expedition. Records ca. i4 species of insects collected by the Tenager Expedition. Records a Hippoboscid fly collected by the lenager kxypedition. Records a new species of Nysius (Lygaeidee. Hemiptera) from collections made by the Tanager Expedition. Lists a termite not reported in Bryan et al., 1926. Lists © species of Hemiptera (1 Lygseid. 1 Nabid). Lists a noctuid moth. Reports specimens of hiproboscids collectea by the Tanager Expedition. Lists a dolichopodid HLy- Describes an apparently endemic species of noctuid moth from: specimens apparently col- lected prior to the Tanager Expedition. Lists 32 species of insects, 18 of them new distributional records, collected in September 1964 and summarizes earlier records excluding Mallophage. *Zimmerman's series ‘Insects of Hawaii’ primerily lists distributional deta based on the Tanager collections and listed in Bryan et al. (1926), but there are a number of re-identifications, nomenclatural changes, end several previously unpublished records not included in the earlier paper. Lf) Appendix Table 3. (continued) Maa, 1963 Reports hippoboscid flies from POBSP collections. Amerson end Emerson, Reports € species of Mallophaga from a Bar- 1971 tailed Godwit collected on Lisianski in March 19604. Echinodermata Clark in Edmondson eb ale 1925 Clark, 1949 Chordata Vertebrata Pisces Fowler and Ball, 1925 Schindler, 1932 Pietschmann. 1938 Reptilia Lisiansky, 1814 Wetmore, 1925 Mellen, 1925 Hornell, 1934 Mamma Lia Lisiansky, 1814 Bailey, 1918 Wetmore, 1925 Reports 1 ophiuroidean and 1 holuthurian col- lected by the Tanager Expedition. Summarizes earlier reports on echinoderms. Listing a holothurian and sphiuroidean. Reports 40 species of fish collected by the Tenager Expedition. Discusses hemirhampids collected in 1928 at or offshore Lisianski. Reports fish collected in 1928. Gives first mention of occurrence of turtles. Gives brief comment on ebundance of green turtles during the Tunager visiv. Gives some observations of green turtles made by the Tanager Expedition. Reports the killing of 120 turtles in January and May 1332. Gives first mention of occurrence of seals. Reports ooservations of 2 seals and the shoot- ing of one of them by the Biological Survey arin, on ONS. Mentions effect of rabbits on vegetation. Avvendix ‘lable 3. L{6 Farrell, 1925 Munro, 1942 King (b), 1956 Kenyon and Rice, 1959 Svihla, 1959 Rice, 1960 Tomich, 1969 Laycock, 1970 Flora Christophersen and Caum, 1931 Tsuda, 1966 St. John, 1970 Geophysical Elschner, 1915 Kroenke and Woolerd, 1965 (continued) Reports, probably erroneously, the presence of mice in the late 1800's. Detaiis killing of seals by the Rothschild Expedition. Summarizes earlier information on the monk seél with Liberal quotations from earlier publications. Gives a detailed summary of previous informa- tion on the Hawaiian monk seal. Records results of aerial surveys of Hawaiian monk seals made (7 January and 15 April 1957. Lists some earlier estimates of seal numbers and adds counts or estimates from visits made in Mey 1951, March and November 1954, and May 1955. Records results of serial surveys of the Hewaiian monk seal made 28 December 1957 and 28 June 1958. A recent summary and bibliography of the mammals of Hawaii that mentions the occurrence of mammals on Lisianski. Gives result of seal count made in March 1969. Reports 4 species of vascular plants observed and collected by the Tanager Expedition, and summarizes earlier botanical informetion. Reports L4 species of marine benthic algae col- lected by the Tanager Expedition and in August and September 1964. Reports a new species of Sicyos from material collected in August and September 1964. Describes island and gives analysis of phos- phate from visit in September 1914. Gives gravity observations made in March 1964. Li Appendix Table 4a. Movements of Black-footed Albatross from Lisianski Original Bending Data Fecapture Data Bend No. Date Age Sex* Where Recaptured Dete Age Sex 15f-30919 06-05-67 L-U At sea, 42°50'N, 09-05-67 U- U 166°50'W Aprendix Table 4b. Movements of Black-footed Albatross to Lisianski Original Bending Data Recapture Date Band No. __Date __—Age Sex Where Recaptured __—s Date Age Sex Kimew acon | 7137-91997 = O1-Oh-64 A - U Lisianski 03-13 65 A-U Appendix Table 5. Movements of Lsysan Albatross from Lisianski Original Banding Data Recapture Data Band No. Date Ase Sex Where kecaptured Date Ase Sex SE 7157-38153 03-11-64** L - U Eastern I., Midway 02-28-69+ U - U Atoll (or -oo9las* 03-11-64 L = U At sea, 32°34'N, (a=Whage w= W 142°37'E 7157-15001 Me = 12-65 N- U Shionomisaki, Japan ="-OP367 WU = U 33°30 Ne L385 2407r To -5Os2 OS eNe-65 oN =1U Kure Atoll Og-Al=68) N= U (ot Le905) Os-13-65 N= U Leysan I. O/7sissee) UW 5 wi (found dead) CEN = ercluiliys Il = iiiwenetbreas 1h = ileesle I= Sse lillies SS = Silegelbligs IW = Umksinoninals **¥Banded by BSFW. +Captured by H.I. Fisher. ++Entangled in fish gear. 1fs Appendix Table 6. Rent " seat Original Banding Data Movements of Bonin Fetrels from Lisianski Recapture Da ta Band No. Date Age Sex Where Recsptured Date Age Sex Sis=(OesT Ws le os.) 2a -nU Kure Atoll Oe=25-69 Aveay 8343-70685 03-12-65 A - U Kure Atoll OB = 02-60 Ay Su 843-71475 03-13-65 A-U Kure Atoll Oh-23-69 A - U Appendix Table 7. Origingl Bending Date Movements of Wedge-tailed Shearwaters from Lisianski Kecapture Deta Band No. Date Age Sex Were INeCeonbieool Dete Age Sex 6115-18119 08-22-64 A- U Laysan I. 08-08-65 A =U Appendix Table 8a. Original Bending Deta Movements of Blue-faced Boobies from Lisianski Ke capture Da ta Bend No. Dste Age Sex Where Kecaptured Dete Ase Sex Ter-S8029 O8-12-65 A= P (with @ eggs)Lisianski I. O6=0=6( ee (with large downy chick) Kure Atoll Naess) A = 18 (Gi So OSA ao IN ig higiamekt 20. OS UES = 1 (Gailtia Wk grown young) lenyeeia I. 68-09-65 A = U 587-s022 08-21-64 1 =U Whale-Skate I., French Frigate Shoals.06-21-68 A - F 5837-30236 06-21-64 "i = U Sand 1. , Johnston O3-29=65 (Se Us Atoll 58387-80277 08-22-64 I - U East I.. French 08-05-65 A - U Frigate Shoals Wee Ie OS 1O=s60 A = U Frigat French Shoals Li) Appendix Table 8a. (continued) Original Banding Data Recapture Data Band No. Date Age Pexee ene Recapuumed Wah wately ye Age Sex uatcrvalnis keel = 09-9h-67 A-M Gintoocic= ing club) T67-41556 03-12-65 A-U Laysan 1. 06-09-67 A -F Lisianski I. 03-20-68 A-F 15f-e7725 10-19-66 I-U Laysan I. 09-06-67 ~S =U 7157-30112 06-02-67 A- U Layisam ke ©9=06-6/7 A= 5 (in roost- ing club) 757-30151 06-03-67 A-™M Leysan I O920657 A =U 71757-30172 06-03-67 N-U Kure Atoll 07-23-68 S - U (found dead) 7157-30181 06-03-67 A-F Laysan I 09-06-67 A-F 7157-30313 06-05-67 N-U Lisianski I O9=Ol 67) ol = WU Johnston Atoll O=OuS68 5) = 1 (found dead) 587-90010 09-01-67 N- U Kure Atoll lO=sk=aos) Si = Bast I.. French ©6-905-69 “A =U Frigate Shoals 587-90044 09-01-67 I- U Fast I., French 06-05-69 A -F Frigate Shoals 587-90052 09-01-67 A-M Laysan I. 09-10-67 A -M 587-90068 09-01-67 A-M Laysan 1: OB=18=68 AM 587-90097 09-01-67 I-U Johnston Atoll 03-30-68 S - U (found dead) (pileeo2OOo-O2-67 i= Us) Kure Aceu) 06-05-63 S - U 157-283820 09-02-67 I- U Whale-Skate I., 06-22-68 S - U French Frigate Shoals 130 Appendix Table 8a. (continued) Original Bending Data Recapture Data Band No. Date Age Sex Where Recaptured Date Age Sex 1517-20827) 09=02=67 Al -1U Kure Atoll 07-18-68 S - U (oneae889ie 09-02-67 pL -GU pAtyseal ea. 23° 1O1N ) FO9- 13268 MULE au 163°10'W *Injured by flying into transmitter guy wire, subsequently collected. +Found dead, specimen collected. Apvendix Table 8b. Movements of Blue-faced Boobies to Lisianski Originel Banding Data Recapture Data Bend No. Date Age Sex Where Recapvtured Date Age €ex French Frigate Shoals, East I. fsSr-collee, Boon 66) ams Seu Lisianski I. OO-Ohaoj A = (in roost- ing club) FES (OWL MGs2065 i = U iseanickie O66" S = WU East I., French 06-14-68 A, - F Frigate Shoals Whale-Skate I., O6=17=69 A =oF French Frigate Shoals (53M OS 10267 — OS = Lisianski I. 08-31-67 S -U Preneh Prigate Shoals, Gin I. Ses (etee Os25-65 io U Listianskiy — ©9-01-67 ) A eer French Frigate Shoals, Trig Il. 5589-83427 06-15-63 A = U nig Lalas eee OB=12=65) 7k) ar: niente IE, 06-08-67 A = EF (with chick) Weiter IO, 06-24-68 A - F (with large downy chick) Appendix Table 8b. (continued) Original Bending Deta Recapture Data Band No. bete Aze Sex Where hkecaptured Date Age Sex Mose 1 06-24-69 A - F Hrench Frigate Shoals, Whale-Skate 1: 5608-70109 06-26-66 N - U iL Sista, I CMO 67 S = UY Whale-Skate I.. Oloa Nes) A = wg French Frigate Shoals 568-70137 06-26-66 N - U Lisianski I. 09-01-67 A = M Johnston Atoll (ete ho se Ou-Os-oX Al = F Johnston Atoll QZ=27 165 A allie Tniciieinis keeles OOHON=a67 A so H (Vaepoosit- ing club) 7737-44169 = =04-09-64 § - U Lasiciagshn ie 06-04-67 A -M (eho ss eae O2-26-05 A = U Teipailentas vole CS-Oll=67 A = U (at -uSGl Iw hs-19-65 A - U sialic 1O=19=66) A) - Ui (in roost- ing elub) Kure Atoll Tar-929ka § 86-02-05, L- U Kure Atoll 09-10-66 S - U Malsualmsiciaele Ob-OM=a67 A =CE)e Kure Atoll 93-28-63 A -M Kure Atoll 92-12-69 A-™M 7137-92973 06-23-65 N - U Kure Atoll OS=20265 iS - wi iienenashe: 10. OSsola67 A = & aL uealStal, | 1G. 09-04-67 A = (in ross Walon, ©} 7137-99626 07-23-66 L- U Lisianski I. 09-01-67 S 2 4U *Parentheses sround an ege or sex designation indicate that there may be some doubt as to the validity of the determinetion, or that, as is evident in some cases of multiple returns. on at least one occasion 8 bird was improperly aged or sexed. 182 Appendix Teble 8b. Origine] Bending Deta Leysan I. 767-41289 767-41291 T67-41179 767-4 1200 7767-41298 767-41322 767-41326 1517-23007 1757-23101 1757-23103 7571-23145 7151-23166 1757-23171 7157-23239 vate 93-08-65 03-08-65 03-09-65 03-09-65 03-09-65 93-10-65 O7-19-65+ 07-19-65+ O7-19-65+ O7-19-65+ 07-19-65+ O7-19-65+ OT-19-65+ (continued) Lisianski Laysan I. Lisianski Laysan I. Lisianski Lisianski Laysan I Lisianski Laysan I. Lisianeki Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianskli Lisieanski Li sianski Li sianski Lisianski Where Recaptured 1H Recapture Data Dates Age £ex C6026 aA 22 Mi -06-05-67 OSsi2265 MM = iF 06-0267 A= M2) -06-05-67 (with chick) OZ213-68. B= 18 06-04-67 A-M O=13265 A = U g=2 i oomecmeaany) 06-04-6r Al =(P) 10-20-66 A-M @2=92=c/ aaa (with im- mature ) O9=0ll-=67 SJ u OSSONS6/ Ws 08 (Giaeoast— ins club) 06-04-67 A - M -06-95-67 (with 1 egg) 06-05-67 A -M (with 1 eg) OB=20-65) shee O9=-0l-e7 A= M O6-Oleon Aa 66-04-67 A =i Appendix Table 8b. Original Banding Data Band No. 1951-23438 757-2347h Fearl and Hermes Reef 5583-83100 Date Age Sex O7-19-65+ U- U A 65+ Ul = U Ofamg-65+ T= U sant EL. OGHes-o5 AL - U 06-24-63 N-U 5538-83580 Appendix Table 9. Original Banding Data Bend No. Date Age Sex (continued) Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Where Recaptured Where Recartured I. 16 Kecapture Data Movements of Brown Boobies to Lisianski Recapture Data Date 183 Date Age Sex Go-Ol-G Aeear O6-05-67) Al Mi O9- Olio fuaes OBE -65) Avant 09-02-67 A-F Gila poast— ing club) Age Sex —————— eee ee Wake I. 151-89726 04-27-65 Johnston Atoll 587-9029 04-26-67 Appendix Table 10a. Original Banding Data teen ioL 1757-27938 tListed on banding schedules as a Laysan Albatross. Age Sex ie@=ig-—6on. A = U IDsUSG Se wu A - U A-M ( breeding) Lisianski I. Lisianski I. Where Kecapture Band No. Date g p Lisvanski, 1. *Marked on leg with orange streamer Jonnston Atoll Wha le-Skate I., French Frigate Shoals 10-19-66 A - JU 09-01-67* A - M Recapture Data Date ——E————— ee SS SS 01-04-69 Ob ooo)" Movements of Red-footed Boobies from Lisianski Age Sex be L354 Appendix Table 10e. (continued) | Original Banding Data Recapture vata | Band No. De te Age jeex Where shecapuumed yy Date Age Sex To(=2(939 10-1966" —S =U Reyeeia Il. CO-O- 6 mca 1757-27961 10-19-66 S-U Kure Atoll 06-30-67 S -U Kure Atoll 95-31-63 A =U Ton -2iO6e. TO=19365) Ae aU Laysan I. CS=1Os67 N= (D(s2INES -_ WOsisiaes = Y East I., French OSlOse7/ Ne UI | Frigate Shoals TOT=CTOS™ 1O=19266" “Ss = 0 Laysan I. 09-08-67 S -U | (5 (-28266"" 10-19-66 <1 - U Johnston Atoll O4-12-67 I - U | Wha le-Skate I.. ObsOMeGre S = iu | French Frigate Snoals 1757-28341 10-19-66 S-U Kure Atoll 06-04-67 S - U Kure Atoll 05-31-68 A -U | 7157-28344 10-19-66 A - U Johnston Atoll 02-15-69 A -U (dead) (eta © OIG MN Ss Laysan I. OSLO IN eS 1 (S(-xSCE WoalsaeG S 2 U Kure Atoll 06-27-68 S - U 151-e3499 10-19-66 U-U Laysan I. O9=10=67 AL =U 53/(-o43e7 08-31-67 S = U Kure Atoll 07-18-68 S - U 5677-34329 08-31-67 Tf - U Johnston Atoll 06-21-69 S - U 587-34330 08-31-67 I- U Fast I., French 06-06-68 I - U Frigate Shoals 507-9162" 03=3l=67 A =U Wha le-Skate I., 06-2269. U)=1U French Frigate Shoals 5387-90235 09-01-67 T =U Kure Atoll 07-22-68 S-U 587-90237 09-01-67 N-U Kure Atoll 07-22-68 S = U 587-90247 09-01-67 L-U Whale-Skate I., 06-16-69 S -U French Frigate Shoals eas Appendix Table 10a. (continued) Original Bending Data 2 Kecapture Data Band No. Dete Age Sex Date Age Sex Where Recaptured g SBy-GO2408 O9-O01l-67 N - U Jahneton Atoll 08-26-68 S =U 58387-90250 09-01-67 N- U Whale-Skete I.. O6-Iy=68 =U French Frigate Shoals Trig I.. French N22 ss69 S = Ui Frigate fhoels SOr-909268 O9=02=67 A - U Trig I., French Oo-25-66" Aven Frigate Shoals Tal-23705a 09-92-67 (S)- U Laysen I. 09-06-67 (A)=nu 09-03-67 Whe le-Skate I., 06-17-68 § - U French Frigate Shoals 7571-28757 *Marked on leg with orange streamer. Appendix Table 10b. Movements of Red-footed Boobies to Lisianski Original Bending Data kecapture Data Band No. Date Age Sex Where Kecaptured Dete Age Sex French Frigate Shoals, delisig ile 767-43028 08-06-65 N- U Lisianski I. 10-19-66 S - U East I., French 06-06-68 A - U Frigate Shoels (OT-480502 OS-05-65 S- U Lisianski I. 10-19-66 S) =U foV-4s0568 98-05-65 S - U Denetas at Ib 09-Oh-67 A -U 7167-43057 «=: ©8-05-65 S - U nisiame kit 09-01-67 A - U 1767-43085 08-05-65 S - U Johnston Atoll OMG SS 19 Di svemekigd. 10-19-66* S : U 76/-43103.. @O8-05-65 S-U Lisianski I. 10-19-66 5S =U East I., French Frigate Shoais 186 Apvendix Table 10b. (continued) Original Banding Data Bend No. Date Age Sex Where Recaptured (5(-260e8" O6=10-66 S =U Lisianski 1. 15(-26192) 06-11-66 S - U lisiansieint.- jm ! G Lisianski I. 1517-26413 06-12-66 fo 1r-2ors6) O6-16-66, -Ay=ig Lisianski I. Fast I.. French Frigate Shoals (57-26348" 96-18-66 ip) - U Lisianski I. French Frigate Shoals, Irie Island (50-27502 (Of/-03-66) 1S = U | Wistar. Has le aeErench Frigate Shoals French Frigate Shoals, Whale-Skate Island (Oroisese Os-2-65 6 = U imeiemekil I. icwajasikes ie: T57-27146 06-23-66 | t S Lisianski I. 751-3576 06-06-67 S-U Lisianski TI. Johnston Atoll. Sand I. TE SAELO, Ofele=68 = U Hisienck it ek. 1737-44189 92-24-65 I - U Lisianski I 1737-44746 8605-04-65 T- U Listaaski 1. 1317-44829.) 96-11-65 f= U Lisianski I. Lisianski I Go sl ! = Wa Xr i —]} € >\ Aw) ! = WA ! ON OY’ > ' = i a m™ bh a pe) Ur. oa = | on Lisianski LI. Recapture Data Date Age Sex 1O=WO=60 Seem 08-02-67 SalaU OSH02e67 S = Ui WIE MA = 0 05-26-67 A - U Osasleoy S =u LOa1O=66 © = U OOZIORS/ VE Sy MOLISE A SU Os-3h-6n) A= Ui Oj B1-6 1S > WU 09-03-67 ™m Ho-Qlaey = 10-19-66 S -U 10-19-66 A-U 09-9 09-01-67 A - U -67 S-U O9202-67 Ae= U 10-19-66 Ar=wU Appendix Table 1LOb. Original Banding Date Band No. 71737-43536 1737-43583 7317-43599 1737-44686 1737-44698 1737-43666 7317-43682 1737-43742 7317-43779 131-43362 1737-43879 1737-43834 7317-43895 7317-43897 5387-90406 5387-90389 Kure Atoll 7317-45370 737-98489 7167-45567 Date 02-19-66 02-22-66 02-22-66 02-23-66 02-23-66 03-24-66 04-01-66 04-15-66 Oh -22-66 05-11-66 04-03-67 10= L4-63 09-07-64 06-12-66 Age Sex Ser A-M 1 7U A-M SoU I - U if = A-M So ILS) a) rsyre (0) = jE Of A -U Ss - U Te TanU) Sea (continued) Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Leysan I. Lisianski Lisianski Lisianeki Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Lisianski Kure Atoll Where Recaptured _ £ Ie ie Kecapture Data 01-07-69 peat eevee 08-31-67 S - U 09-03-67 A - U 10-19-66* S - U 06-13-66 U - U 10-20-66 A -U 10-19-66* A - U 10-19-66* S - U 10-19-66* S - U 10-19-66* A - U 09-03-67 S-U 10-19-66* S - U 09-02-67 A - U 10-19-66* S - U 09-03-67 S - U 09-05-67 S - U 06-O4-67* A - U (with fresh egg) 09-03-67 S - U 09-02-67 A - U 10-19-66 S-- U 09-01-67 A - U 09-03-67 S-U 183 Appendix Table 10b. (continued) Original Banding Data g Recapture Data Band No. Date Age Sex Where Recaptured_ Dave nemo ex FOr-45502 “O7alS=6o FA Sau Gh Sieiaeren IC. 10-19-66 A =U 7T67-45847 O7-22-66 § - Lisianeki I. 09-03-67 S - U 767-45868 08-08-66 § - Lisianski I. 09-01-67 S - U 1737-99688 08-28-66 N - Lisianski I. 08-31-67 S- U 7137-99763 09-03-66 WN - ietanisk il O-M-67 S = w | Laysan I. | SS(aoOsOnr OIeal~o-Gh Ac Laysan I. @3=-09-65 A = Ui Lisianski I. 09-02-67 A -U 5687-80595 09-17-64 I - Lisianski L. OSes1e67 Bos U FS S025 OSaufaGh 1 = Johnston Atoll 02-22-66 S - U Mistansk, i. 10-19-66* S = U 537-30663 09-17-64 I - Lisianski I. 10-19-66 A -U T67-41069 03-07-65 A - Lisianski I. IOLIG=66 A= yi 1757-25643 08-09-65 I - Lisianski I. 06-04-67 S- U 1597-25652 08-09-65 I - Lisianski I. 09-03-67 S-U 1751-25656 08-09-65 I - LA SHES 1. 10-19-66 S-U Lisianski I. 09-03-67 S - U (eCoio) (OS=09-65)) el — aU Lisianski I. 1OSIS=65 Ss U 08-09-65 I-U East I., French 06-10-66 S -U Frigate Shoals 757-2575h Listansiciy ie 10-19-66) /SaaU Johnston Atoll ol-03=67 S = U 7157-25841 08-09-65 ILenetasliel, Ihe 10-19-66 Osos ea Y Lisianski I 10=19-66.s) aU 1517-25798 189 Appendix Table l10b. (continued) Original Banding Data Recapture Data Band No. Dete Age Sex Where Recaptured = Date ge Sexe foyq-ecool(s WO=2e2-66 A = U Lisianski I. 09-94-67 A-U 587-35eh4 06-09-67 A - U Ensianskiad. 09-03-67 A - U Midway Atoll. Eastern I. TOT-4O203) 9 O7=22265" aes U Lisianski I 10-19-66 S = U 7767-40183 o7-24-65 N - U Lisianski I 09-04-67 S-U 7167-40315 o7-2h-65 N -U Lisianski I. 09-03-67 S - U 767-4O340 = o7-2h-65 N-U Lisianski I. 10-19-66 S-U Pearl snd Hermes Reef, Southeast I 1737-38050 96-19-63 N-U listemskill. 06-17-66 U- U 1737-30051 96-19-63 N - U Pili) alatsh moyen muro sine O3226-65 sel] U Lisianski I. 09-01-67 A -U on -09390.. 08-17-64 A - U Lisianski I OB512E65, A = Ui 7157-43066 09-25-66 S-U Lisianski LE. 09-04-67 S - U Wake I. 767-48126 06-17-66 S - U Lisianski I 08-31-67 S -U 587-culge 2-31-66 A - U IL Se vasliet, IL, O9-ORe6 A = U *Marked on les with oranze streamer. Appendix Taovle lla. Movements of Great Frigatebirds from Lisianski ‘ oO Original Bending Data Recapture Deta Band No. Dete Age Sex Where Kecaptured Date Age Sex (51-3200) ) 06-17-66 A = ™M Kure Atoll 09-27-63 A = ™M (517-32644 06-17-66 A - Kore: Aiel) WOHO8S6 A = Wl 190 Appendix Table lla. (continued) Original Banding Data Recapture vata Band No. vete Ace sex) Where ghecaptunmed vete Age Ee 7157-28005 10-19-66 N- U Kure Atoll 06-10-69 § dp) TWareesOe ~ WONG 9 1 Ss Wi Esst I., French 06-07-69 2 “Gj Fricate Shoals eas Appendix Table llb. Movements of Great Frigatebirds to Lisianski Original Banding Deta hecapture Dste ee ES Eo eee Benda No. Date Age Sex ~whereshecaptured ve te Age Prench Nougavesshoge Hest: (oreisror O8-eh-65 A = if Listanskei le 99-02-67 A 7157-26854 06-18-66 A -F IM SieMele, Ie 6g-02-67 S French Frigate Shoals. wWhale-Skate I. 1737-37466 06-14-63 S$ - U Fest I.. French 06-12-67 § Frigate Shoals us terdsie le 08-31-67 S Kure Atoll (37-9159) le 15-65 SU Kure Atoll 05-16-66 A Sena We 08-31-67 A (OT eES INE M825, IN eT Lisianski I. 09-01-67 A 767-46519 07-08-66 S-U iGStelmslaL I. 10-19-66 § Pearl and Hermes Reef, Southeast I. 7531-43056) 09-25-66) BN. =00 Lisianski I. 09-02-67 § tx 191 Appendix Table lé. Movements of Golden Plovers from Lisianski Original Bending Deta kecapture Data Bend No. Date Age Sex Where kecaptured Date Age Sex 662-06097* 03-11-64 A -U Kure Atoll 0920-6 Sanu Scutheast I., Pearl 03-15-65 A - U and Hermes Reef (found dead) *Banded by BSFW. Appendix Table 13. Movements of Ruddy Turnstones to Lisianski Original Banding Data Kecapture Data Band No. Date Age Sex Where Recaptured Date Age Sex Plaska ie ribilor Is., St. Georse 7112-08013 98-07-65 A-U Lisianski I. 06-18-66* A - U Tee-"5262 03-23-66 I - U us mamisis iy el. 09-01-67 A -U fee-tolyo. 08-25-66 , OS=17-6> A = 0 Lisianski I. 06-18-66 A - U 153-44797 «=—.08- 18-64 A - Lisianski I. 05-30-67 A-U USN) Appendix Table Llib. (continued) Original Bending Data RKecapture Dete Band Ns. Date i Weley Sie Where Recavtured Date Age Sex Wake I T#3-49717 §=07-24-63 A - U Lisianski I. 06-04-67 A - U *Merked with oran +Banded by BSFW. Appendix Tébdle 15. Movements of Brown Noddies to Lisianski Original Banding Data Recapture Data Bend Now - Date Bee ek ene mnecoruuEed Dalen em oex Kure Atoll Fisalog4e “Ov=2l=64 N= U Listianski 1. 99-23-67 A - U French Frigate Shoals, Whale-Skate IL. We3820015o “06-13-63, L -.U ieetaniskt wl. OQVoetson A oViy Appendix Table 16a. Movements of Black Noddies from Lisianski Original Bending Data Recapture Data Band No. Date Age Sex Where Recaptured Date _Age Sex 7173-40836 03-12-64 N- U Johnston Atoll 02-20-65 S - U 1173-40847 03-12-64 N-U Whale-Skate I., 03-16-66 A - U French Frigate Shoals 773-40367 §=603-12-64 N- U Whale-Skate I., 08-30-65 A - U French Frigate Shoals 7173-40868 03-12-64 N-U Whale-Skate I., Osslle65 As U French Frigate Shoals 7113-40830 03-12-64 N - U Whale-Skate I., 06-05-67 A - U French Frigate Shoals , 196 Appendix Table 16a. (continued) Original Banding Dete Recapture Data Bend No. Date Age Sex Where Recaptured Date Age lees (12-4883 O3FL2s6h) N= U Whale sSkate I, 08-30-65 A -U French Frigate Shoals 712-50043 09-03-67 A-U Kure Atoll 06-28-68 A - U Appendix Table 16b. Movements of Black Noddies to Lisianski Original Banding Data RKecapture Data Bend No. Date Age Sex Where Recaptured Date) Sige tSex Freneh Frigate ohoallisi) Whale-skate 1. 3638-20852) 9 O3-31E65) Ul au In Sieashe Ike 10-19666) Ui Su 923-19192 08-16-66 = > SS di = > = Ye Z Li I> E Vg i Pe) sy WES — so = YF Wh, “Sy = > Y, a 2 ae — \s e — 1 Po eZ iad ZS eel z a = et ao ae ms z a € | NI NVINOSHLINS S3iuyvugi7 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uvug z a) Zz 2 Za e a) z n 5 < = x = < = gi yy < = z = Zz = Zz \ =| My. = an E 2 = = E WN 2, Man = 3 = : 7 So. oe Br 3 : -S SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION iss SJIYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN ae ee a S us 2 tu Z , 7) - Wy," 2 A e = z :3 a CZ = ox 4 re Ss 3 S foal — faa] rs = rs mm. S = Z z5 Zz a Zz Z 2 “al NI NVINOSHLINS S3IuYvVYdIT LIBRARI ES_ SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS S3a1uvug =e) \\\ ~ = 0] =) a 5 2) f= 7 ‘ KS RY, >) ‘ > > - > m eed m AL} 2 Uf? m = m = S Zz ee = w Ss 7) es a -§ SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOMALITSN ONVINOSHEINS Sa 1uvud Mout BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT JTIO : gg 2 2 Spi wr : 2 ’ \ = y ey 3 WY = 5 cA zs Lr, 9 z Lip a. \ Sa: o 3 . y 0 % oe x ro) : : 2 Gy * samy ESN : : : Eat ag Oe Nae: ee : NI NVINOSHLINS S3INVYGI7 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS S31UVd z= : Ww Ko uu % SS = sf fp a AS = )2 SS “¢f ? WK = eat “i, , = . Fee) aha ee ian =S SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3SIYVYgIT SMITHSONIAN _ ’ » _ Vy NI NVINOSHLIWS SJIYVYEIT LIBRARIES INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI Ng \S S3itY¥Vvuag INSTITUTION ————— INSTITUTION SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3I1YV SANG Siege ee NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYdIT LIBR NVINOSHLINS S3JIYVYSIT LIBRARIES ARTES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI n ; > 7 > X = | 2 YY ‘ S NN = 2S Ss ae tf ¢ CFC WAN OC 35, fe} | = ie Ss AN \) Zz E =. | 5 SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS $3 }yYvdegii LIBRARI! ES SMITHSONIAN _ | n = z z z ; z STU , us = ; a = Gy OR 7D) 2 Yue EDL GMM = GS.i GM \« Chl 3 (RMR « ( 45 WV «< é 4.46 \ = fer Ona fk ) hp Mra ees ae eee eee ye eceen ine eee ML emer | ant nyo = — (27) 5 = wn _ w \LSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I4ut z n me ies 2) = ie 7p) z no <= = pa a = 2) Qin iS =< = z 4 tl fy = NS =I Z WN; 4 z A yf oO 5 GY j OREN at fo) WAS ac fe) LY, 2 BGIT ERR 8 e g : 8 Gs = 2G = Sirs = z = Zz YG = > = Spee S > é = > ” 2 77) Ns 7) Edie 77) 2 RIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IXVYEIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTI z 2 oN Fs z ra] SON, uJ RS WW uJ - uf fo 4 SRM) = ZW FE g - ag ME = fz Z\ oc = NWS a = (ae = < iff Z ak 3] < 4 AS. < a < = ow Gz a Xs ys] S NN fo = cc = O “GA Gy, awe rs) 2 ) a 3 ad z = z i as zZ ay Zz [LSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3!IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI Saul ire z iy z es - z is z o = Kanye » co = GE, Ly, ies) = Oo * = A =e v\ v S be, a =) a a) = EG |] = = Y pees = 5 WEE z Kay 2 ey fOr? = ~ KS iB _— w = — eS, RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3iyVvugia_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTIT wn Zc wo Fa wo ; Sie 2) = = < = =< = Ws < = <= \ + XR = a o NY N = 5 AY = 2 5 z . & = z “| WS 6 2 ANE ZB 2B 6 Gi ae) ee iV 2 E Nv 2 = Sy ETO ieee NOS = 5 A 2 ae a z = Slee 3 ee ILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S314' rai e z ” S “n Padres oe 7) pee 7-9 WW o WW o ; J = cz = = a SS oe : 3 : : = : = Ny: 5 a S ale 5 a oF Se eS Zz J 2 3 Zz = 2 I RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uYvVuUaIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT = i z im z i 2 - 2 40 = oD o a = oO 5 Lif 2 = rs) & a 5 2 ‘th 4 p=] A 2D 2. EW > = > = = a z - : cS E = as a = g 2 “fe m x nm a m 2 m = n = wn . £ wo = n LILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3JIYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S314! z 7) z eens n 2 2) zZ no = = < Ww = < = = = “ = a Z WNYX 4 z =| z Aa yy GE i ZH IRS TERI LZ IEDIS y= Zz S SS. Zz = S° = 8 GY = > = B > Ss ; > = > w Pe wn - =a w Lan =z w rs RIES SMITHSONIAN pNOILMLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31YVes 17 _ SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT a eee Aspet Fs 2 io : Gy = j ee ey, < ANS z = wey, = Yip, wo x \ = (Se ty (= f y so 4 : G 5 “je 3 i aS Fz Zz ALSNI NVINOSHLIWS S3IYvVuYdiT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN_INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS _S314\ : d ’ 17 INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI S3IYVUEIT LIBRARIES S3iyvugl INSTITUTION INSTITUTION S3iu¥vYug RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Xx NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3iuvVuaIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT NVINOSHLINS S3ZIYVYEITLIBRARIES z mn) z 2) Zz Zz Fe RS < = cS = < = < \ — — = Y IN S = 2 & = 5 aa 5 \ S\N z -@ oe 2 ise 3S oo \ = 2 = 2 = 2 iS A = >" = >" = BN. > = me 7) Zz 7) 2 no 2 rz) ; JISNI_NVINOSHLINS LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS S3 1d ae By = n = ” Zz > f 9 QL KS 4 a ~” uu nea ahs hee . eae ‘ v7 we anetonyt inlet tL APES hot Vey at é psd ‘ . rn terw es wtaeie ‘ Figen? A Mo" baw calm ve A . wee ay - ‘ ‘ ; Wee o AIL ‘ ony rs ‘ ‘ ee ; ee EN, ‘ att , ‘ 3 ‘ ‘ 4% rs ‘ . 30 . H : +hai Loy 1s ‘ : : in pop at tea : Sie a “ * eee | Nesey Ge wh ad 4 A aN chia Re 4 ' 7 ’ : Wyn, a) ‘1 ‘ : 2 OMe yt Z es it Pons he 4 bet t : bee , : : rae . J Poy ‘ ; ee aye: ae art ‘ . 3 4 we